CN103814538B - Dispensing device, sending method, reception device and method of reseptance - Google Patents

Abstract

The dispensing device communicated under a kind of SISO of the polarity that polarizes in use the 1st and MISO and MIMO of use the 1st polarization polarity (V polarization) and the 2nd polarization polarity (H polarization) is provided.In the case of communicating with SISO, the antenna with the 1st polarization polarity (V polarization) is used to be transmitted.In the case of communicating with MISO and MIMO, the antenna with the 1st polarization polarity (V polarization) and the antenna with the 2nd polarization polarity (H polarization) is used to be transmitted.By above structure, the reception device of the system only possessing the antenna with the 1st polarization polarity (V polarization) can then receive transmission data based on SISO.

Description

Dispensing device, sending method, reception device and method of reseptance

Technical field

The Japanese patent application 2011-140796 that (explanation relevant with related application) proposed on June 24th, 2011 In the disclosure of claims, description, accompanying drawing and specification digest that comprises all be incorporated in the application.

The invention particularly relates to dispensing device and the reception dress carrying out employing the communication of multiple antennas (multi-antenna) Put.

Background technology

In the past, have be able to carry out SISO(Single Input Single Output: single-input single-output) under communication, And MISO(Multiple Input Single Output: multiple-input and multiple-output) under communication dispensing device (such as, ginseng According to non-patent literature 14).

Prior art literature

Patent documentation

Patent documentation 1: International Publication the 2005/050885th

Non-patent literature

Non-patent literature 1: " Achieving near-capacity on a multiple-antenna channel " IEEE Transaction on communications, vol.51, no.3, pp.389-399, March2003.

Non-patent literature 2: " Performance analysis and design optimization of LDPC- Coded MIMO OFDM systems " IEEE Trans.Signal Processing., vol.52, no.2, pp.348-361, Feb.2004.

Non-patent literature 3: " BER performance evaluation in2x2MIMO spatial Multiplexing systems under Rician fading channels, " IEICE Trans.Fundamentals, Vol.E91-A, no.10, pp.2798-2807, Oct.2008.

Non-patent literature 4: " Turbo space-time codes with time varying linear Transformations, " IEEE Trans.Wireless communications, vol.6, no.2, pp.486-493, Feb.2007.

Non-patent literature 5: " Likelihood function for QR-MLD suitable for soft- Decision turbo decoding and its performance, " IEICE Trans.Commun., vol.E88-B, No.1, pp.47-57, Jan.2004.

Non-patent literature 6: " Shannon gauge へ road: " Parallel concatenated(Turbo) Coding ", " Turbo(iterative) decoding " と そ week " Zi Qing Communications Society, letter learn skill and technique IT98-51

Non-patent literature 7: " Advanced signal processing for PLCs:Wavelet-OFDM, " Proc.of IEEE International symposium on ISPLC2008, pp.187-192,2008.

Non-patent literature 8:D.J.Love, and R.W.heath, Jr., " Limited feedback unitary Precoding for spatial multiplexing systems, " IEEE Trans.Inf.Theory, vol.51, No.8, pp.2967-2976, Aug.2005.

Non-patent literature 9:DVB Document A122, Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for a second generation digital terrestrial television Broadcasting system, (DVB-T2), June2008.

Non-patent literature 10:L.Vangelista, N.Benvenuto, and S.Tomasin, " Key technologies For next-generation terrestrial digital television standard DVB-T2, " IEEE Commun.Magazine, vo.47, no.10, pp.146-153, Oct.2009.

Non-patent literature 11:T.Ohgane, T.Nishimura, and Y.Ogawa, " Application of space Division multiplexing and those performance in a MIMO channel, " IEICE Trans.Commun., vo.88-B, no.5, pp.1843-1851, May2005.

Non-patent literature 12:R.G.Gallager, " Low-density parity-check codes, " IRE Trans.Inform.Theory, IT-8, pp-21-28,1962.

Non-patent literature 13:D.J.C.Mackay, " Good error-correcting codes based on very Sparse matrices, " IEEE Trans.Inform.Theory, vol.45, no.2, pp399-431, March1999.

Non-patent literature 14:ETSI EN302307, " Second generation framing structure, Channel coding and modulation systems for broadcasting, interactive services, News gathering and other broadband satellite applications, " v.1.1.2, June2006.

Non-patent literature 15:Y.-L.Ueng, and C.-C.Cheng, " a fast-convergence decoding method and memory-efficient VLSI decoder architecture for irregular LDPC Codes in the IEEE802.16e standards, " IEEE VTC-2007Fall, pp.1255-1259.

Non-patent literature 16:S.M.Alamouti, " A simple transmit diversity technique for Wireless communications, " IEEE J.Select.Areas Commun., vol.16, no.8, pp.1451- 1458, Oct1998.

Non-patent literature 17:V.Tarokh, H.Jafrkhani, and A.R.Calderbank, " Space-time Block coding for wireless communications:Performance results, " IEEE J.Select.Areas Commun., vol.17, no.3, no.3, pp.451-460, March1999.

Summary of the invention

Brief summary of the invention

The problem that invention is to be solved

It is an object of the invention to provide one and carry out with MIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output: be many Input multi output) and MISO mode communicate and be only capable of receive SISO receive in device sending out of the communication that also is able to receive Send device, sending method and reception device, method of reseptance.

Means for solving the above

Dispensing device for the present invention, has at MISO(multiple input single output) or MIMO(multiple-input and multiple-output) and SISO(single-input single-output) under communication function, it is characterised in that this dispensing device possesses: sending part, be mixed into enforcement use 1st polarization polarity and MISO or MIMO of combination of the 2nd polarization polarity and the SISO using above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity.

Invention effect

So, in accordance with the invention it is possible to provide a kind of in the transmission for the SISO communication originally to use such as V to polarize In the case of device such as adds H polarization and carries out MISO and MIMO, it is mixed into the SISO of enforcement V polarization and uses V/H pole The sending method of MIMO of change, method of reseptance, dispensing device, reception device.Thus, only there is connecing of existing V reception antenna Receiving apparatus also is able to then receive SISO, and the reception device having added H reception antenna also is able to receive SISO, MIMO.

Accompanying drawing explanation

Fig. 1 is the structure example of the R-T unit in spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system.

Fig. 2 is an example of frame structure.

Fig. 3 is the structure example of dispensing device during application phase place variation.

Fig. 4 is the structure example of dispensing device during application phase place variation.

Fig. 5 is the example of frame structure.

Fig. 6 is the example of phase place variation.

Fig. 7 is the structure example receiving device.

Fig. 8 is the structure example of the signal processing part receiving device.

Fig. 9 is the structure example of the signal processing part receiving device.

Figure 10 is decoding processing method.

Figure 11 is the example of reception state.

Figure 12 is the structure example of dispensing device during application phase place variation.

Figure 13 is the structure example of dispensing device during application phase place variation.

Figure 14 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 15 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 16 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 17 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 18 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 19 is an example of mapping method.

Figure 20 is an example of mapping method.

Figure 21 is the structure example of weighting combining unit.

Figure 22 is sort method one example of code element.

Figure 23 is the structure example of the R-T unit in spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system.

Figure 24 is BER characteristic example.

Figure 25 is the example of phase place variation.

Figure 26 is the example of phase place variation.

Figure 27 is the example of phase place variation.

Figure 28 is the example of phase place variation.

Figure 29 is the example of phase place variation.

Figure 30 is the code element configuration example of the modulated signal being obtained in that higher receiving quality.

Figure 31 is the frame structure example of the modulated signal being obtained in that higher receiving quality.

Figure 32 is the code element configuration example of the modulated signal being obtained in that higher receiving quality.

Figure 33 is the code element configuration example of the modulated signal being obtained in that higher receiving quality.

The code element number required for the block after 1 coding when Figure 34 is to use block code, the change case of timeslot number.

The code element number required for the block after 2 codings when Figure 35 is to use block code, the change case of timeslot number.

Figure 36 is the overall structure figure of digital broadcasting system.

Figure 37 is the block diagram representing receiver structure example.

Figure 38 is the figure of the structure representing multiplexed data.

Figure 39 is to show schematically the figure how each stream is multiplexed in multiplexed data.

Figure 40 is to represent the most stored detailed figure of video flowing in PES packet arranges.

Figure 41 is the figure of the structure representing TS packet and source data packet in multiplexed data.

Figure 42 is the figure of the data structure representing PMT.

Figure 43 is the figure of the internal structure representing multiplexed data information.

Figure 44 is the figure of the internal structure representing stream attribute information.

Figure 45 is the structure chart of image display, voice output.

Figure 46 is structure one example of communication system.

Figure 47 is the code element configuration example of the modulated signal being obtained in that higher receiving quality.

Figure 48 is the code element configuration example of the modulated signal being obtained in that higher receiving quality.

Figure 49 is the code element configuration example of the modulated signal being obtained in that higher receiving quality.

Figure 50 is the code element configuration example of the modulated signal being obtained in that higher receiving quality.

Figure 51 is the structure example of dispensing device.

Figure 52 is the structure example of dispensing device.

Figure 53 is the structure example of dispensing device.

Figure 54 is the structure example of dispensing device.

Figure 55 is the figure representing baseband signal replacement portion.

Figure 56 is the structure example of dispensing device.

Figure 57 is an example of the action of dispenser.

Figure 58 is another example of the action of dispenser.

Figure 59 is an example of the communication system of the relation representing base station and terminal.

Figure 60 is an example of the frequency distribution sending signal.

Figure 61 is an example of the frequency distribution sending signal.

Figure 62 is an example of the communication system of the relation representing base station, repeater and terminal.

Figure 63 is an example of the frequency distribution sending signal from base station.

Figure 64 is an example of the frequency distribution sending signal from repeater.

Figure 65 is an example of the structure of the acceptance division of repeater and sending part.

Figure 66 is an example of the data form of the signal that base station sends.

Figure 67 is the structure example of dispensing device.

Figure 68 is the accompanying drawing representing baseband signal replacement portion.

Figure 69 is weighting, the conversion of baseband signal and an example of phase place variation.

Figure 70 is the structure example of the dispensing device using OFDM mode.

Figure 71 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 72 is timeslot number corresponding with modulation system and the example of phase place change value.

Figure 73 is timeslot number corresponding with modulation system and the example of phase place change value.

Figure 74 is the summary of the frame structure of the signal that the broadcasting station in DVB-T2 standard sends.Figure 75 is to deposit at synchronization Example at two or more signal.

Figure 76 is the structure example of dispensing device.

Figure 77 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 78 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 79 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 80 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 81 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 82 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 83 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 84 is the example that there is two or more signals at synchronization.

Figure 85 is the structure example of dispensing device.

Figure 86 is the structure example receiving device.

Figure 87 is the structure example receiving device.

Figure 88 is the structure example receiving device.

Figure 89 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 90 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 91 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 92 is the example of frame structure.

Figure 93 is the example of frame structure.

The example of frame structure when Figure 94 is to use space-time block code.

Figure 95 is the example of the signaling point configuration in the case of the 16QAM in I-Q plane.

Figure 96 is the structure example of the signal generating unit in the case of using circulation Q to postpone.

S1(t when Figure 97 is to use circulation Q to postpone), s2(t) the 1st example of generation method.

Figure 98 is the structure example of the signal generating unit in the case of using circulation Q to postpone.

Figure 99 is the structure example of the signal generating unit in the case of using circulation Q to postpone.

S1(t when Figure 100 is to use circulation Q to postpone), s2(t) the 2nd example of generation method.

Figure 101 is the structure example of the signal generating unit in the case of using circulation Q to postpone.

Figure 102 is the structure example of the signal generating unit in the case of using circulation Q to postpone.

Figure 103 (a) is to represent the figure about the restriction that 1 antenna sends and multiple antennas sends in DVB-T2 standard, Figure 103 B () is to represent the figure of desired specification in standard from now on.

Figure 104 is the subframe structure example of configuration based on transmission antenna.

Figure 105 is the subframe structure example of configuration based on transmission antenna.

Figure 106 is the structure sending frame.

Figure 107 is the SP configuration in sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol Example.

Figure 108 A is the figure representing DVB-T2 reality service network (SISO).

Figure 108 B is the figure representing the Distributed-MISO utilizing existing transmission antenna.

Figure 108 C is the figure of the structure representing Co-sited-MIMO.

Figure 108 D is the figure representing the structure combined by Distributed-MISO Yu Co-sited-MIMO.

Figure 109 is the subframe structure example of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization).

Figure 110 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 111 is the subframe structure example of configuration (being also contemplated for transmit power) based on transmission antenna.

Figure 112 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 113 is the subframe structure example of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization and transmit power).

Figure 114 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 115 is the subframe structure example of configuration based on transmission antenna.

Figure 116 is the subframe structure example of configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames).

Figure 117 is the subframe structure example of configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames).

Figure 118 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 119 is the subframe structure example of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization).

Figure 120 is the subframe structure example of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames).

Figure 121 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 122 is the figure of the transmit power switch mode example representing SISO and MISO/MIMO.

Figure 123 is the son of configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) Frame structure example.

Figure 124 is the son of configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) Frame structure example.

Figure 125 is the son of configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) Frame structure example.

Figure 126 is the son of configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) Frame structure example.

Figure 127 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 128 is the figure of transmit power switch mode (the being also contemplated for polarization) example representing SISO and MISO/MIMO.

Figure 129 is configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switches Pattern) subframe structure example.

Figure 130 is configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switches Pattern) subframe structure example.

Figure 131 is configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switches Pattern) subframe structure example.

Figure 132 is configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switches Pattern) subframe structure example.

Figure 133 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 134 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 135 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 136 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 137 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 138 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 139 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 140 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 141 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 142 (a) is the figure of the control information representing S1, and Figure 142 (b) is the figure representing the control information about subframe.

Figure 143 is the figure representing the control information about subframe.

Figure 144 is the structure example representing and sending frame.

Figure 145 (a) is the figure representing L1 signaling data, and Figure 145 (b) is the figure of the control information representing S1.

Figure 146 is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 147 (a) is the figure representing L1 signaling data, and Figure 147 (b) is the figure of the control information representing S1.

Figure 148 A is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 148 B is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 149 A(a) it is the figure representing L1 signaling data, Figure 149 A(b) it is the figure representing the control information about subframe.

Figure 149 B is the figure of the control information representing S1.

Figure 150 A is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 150 B is the structure example sending frame.

Figure 151 (a) is the figure representing L1 signaling data, and Figure 151 (b) is the figure of the control information representing S1.

Figure 152 is the figure representing the control information about AGC synchronization preamble.

Figure 153 A is the control information example in standard from now on.

Figure 153 B is the control information example in standard from now on.

Figure 154 A is the figure of the structure representing the Distributed-MISO utilizing existing transmission antenna.

Figure 154 B is the figure of the structure representing the Co-sited-MIMO that each dispatching station has added H antenna.

Figure 155 is to represent to connect for V receiver and V/H in the Co-sited-MIMO that each dispatching station has added H antenna The figure that V/H-MIMO for receipts machine sends.

Figure 156 is to represent transmit power and the tune of use in the Co-sited-MIMO that each dispatching station has added H antenna The figure of the relation of mode processed.

Detailed description of the invention

(understanding that inventors obtain)

In the past, as the communication means of use multiple antennas, such as, had and be referred to as MIMO(Multiple-Input Multiple-Output: multiple-input and multiple-output) communication means.In the multi-antenna communication with MIMO as representative, by respectively The transmission data of multiple series are modulated, and send each modulated signal from different antennas simultaneously, improve the logical of data Letter speed.

Figure 23 represent transmission antenna number be 2, reception antenna number be 2, to send modulated signal (sending stream) number be transmitting-receiving when 2 One example of the structure of device.In dispensing device, the data after coding are interlocked (interweaving, interleave), to staggered After data be modulated, line frequency of going forward side by side conversion etc., thus generate transmission signal, send signal and sent from antenna.Now, It is spatial multiplexing MIMO mode from transmission antenna in the way of same frequency sends different modulated signals respectively at synchronization.

Now, patent documentation 1 proposes a kind of transmission possessing different interleaving modes in each transmission antenna Device.It is to say, 2 interleavers (π a, π b) have mutually different interleaving mode in the dispensing device of Figure 23.And, In receiving device, as shown in non-patent literature 1, non-patent literature 2, utilize soft value (soft value) by being repeated Demodulation method (the MIMO detector in Figure 23), improves receiving quality.

, as the model of the actual propagation environment in radio communication, exist with Rayleigh fading (Rayleigh Fading) environment is NLOS(non-line of sight: the non line of sight of representative) environment and with Lay this decline (Rician Fading) environment is LOS(line of sight: the sighting distance of representative) environment.Single modulated signal is sent in dispensing device, Signal after the signal received by multiple reception antennas being carried out in receiving device high specific synthesis and high specific being synthesized In the case of being demodulated and decoding, LOS environment, particularly represent ground wave receive power relative to the reception of scattered wave In the environment of the Rice factor of the size of power is relatively big, it is possible to obtain good receiving quality.But, according to transmission means (example Such as spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means) difference, increase if Rice factor can be produced, receiving quality deterioration problem.(see Non-patent literature 3)

Figure 24 (A) (B) represents, Rayleigh fading environment and Rice factor K=3,10, under this fading environment of Lay of 16dB, To LDPC(low-density parity-check: low-density check) coding after data carried out 2 × 2(2 antenna send, 2 Antenna receive) spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission in the case of BER(Bit Error Rate: bit error rate) characteristic (longitudinal axis: BER, Transverse axis: SNR(signal-to-noise power ratio: signal to noise ratio)) an example of analog result.Figure 24 (A) represents, no The Max-log-APP(carrying out detection repeatedly sees non-patent literature 1, non-patent literature 2) (APP:a posterior Probability: posterior probability)) BER characteristic, Figure 24 (B) represent, carry out the Max-log-APP(after detection repeatedly and see Non-patent literature 1, non-patent literature 2) the BER characteristic of (number of occurrence is 5 times).Knowable to Figure 24 (A) (B), regardless of whether enter Row detection repeatedly, in Spatial Multiplexing Scheme of MIMO System, increases if Rice factor can be confirmed, the feelings that receiving quality degenerates Condition.It follows that there is " in Spatial Multiplexing Scheme of MIMO System, receiving quality degenerates when communication environments becomes stable " so , the problem that non-existent Spatial Multiplexing Scheme of MIMO System is intrinsic in the conventional system sending single modulated signal.

Broadcast or multicast communication is the service that must adapt to various communication environments, and the receiver that user holds is with wide Broadcast the radio propagation environment between station and be certainly likely to be LOS environment.Should by the Spatial Multiplexing Scheme of MIMO System with above-mentioned problem When using in broadcast or multicast communication, the received electric field strength of electric wave is higher in receivers, but may produce because receiving product The deterioration of matter and the phenomenon of service cannot be accepted.It is to say, in order to use spatial multiplexing MIMO in broadcast or multicast in communicating System, it is desirable in the case of any one of NLOS environment and LOS environment, the MIMO obtaining a certain degree of receiving quality passes The exploitation of defeated mode.

In non-patent literature 8, elaborate from selecting the code book for precoding from the feedback information of communication object The method of (pre-coding matrix (also referred to as precoding weight matrices)), but as it has been described above, as broadcast or multicast communicate, The method that cannot obtain carrying out precoding under the situation of the feedback information of communication object, but entirely without description.

On the other hand, in non-patent literature 4, elaborate also to be able to when there is no feedback information application, over time The method switching pre-coding matrix.In the publication, elaborate to use as the matrix for precoding unitary matrice and The random method switching unitary matrice, but for the above-mentioned deterioration for the receiving quality under LOS environment application process but Entirely without description, only describe random switching.Certainly, entirely without record for improving the bad of the receiving quality of LOS environment The method for precoding changed and the constructive method of pre-coding matrix.

As an object of the present invention, it is to provide the mimo system of a kind of receiving quality that can improve LOS environment.

Below, the embodiment that present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying.

(embodiment 1)

Describe the sending method of present embodiment, dispensing device, method of reseptance in detail and receive device.

Before carrying out this explanation, illustrate as the sending method in the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system of conventional system, The summary of coding/decoding method.

Fig. 1 represents N_t×N_rThe structure of Spatial Multiplexing Scheme of MIMO System.Dope vector z is implemented coding and interlocks (interleave).Then, as staggered output, the vector u=(u of coded bit is obtained₁..., u_Nt).Wherein, if u_i =(u_i1..., u_iM) (the transmission bit number of M: each code element).If setting transmission vector s=(s₁..., s_Nt)^T, then from sending sky Line #i is expressed as sending signal s_i=map(u_i), if energy normalization will be sent, then it is expressed as E{ | s_i|²}=Es/Nt(E_s: The gross energy of every channel).And, if setting reception vector as y=(y₁..., y_Nr)^T, then express as formula (1).

[numerical expression 1]

$\begin{array}{c}y={(y_1,...,y_{\mathrm{Nr}})}^T\\ =H_{\mathrm{NtNr}}s+n\end{array}$ ... formula (1)

Now, H_NtNrIt is channel matrix, n=(n₁..., n_Nr)^TIt is noise vector, n_iIt is meansigma methods 0, variances sigma²'s I.i.d. Gaussian noise is answered.According to the transmission code element imported by receiver and the relation of receiving symbol, relevant with receiving vector Probability can give with Multi-dimensional Gaussian distribution as formula (2).

[numerical expression 2]

$p\left(y\right|u)=\frac{1}{{\left(2\mathrm{\π}{\mathrm{\σ}}^2\right)}^{N_r}}\exp (-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\σ}}^2}{\left|\right|y-\mathrm{Hs}\left(u\right)\left|\right|}^2)$ ... formula (2)

Here, it is considered to by outside software-redundancy (outer soft-in-soft-out) decoder with carry out by MIMO detection The receiver repeatedly decoded as the Fig. 1 constituted.Vector (L-value) such as formula (3)-(5) of the log-likelihood ratio in Fig. 1 Express like that.

[numerical expression 3]

$L\left(u\right)={(L\left(u_1\right),...,L\left(u_{N_t}\right))}^T$ ... formula (3)

[numerical expression 4]

$L\left(u_i\right)=(L\left(u_{i1}\right),...,L\left(u_{\mathrm{iM}}\right))$ ... formula (4)

[numerical expression 5]

$L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)=\ln \frac{P(u_{\mathrm{ij}}=+1)}{P(u_{\mathrm{ij}}=-1)}$ ... formula (5)

＜ demodulation method ＞ repeatedly

Here, explanation N_txN_rThe detection repeatedly of the MIMO signal in Spatial Multiplexing Scheme of MIMO System.

U is defined as formula (6)_mnLog-likelihood ratio.

[numerical expression 6]

$L\left(u_{\mathrm{mn}}\right|y)=\ln \frac{P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=+1|y)}{P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=-1|y)}$ ... formula (6)

According to Bayes theorem, formula (6) can be expressed as formula (7).

[numerical expression 7]

$L\left(u_{\mathrm{mn}}\right|y)=\begin{array}{c}\ln \frac{p\left(y\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}}=+1)P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=+1)/p\left(y\right)}{p\left(y\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}}=-1)P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=-1)/p\left(y\right)}\\ =\ln \frac{P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=+1)}{P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=-1)}+\ln \frac{p\left(y\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}}=+1)}{p\left(y\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}}=-1)}\\ =\ln \frac{P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=+1)}{P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=-1)}+\ln \frac{{\mathrm{\Σ}}_{U_{\mathrm{mn},+1}}p\left(y\right|u)p\left(u\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}})}{{\mathrm{\Σ}}_{U_{\mathrm{mn},-1}}p\left(y\right|u)p\left(u\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}})}\end{array}$ ... formula 7

Wherein, if U_{Mn, ± 1}=u | u_mn=± 1}.And, if with ln Σ a_j～max ln a_jApproximate, then formula (7) energy Enough approximate as formula (8).Further, above "～" symbol represent approximation.

[numerical expression 8]

$\begin{array}{c}L\left(u_{\mathrm{mn}}\right|y)\≈\ln \frac{P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=+1)}{P(u_{\mathrm{mn}}=-1)}+\underset{\mathrm{Umn},+1}{\max }\{\ln p\left(y\right|u)+P\left(u\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}})\}\\ -\underset{\mathrm{Umn},-1}{\max }\{\ln p\left(y\right|u)+P\left(u\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}})\}\end{array}$ ... formula 8

P(u in formula (8) | u_mn) and ln P(u | u_mn) be expressed as.

[numerical expression 9]

$P\left(u\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}})=\begin{array}{c}\underset{\left(\mathrm{ij}\right)\≠\left(\mathrm{mn}\right)}{\mathrm{\Π}}P\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)\\ =\underset{\left(\mathrm{ij}\right)\≠\left(\mathrm{mn}\right)}{\mathrm{\Π}}\frac{\exp \left(\frac{u_{\mathrm{ij}}L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)}{2}\right)}{\exp \left(\frac{L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)}{2}\right)+\exp (-\frac{L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)}{2})}\end{array}$ ... formula 9

[numerical expression 10]

$\ln P\left(u\right|u_{\mathrm{mn}})=\left(\underset{\mathrm{ij}}{\mathrm{\Σ}}\ln P\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)\right)-\ln P\left(u_{\mathrm{mn}}\right)$ ... formula 10

[numerical expression 11]

$\ln P\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)=\begin{array}{c}\frac{1}{2}{u}_{\mathrm{ij}}P\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)-\ln (\exp \left(\frac{L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)}{2}\right)+\exp (-\frac{L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)}{2}))\\ \≈\frac{1}{2}{u}_{\mathrm{ij}}L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)-\frac{1}{2}\left|L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)\right|\mathrm{for}\left|L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)\right|>2\\ =\left|\frac{L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)}{2}\right|(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\mathrm{sign}\left(L\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)\right)-1)\end{array}$ ... formula 11

Here, the log probability of the formula defined in formula (2) is expressed as formula (12).

[numerical expression 12]

$\ln P\left(y\right|u)=-\frac{N_r}{2}\ln \left(2\mathrm{\π}{\mathrm{\σ}}^2\right)-\frac{1}{2{\mathrm{\σ}}^2}{\left|\right|y-\mathrm{Hs}\left(u\right)\left|\right|}^2$ ... formula 12

Therefore, learn according to (7), (13), at MAP or APP(a posteriori probability) in, L-afterwards Value is expressed as.

[numerical expression 13]

$L\left(u_{\mathrm{mn}}\right|y)=\ln \frac{{\mathrm{\Σ}}_{U_{\mathrm{mn},+1}}\exp \{-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\σ}}^2}{\left|\right|y-\mathrm{Hs}\left(u\right)\left|\right|}^2+\underset{\mathrm{ij}}{\mathrm{\Σ}}\ln P\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)\}}{{\mathrm{\Σ}}_{U_{\mathrm{mn},-1}}\exp \{-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\σ}}^2}{\left|\right|y-\mathrm{Hs}\left(u\right)\left|\right|}^2+\underset{\mathrm{ij}}{\mathrm{\Σ}}\ln P\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)\}}$ ... formula 13

APP decoding the most repeatedly.It addition, according to formula (8), (12), at the log-likelihood approximated based on Max-Log Ratio is in (Max-Log APP), and L-value afterwards is expressed as.

[numerical expression 14]

$L\left(u_{\mathrm{mn}}\right|y)\≈\underset{\mathrm{Umn},+1}{\max }\left\{\mathrm{\Ψ}(u,y,L\left(u\right))\right\}-\underset{\mathrm{Umn},-1}{\max }\left\{\mathrm{\Ψ}(u,y,L\left(u\right))\right\}$ ... formula 14

[numerical expression 15]

$\mathrm{\Ψ}(u,y,L\left(u\right))=-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\σ}}^2}{\left|\right|y-\mathrm{Hs}\left(u\right)\left|\right|}^2+\underset{\mathrm{ij}}{\mathrm{\Σ}}\ln P\left(u_{\mathrm{ij}}\right)$ ... formula 15

Max-log APP decoding the most repeatedly.And, external information required in the system repeatedly decoded is permissible Ask for by deducting input in advance from formula (13) or (14).

＜ system model ＞

Figure 23 represents the basic structure of the system relevant with following description.Here, be set to 2 × 2 spatial multiplexing MIMO systems System, has external encoder (outer encoder) in stream A, B respectively, and 2 external encoders are set to the volume of identical LDPC code Code device (illustrate as a example by the structure of the encoder using LDPC code in this as external encoder, but external encode The error correcting code that device uses is not limited to LDPC code, uses other the error correcting code such as Turbo code, convolutional code, LDPC convolutional-code also can Enough similarly implement.It addition, external encoder is set to the structure having in each transmission antenna, but be not restricted to that this, Even if transmission antenna is multiple, external encoder can also be one, alternatively, it is also possible to have the outside more than transmission antenna number Encoder.).And, in stream A, B, there is interleaver (π respectively_a, π_b).Here, modulation system is set to 2^h-QAM(is sent out by 1 code element Send h bit.).

In receivers, detection repeatedly (APP(or the Max-logAPP repeatedly) decoding of above-mentioned MIMO signal is carried out).And And, as the decoding of LDPC code, such as, carry out decoding with product.

Fig. 2 represents frame structure, describes the order of the code element after interlocking.Now, as following formula, express (i_a, j_a), (i_b, j_b).

[numerical expression 16]

$(i_a,j_a)={\mathrm{\π}}_a\left({\mathrm{\Ω}}_{\mathrm{ia},\mathrm{ja}}^a\right)$ ... formula (16)

[numerical expression 17]

$(i_a,j_b)={\mathrm{\π}}_b\left({\mathrm{\Ω}}_{\mathrm{ib},\mathrm{jb}}^a\right)$ ... formula (17)

Now illustrate: i_a, i_b: the order of the code element after Jiao Cuo, j_a, j_b: the bit position (j in modulation system_a, j_b= 1, h), π_a, π_b: the interleaver of stream A, B, Ω^a _{Ia, ja}, Ω^b _{Ib, jb}: stream A, B staggered before the order of data.Wherein, Fig. 2 represents i_a=i_bTime frame structure.

＜ decodes ＞ repeatedly

Here, describe use in the decoding of LDPC code in receivers and product (sum-project) decoding in detail And the algorithm of MIMO signal detection repeatedly.

Decode with product

By binary M × N matrix H={H_mnIt is set to the inspection matrix of the LDPC code as decoder object.As following formula fixed Justice set [1, N]=1,2, the partial set A(m of N}), B(n).

[numerical expression 18]

A(m)≡{n∶H_mn=1} ... formula (18)

[numerical expression 19]

B(n)≡{m∶H_mn=1} ... formula (19)

Now, A(m) it is meant that be the set of the column index of 1 on the m row checking matrix H, B(n) it is to check square It it is the set of the line index of 1 in the line n of battle array H.As follows with the algorithm of product decoding.

Step A 1(initializes): for meeting H_mn(m, n), if be worth logarithm ratio β in advance for whole groups of=1_mn=0.If Cyclic variable (number of occurrence) l_sum=1, and circulation maximum times is set as l_{Sum, max}。

Step A 2(row processes): for by m=1,2, the order of M meets H_mn=1 whole groups (m, n), Use following newer to update external value logarithm ratio α_mn。

[numerical expression 20]

${\mathrm{\α}}_{\mathrm{mn}}=\left(\underset{n^{\′}\∈A\left(m\right)\backslash n}{\mathrm{\Π}}\mathrm{sign}({\mathrm{\λ}}_{n^{\′}}+{\mathrm{\β}}_{{\mathrm{mn}}^{\′}})\right)\×f\left(\underset{n^{\′}\∈A\left(m\right)\backslash n}{\mathrm{\Σ}}f({\mathrm{\λ}}_{n^{\′}}+{\mathrm{\β}}_{{\mathrm{mn}}^{\′}})\right)$ ... formula 20

[numerical expression 21]

$\mathrm{sign}\left(x\right)\&equiv;\left\{\begin{array}{cc}1& x\&GreaterEqual;0\\ -1& x<0\end{array}\right.$ ... formula (21)

[numerical expression 22]

$f\left(x\right)\&equiv;\ln \frac{\exp \left(x\right)+1}{\exp \left(x\right)-1}$ ... formula (22)

Now, f is the function of Gallager.And, λ_nAcquiring method discussed in detail below.

Step A 3(column processing): for by n=1,2, the order of N meets H_mn=1 whole groups (m, n), Use following newer to update external value logarithm ratio β_mn。

[numerical expression 23]

${\mathrm{\&beta;}}_{\mathrm{mn}}=\underset{m^{\&prime;}\&Element;B\left(n\right)\backslash m}{\mathrm{\&Sigma;}}{\mathrm{\&alpha;}}_{m^{\&prime;}n}$ ... formula 23

The calculating of Step A 4(log-likelihood ratio): for n ∈ [1, N], ask for log-likelihood ratio L as follows_n。

[numerical expression 24]

$L_n=\underset{m^{\&prime;}\&Element;B\left(n\right)\backslash m}{\mathrm{\&Sigma;}}{\mathrm{\&alpha;}}_{m^{\&prime;}n}+{\mathrm{\&lambda;}}_n$ ... formula 24

The counting of the Step A 5(number of occurrence): if l_sum＜ l_{Sum, max}, then by l_sumIncrement, and return step A 2. At l_sum=l_{Sum, max}In the case of, terminating with product decoding of this.

The above is 1 time and product decoding action.Subsequently, the detection repeatedly of MIMO signal is carried out.Above-mentioned and take advantage of Variable m, n, α used in the action specification of long-pending decoding_mn、β_mn、λ_nAnd L_nIn, use m_a、n_a、α^a _mana、β^a _mana、λ_na、L_naCarry out table Reach the variable in stream A, use m_b、n_b、α^b _mbnb、β^b _mbnb、λ_nb、L_nbExpress the variable in stream B.

The detection ＞ repeatedly of ＜ MIMO signal

Here, the λ described in detail in the detection repeatedly of MIMO signal_nAcquiring method.

Learning from formula (1), equation below is set up.

[numerical expression 25]

$y\left(t\right)=\begin{array}{c}{(y_1\left(t\right),y_2\left(t\right))}^T\\ H_{22}\left(t\right)s\left(t\right)+n\left(t\right)\end{array}$ ... formula (25)

According to the frame structure of Fig. 2, learning from formula (16) (17), relational expression below is set up.

[numerical expression 26]

$n_a={\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{ia},\mathrm{ja}}^a$ ... formula (26)

[numerical expression 27]

$n_b={\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{ib},\mathrm{jb}}^b$ ... formula (27)

Now, n_a, n_b∈ [1, N].After, by λ during number of occurrence k of the detection repeatedly of MIMO signal_na、L_na、λ_nb、 L_nbIt is expressed as λ respectively_{K, na}、L_{K, na}、λ_{K, nb}、L_{K, nb}。

The initial detection of Step B 1(；K=0): when initial detection, λ is asked for as follows_{0, na}、λ_{0, nb}。

Repeatedly during APP decoding:

[numerical expression 28]

${\mathrm{\&lambda;}}_{{0,}_{n_X}}=\ln \frac{{\mathrm{\&Sigma;}}_{U_{0_{,\mathrm{nX},}+1}}\exp \{-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\&sigma;}}^2}{\left|\right|y\left(i_X\right)-H_{22}\left(i_X\right)s\left(u\left(i_X\right)\right)\left|\right|}^2\}}{{\mathrm{\&Sigma;}}_{U_{0_{,\mathrm{nX},}-1}}\exp \{-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\&sigma;}}^2}{\left|\right|y\left(i_X\right)-H_{22}\left(i_X\right)s\left(u\left(i_X\right)\right)\left|\right|}^2\}}$ ... formula 28

Repeatedly during Max-log APP decoding:

[numerical expression 29]

${\mathrm{\&lambda;}}_{{0,}_{n_X}}=\underset{U_{0_{,\mathrm{nX},}+1}}{\max }\left\{\mathrm{\&Psi;}(u\left(i_X\right),Y\left(i_X\right))\right\}-\underset{U_{0_{,\mathrm{nX},}-1}}{\max }\left\{\mathrm{\&Psi;}(u\left(i_X\right),y\left(i_X\right))\right\}$ ... formula 29

[numerical expression 30]

$\mathrm{\&Psi;}(u\left(i_X\right),y\left(i_X\right))=-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\&sigma;}}^2}{\left|\right|y\left(i_X\right)-H_{22}\left(i_X\right)s\left(u\left(i_X\right)\right)\left|\right|}^2$ ... formula 30

Wherein, if X=a, b.And, the number of occurrence of the detection repeatedly of MIMO signal is set to l_mimo=0, will be the most secondary The maximum times of number is set as l_{Mimo, max}。

Step B 2(detection repeatedly；Number of occurrence k): λ during number of occurrence k_{K, na}、λ_{K, nb}Such as formula (11) (13)-(15) (16) (17) express like that to formula (31)-(34).Wherein, (X, Y)=(a, and b) (b, a).

Repeatedly during APP decoding:

[numerical expression 31]

${\mathrm{\&lambda;}}_{{k,}_{n_X}}=L_{{k-1,}_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}\right)+\ln \frac{{\mathrm{\&Sigma;}}_{U_{k_{,\mathrm{nX},}+1}}\exp \{-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\&sigma;}}^2}{\left|\right|y\left(i_X\right)-H_{22}\left(i_X\right)S\left(u\left(i_X\right)\right)\left|\right|}^2+\mathrm{\&rho;}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}\right)\}}{{\mathrm{\&Sigma;}}_{U_{k_{,\mathrm{nX},}-1}}\exp \{-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\&sigma;}}^2}{\left|\right|y\left(i_X\right)-H_{22}\left(i_X\right)s\left(u\left(i_X\right)\right)\left|\right|}^2+\mathrm{\&rho;}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}\right)\}}$

... formula 31

[numerical expression 32]

$\mathrm{\&rho;}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}\right)=\begin{array}{c}\underset{\stackrel{\mathrm{\&gamma;}=1}{\mathrm{\&gamma;}\&NotEqual;\mathrm{jX}}}{\overset{h}{\mathrm{\&Sigma;}}}\left|\frac{L_{{k-1,}_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^X}}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^X}\right)}{2}\right|(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^X}\mathrm{sign}\left(L_{{k-1,}_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^X}}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^X}\right)\right)-1)\\ +\underset{\mathrm{\&gamma;}=1}{\overset{h}{\mathrm{\&Sigma;}}}\left|\frac{L_{{k-1,}_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^Y}}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^Y}\right)}{2}\right|(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^Y}\mathrm{sign}\left(L_{{k-1,}_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^Y}}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{\&gamma;}}^Y}\right)\right)-1)\end{array}$ ... formula 32

Repeatedly during Max-log APP decoding:

[numerical expression 33]

${\mathrm{\&lambda;}}_{{k,}_{n_X}}=L_{{k-1,}_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}\right)+\underset{U_{k_{,\mathrm{nX},}+1}}{\max }\left\{\mathrm{\&Psi;}(u\left(i_X\right),y\left(i_X\right),\mathrm{\&rho;}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}\right))\}-\underset{U_{k_{,\mathrm{nX},}-1}}{\max }\{\mathrm{\&Psi;}(u\left(i_X\right),y\left(i_X\right),\mathrm{\&rho;}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}\right))\right\}$

... formula 33

[numerical expression 34]

$\mathrm{\&Psi;}(u\left(i_X\right),y\left(i_X\right),\mathrm{\&rho;}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}\right))=-\frac{1}{{2\mathrm{\&sigma;}}^2}{\left|\right|y\left(i_X\right)-H_{22}\left(i_X\right)s\left(u\left(i_X\right)\right)\left|\right|}^2+\mathrm{\&rho;}\left(u_{{\mathrm{\&Omega;}}_{\mathrm{iX},\mathrm{jX}}^X}\right)$

... formula 34

The counting of the Step B 3(number of occurrence, code word estimate): if l_mimo＜ l_{Mimo, max}, then by l_mimoIncrement, returns step B·2.At l_mimo=l_{Mimo, max}In the case of, ask for as follows estimating code word.

[numerical expression 35]

${\hat{u}}_{n_X}=\begin{array}{cc}1& L_{l_{\mathrm{mimo}},n_X}\&GreaterEqual;0\\ -1& L_{l_{\mathrm{mimo}},n_X}<0\end{array}$ ... formula 35

Wherein, if X=a, b.

Fig. 3 is an example of the structure of the dispensing device 300 in present embodiment.Encoding section 302A is with information (data) 301A And frame structure signal 313 is input, contains encoding section 302A according to frame structure signal 313(and use in the Error Correction of Coding of data Error correcting system, encoding rate, the information such as block length, use the mode specified by frame structure signal 313.It addition, error correcting system is also Can switch.), such as carry out the Error Correction of Coding of convolutional code, LDPC code and Turbo code etc., data 303A after output coding.

Interleaver 304A carries out interlocking with data 303A after coding and frame structure signal 313 for input, i.e. sequentially Sequence, data 305A after output is staggered.(based on frame structure signal 313, staggered method can also switch.)

Mapping portion 306A for inputting, carries out QPSK(Quadrature with data 305A after staggered and frame structure signal 313 Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM(16Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM The modulation of (64Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) etc., exports baseband signal 307A.(based on frame structure signal 313, modulation system can also switch.)

Figure 19 is the same phase constituent I of composition baseband signal in QPSK modulation and the mapping in the IQ plane of orthogonal component Q One example of method.Such as, as shown in Figure 19 (A), in the case of input data are " 00 ", export I=1.0, Q=1.0, below Similarly, in the case of input data are " 01 ", export I=-1.0, Q=1.0, output.Figure 19 (B) is and Figure 19 (A) example of the mapping method in the IQ plane of different QPSK modulation, the difference of Figure 19 (B) and Figure 19 (A) is, it is possible to The signaling point of Figure 19 (B) is obtained by making the signaling point in Figure 19 (A) rotate centered by initial point.Rotation about this constellation Shifting method, shown in non-patent literature 9, non-patent literature 10, alternatively, it is also possible to application non-patent literature 9, non-patent literature Cyclic Q Delay shown in 10.As the example different with Figure 19, in IQ plane when representing 16QAM in fig. 20 Signaling point configuration, the example corresponding with Figure 19 (A) is Figure 20 (A), and the example corresponding with Figure 19 (B) is Figure 20 (B).

Encoding section 302B, with information (data) 301B and frame structure signal 313 for input, contains according to frame structure signal 313( There is the information of the error correcting system of use, encoding rate, block length etc., use the mode specified by frame structure signal 313.It addition, entangle Wrong mode can also switch.), such as carry out the Error Correction of Coding of convolutional code, LDPC code, Turbo code etc., the data after output coding 303B。

Interleaver 304B carries out interlocking with data 303B after coding and frame structure signal 313 for input, i.e. sequentially Sequence, data 305B after output is staggered.(based on frame structure signal 313, staggered method can also switch.)

Mapping portion 306B for inputting, carries out QPSK(Quadrature with data 305B after staggered and frame structure signal 313 Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM(16Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM The modulation of (64Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) etc., exports baseband signal 307B.(based on frame structure signal 313, modulation system can also switch.)

Signal processing method information generation unit 314, with frame structure signal 313 for input, exports and based on frame structure signal The information 315 that the signal processing method of 313 is relevant.Further, relevant with signal processing method information 315 comprises specifies fixing making Information by the phase place change pattern of the information of which pre-coding matrix and change phase place.

Weighting combining unit 308A is with baseband signal 307A, baseband signal 307B and the information relevant with signal processing method 315 is input, based on the information 315 relevant with signal processing method, adds baseband signal 307A and baseband signal 307B Power synthesis, the signal 309A after output weighting synthesis.Further, about the method details of weighting synthesis, will be described in detail later.

Radio section 310A, with the signal 309A after weighting synthesis for input, carries out orthogonal modulation, frequency band restriction, frequency transformation And the process of amplification etc., output sends signal 311A, sends signal 311A and is exported as electric wave from antenna 312A.

Weighting combining unit 308B is with baseband signal 307A, baseband signal 307B and the information relevant with signal processing method 315 is input, based on the information 315 relevant with signal processing method, adds baseband signal 307A and baseband signal 307B Power synthesis, the signal 316B after output weighting synthesis.

Figure 21 represents the structure of weighting combining unit (308A, 308B).The region surrounded with dotted line in figure 21 is that weighting is closed One-tenth portion.Baseband signal 307A is multiplied with w11 and generates w11 s1(t), be multiplied with w21 and generate w21 s1(t).Similarly, Baseband signal 307B is multiplied with w12 and generates w12 s2(t), be multiplied with w22 and generate w22 s2(t).It follows that obtain z1 (t)=w11 s1(t)+w12 s2(t), z2(t)=w21 s1(t)+w22 s2(t).Now, s1(t) and s2(t) from upper State bright understand, become BPSK(Binary Phase Shift Keying), QPSK, 8PSK(8Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM, 32QAM(32Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM, 256QAM, 16APSK The baseband signal of modulation systems such as (16Amplitude Phase Shift Keying).

Here, two weighting combining units use fixing pre-coding matrixes to perform weighting, as pre-coding matrix, as One example has the method using formula (36) based on following formula (37) or the condition of formula (38).But this is an example, the value of α is not limited to Formula (37), formula (38), it is also possible to be set to other value, such as, α be set to 1.

Further, pre-coding matrix is

[numerical expression 36]

$\left(\begin{array}{cc}w11& w12\\ w21& w22\end{array}\right)=\frac{1}{\sqrt{{\mathrm{\&alpha;}}^2+1}}\left(\begin{array}{cc}{e}^{j0}& {\mathrm{\&alpha;}\&times;e}^{j0}\\ {\mathrm{\&alpha;}\&times;e}^{j0}& e^{\mathrm{j\&pi;}}\end{array}\right)$ ... formula (36)

Wherein, in above-mentioned formula (36), α is

[numerical expression 37]

$\mathrm{\&alpha;}=\frac{\sqrt{2}+4}{\sqrt{2}+2}$ ... formula (37)

Or, in above-mentioned formula (36), α is

[numerical expression 38]

$\mathrm{\&alpha;}=\frac{\sqrt{2}+3+\sqrt{5}}{\sqrt{2}+3-\sqrt{5}}$ ... formula (38)

Further, pre-coding matrix is not limited to formula (36), it is possible to use the pre-coding matrix shown in formula (39).

[numerical expression 39]

$\left(\begin{array}{cc}w11& w12\\ w21& w22\end{array}\right)=\left(\begin{array}{cc}a& b\\ c& d\end{array}\right)$ ... formula (39)

In this formula (39), as long as with a=Ae^jδ11, b=Be^jδ12, c=Ce^jδ21, d=De^jδ22Express.It addition, Any one of a, b, c, d can also be " zero ".For example, it is also possible to be (1) a be zero, b, c, d are not zero, and (2) b is zero, a, c, d Being not zero, (3) c is zero, and a, b, d are not zero, and (4) d is zero, and a, b, c are not zero such structure.

Further, when changing some of modulation system, error correcting code and encoding rate thereof, it is also possible to the precoding square used Battle array is set and changes, and uses this pre-coding matrix regularly.

Phase place changing unit 317B is to weight the signal 316B after synthesizing and the information 315 relevant with signal processing method for defeated Enter, change the phase place of this signal 316B regularly and export.So-called change regularly refers at predetermined cycle (such as every n Individual code element (n is the integer of more than 1) or every a predetermined time) in, change phase place according to predetermined phase place change pattern. The details of relevant phase place change pattern, will illustrate in following embodiment 4.

Signal 309B after radio section 310B changes with phase place is input, implements orthogonal modulation, frequency band restriction, frequency transformation And the process of amplification etc., output sends signal 311B, sends signal 311B and is exported as electric wave from antenna 312B.

Fig. 4 represents the structure example of the dispensing device 400 different with Fig. 3.In the diagram, the part different with Fig. 3 is described.

Encoding section 402, with information (data) 401 and frame structure signal 313 for input, is entangled based on frame structure signal 313 Miscoding, the data 402 after output coding.

Data 405A and data 405B are distributed and exported to dispenser 404, with the data 403 after coding for input,.Further, exist In Fig. 4, describe the situation that encoding section is, but be not limited to this, for encoding section being set to the integer that m(m is more than 1), And by dispenser, the coded data made by each encoding section being divided into the situation that the data of 2 systems export, the present invention also may be used Similarly to implement.

Fig. 5 represents frame structure one example on the time shaft of the dispensing device in present embodiment.Code element 500_1 be for Receiving the code element of device notice sending method, such as, transmission is for transmitting the information of the error correcting system of data symbols, its encoding rate And for transmitting the information etc. of the modulation system of data symbols.

Code element 501_1 is for estimating modulated signal z1(t that dispensing device is sent) channel of { wherein t is the time } becomes Dynamic code element.Code element 502_1 is modulated signal z1(t) to the data symbols of (on time shaft) symbol number u transmission, code element 503_1 is modulated signal z1(t) to the data symbols of symbol number u+1 transmission.

Code element 501_2 is for estimating modulated signal z2(t that dispensing device is sent) channel of { wherein, t be hour } The code element of variation.Code element 502_2 is modulated signal z2(t) to the data symbols of symbol number u transmission, code element 503_2 is modulation Signal z2(t) to the data symbols of symbol number u+1 transmission.

Now, at z1(t) in code element and z2(t) in code element in, the code element of synchronization (same time) use with One (jointly) frequency, sends from transmission antenna.

Modulated signal z1(t that dispensing device sends is described) and modulated signal z2(t) and the reception letter that receives in device Number r1(t), r2(t) relation.

In Figure 5,504#1,504#2 represent the transmission antenna in dispensing device, and 505#1,505#2 represent in reception device Reception antenna, dispensing device sends modulated signal z1(t from transmission antenna 504#1 and transmission antenna 504#2 respectively) and modulation Signal z2(t).Now, modulated signal z1(t) and modulated signal z2(t) take same (common) frequency (frequency band).Assume to send out The each transmission antenna sending device and the channel variation of each reception antenna receiving device are respectively h11(t), h12(t), h21(t), H22(t), the reception signal that the reception antenna 505#1 of reception device receives is r1(t), receive the reception antenna 505#2 of device The reception signal received is r2(t), then relational expression below is set up.

[numerical expression 40]

$\left(\begin{array}{c}r1\left(t\right)\\ r2\left(t\right)\end{array}\right)=\left(\begin{array}{cc}h11\left(t\right)& h12\left(t\right)\\ h21\left(t\right)& h22\left(t\right)\end{array}\right)\left(\begin{array}{c}z1\left(t\right)\\ z2\left(t\right)\end{array}\right)$ ... formula (40)

Fig. 6 is and the method for weighting (precoding (Precoding) method) in present embodiment and phase place variation phase The figure closed, weighting combining unit 600 is the weighting combining unit after incorporating weighting combining unit 308A of Fig. 3 and 308B both sides.Such as Fig. 6 Shown in, flow s1(t) and stream s2(t) corresponding to baseband signal 307A of Fig. 3 and 307B, say, that become according to QPSK, The mapping of the modulation systems such as 16QAM, 64QAM, baseband signal homophase I composition and quadrature Q components.And, such as the frame of Fig. 6 Structure is such, flows s1(t) be s1(u by the signal representation of symbol number u), it is s1(u+ by the signal representation of symbol number u+1 1),.Equally, flow s2(t) be s2(u by the signal representation of symbol number u), by the signal representation of symbol number u+1 it is S2(u+1),.And, weighting combining unit 600 is with baseband signal 307A(s1(t in Fig. 3)) and 307B(s2(t)) and The information 315 relevant with signal processing method is input, the weighting of the information 315 that implementation basis is relevant with signal processing method, Output Fig. 3 weighting synthesis after signal 309A(z1(t)), 316B(z2'(t)).After the change weighting of phase place changing unit 317B Signal 316B(z2'(t)) phase place, output phase place change after signal 309B(z2(t)).

Now, if the vector of the 1st row assumed in fixing pre-coding matrix F is W1=(w11, w12), then z1(t) and can To express with following formula (41).

[numerical expression 41]

z1(t)=W1×(s1(t),s2(t))^T... formula (41)

On the other hand, if the vector of the 2nd row assumed in fixing pre-coding matrix F is W2=(w21, w22), and by phase The phase place change formula that position changing unit obtains is y(t), then z2(t) can express with following formula (42).

[numerical expression 42]

z2(t)=y(t)×W2×(s1(t),s2(t))^T... formula (42)

Here, y(t) it is the formula for changing phase place in a predetermined manner, if the cycle that sets is as 4, then the phase of moment u Position change formula such as can be expressed with formula (43).

[numerical expression 43] y (u)=e^j0... formula (43)

Equally, the phase place change formula of moment u+1 such as can be expressed with formula (44).

[numerical expression 44]

$y(u+1)=e^{j\frac{\mathrm{\&pi;}}{2}}$ ... formula (44)

It is to say, the phase place change formula of moment u+k can be expressed with formula (45).

[numerical expression 45]

$y(u+k)=e^{j\frac{\mathrm{k\&pi;}}{2}}$ ... formula (45)

Further, the phase place modification of formula (43)～the rule shown in (45) is an example.

The cycle of the phase place change of rule is not limited to 4.If the number in this cycle becomes many, then can promote to receive device Receptivity (more correct for be error-correcting performance) improve this quantity and (as long as being not to say that the cycle is the most all right, but keep away Open 2 the least more preferable probabilities of value higher.).

It addition, by the phase place modification shown in above formula (43)～(45), it is shown that make it rotate the phase of regulation successively The structure of position amount (being respectively pi/2 in above-mentioned formula) but it also may do not make it rotate identical phase mass, and change phase randomly Position.Such as, y(t) can also be according to the predetermined cycle, the order as shown in formula (46) or formula (47) changes the phase place being multiplied. It is essential that change the phase place of modulated signal regularly in the systematicness of phase place changes, for the degree of the phase place of change, excellent Electing as far as possible impartial, the most p-π radian, to π radian, is preferably uniformly distributed but it also may be random.

[numerical expression 46]

$\begin{array}{c}{e}^{j0}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{2\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{3\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{4\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\\ \&RightArrow;e^{\mathrm{j\&pi;}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{6\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{7\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{8\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{9\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\end{array}$ ... formula (46)

[numerical expression 47]

$\begin{array}{c}{e}^{j\frac{\mathrm{\&pi;}}{2}}\&RightArrow;e^{\mathrm{j\&pi;}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{3\mathrm{\&pi;}}{2}}\&RightArrow;e^{j2\mathrm{\&pi;}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{\mathrm{\&pi;}}{4}}\\ \&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{3}{4}\mathrm{\&pi;}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{5\mathrm{\&pi;}}{4}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{7\mathrm{\&pi;}}{4}}\end{array}$ ... formula (47)

So, the weighting combining unit 600 of Fig. 6 uses predetermined fixing precoding weight to perform precoding, and phase place becomes More portion 317B changes its change degree, the phase place of the signal that change is inputted on one side regularly.

Under LOS environment, if using special pre-coding matrix, then there is the possibility that receiving quality is greatly improved Property, but according to the situation of ground wave, the phase place of ground wave, amplitude component when this special pre-coding matrix is because receiving and not With.But, under LOS environment, there is certain rule, if change the phase place sending signal, then data regularly according to this rule The bigger improvement of receiving quality.The present invention proposes the signal processing method improving LOS environment.

Fig. 7 represents an example of the structure receiving device 700 in present embodiment.Radio section 703_X is to be connect by antenna 701_X The reception signal 702_X received is input, implements frequency transformation and quadrature demodulation etc. and processes, exports baseband signal 704_X.

Channel variation presumption unit 705_1 in modulated signal z1 sent by dispensing device is defeated with baseband signal 704_X Enter, extract reference symbols sn 501_1 of channel presumption in Fig. 5, the value corresponding for h11 of presumption and formula (40), export channel and push away Determine signal 706_1.

Channel variation presumption unit 705_2 in modulated signal z2 sent by dispensing device is defeated with baseband signal 704_X Enter, extract reference symbols sn 501_2 of channel presumption in Fig. 5, the value corresponding for h12 of presumption and formula (40), export channel and push away Determine signal 706_2.

Radio section 703_Y, with the reception signal 702_Y that received by antenna 701_Y for input, implements frequency transformation and just Hand over demodulation etc. to process, export baseband signal 704_Y.

Channel variation presumption unit 707_1 in modulated signal z1 sent by dispensing device is defeated with baseband signal 704_Y Enter, extract reference symbols sn 501_1 of channel presumption in Fig. 5, the value corresponding for h21 of presumption and formula (40), export channel and push away Determine signal 708_1.

Channel variation presumption unit 707_2 in modulated signal z2 sent by dispensing device is defeated with baseband signal 704_Y Enter, extract reference symbols sn 501_2 of channel presumption in Fig. 5, the value corresponding for h22 of presumption and formula (40), export channel and push away Determine signal 708_2.

Control information lsb decoder 709 is with baseband signal 704_X and 704_Y for input, and detection is for notifying the sender of Fig. 5 Code element 500_1 of method, the information-related signal 710 of the sending method that output and dispensing device are notified.

Signal processing part 711 is with baseband signal 704_X, 704_Y, channel presumption signal 706_1,706_2,708_1,708_ 2 and the information-related signal 710 of sending method that notified with dispensing device be input, carry out detection and decoding, output connects Receive data 712_1 and 712_2.

It follows that describe the action of the signal processing part 711 of Fig. 7 in detail.Fig. 8 represents the signal processing in present embodiment One example of the structure in portion 711.Fig. 8 mainly includes INNER MIMO detection section, software-redundancy decoder and coefficient generating unit.Relevant The method repeatedly decoded in this structure, records in non-patent literature 2, non-patent literature 3 in detail, but is non-patent literary composition Offer 2, the MIMO transmission mode described in non-patent literature 3 is spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, and the biography in present embodiment The difference of defeated mode and non-patent literature 2, non-patent literature 3 is, is a kind of to change signal over time and regularly Phase place, and use the MIMO transmission mode of pre-coding matrix.If (channel) matrix set in formula (36) is as H(t), in Fig. 6 Precoding weight matrices be F(pre-coding matrix here be to receive in signal, at 1, the fixing matrix not changed), by Fig. 6 The matrix of phase place change formula that obtains of phase place changing unit be Y(t) (Y(t here) change along with t), reception vector is R(t) =(r1(t), r2(t))^T, flow vector S(t)=(s1(t), s2(t))^T, then relational expression below is set up.

[numerical expression 48] R (t)=H (t) × Y (t) × F × S (t) ... formula (48)

Wherein

$Y\left(t\right)=\left(\begin{array}{cc}1& 0\\ 0& y\left(t\right)\end{array}\right)$

Now, receiving device can be by obtaining H(t) × Y(t) × F, to receiving vector R(t) application non-patent literature 2, The coding/decoding method of non-patent literature 3.

Therefore, the information of the coefficient generating unit 819 of Fig. 8 sending method to be notified with dispensing device (is used for determining institute The fixing pre-coding matrix that uses and the information of phase place change pattern when changing phase place) relevant signal 818(corresponds to The 710 of Fig. 7) for input, the information-related signal 820 of output and signal processing method.

INNER MIMO detection section 803 is with the information-related signal 820 with signal processing method for input, by utilizing This signal, and utilize the relation of formula (48), carry out the decoding of detection repeatedly, its action of following description.

In the signal processing part of the structure shown in Fig. 8, in order to repeatedly decode (detection repeatedly), need to carry out Figure 10 Shown processing method.First, 1 code word (or 1 frame) and 1 code word of modulated signal (stream) s2 of signal (stream) s1 it are modulated The decoding of (or 1 frame).Its result, obtains 1 code word (or 1 frame) of modulated signal (stream) s1 from software-redundancy decoder and adjusts The log-likelihood ratio (LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio) of each bit of 1 code word (or 1 frame) of signal processed (stream) s2.So After, use this LLR again to carry out detection decoding.Repeatedly carry out this operation (this operation to be referred to as decoding repeatedly (repeatedly examine Ripple).).After, stress the manufacture method of the log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of code element with the special time in 1 frame.

In fig. 8, storage part 815 corresponds to baseband signal 704_X of Fig. 7 with baseband signal 801X(.), channel presumption letter Number group 802X(is corresponding to channel presumption signal 706_1,706_2 of Fig. 7.), baseband signal 801Y(corresponding to Fig. 7 base band letter Number 704_Y.) and channel presumption ensemble 802Y(corresponding to Fig. 7 channel presumption signal 708_1,708_2.) for inputting, in order to Realize decoding (detection repeatedly) repeatedly, perform the H(t in (calculating) formula (48)) × Y(t) × F, as deformation channel signal group The matrix that storage calculates.Then, storage part 815 exports above-mentioned signal when needed, is used as baseband signal 816X, deformation letter Road presumption ensemble 817X and baseband signal 816Y, deformation channel presumption ensemble 817Y.

About action thereafter, the situation of the situation and decoding (detection repeatedly) repeatedly that are classified into initial detection is said Bright.

Situation ＞ of the initial detection of ＜

INNER MIMO detection section 803 is with baseband signal 801X, channel presumption ensemble 802X, baseband signal 801Y and letter Presumption ensemble 802Y in road is input.Here, using modulated signal (stream) s1, modulated signal (stream) s2 modulation system as 16QAM illustrates.

First INNER MIMO detection section 803 according to channel presumption ensemble 802X and channel presumption ensemble 802Y, is held Row H(t) × Y(t) × F, asks for the candidate signal point corresponding with baseband signal 801X.Figure 11 represents situation now.At Figure 11 In, ● (stain) is the candidate signal point in IQ plane, owing to modulation system is 16QAM, so candidate signal point exists 256 Individual.But (, figure 11 illustrates schematic diagram, so not shown whole 256 candidate signal points.) here, believe by modulation if setting 4 bits of number s1 transmission are b0, b1, b2, b3, modulated signal s2 4 bits transmitted are b4, b5, b6, b7, the most in fig. 11 There is the candidate signal point corresponding with (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7).Then, received signal points 1101(is asked for corresponding In baseband signal 801X.) and candidate signal point each between squared euclidean distance.Then, by the variances sigma of noise²Divided by respectively Individual squared euclidean distance.Therefore, E is obtained_X(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7), this E_X(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, B7) it is that the candidate signal point corresponding with (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) and received signal points squared euclidean distance are removed With the value after the variance of noise.Further, each baseband signal, modulated signal s1, s2 are complex signals.

Similarly, according to channel presumption ensemble 802X and channel presumption ensemble 802Y, perform H(t) × Y(t) × F, Ask for the candidate signal point corresponding with baseband signal 801Y, and ask for received signal points (corresponding to baseband signal 801Y.) it Between squared euclidean distance, by this squared euclidean distance divided by the variances sigma of noise².Therefore, E is obtained_Y(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, B5, b6, b7), this E_Y(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) is by corresponding with (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) Candidate signal point and received signal points squared euclidean distance are divided by the value after the variance of noise.

Then, E is asked for_X(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7)+E_Y(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7)=E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7).

INNER MIMO detection section 803 exports E(b0 as signal 804, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7).

Log-likelihood calculations portion 805A, with signal 804 for input, calculates the log-likelihood (log of bit b0, b1, b2 and b3 Likelihood), output log-likelihood signal 806A.But, in the calculating of log-likelihood, calculate log-likelihood time " 1 " And log-likelihood time " 0 ".Shown in its computational methods such as formula (28), formula (29) and formula (30), details is recorded in non-patent In document 2, non-patent literature 3.

Similarly, log-likelihood calculations portion 805B, with signal 804 for input, calculates the logarithm of bit b4, b5, b6 and b7 seemingly So, output log-likelihood signal 806B.

Deinterlacer (807A), with log-likelihood signal 806A for input, is carried out and the interleaver (interleaver of Fig. 3 (304A)) corresponding release of an interleave, the log-likelihood signal 808A after output release of an interleave.

Similarly, deinterlacer (807B), with log-likelihood signal 806B for input, carries out with interleaver that (Fig. 3's is staggered Device (304B)) corresponding release of an interleave, the log-likelihood signal 808B after output release of an interleave.

Log-likelihood calculations portion 809A, with the log-likelihood signal 808A after release of an interleave for input, calculates by the volume of Fig. 3 The log-likelihood ratio (LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio) of the bit after code device 302A coding, exports log-likelihood ratio signal 810A。

Equally, log-likelihood calculations portion 809B, with the log-likelihood signal 808B after release of an interleave for input, calculates by Fig. 3 Encoder 302B coding after the log-likelihood ratio (LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio) of bit, export log-likelihood ratio Signal 810B.

Software-redundancy decoder 811A is decoded with log-likelihood ratio signal 810A for inputting, and it is decoded right to export Number likelihood ratio 812A.

Equally, software-redundancy decoder 811B is decoded with log-likelihood ratio signal 810B for inputting, output decoding After log-likelihood ratio 812B.

＜ decodes the situation of (detection repeatedly), number of occurrence k ＞ repeatedly

Interleaver (813A) with the decoded log-likelihood ratio 812A obtained by software-redundancy decoder of kth-1 time is Input interlocks, the log-likelihood ratio 814A after output is staggered.Now, the interleaving mode of interleaver (813A) and Fig. 3 The interleaving mode of interleaver (304A) is identical.

Interleaver (813B) with the decoded log-likelihood ratio 812B obtained by software-redundancy decoder of kth-1 time is Input interlocks, the log-likelihood ratio 814B after output is staggered.Now, the interleaving mode of interleaver (813B) and Fig. 3 and The interleaving mode of interleaver (304B) is identical.

INNER MIMO detection section 803 is with baseband signal 816X, deformation channel presumption ensemble 817X, baseband signal 816Y, deformation channel presumption ensemble 817Y, staggered after log-likelihood ratio 814A and staggered after log-likelihood ratio 814B be Input.Here, baseband signal 801X, channel presumption ensemble 802X, baseband signal 801Y and channel presumption ensemble are not used 802Y, and use baseband signal 816X, deformation channel presumption ensemble 817X, base band 816Y and deformation channel presumption ensemble 817Y, this is because, create time delay owing to repeatedly decoding.

The difference of action when action when INNER MIMO detection section 803 decodes repeatedly and initial detection is, Log-likelihood ratio 814B after employing the log-likelihood ratio 814A after interlocking during signal processing and interlocking.INNER MIMO detection Portion 803 first with similarly ask for E(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7 during initial detection).In addition, always according to staggered After log-likelihood ratio 814A and staggered after log-likelihood ratio 814B ask for the coefficient corresponding with formula (11), formula (32).Then, Utilize this coefficient obtained to revise E(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) value, its value is set to E'(b0, b1, b2, B3, b4, b5, b6, b7), export as signal 804.

Log-likelihood calculations portion 805A, with signal 804 for input, calculates the log-likelihood (log of bit b0, b1, b2 and b3 Likelihood), output log-likelihood signal 806A.Wherein, in the calculating of log-likelihood, calculate log-likelihood time " 1 " And log-likelihood time " 0 ".Shown in its computational methods such as formula (31), formula (32), formula (33), formula (34) and formula (35), and remember It is loaded in non-patent literature 2, non-patent literature 3.

Similarly, log-likelihood calculations portion 805B, with signal 804 for input, calculates the logarithm of bit b4, b5, b6 and b7 seemingly So, output log-likelihood signal 806B.Deinterlacer action hereafter is identical with initial detection.

Further, figure 8 illustrates the structure of signal processing part when carrying out detection repeatedly, but detection is obtaining repeatedly The aspect of good receiving quality it is not necessary to structure, it is also possible to only have the structure division needed for detection the most repeatedly, and do not have The structure of interleaver 813A, 813B.Now, INNERMIMO detection section 803 does not carry out detection repeatedly.

And, part and parcel is in the present embodiment, carries out H(t) × Y(t) computing of × F.Further, such as non-patent Shown in document 5 grade, it is possible to use QR decomposition carries out initial detection and detection repeatedly.

It addition, as shown in non-patent literature 11, it is also possible to according to H(t) × Y(t) × F, carry out MMSE(Minimum Mean Square Error), ZF(Zero Forcing) linear operation, carry out initial detection.

Fig. 9 is the structure of the signal processing part different with Fig. 8, needed for being the modulated signal that the dispensing device of Fig. 4 is sent Signal processing part.With the number that difference is software-redundancy decoder of Fig. 8, software-redundancy decoder 901 is with logarithm seemingly So than signal 810A, 810B for inputting, it is decoded, exports decoded log-likelihood ratio 902.After dispenser 903 is with decoding Log-likelihood ratio 902 be input, be allocated.Part beyond it is the action identical with Fig. 8.

As above, as in the present embodiment, multiple modulation are sent when the dispensing device of mimo transmission system from many antennas During signal, pre-coding matrix is multiplied, and changes phase place over time, carry out the change of this phase place regularly, thus, directly Connect ripple and account under leading LOS environment, compared with when using the transmission of conventional spatial multiplexing MIMO, it is possible to obtain improve and receive device In the effect of receiving quality of data.

In the present embodiment, especially for the structure of reception device, limit antenna number and illustrate its action, but Increase antenna number can also similarly implement.It is to say, antenna number in reception device give present embodiment action, Effect brings impact.

It addition, in the present embodiment, particularly it is illustrated as a example by LDPC code, but be not restricted to that this, it addition, Relevant coding/decoding method, is also not necessarily limited to decode with product as software-redundancy decoder, also has the decoding side of other software-redundancy Method, such as bcjr algorithm, SOVA algorithm and Max-log-MAP algorithm etc..Details is documented in non-patent literature 6.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated as a example by carrier way, but be not restricted to that this, implementing It also is able to similarly to implement in the case of multi-carrier transmission.It is thus possible, for instance using spread spectrum communication mode, OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) mode, SC-FDMA(Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access), SC-OFDM(Single Carrier Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) feelings of the wavelet OFDM mode etc. shown in mode and non-patent literature 7 etc. Under condition, it is also possible to similarly implement.It addition, in the present embodiment, code element, such as pilot frequency code element beyond data symbols (are led Speech, unique word etc.) and the code element etc. of the information of control transmission can be with arbitrary disposition in frame.

Below, as an example of multi-carrier mode, illustrate to use example during OFDM mode.

Figure 12 represents the structure of dispensing device when using OFDM mode.In fig. 12, for Fig. 3 similarly action Part, gives identical symbol.

OFDM mode correlation processing unit 1201A, with the signal 309A after weighting for input, implements the place that OFDM mode is relevant Reason, output sends signal 1202A.Similarly, the signal 309B after OFDM mode correlation processing unit 1201B changes with phase place is defeated Entering, output sends signal 1202B.

Figure 13 represents an example of OFDM mode correlation processing unit 1201A of Figure 12, structure later for 1201B, with Figure 12's Part relevant for 1201A to 312A is 1301A to 1310A, and the part relevant to 1201B to 312B is 1301B to 1310B.

Serial-parallel conversion portion 1302A to weighting after signal 1301A(corresponding to Figure 12 weighting after signal 309A) enter Row serial-parallel conversion, exports parallel signal 1303A.

Sequence portion 1304A, with parallel signal 1303A for input, is ranked up, the signal 1305A after output sequence.Further, Relevant sequence will be described in detail later.

Inverse fast fourier transform portion 1306A, with the signal 1305A after sequence for input, implements inverse fast Flourier and becomes Change, the signal 1307A after output inverse Fourier transform.

Radio section 1308A, with the signal 1307A after inverse Fourier transform for input, performs the place of frequency transformation and amplification etc. Reason, exports modulated signal 1309A, and modulated signal 1309A is exported as electric wave from antenna 1310A.

Serial-parallel conversion portion 1302B becomes corresponding to the phase place of Figure 12 for the signal 1301B(after weighting and change phase place Signal 309B after more) carry out serial-parallel conversion, export parallel signal 1303B.

Sequence portion 1304B, with parallel signal 1303B for input, is ranked up, the signal 1305B after output sequence.Further, Relevant sequence will be described in detail later.

Inverse fast fourier transform portion 1306B, with the signal 1305B after sequence for input, implements inverse fast Flourier and becomes Change, the signal 1307B after output inverse Fourier transform.

Radio section 1308B, with the signal 1307B after inverse Fourier transform for input, performs the place of frequency transformation and amplification etc. Reason, exports modulated signal 1309B, and modulated signal 1309B is exported as electric wave from antenna 1310B.

In the dispensing device of Fig. 3, because being not the transmission means using multicarrier, so as Fig. 6, to become 4 The mode in cycle changes phase place, the code element after being configured with phase place change along time-axis direction.At the employing OFDM shown in Figure 12 In the case of the multicarrier transmission mode of mode, it is of course possible to expect carrying out as shown in Figure 3 precoding, configure along time-axis direction Code element after change phase place, carries out the mode of above-mentioned process in each (sub) carrier wave, and in the situation of multicarrier transmission mode Under, it is contemplated that utilize the method that frequency axis direction or frequency axis time shaft both sides carry out configuring.Below, for this Any illustrates.

Figure 14 represents the sequence side of the code element in sequence portion 1301A, 1301B of the temporal Figure 13 of transverse axis frequency, the longitudinal axis One example of method, frequency axis is made up of (sub) carrier wave 0～(sub) carrier wave 9, and modulated signal z1 and z2 use at synchronization (time) Identical frequency band, Figure 14 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 14 (B) represents the code element of modulated signal z2 Sort method.Serial-parallel conversion portion 1302A, for the code element of the signal 1301A after the weighting as input, numbers in order as # 0、#1、#2、#3、···.Here, owing to considering the situation that the cycle is 4, thus #0, #1, #2, #3 become a periodic quantity.With Sample ground considers, #4n, #4N+1, #4n+2, #4n+3(n are the integer of more than 0) become a periodic quantity.

Now, as Figure 14 (a), it is configured to regularly, starts to configure code element #0, #1, #2, # in order from carrier wave 0 3, and configure code element #0～#9 in the moment 1, then, configure code element #10～#19 in the moment 2.Further, modulated signal Z1 and z2 is complex signal.

Equally, serial-parallel conversion portion 1302B for weighting and change the code of the signal 1301B after phase place as input Unit, number in order into #0, #1, #2, #3,.Here, owing to considering the situation that the cycle is 4, thus #0, #1, #2, # 3 carry out different phase place changes respectively, and #0, #1, #2, #3 become a periodic quantity.If similarly considering, then #4n, #4N+1, #4n+ 2, #4n+3(n is the integer of more than 0) carry out different phase place changes respectively, #4n, #4N+1, #4n+2, #4n+3 become a cycle Amount.

Now, as Figure 14 (b), it is configured to regularly, starts to configure code element #0, #1, #2, # in order from carrier wave 0 3, and configure code element #0～#9 in the moment 1, then, configure code element #10～#19 in the moment 2.

And, 1 periodic quantity when the code element group 1402 shown in Figure 14 (B) is to use the phase place variation shown in Fig. 6 Code element, code element #0 is the code element during phase place of the moment u using Fig. 6, when code element #1 is the phase place of the moment u+1 using Fig. 6 Code element, code element #2 is the code element during phase place of the moment u+2 using Fig. 6, when code element #3 is the phase place of the moment u+3 using Fig. 6 Code element.Therefore, in code element #x, x mod4 be 0(with 4 divided by remainder during x, therefore, mod:modulo) time, code element #x is Using the code element during phase place of moment u of Fig. 6, when x mod4 is 1, code element #x is the code during phase place of the moment u+1 using Fig. 6 Unit, when x mod4 is 2, code element #x is the code element during phase place of the moment u+2 using Fig. 6, and when x mod4 is 3, code element #x is to make By the code element during phase place of the moment u+3 of Fig. 6.

Further, in the present embodiment, modulated signal z1 shown in Figure 14 (A) does not changes phase place.

So, in the case of the multicarrier transmission mode using OFDM mode etc., different with during single carrier transmission, have Can be along the feature of frequency axis direction arrangement code element.And, the aligning method of code element is not limited to the aligning method of Figure 14.For it His example, uses Figure 15, Figure 16 to illustrate.

Figure 15 represents in sequence portion 1301A, 1301B of the transverse axis frequency different with Figure 14, the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis One example of the sort method of code element, Figure 15 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 15 (B) represents modulation letter The sort method of the code element of number z2.The difference of Figure 15 (A) (B) and Figure 14 is, the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1 Different from the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z2, in Figure 15 (B), code element #0～#5 are configured at carrier wave 4～carrier wave 9 In, code element #6～#9 are configured in carrier wave 0～3, subsequently, with same rule, code element #10～#19 are configured at each carrier wave In.Now, identical with Figure 14 (B), when the code element group 1502 shown in Figure 15 (B) is to use the phase place variation shown in Fig. 61 The code element of periodic quantity.

Figure 16 represents in sequence portion 1301A, 1301B of the transverse axis frequency different with Figure 14, the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis One example of the sort method of code element, Figure 16 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 16 (B) represents modulation letter The sort method of the code element of number z2.The difference of Figure 16 (A) (B) and Figure 14 is, in fig. 14, is configured to code element successively carry In ripple, and in figure 16, code element is not configured in carrier wave successively.Certainly, in figure 16, it is also possible in the same manner as Figure 15, make The sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1 is different with the sort method of modulated signal z2.

Figure 17 represents the transverse axis frequency different with Figure 14～16, sequence portion 1301A, 1301B of the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis In the example of sort method of code element, Figure 17 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 17 (B) represents tune The sort method of the code element of signal z2 processed.In Figure 14～16, code element is arranged along frequency axis direction, and profit in fig. 17 Code element is configured with the both sides of frequency, time shaft.

In figure 6, illustrate the example during change by 4 time slots switching phase places, and here, to switch by 8 time slots Illustrate as a example by situation.The code element of 1 periodic quantity when the code element group 1702 shown in Figure 17 is to use phase place variation is (therefore It is 8 code elements), code element #0 is the code element during phase place using moment u, and code element #1 is the code element during phase place using moment u+1, code Unit #2 is the code element during phase place using moment u+2, and code element #3 is the code element during phase place using moment u+3, and code element #4 is to make By the code element during phase place of moment u+4, code element #5 is the code element during phase place using moment u+5, and code element #6 is to use moment u+6 Phase place time code element, code element #7 be use moment u+7 phase place time code element.Therefore, in code element #x, when x mod8 is 0, Code element #x is the code element during phase place using moment u, and when x mod8 is 1, code element #x is the code during phase place using moment u+1 Unit, when x mod8 is 2, code element #x is the code element during phase place using moment u+2, and when x mod8 is 3, code element #x is to use the moment The code element during phase place of u+3, when x mod8 is 4, code element #x is the code element during phase place using moment u+4, when x mod8 is 5, Code element #x is the code element during phase place using moment u+5, and when x mod8 is 6, code element #x is the code during phase place using moment u+6 Unit, when x mod8 is 7, code element #x is the code element during phase place using moment u+7.In the aligning method of Figure 17 code element, although Use is 4 time slots on time-axis direction, is total 4 × 2=8 time slot of 2 time slots on frequency axis direction, configures for 1 cycle The code element of amount, but now, if the quantity of the code element of a periodic quantity is that (phase place being i.e. multiplied exists m × n kind to m × n code element.), The axial time slot of the frequency (carrier number) used to configure the code element of 1 periodic quantity is n, uses on time-axis direction Time slot is m, preferably m ＞ n.Now, the phase place of ground wave is, the variation of time-axis direction variation axial with frequency is compared More relax.Therefore, in order to reduce the impact of constant ground wave, and carry out the change of the regular phase of present embodiment, because of And wish to reduce the variation of ground wave within the cycle carrying out phase place change.It is therefore preferable that be m ＞ n.If it addition, in view of upper The problem in face, compared with only in frequency axis direction or the code element that the most temporally sorts on direction of principal axis, as Figure 17, utilizes frequency The both sides of axle and time shaft are ranked up, and the probability that ground wave becomes constant is higher, it is easy to obtain the effect of the present invention.But It is that if arranging along frequency axis direction, then the variation of frequency axis is more violent, may obtain diversity gain, hence with The method that the both sides of frequency axis and time shaft are ranked up is not necessarily optimal method.

Figure 18 represents in sequence portion 1301A, 1301B of the transverse axis frequency different with Figure 17, the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis One example of the sort method of code element, Figure 18 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 18 (B) represents modulation letter The sort method of the code element of number z2.Figure 18 and Figure 17 is same, utilize frequency, time shaft both sides to configure code element, but and figure The difference of 17 is, in fig. 17, makes frequency direction preferential, then along time-axis direction configuration code element, in contrast, In Figure 18, make time-axis direction preferential, then configure code element along time-axis direction.In figure 18, code element group 1802 is to use phase The code element of 1 periodic quantity during the variation of position.

Further, at Figure 17, Tu18Zhong, and Figure 15 is same, is configured to symbol arranging method and the modulation letter of modulated signal z1 The symbol arranging method difference of number z2 also is able to similarly implement, further, it is possible to obtain can obtain higher receiving quality this The effect of sample.It addition, at Figure 17, Tu18Zhong, even if configuring code element as Figure 16 the most successively, it is also possible to similarly implement, and And, it is possible to obtain and can obtain the such effect of higher receiving quality.

Figure 22 represent with above-mentioned different transverse axis frequency, the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis sequence portion 1301A, 130B in code One example of the sort method of unit.Consider that 4 time slots as moment u～u+3 of use Fig. 6 change the situation of phase place regularly. Characteristic point is in fig. 22, although be arranged in order code element along frequency axis direction, but when entering into time-axis direction, makes to follow Ring carries out n(n=1 in the example of Figure 22) symbol cyclic displacement.Shown in frequency axial code element group 2210 in fig. 22 4 code elements in, perform Fig. 6 moment u～u+3 phase place change.

Now, in the code element of #0, carry out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u, carry out using moment u+1 in #1 Phase place phase place change, carry out in #2 use moment u+2 phase place phase place change, carry out in #3 use moment u+3 Phase place phase place change.

For code element group 2220 axial for frequency similarly, in the code element of #4, carry out using the phase of moment u The phase place change of position, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+1 in #5, carries out using the phase of moment u+2 in #6 The phase place change of position, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+3 in #7.

In the code element of time $ 1, although carried out the change of above-mentioned phase place, but on time-axis direction, carry out Cyclic shift, so for code element group 2201,2202,2203,2204, the following change performing phase place.

For the code element group 2201 of time-axis direction, in the code element of #0, carry out using the phase place of the phase place of moment u Change, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+1 in #9, carries out using the phase place of the phase place of moment u+2 in #18 Change, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+3 in #27.

For the code element group 2202 of time-axis direction, in the code element of #28, carry out using the phase place of the phase place of moment u Change, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+1 in #1, carries out using the phase place of the phase place of moment u+2 in #10 Change, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+3 in #19.

For the code element group 2203 of time-axis direction, in the code element of #20, carry out using the phase place of the phase place of moment u Change, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+1 in #29, carries out using the phase place of the phase place of moment u+2 in #2 Change, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+3 in #11.

For the code element group 2204 of time-axis direction, in the code element of #12, carry out using the phase place of the phase place of moment u Change, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+1 in #21, carries out using the phase of the phase place of moment u+2 in #30 Position change, carries out using the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+3 in #3.

Feature in Figure 22 is, such as when being conceived to the code element of #11, and the code of axial two neighbours of frequency of synchronization Unit (#10 with #12) all use the phase place different with #11 to carry out the change of phase place, and time of the same carrier wave of #11 code element The code element (#2 with #20) of direction of principal axis two neighbour all uses the phase place different with #11 to carry out the change of phase place.And, this does not limit In the code element of #11, on frequency axis direction and time-axis direction, all have and #11 in both sides exists whole code elements of code element The identical feature of code element.Thus, effectively change phase place, be not easily susceptible to the ground wave impact on stability state, therefore data The improved probability of receiving quality increase.

In fig. 22, it is illustrated as n=1, but be not restricted to that this, also be able to similarly implement as n=3. It addition, in fig. 22, arranging code element along frequency axis, and when the time is advanced axially relative, suitable owing to having the configuration to code element Sequence is circulated the feature of displacement, it is achieved that features described above, but configure also by random (can also be regularly) Code element realizes the method for features described above.

(embodiment 2)

In above-mentioned embodiment 1, change (after the fixing pre-coding matrix precoding) letter after weighting synthesis Number z(t) phase place.Here, the various realities of the open phase place variation being obtained in that the effect identical with above-mentioned embodiment 1 Execute mode.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in Figure 3 and Figure 6, phase place changing unit 317B it is configured to only to from weighting synthesis The output of one side in portion 600 performs the change of phase place.

But, as the timing performing phase place change, it is also possible to held before being carried out precoding by weighting combining unit 600 OK, and dispensing device can also replace the structure shown in Fig. 6, and as shown in figure 25, phase place changing unit 317B be arranged at and add The front portion of power combining unit 600.

In this case, it is also possible to be, the phase place changing unit 317B base band to the mapping according to selected modulation system Signal s2(t) change of executing rule phase place, export s2'(t)=s2(t) y(t) (wherein, y(t) change along with t), weighting is closed One-tenth portion 600 is to s2'(t) perform precoding, export z2(t) (=W2s2'(t)) (seeing formula (42)) send.

It addition, the change of phase place can also be to two modulated signals s1(t), s2(t) both sides perform, and dispensing device The structure shown in Fig. 6 can also be replaced, and as shown in figure 26, use the output of the both sides to weighting combining unit 600 that phase place is set The structure of changing unit.

Phase place changing unit 317A and phase place changing unit 317B similarly, change the phase place of the signal inputted regularly, become More from weighting combining unit precoding after signal z1'(t) phase place, will change phase place after signal z1(t) output give send out Send portion.

But, the degree of the phase place of the mutually change phase place of phase place changing unit 317A and phase place changing unit 317B is identical In timing, perform the change of the phase place shown in Figure 26.(wherein, here is an example, and the variation of phase place is not limited to this.) time Phase place changing unit 317A carving u, Figure 26 performs the change of phase place, to become z1(t)=y₁(t) z1'(t), and, phase place changes Portion 317B performs the change of phase place, to become z2(t)=y₂(t) z2'(t).Such as, as shown in figure 26, at moment u, y₁(u)= e^j0、y₂(u)=e^-jπ/2, at moment u+1, y₁(u+1)=e^jπ/4、y₂(u+1)=e^-j3π/4, at moment u+k, y₁(u+k) =e^jkπ/4、y₂(u+k)=e^{J(-k π/4-pi/2)}, so perform the change of phase place.Further, the cycle changing phase place regularly is the most permissible In phase place changing unit 317A with phase place changing unit 317B identical, it is also possible to be the different cycles.

It addition, as it has been described above, the timing of change phase place can also send dress before being performed precoding by weighting combining unit Put and can also replace the structure shown in Figure 26, and use the structure shown in Figure 27.

When changing the phase place of two modulated signals regularly, in each sends signal, such as the information of control Comprise the information of respective phase place change pattern, receive device and can grasp dispensing device institute by obtaining this control information The phase place variation, the i.e. phase place that switch regularly change pattern, thereby, it is possible to perform correct demodulation (detection).

It follows that the variation of the structure for Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 28, Figure 29 is used to illustrate.Figure 28 and Fig. 6 is not With part be, exist with the phase place change relevant information 2800 of ON/OFF and phase place is changed to z1'(t), z2'(t) certain One (by synchronization or same frequency, to z1'(t), z2'(t) some implementing phase change.).Therefore, to z1' (t), z2'(t) some perform phase place change, so phase place changing unit 317A of Figure 28, phase place changing unit 317B exist hold Line phase changes the situation of (ON) and does not perform the situation of phase place change (OFF).Should control information relevant with ON/OFF be with The information 2800 that phase place change ON/OFF is relevant.Information 2800 that should be relevant with phase place change ON/OFF is from the signal shown in Fig. 3 Processing method information generation unit 314 exports.

Phase place changing unit 317A of Figure 28 is to become z1(t)=y₁(t) z1'(t) mode perform the change of phase place, and And, phase place changing unit 317B is to become z2(t)=y₂(t) z2'(t) mode perform the change of phase place.

Now, such as z1'(t) carry out phase place change by the cycle 4.(now, z2'(t) does not carry out phase place change.) therefore, At moment u, y₁(u)=e^j0、y₂U ()=1, at moment u+1, y₁(u+1)=e^jπ/2、y₂(u+1)=1, at moment u+2, y₁(u+2) =e^jπ、y₂(u+2)=1, at moment u+3, y₁(u+3)=e^j3π/2、y₂(u+3)=1.

It follows that such as z2'(t) carry out phase place change by the cycle 4.(now, z1'(t) does not carry out phase place change.) because of This, at moment u+4, y₁(u+4)=1, y₂(u+4)=e^j0, at moment u+5, y₁(u+5)=1, y₂(u+5)=e^jπ/2, at moment u + 6, y₁(u+6)=1, y₂(u+6)=e^jπ, at moment u+7, y₁(u+7)=1, y₂(u+7)=e^j3π/2。

Therefore, in above-mentioned example,

During moment 8k, y₁(8k)=e^j0、y₂(8k)=1,

During moment 8k+1, y₁(8k+1)=e^jπ/2、y₂(8k+1)=1,

During moment 8k+2, y₁(8k+2)=e^jπ、y₂(8k+2)=1,

During moment 8k+3, y₁(8k+3)=e^j3π/2、y₂(8k+3)=1,

During moment 8k+4, y₁(8k+4)=1, y₂(8k+4)=e^j0,

During moment 8k+5, y₁(8k+5)=1, y₂(8k+5)=e^jπ/2,

During moment 8k+6, y₁(8k+6)=1, y₂(8k+6)=e^jπ,

During moment 8k+7, y₁(8k+7)=1, y₂(8k+7)=e^j3π/2

As it has been described above, there is only z1'(t) change the time of phase place and only z2'(t) change phase place time.It addition, pass through Only z1'(t) change the time of phase place and only z2'(t) change phase place time, constitute phase place change cycle.It addition, above-mentioned In the case of, make only z1'(t) carry out phase place change time cycle and only z2'(t) carry out phase place change time cycle identical, but It is not limited to this, only z1'(t) carry out cycle when phase place changes and only z2'(t) carrying out cycle when phase place changes can not also With.It addition, in above-mentioned example, illustrate by z1'(t) carry out z2'(t after phase place change by 4 cycles) by 4 cycles Carry out phase place change, but be not restricted to that this, z1'(t) phase place change and z2'(t) the order of phase place change be arbitrary (for example, it is also possible to alternately z1'(t) phase place change and z2'(t) phase place change, it is also possible to be based on certain rule Sequentially, and sequentially can also be random.)

Phase place changing unit 317A of Figure 29 is to become s1'(t)=y₁(t) s1(t) mode carry out the change of phase place, and And, phase place changing unit 317B is to become s2'(t)=y₂(t) s2(t) mode carry out the change of phase place.

Now, such as s1(t) carry out phase place change by the cycle 4.(now, s2(t) does not carry out phase place change.) therefore, Moment u, y₁(u)=e^j0、y₂U ()=1, at moment u+1, y₁(u+1)=e^jπ/2、y₂(u+1)=1, at moment u+2, y₁(u+2)= e^jπ、y₂(u+2)=1, at moment u+3, y₁(u+3)=e^j3π/2、y₂(u+3)=1.

It follows that such as s2(t) carry out phase place change by the cycle 4.(now, s1(t) does not carry out phase place change.) therefore, At moment u+4, y₁(u+4)=1, y₂(u+4)=e^j0, at moment u+5, y₁(u+5)=1, y₂(u+5)=e^jπ/2, at moment u+6, y₁(u+6)=1, y₂(u+6)=e^jπ, at moment u+7, y₁(u+7)=1, y₂(u+7)=e^j3π/2。

Therefore, in above-mentioned example

During moment 8k, y₁(8k)=e^j0、y₂(8k)=1,

During moment 8k+1, y₁(8k+1)=e^jπ/2、y₂(8k+1)=1,

During moment 8k+2, y₁(8k+2)=e^jπ、y₂(8k+2)=1,

During moment 8k+3, y₁(8k+3)=e^j3π/2、y₂(8k+3)=1,

During moment 8k+4, y₁(8k+4)=1, y₂(8k+4)=e^j0,

During moment 8k+5, y₁(8k+5)=1, y₂(8k+5)=e^jπ/2,

During moment 8k+6, y₁(8k+6)=1, y₂(8k+6)=e^jπ,

During moment 8k+7, y₁(8k+7)=1, y₂(8k+7)=e^j3π/2

As it has been described above, there is only s1(t) change the time of phase place and only s2(t) change phase place time.It addition, by only S1(t) change the time of phase place and only s2(t) change phase place time, constitute phase place change cycle.It addition, in above-mentioned situation Under, make only s1(t) carry out phase place change time cycle and only s2(t) carry out phase place change time cycle identical, but do not limit In this, only s1(t) carry out phase place change time cycle and only s2(t) carry out phase place change time cycle can also difference.It addition, At above-mentioned example, illustrate by s1(t) carry out phase place change by 4 cycles after by s2(t) carry out phase place change by 4 cycles More, but be not restricted to that this, s1(t) phase place change and s2(t) the order of phase place change be arbitrary (for example, it is also possible to Alternately s1(t) phase place change and s2(t) phase place change, it is also possible to be based on the order of certain rule, and order Can also be random.)

Thereby, it is possible to make reception device side receive send signal z1(t) and z2(t) time respective reception state become Impartial, and by the signal z1(t received) and z2(t) periodically switching phase place in respective code element, it is possible to increase Error correcting capability after error correction decoding, it is thus possible to improve the receiving quality under LOS environment.

Above, the structure shown in embodiment 2 is used also to be able to obtain the effect identical with above-mentioned embodiment 1.

In the present embodiment, illustrate the example of carrier way, namely time shaft is carried out the feelings of phase place change Condition, but be not restricted to that this, also is able to similarly implement in the case of carrying out multi-carrier transmission.It is thus possible, for instance expand using Frequently communication mode, OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) mode, SC-FDMA (Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access), SC-OFDM(Single Carrier Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) wavelet shown in mode and non-patent literature 7 etc. In the case of OFDM mode etc., it is also possible to similarly implement.As it was previously stated, in the present embodiment, as carrying out phase place change Explanation, illustrate that temporally t direction of principal axis carries out the situation of phase place change, but and embodiment 1 similarly, along frequency axis side To carrying out phase place change, say, that in the present embodiment, t is replaced into f by the explanation of the phase place change on t direction (f: frequency ((sub) carrier wave)), thus the phase place that the phase place variation illustrated in present embodiment is applied to frequency direction becomes More.It addition, the explanation of the phase place variation of present embodiment and embodiment 1 is same, in the phase place to T/F direction Change also is able to application.

Therefore, in Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26 and Figure 27, represent that temporally direction of principal axis performs the situation that phase place changes, and at figure 6, in Figure 25, Figure 26 and Figure 27, be equivalent to by time t is replaced into carrier wave f, carry out the phase place change in frequency direction, And be equivalent to, by time t is replaced into time t, frequency f, namely (t) be replaced into (t, f), carry out temporally frequency Block carries out phase place change.

And, in the present embodiment, the code element beyond data symbols, such as pilot frequency code element (introduction, unique word etc.) and The code element etc. of control information transmission can at random be configured in frame.

(embodiment 3)

In above-mentioned embodiment 1 and 2, change phase place regularly.In present embodiment 3, the method being disclosed directly below: From the point of view of dispensing device, in being scattered in reception device everywhere, no matter receiving where device is arranged in, each device that receives all obtains Obtain data receiver quality well.

In present embodiment 3, illustrate to change the code element configuration of phase place and the signal that obtains.

Figure 31 represents, in the transmission mode changing phase place regularly, use OFDM mode multi-carrier mode time time One example of the frame structure of a part of code element of the signal on m-frequency axis.

First, illustrate a baseband signal among the baseband signal after 2 precodings of explanation in embodiment 1 (seeing Fig. 6) carries out example during phase place change.

(also, represent the situation performing phase place change along time-axis direction in figure 6, in figure 6, be equivalent to by inciting somebody to action Time t is replaced into carrier wave f, carry out in frequency direction phase place change, and be equivalent to by time t is replaced into time t, Frequency f, is namely replaced into (t) (t, f), and the block carrying out temporally frequency performs phase place change.)

Figure 31 is denoted as input, the modulated signal z2' frame structure of phase place changing unit 317B shown in Figure 12,1 Square expression code element (wherein, usually contain the signal of s1 and s2 both sides owing to implementing precoding, but according to pre-coding matrix Structure different, a signal of the most only s1 and s2.).

Here, the code element 3100 of the carrier wave 2 of Figure 31, moment $ 2 it is conceived to.Also have, although describing at this is carrier wave, but The most sometimes address is subcarrier.

In carrier wave 2, the code element 3103 of the code element the most adjacent with moment $ 2, namely the moment $ 1 of carrier wave 2 With the respective channel status of the code element 3101 of moment $ 3, compare with the channel status of the code element 3100 of the moment $ 2 of carrier wave 2, phase Closing property is the highest.

Similarly, at moment $ 2, the code element of frequency the most adjacent with carrier wave 2 on frequency axis direction, namely carrier wave 1 The channel status of the code element 3104 of the code element 3104 of moment $ 2 and the carrier wave 3 of moment $ 2, and the code element 3100 of the moment $ 2 of carrier wave 2 Channel status compare, dependency is the highest.

As it has been described above, the channel status of the respective channel status of code element 3101,3102,3103 and 3104 and code element 3100 Dependency is the highest.

In this manual, in the sending method changing phase place regularly, as the phase place being multiplied, prepare N kind phase Position (wherein, N is the integer of more than 2).In the code element shown in Figure 31, such as, append " e^j0" such description, it means that, Signal z2' in Fig. 6 in this code element is multiplied by " e^j0" and change phase place.It is to say, describe in each code element of Figure 31 Value becomes the y(t in formula (42)) and embodiment 2 in explanation z2(t)=y₂(t) z2'(t) in y₂The value of (t).

In the present embodiment, be disclosed directly below content: utilize this by the code element adjoined each other on frequency axis direction and/or The situation that the dependency of the channel status of the code element adjoined each other on time-axis direction is higher, is receiving device side, it is thus achieved that relatively The code element configuration of the code element after the change phase place of high data receiver quality.

As the condition obtaining higher data receiver quality in this reception side, it is considered to ＜ condition #1 ＞, ＜ condition #2 ＞.

＜ condition #1 ＞

As Fig. 6, in the sending method that baseband signal z2' after precoding is changed regularly phase place, use In the case of multicarrier transmission mode as OFDM, time X carrier wave Y is code element (the hereinafter referred to as data of data transmission Code element), code element adjacent on time-axis direction, namely time X-1 carrier wave Y and time X+1 carrier wave Y is numeric data code Unit, baseband signal z2' after the precoding corresponding with these 3 data symbols, namely time X carrier wave Y, time X-1 In baseband signal z2' after each precoding in carrier wave Y and time X+1 carrier wave Y, it is carried out different phase place changes.

＜ condition #2 ＞

As Fig. 6, in the sending method that baseband signal z2' after precoding is changed regularly phase place, use In the case of that multicarrier transmission mode of OFDM, time X carrier wave Y is code element (the hereinafter referred to as data of data transmission Code element), and the code element, i.e. time X carrier wave Y-1 and the time X carrier wave Y+1 that are adjacent on frequency axis direction be data In the case of code element, baseband signal z2' after the precoding corresponding with these 3 data symbols, i.e. time X carrier wave Y, time In baseband signal z2' after each precoding in X carrier wave Y-1 and time X carrier wave Y+1, it is carried out different phase places and becomes More.

And, there is the data symbols meeting ＜ condition #1 ＞.Similarly there are the numeric data code meeting ＜ condition #2 ＞ Unit.

The reason deriving this ＜ condition #1 ＞ ＜ condition #2 ＞ is as follows.

Certain code element (hereinafter referred to as code element A) is there is in sending signal, each with the code element that this code element A adjoins in time From channel status as it has been described above, and dependency between the channel status of code element A higher.

Therefore, if 3 adjacent in time code elements use different phase places, even if then code element A is very under LOS environment (although having obtained higher receiving quality as SNR, but the phase relation being because ground wave is very poor to the receiving quality of difference Situation, so being the poor state of receiving quality), in remaining 2 code elements adjacent with code element A, it is possible to obtain good connecing The probability receiving quality is the highest, and its result is, is obtained in that good receiving quality after error correction decoding.

Similarly, in sending signal, there is certain code element (hereinafter referred to as code element A), adjoin in frequency with this code element A The respective channel status of code element as it has been described above, and dependency between the channel status of code element A higher.

Therefore, if 3 code elements adjacent in frequency use different phase places, although then code element A is very under LOS environment (although having obtained higher receiving quality as SNR, but the phase relation being because ground wave is very poor to the receiving quality of difference Situation, so being the poor state of receiving quality), in remaining 2 code elements adjacent with code element A, it is possible to obtain good connecing The probability receiving quality is the highest, and its result is, is obtained in that good receiving quality after error correction decoding.

If it addition, ＜ condition #1 ＞ and ＜ condition #2 ＞ is combined, then in receiving device, it is possible to improve data further Receiving quality.Therefore, it is possible to derive following ＜ condition #3 ＞.

＜ condition #3 ＞

As Fig. 6, in the sending method that baseband signal z2' after precoding is changed regularly phase place, use In the case of multicarrier transmission mode as OFDM, time X carrier wave Y is that the code element of data transmission (is called below for number According to code element), and the code element, i.e. time X-1 carrier wave Y and the time X+1 carrier wave Y that are adjacent on time-axis direction be several According to code element, and the code element, i.e. time X carrier wave Y-1 and the time X carrier wave Y+1 that are adjacent on frequency axis direction are several In the case of code element, baseband signal z2' after the precoding corresponding with these 5 data symbols, i.e. time X carrier wave Y, time Between after each precoding in X-1 carrier wave Y, time X+1 carrier wave Y, time X carrier wave Y-1 and time X carrier wave Y+1 In baseband signal z2', it is carried out different phase place changes.

Here, " different phase place changes " are supplemented.Phase place change defines in 0 radian to 2 π radians.Such as, false Being located in time X carrier wave Y, the phase place implementing baseband signal z2' after the precoding of Fig. 6 is changed to e^{J θ X, Y}, at time X- In 1 carrier wave Y, the phase place implementing baseband signal z2' after the precoding of Fig. 6 is changed to e^{J θ X-1, Y}, at time X+1 carrier wave In Y, the phase place implementing baseband signal z2' after the precoding of Fig. 6 is changed to e^{J θ X+1, Y}, then 0 radian θ_{X, Y}＜ 2 π, 0 radian ≦θ_{X-1, Y}＜ 2 π, 0 radian θ_{X+1, Y}＜ 2 π.Therefore, in ＜ condition #1 ＞, θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X-1, Y}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X+1, Y}And θ_{X+1, Y}≠ θ_{X-1, Y}Set up.If similarly considering, in ＜ condition #2 ＞, θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X, Y-1}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X, Y+1}And θ_{X, Y-1}≠θ_{X-1, Y+1}Set up, In ＜ condition #3 ＞, θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X-1, Y}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X+1, Y}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X, Y-1}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X, Y+1}And θ_{X-1, Y}≠θ_{X+1, Y}And θ_{X-1, Y} ≠θ_{X, Y-1}And θ_{X-1, Y}≠θ_{X, Y+1}And θ_{X+1, Y}≠θ_{X, Y-1}And θ_{X+1, Y}≠θ_{X, Y+1}And θ_{X, Y-1}≠θ_{X, Y+1}Set up.

And, there is the data symbols meeting ＜ condition #3 ＞.

Figure 31 is the example of ＜ condition #3 ＞, and it arranges as follows: after Fig. 6 precoding corresponding with code element 3100 The phase place, corresponding with 3103 to baseband signal z2' after Fig. 6 precoding corresponding with code element 3101 that is multiplied of baseband signal z2' Fig. 6 precoding after the phase place that is multiplied of baseband signal z2' and to Fig. 6 corresponding with code element 3102 adjacent in frequency The phase place that baseband signal z2' after Fig. 6 precoding that baseband signal z2' after precoding is corresponding with 3104 is multiplied is mutually different, Above-mentioned code element 3100 is corresponding to code element A, and above-mentioned code element 3101 adjoins in time with code element 3100；Therefore, although receiving side The receiving quality of code element 3100 may be very poor, but the receiving quality of its adjacent code element becomes the highest, it is possible to guarantee Higher receiving quality after error correction decoding.

Figure 32 represents the configuration example of the code element changing phase place according to this condition and obtain.

As can be seen from Figure 32, in arbitrary data symbols, for double at frequency axis direction and time-axis direction of its phase place The degree of the phase place that the code element adjoined each other in side is changed becomes mutually different phase place amount of change.By so constituting, energy Enough error correcting capabilities improved further in reception device.

It is to say, in Figure 32, in the case of there is data symbols in code element adjacent on time-axis direction, ＜ bar Part #1 ＞ sets up in whole X, whole Y.

Equally, in Figure 32, in the case of there is data symbols in code element adjacent in a frequency direction, ＜ condition #2 ＞ Whole X, whole Y set up.

Similarly, in Figure 32, there is data symbols in code element adjacent in a frequency direction, and on time-axis direction In the case of there is data symbols in adjacent code element, ＜ condition #3 ＞ sets up in whole X, whole Y.

Below, by embodiment 2 explanation, the baseband signal after 2 precodings is carried out phase place change time (see Example Figure 26) illustrates.

As Figure 26, in the both sides' imparting to baseband signal z1' after precoding and baseband signal z2' after precoding In the case of phase place change, phase place variation has several method.Describe this point in detail.

As method 1, the phase place of baseband signal z2' after precoding changes as it was previously stated, carry out phase place as shown in Figure 32 Change.In Figure 32, the phase place change of baseband signal z2' after precoding is set to the cycle 10.But, as it was previously stated, in order to full Foot ＜ condition #1 ＞ ＜ condition #2 ＞ ＜ condition #3 ＞, in (sub) carrier wave 1, changes over time and believes the base band after precoding The phase place change that number z2' implements.(in Figure 32, implement this change, but the cycle 10 can also be set to, and use other Phase place variation) and, the phase place of baseband signal z1' after precoding changes as shown in Figure 33, the base band letter after precoding The phase place of number z2' is changed to, and the value of the phase place change of 1 periodic quantity in cycle 10 is certain.In fig. 33, (precoding is being comprised After the phase place change of baseband signal z2') 1 periodic quantity is at interior moment $ 1, the phase place of baseband signal z1' after precoding becomes Value more is e^j0, comprising the moment $ 2 of ensuing (the phase place change of baseband signal z2' after precoding) 1 periodic quantity, The value of the phase place change of baseband signal z1' after precoding is e^jπ/9,.

Further, in the code element shown in Figure 33, such as, " e is appended^j0" such description, it means that, in this code element Signal z1' in Figure 26, is multiplied by " ej⁰" and change phase place.It is to say, the value described in each code element of Figure 33 becomes real Execute z1(t illustrated in mode 2)=y₁(t) z1'(t) in y₁The value of (t).

The phase place of baseband signal z1' after precoding changes as shown in Figure 33, the phase place of baseband signal z2' after precoding Being changed to, the value of the phase place change of 1 periodic quantity in cycle 10 is set to necessarily, carries out value and the numbering of 1 periodic quantity of phase place change Change together.(as it has been described above, in fig. 33, e is set to for the 1st 1 periodic quantity^j0, e is set to for the 2nd 1 periodic quantity^{j π/9},.)

Consisting of above-mentioned, the phase place of baseband signal z2' after precoding is changed to the cycle 10, and is obtained in that Following effect: the phase place considering baseband signal z2' after the phase place change of baseband signal z1' after precoding and precoding becomes Cycle during both sides more can be more than 10.Therefore, it is possible to improve the data receiver quality receiving device.

As method 2, the phase place of baseband signal z2' after precoding changes as it was previously stated, perform phase place as shown in Figure 32 Change.In Figure 32, the phase place change of baseband signal z2' after precoding is set to the cycle 10.But, as it was previously stated, in order to full Foot ＜ condition #1 ＞ ＜ condition #2 ＞ ＜ condition #3 ＞, in (sub) carrier wave 1, changes over time to the base band after precoding The phase place change that signal z2' implements.(in Figure 32, implement this change, but the cycle 10 can also be set to, and use not Phase place variation) and, the phase place of baseband signal z1' after precoding changes as shown in figure 30, the base band after precoding The phase place change of signal z2' carries out the phase place change in the cycle 3 different with the cycle 10.

Further, in the code element shown in Figure 30, such as, " e is appended^j0" such description, it means that, in this code element Figure 26 in signal z1' be multiplied by " e^j0" and change phase place.It is to say, the value described in each code element of Figure 30 becomes real Execute z1(t illustrated in mode 2)=y₁(t) z1'(t) in y₁The value of (t).

By constructed as described above, the phase place change of baseband signal z2' after precoding is the cycle 10, and is obtained in that as follows Effect: consider baseband signal z1' after precoding phase place change and precoding after baseband signal z2' phase place change Both sides time cycle be 30, it is contemplated that the baseband signal after the change of the phase place of baseband signal z1' after precoding and precoding The cycle during both sides that the phase place of z2' changes is more than 10.Therefore, it is possible to improve the data receiver quality receiving device.As side One effective ways of method 2, are being set to N, after precoding by the cycle that the phase place of baseband signal z1' after precoding changes When the cycle of the phase place change of baseband signal z2' is set to M, if particularly N and M is the relation of prime number each other, then have the most excellent Point: the phase place in view of baseband signal z1' after precoding changes and phase place change double of baseband signal z2' after precoding Cycle during side can be easily set to the advantage in N × M such bigger cycle, even if N and M is the pass of prime number each other System, it is also possible to increase the cycle.

Further, the phase place variation of present embodiment 3 is an example, however it is not limited to this, such as embodiment 1, embodiment party As illustrated by formula 2, no matter carry out phase place change by frequency axis direction, or temporally direction of principal axis carries out phase place change, or Person temporally-block of frequency performs phase place change, the most similarly have to improve and receive the receiving quality of data in device Effect.

In addition to frame structure stated above, it is also conceivable to insert pilot frequency code element (SP between data symbols (Scattered Pilot)) or the code element etc. of transmission control information.Describe phase place change in this case in detail.

Figure 47 represents, modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1' and the modulated signal (base after precoding Band signal) z2' T/F axle on frame structure, Figure 47 (a) be modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or Frame structure on the T/F axle of z1', Figure 47 (b) is the time m-frequency of modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2' Frame structure on rate axle.In Figure 47,4701 represent pilot frequency code element, and 4702 represent data symbols, and data symbols 4702 is to implement Code element after precoding or precoding and phase place change.

Figure 47, as Fig. 6, represents that code element configuration when baseband signal z2' after precoding carries out phase place change is (right Baseband signal z1 after precoding does not carry out phase place change).(also, figure 6 illustrates temporally direction of principal axis and carry out phase place change Situation more, but in figure 6, the phase place being equivalent to carry out in frequency direction by time t is replaced into carrier wave f changes, And be equivalent to by time t is replaced into time t, frequency f, say, that (t) is replaced into (t, f), carrys out temporally frequency Block perform phase place change.) therefore, describe the numeric representation phase in the code element of baseband signal z2' after the precoding of Figure 47 The change value of position.Further, baseband signal z1'(z1 after the precoding of Figure 47) code element owing to not carrying out phase place change, thus Do not describe numerical value.

In Figure 47, important point is, for baseband signal z2' after precoding phase place change be to data symbols, also The code element having been carried out precoding is implemented.(describing here is code element, but in code element described herein, because Have been carried out precoding, so containing the code element of s1 and the both sides of the code element of s2.) therefore, to the pilot frequency code element inserted in z2' Not implementing phase change.

Figure 48 represents modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1' and the modulated signal (base after precoding Band signal) z2' T/F axle on frame structure, Figure 48 (a) be modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or Frame structure on the T/F axle of z1', Figure 48 (b) is the time m-frequency of modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2' Frame structure on rate axle.In Figure 48,4701 represent pilot frequency code element, and 4702 represent data symbols, and data symbols 4702 is to implement Precoding and the code element of phase place change.

Figure 48, as Figure 26, represents and carries out baseband signal z1' after precoding and baseband signal z2' after precoding Code element configuration during phase place change.(also, although figure 26 illustrates temporally direction of principal axis and carry out the situation of phase place change, But in fig. 26, the phase place being equivalent to carry out in frequency direction by time t is replaced into carrier wave f changes, and quite In by time t is replaced into time t, frequency f, namely (t) being replaced into (t, f), the block carrying out temporally frequency carries out phase Position change.) thus, describe in the code element of baseband signal z1' after the precoding of Figure 48 and baseband signal z2' after precoding The change value of numeric representation phase place.

In Figure 48, important point is, changing for the phase place of baseband signal z1' after precoding is to data symbols, i.e. Have been carried out the code element enforcement of precoding, and, the phase place change for baseband signal z2' after precoding is to data Code element, i.e. have been carried out precoding code element implement.(describing here is code element, but in code element described herein, because of For having been carried out precoding, so containing the code element of s1 and the both sides of the code element of s2.) therefore, to the pilot tone inserted in z1' Code element not implementing phase changes, and, the pilot frequency code element being inserted into z2' not implementing phase changes.

Figure 49 represents modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1' and the modulated signal (base after precoding Band signal) z2' T/F axle on frame structure, Figure 49 (a) be modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or Frame structure on the T/F axle of z1', Figure 49 (b) is the time m-frequency of modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2' Frame structure on rate axle.In Figure 49,4701 is pilot frequency code element, and 4702 is data symbols, and 4901 is zero symbol, and base band letter Number same phase constituent I=0, orthogonal component Q=0.Now, data symbols 4702 is to implement precoding or precoding and phase place Code element after change.The constructive method not being all code element beyond data symbols of Figure 49 and Figure 47, and in modulated signal z1' In insert on time and the carrier wave of pilot frequency code element, modulated signal z2' becomes zero symbol (null symbol), on the contrary, in modulation Inserting in signal z2' on time and the carrier wave of pilot frequency code element, modulated signal z1' becomes zero symbol.

Figure 49, as Fig. 6, represents that code element configuration when baseband signal z2' after precoding carries out phase place change is (right Baseband signal z1 after precoding does not carry out phase place change).(also, although figure 6 illustrates temporally direction of principal axis and carry out phase Position change situation, but in figure 6, be equivalent to by time t is replaced into carrier wave f carry out by frequency direction phase place become More, and be equivalent to, by time t is replaced into time t, frequency f, namely (t) be replaced into (t, f), carry out temporally frequency Block carry out phase place change.) therefore, describe the numeric representation phase in the code element of baseband signal z2' after the precoding of Figure 49 The change value of position.Further, baseband signal z1'(z1 after the precoding of Figure 49) code element owing to not carrying out phase place change, thus Do not describe numerical value.

In Figure 49, important point is, changing for the phase place of baseband signal z2' after precoding is to data symbols, i.e. Have been carried out the code element enforcement of precoding.(describing here is code element, but in code element described herein, because Implement precoding, so containing the code element of s1 and the both sides of the code element of s2.) thus, to the pilot frequency code element inserted in z2' not Implementing phase changes.

Figure 50 represents modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1' and the modulated signal (base after precoding Band signal) z2' T/F axle on frame structure, Figure 50 (a) be modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or Frame structure on the T/F axle of z1', Figure 50 (b) is the time m-frequency of modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2' Frame structure on rate axle.In Figure 50,4701 is pilot frequency code element, and 4702 is data symbols, and 4901 is zero symbol, and base band letter Number same phase constituent I=0, orthogonal component Q=0.Now, data symbols 4702 is to implement precoding or precoding and phase place Code element after change.The constructive method not being all code element beyond data symbols of Figure 50 and Figure 48, and in modulated signal z1' In insert on time and the carrier wave of pilot frequency code element, modulated signal z2' becomes zero symbol, on the contrary, inserts in modulated signal z2' On the time of pilot frequency code element and carrier wave, modulated signal z1' becomes zero symbol.

Figure 50, as Figure 26, represents and carries out baseband signal z1' after precoding and baseband signal z2' after precoding Code element configuration during phase place change.(also, represent that temporally direction of principal axis carries out the situation of phase place change in fig. 26, but In Figure 26, be equivalent to carry out changing by the phase place of frequency direction by time t is replaced into carrier wave f, and be equivalent to pass through Time t being replaced into time t, frequency f, namely (t) is replaced into (t, f), the block carrying out temporally frequency performs phase place change More.) therefore, describe the number in the code element of baseband signal z1' after the precoding of Figure 50 and baseband signal z2' after precoding Value represents the change value of phase place.

In Figure 50, important point is, changing for the phase place of baseband signal z1' after precoding is to data symbols, i.e. Have been carried out the code element enforcement of precoding, and, the phase place change for baseband signal z2' after precoding is to data Code element, i.e. have been carried out precoding code element implement.(describing here is code element, but in code element described herein, because of For having been carried out precoding, so containing the code element of s1 and the both sides of the code element of s2.) thus, to the pilot tone inserted in z1' Code element not implementing phase changes, and, the pilot frequency code element inserted in z2' not implementing phase is changed.

Figure 51 represents an example of the structure of the modulated signal of frame structure generating Figure 47, Figure 49 the dispensing device sent, For carrying out the part of action equally with Fig. 4, enclose identical symbol.

In Figure 51, weighting combining unit 308A, 308B and phase place changing unit 317B are only illustrating that frame structure signal 313 is several Action is carried out according to the moment of the timing of code element.

Pilot frequency code element (the doubling as zero symbol to generate) generating unit 5101 of Figure 51 represents it is pilot frequency code element at frame structure signal 313 In the case of (and zero symbol), baseband signal 5102A of output pilot frequency code element and 5102B.

Although not shown in the frame structure of Figure 47 to Figure 50, but not implementing precoding (and do not implement phase using Position rotates) such as from 1 antenna send modulated signal mode (in this case, not from another root antenna transmission signal), Or in the case of the transmission means employing space-time code (particularly space-time block code) sends control information code element, control information Code element generating unit 5104, to control information 5103 and frame structure signal 313 for input, represents it is to control to believe at frame structure signal 313 During breath code element, output controls baseband signal 5102A of information code element, 5102B.

Radio section 310A, 310B of Figure 51 according to as input multiple baseband signals among frame structure signal 313, from Multiple baseband signals select desired baseband signal.Then, implementing ofdm signal and process, output is according to the modulation of frame structure respectively Signal 311A, 311B.

Figure 52 represents an example of the structure of the modulated signal generating Figure 48, Figure 50 frame structure the dispensing device sent, right In similarly carrying out the part of action with Fig. 4, Figure 51, enclose identical symbol.Phase place changing unit 317A that Figure 51 is added Only represent that the moment of the timing being data symbols just carries out action at frame structure signal 313.Other are identical with the action of Figure 51.

Figure 53 is the constructive method of the dispensing device different with Figure 51.Following description difference.Phase place changing unit 317B As Figure 53, with multiple baseband signals for input.Then, in the case of frame structure signal 313 expression is data symbols, phase Baseband signal 316B implementing phase after precoding is changed by position changing unit 317B.Then, represent it is to lead at frame structure signal 313 In the case of frequency code unit (or zero symbol) or control information code element, phase place changing unit 317B stops the action of phase place change, Directly export the baseband signal of each code element.(as explanation, as long as thinking that pressure is carried out and " e^j0" corresponding phase place rotates.)

Selection portion 5301, with multiple baseband signals for input, selects the baseband signal of the code element shown in frame structure signal 313 And export.

Figure 54 is the constructive method of the dispensing device different with Figure 52.Difference is described below.Phase place changing unit 317B As Figure 54, with multiple baseband signals for input.Then, in the case of frame structure signal 313 expression is data symbols, phase Baseband signal 316B implementing phase after precoding is changed by position changing unit 317B.Then, represent it is to lead at frame structure signal 313 In the case of frequency code unit (or zero symbol) or control information code element, phase place changing unit 317B stops the action of phase place change, Directly export the baseband signal of each code element.(as explanation, it is believed that force to carry out and " e^j0" corresponding phase place rotates.)

Similarly, phase place changing unit 5201 is as Figure 54, with multiple baseband signals for input.Then, believe at frame structure In the case of numbers 313 represent and are data symbols, the baseband signal 309A implementing phase after precoding is become by phase place changing unit 5201 More.Then, in the case of frame structure signal 313 expression is pilot frequency code element (or zero symbol) or control information code element, phase Position changing unit 5201 stops the action of phase place change, directly exports the baseband signal output of each code element.(as explanation, it is believed that strong System is carried out and " e^j0" corresponding phase place rotates)

In superincumbent explanation, it is illustrated as a example by pilot frequency code element, control code element and data symbols, but does not limit In this, it is important that as long as using the transmission method different with precoding, such as, employ 1 antenna transmission, the biography of space-time block code The code element that defeated mode etc. are transmitted, does not the most give phase place and changes, in contrast, it is important in the invention that right Phase place change is carried out in the code element carrying out precoding.

Therefore, inventive feature is, is not to carry out phase in the whole code elements in the frame structure on T/F axle Position change, but the signal only having carried out precoding gives phase place change.

(embodiment 4)

In above-mentioned embodiment 1 and 2, disclosure goes out to change the situation of phase place regularly, and in embodiment 3, disclosure goes out Make the situation that the degree of the phase place change of code element that adjoins each other is different.

In present embodiment 4, represent phase place variation use according to dispensing device modulation system, the volume of error correcting code Code check, it is also possible to different.

In following table 1, there is shown the phase place change set according to the various setup parameters set by dispensing device Method one example.

[table 1]

#1 in table 1 means the base of the modulation system set by modulated signal s1(dispensing device of above-mentioned embodiment 1 Band signal s1), #2 means baseband signal s2 of the modulation system set by modulated signal s2(dispensing device).Volume in table 1 The encoding rate set for the modulation system of #1, #2 is shown in the list of code check by error correcting code.The row of the phase place change pattern in table 1 As illustrated by embodiment 1 to embodiment 3, represent to baseband signal z1(z1' after precoding), z2 (z2') the phase place variation implemented, although as A, B, C, D, E, set phase place change pattern, but this is real The information of change of the degree representing change phase place on border, such as, represent shown in above-mentioned formula (46) or formula (47) that Plant change pattern.Further, the example of the change of the phase place in table 1 pattern describes as " ", it means that do not perform phase place and become More.

Further, the combination of the modulation system shown in table 1 or encoding rate is an example, it is also possible to comprise the modulation methods shown in table 1 Modulation system (such as 128QAM or 256QAM etc.) outside formula or encoding rate (such as 7/8 etc.).It addition, such as embodiment 1 institute Showing, s1, s2 can also be set and (also, in the case of table 1, as Fig. 4, be set to implement an error correction by error correcting code respectively The situation of the coding of code.).Alternatively, it is also possible to by mutually different multiple phase places change pattern and identical modulation system and volume Code check sets up association.Dispensing device docking receiving apparatus send represent each phase place change pattern information, receive device by referring to This information and table 1 determine that phase place changes pattern, perform demodulation and decoding.Further, in phase place change pattern relative to modulation methods In the case of formula and error correcting system uniquely determine, as long as the information of modulation system and error correcting system is sent to receive by dispensing device Device, receives device and just can identify that by obtaining its information phase place changes pattern, thus in this case, phase place changes mould The information of formula is not necessarily required to.

In embodiment 1 to embodiment 3, illustrate the baseband signal after precoding is carried out the feelings of phase place change Condition, but it is not only phase place, it is also possible to similarly change amplitude with periods rules with phase place change.Therefore, in this table 1, also Can be corresponding with the amplitude of the amplitude changing modulated signal regularly change Model Establishment.In this case, in dispensing device, As long as possessing the amplitude changing unit of change amplitude after weighting combining unit 308A of Fig. 3 or Fig. 4, or in weighting combining unit The amplitude changing unit of change amplitude is possessed after 308B.Further, both can be to baseband signal z1(t after precoding), Z2(t) one enforcement amplitude change is (in this case, as long as possessing after any one at weighting combining unit 308A, 308B Amplitude changing unit), it is also possible to both sides are implemented amplitude change.

Furthermore, although the most not shown but it also may not to be to change phase place regularly, and be set to by mapping portion Change the structure of mapping method regularly.

It is to say, by modulated signal s1(t) mapping mode from 16QAM, by modulated signal s2(t) mapping mode from 16QAM changes, such as 16QAM → 16APSK(16Amplitude Phase Shift Keying) → in I-Q plane The conduct of upper the 1st mapping method as different with 16QAM, 16APSK signaling point configurations → in I-Q plane and 16QAM, 2nd mapping method of signaling point configurations different for 16APSK → like that, change regularly is applicable to modulated signal s2(t) Mapping mode, identical with the situation changing as mentioned above phase place regularly, it is possible in receiving device, it is thus achieved that make connecing of data Receive the effect that quality is improved.

It addition, the present invention can also be to change the method for phase place, the method changing mapping method regularly and change regularly Any one the combination of the method for more amplitude, alternatively, it is also possible to as the structure all sending signal in view of it.

Use present embodiment, in the case of any one, can implement in carrier way, multi-carrier transmission.Therefore, For for example with spread spectrum communication mode, OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) side Formula, SC-FDMA(Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access), SC-OFDM(Single Carrier Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) shown in mode and non-patent literature 7 etc. The situation of wavelet OFDM mode etc., it is also possible to implement.As it was previously stated, in the present embodiment, as carrying out phase place change, shaking Amplitude variation more and maps the explanation changed, and illustrates in the change of time t direction of principal axis enterprising line phase, amplitude change and maps change Situation, but same and same when the enterprising line phase in frequency axis direction changes with embodiment 1, say, that in this enforcement In mode, in the explanation of phase place change, amplitude change and mapping change on t direction, by t is replaced into f(f: frequency ((sub) carrier wave)), phase place change illustrated in present embodiment, amplitude change and mapping are applied the changes in frequency direction Phase place change, amplitude change and map change.It addition, the phase place change of present embodiment, amplitude change and mapping change side Method is identical with the explanation of embodiment 1, to phase place change, amplitude change and mapping change for T/F direction, also can Enough application.

And, in the present embodiment, the code element in addition to data symbols, such as pilot frequency code element (introduction, unique word etc.), The code element etc. of control information transmission can be configured in frame to use arbitrary mode.

(embodiment A1)

In the present embodiment, shown in non-patent literature 12～non-patent literature 15, employing QC(Quasi is described in detail Cyclic) LDPC(Low-Density Prity-Check) code (may not be QC-LDPC code, but LDPC code), LDPC code With BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code) connect code and employ truncation Turbo code or During the block code of Duo-Binary Turbo Code etc., to change phase place regularly method.Here, as an example, to send Illustrate as a example by the situation of 2 streams of s1, s2.But, when using block code to encode, it is not necessary to during control information etc., Constitute the bit number of the block after coding and constitute the bit number of block code (but it is also possible to contain described below that wherein Control information etc..) consistent.When using block code to carry out coding, need (the such as CRC(cyclic such as control information Redundancy check), transmission parameter etc.) time, the bit number constituting the block after coding is the bit constituting block code the most sometimes The bit number sum of number and control information etc..

When Figure 34 is to represent use block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding and the figure of the change of timeslot number.Figure 34 is shown in the dispensing device of such as Fig. 4, sends 2 streams of s1, s2, and " representing when dispensing device has 1 encoder When using block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number ".(now, as transmission means, Can also be used as single carrier transmission or OFDM multi-carrier transmission any one.)

As shown in figure 34, the bit number of the block after the composition in block code 1 being encoded is set to 6000 bits.In order to send this 6000 bits, need 3000 code elements when modulation system is QPSK, need 1500 code elements during 16QAM, need 1000 yards during 64QAM Unit.

And, in the dispensing device of Fig. 4, owing to sending 2 streams simultaneously, so when modulation system is QPSK, aforementioned 3000 code elements distribute 1500 code elements to s1, distribute 1500 code elements to s2, therefore, in order to send 1500 code elements sent by s1 and Sent 1500 code elements by s2, need 1500 time slots (named at this " time slot ".).

Similarly consider, when modulation system is 16QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 1 coding, need Want 750 time slots, when modulation system is 64QAM, in order to send the whole bits constituting 1 piece, need 500 time slots.

It follows that explanation is in the method changing phase place regularly, between time slot as defined above and the phase place being multiplied Relation.

Here, by by change regularly phase place change value (or phase place change set) that the method for phase place prepared Number is set to 5.It is to say, for the phase place changing unit of Fig. 4 dispensing device, (or the phase place change of 5 phase place change values to be prepared Set) (becoming embodiment 1 to " cycle " in embodiment 4) (as Fig. 6, only to the baseband signal after precoding In the case of z2' performs phase place change, in order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, as long as it is the most permissible to prepare 5 phase place change values. It addition, as Figure 26, in the case of the both sides of baseband signal z1' after precoding and z2' are performed phase place change, in order to 1 time slot, needs 2 phase place change values.These 2 phase place change values are referred to as phase place change set.Therefore, in this case, for The phase place change of implementation cycle 5, gathers as long as preparing 5 phase places changes).By these 5 phase place change values (or, phase Position change set) it is expressed as PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [3], PHASE [4].

When modulation system is QPSK, send constitute 1 coding after block bit number 6000 bit needed for above-mentioned 1500 time slots in, use phase place PHASE [0] time slot need to be 300 time slots, use phase place PHASE [1] time slot need be 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [3] to need when being 300 Gap, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 300 time slots.Its reason is, if there is imbalance in the phase place used, then The impact employing greater number of phase place is relatively big, in receiving device, becomes the receiving quality of the data depending on this impact.

Equally, when modulation system is 16QAM, needed for bit number 6000 bit of the block sent after constituting 1 coding Above-mentioned 750 time slots in, use phase place PHASE [0] time slot need to be 150 time slots, use phase place PHASE [1] time slot need Being 150 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 150 time slots, the time slot needs of use phase place PHASE [3] are 150 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 150 time slots.

Equally, when modulation system is 64QAM, needed for bit number 6000 bit of the block sent after constituting 1 coding Above-mentioned 500 time slots in, use phase place PHASE [0] time slot need to be 100 time slots, use phase place PHASE [1] time slot need Being 100 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 100 time slots, the time slot needs of use phase place PHASE [3] are 100 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 100 time slots.

As above, in the method changing phase place regularly, in the phase place change value (or phase place change set) that will prepare Be set to N number of (N number of different phase place is expressed as PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1]) time, when the bit of the block sent after all constituting 1 coding, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [0] It is set to K₀, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [1] is set to K₁, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [i] is set to K_i(i=0, 1,2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [N-1] is set to K_N-1, Now,

＜ condition #A01 ＞

K₀=K₁==K_i==K_N-1, say, that K_a=K_b, (, wherein, a, b =0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ b).

And, support multiple modulation systems in communication system, and select situation about using from the modulation system supported Under, in the modulation system supported, ＜ condition #A01 ＞ sets up.

But, in the case of supporting multiple modulation systems, in general, it is possible to sent out by 1 code element by each modulation system The bit number sent is different (according to circumstances, it is also possible to identical.), difference according to circumstances, also occasionally there are and can not meet ＜ condition # The modulation system of A01 ＞.In this case, replace ＜ condition #A01 ＞ and meet following condition.

＜ condition #A02 ＞

K_aAnd K_bDifference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_a―K_b| it is 0 or 1

(, wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

When Figure 35 is to represent use block code, the code element number required for block after 2 codings and the figure of the change of timeslot number.Figure 35 is as shown in the dispensing device of Fig. 3 and the dispensing device of Figure 12, sends 2 streams of s1, s2, and dispensing device has 2 " representing when using block code the code element number required for the block after 1 coding and the figure of change of timeslot number " during encoder.(this Time, as transmission means, it would however also be possible to employ as single carrier transmission, OFDM multi-carrier transmission any one.)

As shown in figure 35, the bit number of the block after the composition in block code 1 being encoded is set to 6000 bits.In order to send this 6000 bits, need 3000 code elements when modulation system is QPSK, need 1500 code elements during 16QAM, need 1000 yards during 64QAM Unit.

And, in the dispensing device of Fig. 3 and the dispensing device of Figure 12, owing to sending 2 streams simultaneously, and there are 2 Encoder, so passing through the code block that 2 streaming are different.Therefore, when modulation system is QPSK, by s1, s2 in same interval 2 encoding blocks of interior transmission, so such as being sent the block after the 1st coding by s1, are sent the 2nd encoding block by s2, therefore, in order to send Block after 1st, the 2nd coding, needs 3000 time slots.

Similarly consider, when modulation system is 16QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 2 codings, need Want 1500 time slots, when modulation system is 64QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 2 codings, when needing 1000 Gap.

Below, illustrate in the method changing phase place regularly, between time slot as defined above and the phase place being multiplied Relation.

Here, by by change regularly phase place change value (or phase place change set) that the method for phase place prepared Number is set to 5.It is to say, for the phase place changing unit of Fig. 3 and Figure 12 dispensing device, 5 phase place change values (or phase to be prepared Position change set) (becoming embodiment 1 to " cycle " in embodiment 4) (as Fig. 6, only to the base band after precoding In the case of signal z2' carries out phase place change, in order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, as long as preparing 5 phase place change values i.e. Can.It addition, as Figure 26, in the case of the both sides of baseband signal z1' after precoding and z2' are carried out phase place change, for 1 time slot, needs 2 phase place change values.These 2 phase place change values are referred to as phase place change set.Therefore, in this case, In order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, gather as long as preparing 5 phase place changes).By these 5 phase place change values (or phase Position change set) it is expressed as PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [3], PHASE [4].

When modulation system is QPSK, send constitute 2 coding after block bit number 6000 × 2 bit needed for upper Stating in 3000 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 600 time slots, the time slot needs of use phase place PHASE [1] are 600 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 600 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [3] to need when being 600 Gap, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 600 time slots.Its reason is, if there is imbalance in the phase place used, then The impact employing greater number of phase place is relatively big, in receiving device, becomes the receiving quality of the data depending on this impact.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 600 times, use phase place The time slot of PHASE [1] needs to be 600 times, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 600 times, uses phase place PHASE [3] Time slot need to be 600 times, use phase place PHASE [4] time slot need to be 600 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd encoding block, make Being 600 times with the time slot of phase place PHASE [0], the time slot using phase place PHASE [1] is 600 times, uses phase place PHASE [2] Time slot is 600 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [3] is 600 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [4] is 600 times.

Equally, when modulation system is 16QAM, sending bit number 6000 × 2 bit institute of the block after constituting 2 codings In above-mentioned 1500 time slots needed, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [1] Needing is 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [3] to need It is 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 300 time slots.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 300 times, use phase place The time slot of PHASE [1] needs to be 300 times, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 300 times, uses phase place PHASE [3] Time slot need to be 300 times, use phase place PHASE [4] time slot need to be 300 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd encoding block, make Being 300 times with the time slot of phase place PHASE [0], the time slot using phase place PHASE [1] is 300 times, uses phase place PHASE [2] Time slot is 300 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [3] is 300 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [4] is 300 times.

Equally, when modulation system is 64QAM, sending bit number 6000 × 2 bit institute of the block after constituting 2 codings In above-mentioned 1000 time slots needed, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 200 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [1] Needing is 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [3] to need It is 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 200 time slots.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 200 times, use phase place The time slot of PHASE [1] needs to be 200 times, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 200 times, uses phase place PHASE [3] Time slot need to be 200 times, use phase place PHASE [4] time slot need to be 200 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd encoding block, make Being 200 times with the time slot of phase place PHASE [0], the time slot using phase place PHASE [1] is 200 times, uses phase place PHASE [2] Time slot is 200 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [3] is 200 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [4] is 200 times.

As above, in the method changing phase place regularly, the phase place change value (or phase place change set) prepared is set For (being expressed as) PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1] time, when all sending out When sending the bit of the block after constituting 2 codings, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [0] is set to K₀, using phase place PHASE [1] timeslot number is set to K₁, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [i] is set to K_i(i=0,1,2, N-1(i be 0 with Go up and the integer of below N-1)), the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [N-1] is set to K_N-1, now,

＜ condition #A03 ＞

K₀=K₁==K_i==K_N-1, say, that K_a=K_b, (, wherein, a, b =0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ b)

When the bit of the block all sent after constituting the 1st coding, the number of times using phase place PHASE [0] is set to K_0,1, The number of times using phase place PHASE [1] is set to K_1,1, the number of times using phase place PHASE [i] is set to K_{I, 1}(i=0,1, 2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the number of times using phase place PHASE [N-1] is set to K_N-1,1, this Time,

＜ condition #A04 ＞

K_0,1=K_1,1==K_{I, 1}==K_N-1,1, say, that K_{A, 1}=K_{B, 1}, ( , its In, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ B)

When the bit of the block all sent after constituting the 2nd coding, the number of times using phase place PHASE [0] is set to K_0,2, The number of times using phase place PHASE [1] is set to K_1,2, the number of times using phase place PHASE [i] is set to K_{I, 2}(i=0,1, 2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the number of times using phase place PHASE [N-1] is set to K_N-1,2, this Time,

＜ condition #A05 ＞

K_0,2=K_1,2==K_{I, 2}==K_N-1,2, say, that K_{A, 2}=K_{B, 2}, ( , its In, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ B)

And, support multiple modulation systems in communication system, and select situation about using from the modulation system supported Under, in the modulation system supported, ＜ condition #A03 ＞ ＜ condition #A04 ＞ ＜ condition #A05 ＞ sets up.

But, in the case of supporting multiple modulation systems, in general, it is possible to sent out by 1 code element by each modulation system The bit number sent is different (according to circumstances, it is also possible to the most identical.), difference according to circumstances, also occasionally there are and can not meet ＜ The modulation system of condition #A03 ＞ ＜ condition #A04 ＞ ＜ condition #A05 ＞.In this case, ＜ condition #A03 ＞ ＜ bar is replaced Part #A04 ＞ ＜ condition #A05 ＞ and meet following condition.

＜ condition #A06 ＞

K_aAnd K_bDifference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_a―K_b| it is 0 or 1

(, wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

＜ condition #A07 ＞

K_{A, 1}And K_{B, 1}Difference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_{A, 1}―K_{B, 1}| it is 0 or 1

(, wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

＜ condition #A08 ＞

K_{A, 2}And K_{B, 2}Difference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_{A, 2}―K_{B, 2}| it is 0 or 1

(, wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

As above, by the block after coding is associated, in order to transmit the phase that encoding block is used with the phase place foundation being multiplied Uneven disappearance in Wei, so be obtained in that the such effect of receiving quality improving data in receiving device.

In the present embodiment, in the method changing phase place regularly, for the phase place variation of cycle N, need N Individual phase place change value (or phase place change set).Now, as N number of phase place change value (or phase place change set), prepare PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1], but also have on frequency axis direction By PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], the tactic method of PHASE [N-1], and It is not limited to this, it is also possible in the same manner as embodiment 1, by the block of time shaft, frequency-time axle is configured code element, makes N number of phase Position change value (or phase place change set) PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1] changes phase place.Also have, although the phase place variation as cycle N is illustrated, but use N number of phase place at random Change value (or phase place change set) also is able to obtain same effect, say, that, although it is not required to use N number of Phase place change value (or phase place change set), to make it have regular periods, but meets condition stated above and is receiving The aspect obtaining higher data receiver quality in device is important.

It addition, there is also spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, pre-coding matrix is fixing MIMO transmission mode, empty time block Coded system, only transmission 1 flow and change regularly the method (transmission illustrated in embodiment 1 to embodiment 4 of phase place Method) mode, dispensing device (broadcasting station, base station) can select any one sending method from these modes.

Further, so-called spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means refers to as shown in non-patent literature 3, respectively from different Antenna sends the method for signal s1, s2 of mapping with selected modulation system, the MIMO transmission that so-called pre-coding matrix is fixing Mode refers in embodiment 1 to embodiment 4, only carries out the mode of precoding (not performing phase place change).It addition, So-called space-time block coding mode refers to the transmission means shown in non-patent literature 9,16,17.1 stream of so-called only transmission Refer to and perform predetermined process, send the signal of the modulation system mapping selected with lock from antenna_sThe method of the signal of 1.

Alternatively, it is also possible to use the transmission means of multicarrier as OFDM, as the 1st carrier wave being made up of multiple carrier waves Group, 2nd carrier group different from the 1st carrier group being made up of multiple carrier waves, like that, achieve many with multiple carrier groups Carrier-wave transmission, by each carrier group, is set as the MIMO transmission side that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, pre-coding matrix are fixing Formula, space-time block coding mode, only send 1 stream and change any one of method of phase place regularly.

Particularly, for (sub) carrier group that have selected the method changing phase place regularly, implement present embodiment ?.

Further, in the case of the baseband signal after a precoding is carried out phase place change, such as by PHASE's [i] Phase place changing unit when phase place change value is set to " X radian ", in Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53 In, by e^jXIt is multiplied with baseband signal z2' after precoding.And, the baseband signal after two precodings is being carried out phase place change In the case of more, such as when the phase place change set of PHASE [i] being set to " X radian " and " Y radian ", at Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, in the phase place changing unit in Figure 52 and Figure 54, by e^jXIt is multiplied with baseband signal z2' after precoding, by e^jYAfter precoding Baseband signal z1' be multiplied.

(embodiment B1)

Below, the application examples of the sending method shown in the respective embodiments described above and method of reseptance is described and uses this application The structure example of the system of example.

Figure 36 is to represent the system including performing the device of the sending method shown in above-mentioned embodiment and method of reseptance The accompanying drawing of structure example.Sending method shown in the respective embodiments described above and method of reseptance are in digital broadcasting reality in system 3600 Executing, this digital broadcasting system 3600 includes the broadcasting station shown in Figure 36, television set (television) 3611, DVD recorder 3612, STB(Set Top Box) 3613, computer 3620, the various receptions of Autcmotive television 3641 and mobile phone 3630 etc. Machine.Specifically, broadcasting station 3601 uses the sending method shown in the respective embodiments described above, sends out in the transmission band of regulation Send the multiplexed data after image data or voice data etc. being multiplexed.

The signal sent from broadcasting station 3601 is by being built in each receiver or being arranged at outside and and this receiver connection Antenna (such as antenna 3660,3640) receives.Each receiver uses the method for reseptance shown in the respective embodiments described above, in sky The signal received in line is demodulated, and obtains multiplexed data.Thus, digital broadcasting system 3600 can obtain above-mentioned The effect of the present application illustrated in each embodiment.

Here, the image data comprised in multiplexed data uses such as with MPEG(Moving Picture Experts Group) 2, MPEG4-AVC(Advanced Video Coding) and the motion diagram that standard is foundation of VC-1 etc. As coded method encodes.It addition, the voice data comprised in multiplexed data is with such as Doby AC(Audio Coding)-3, Dolby Digital Plus, MLP(Meridian Lossless Packing), DTS(Digital Theater Systems), the sound encoding system such as DTS-HD and linear PCM (Pulse Coding Modulation) compiles Code.

Figure 37 is the one of the structure representing the receiver 7900 implementing method of reseptance illustrated in the respective embodiments described above The accompanying drawing of example.Receiver 3700 shown in Figure 37 is equivalent to the television set (television) 3611 shown in Figure 36, DVD recorder 3612, STB(Set Top Box) 3613, the knot that possessed of computer 3620, Autcmotive television 3641 and mobile phone 3630 etc. Structure.Receiver 3700 possesses: tuner 3701, antenna 3760 high-frequency signal received is transformed to baseband signal；Demodulation Portion 3702, is demodulated the baseband signal after frequency transformation, obtains multiplexed data.Shown in the respective embodiments described above Method of reseptance is implemented in demodulation section 3702, thereby, it is possible to obtain the present application illustrated in the respective embodiments described above Effect.

It addition, receiver 3700 has: stream input and output portion 3720, from the multiplexed data obtained by demodulation section 3702 Separate image data and voice data；Signal processing part 3704, use with separate after moving image solution corresponding to image data Code method, is decoded as signal of video signal by image data, use with separate after voice codec method corresponding to voice data, by sound Sound data are decoded as acoustical signal；The audio output units such as speaker 3706, export decoded acoustical signal；The images such as display Display part 3707, shows decoded signal of video signal.

Such as, user uses remote controller (remote controller) 3750, channel ((TV) selected that will select Program, the sound radio selected) information be sent to operation inputting part 3710.Then, receiver 3700 is being connect by antenna 3760 In the reception signal received, the signal corresponding with the channel selected is demodulated, performs error correction decoding etc. and process, obtain reception Data.Now, receiver 3700 includes transmission method (the above-mentioned reality comprised in the signal corresponding with the channel selected by acquirement Execute the transmission means described in mode, modulation system, error correcting system etc.) (about this point, as shown in Fig. 5, Figure 41.) information exist The information of interior control code element, the correct method setting reception action, demodulation method and error correction decoding etc., thereby, it is possible to obtain The data comprised in the data symbols sent by broadcasting station (base station).It is explained above user and selects letter by remote controller 3750 The example in road, but use the selection key that receiver 3700 is carried to select channel, also become and action as above.

Using said structure, user can be with audiovisual receiver 370 by the method for reseptance shown in the respective embodiments described above And the program received.

It addition, the receiver 3700 of present embodiment possesses record portion (driver) 3708, will be by by demodulation section 3702 (difference according to circumstances, the most not to by demodulation section for the multiplexed data demodulating and carrying out the decoding of error correction and obtain 3702 demodulation and the signal that obtains carries out error correction decoding.It addition, other are implemented the most sometimes after error correction decoding by receiver 3700 Signal processing.After, for carrying out the part of identical performance, this point is the most identical.The data that comprise in) or with this number According to corresponding data (data such as, obtained by compression data) or the number that obtained by working motion image, sound According to, it is recorded in the record medium of disk, CD and non-volatile semiconductor memory etc..Here, CD refers to such as DVD(Digital Versatile Disc) or BD(Blu-ray Disc) etc. use laser to carry out the storage of information and reading Record medium.Disk refers to such as FD(Floppy Disk) (registered trade mark) or hard disk (Hard Disk) etc. by use Magnetic magnetization is stored the record medium of information by magnetic.Non-volatile semiconductor memory refers to such as flash memories Or the record that strong dielectric memory (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) etc. is made up of semiconductor element Medium, can enumerate SD card or the Flash SSD(Solid StateDrive employing flash memories) etc..Further, set forth herein The kind of the record medium gone out is only an example, naturally it is also possible to use the record medium beyond aforementioned recording medium to carry out record.

By said structure, user is able to record that and preserves receiver 3700 by connecing shown in the respective embodiments described above The program that receiving method receives, the random time after the time of broadcast program reads recorded data, carries out audiovisual.

Further, in the above description, although receiver 3700 is recorded by by demodulation section by record portion 3708 3702 demodulate and carry out the decoding of error correction and the multiplexed data that obtains, but can also extract and record multiplexed data In a part of data in the data that comprise.Such as, obtaining by being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 and carry out the decoding of error correction Multiplexed data in comprise content of data broadcasting service beyond image data or voice data etc. in the case of, record Portion 3708 can also extract image data or voice data from the multiplexed data after being demodulated by demodulation section 3702, and records many New multiplexed data after the multiplexing of road.It addition, can also record only will be by being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 in record portion 3708 And carry out the decoding of error correction and some among the image data that comprises in the multiplexed data that obtains and voice data is many New multiplexed data after the multiplexing of road.And, record portion 3708 can also record and comprise in above-mentioned multiplexed data The content of data broadcasting service.

Furthermore, at television set, recording equipment (such as DVD recorder, Blu-ray recorder, HDD recorder and SD card etc.) And in the case of mobile phone is equipped with in the present invention receiver 3700 of explanation, by being gone forward side by side by demodulation section 3702 demodulation The decoding of row error correction and in the multiplexed data that obtains, containing making television set or recording equipment carry out action and make for correction The data of defect (bug: leak) of software and prevent personal information or the software of outflow that recorded for revising During the data of defect (leak), it is also possible to by installing these data, revise the software defect of television set or recording equipment.And And, in data, during containing the data of defect (leak) for the software of corrected received machine 3700, it is also possible to by these data Carry out the defect of corrected received machine 3700.Thus, it is equipped with the television set of receiver 3700, recording equipment and mobile phone can enter The action that row is more stable.

Here, comprise from the multiplexed data obtained by being demodulated and carry out the decoding of error correction by demodulation section 3702 Multiple data extract a part of data and carry out the process that multiplexes, such as carried out by stream input and output portion 3703.Specifically For, stream input and output portion 3703 is according to the instruction from control portions such as not shown CPU, after being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 Multiplexed data is separated into multiple data such as the content of image data, voice data, data broadcasting service, the number after separating According to only extracting the data specified and multiplexing, generate new multiplexed data.Further, the data after separating are extracted Which data, the most both can be determined by user, it is also possible to predetermine by each of record medium class.

By above-mentioned structure, due to need when receiver 3700 can only extract and record the program that audiovisual recorded Data, it is thus possible to reduce the data size of data to be recorded.

It addition, in superincumbent explanation, record portion 3708 records the solution by being demodulated and carry out error correction by demodulation section 3702 Code and the multiplexed data that obtains, but can also will obtain by being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 and carry out the decoding of error correction Multiplexed data in the image data that comprises, be transformed to with the dynamic image encoding method that this image data is implemented not The same image data after dynamic image encoding method coding, so that data size or bit rate are less than this image data, and The new multiplexed data after image data multiplexing after recording conversion.Now, original image data is implemented Dynamic image encoding method and the dynamic image encoding method that the image data after conversion is implemented both can be according to mutually the most not Same standard, it is also possible to according to same standard, the parameter only used during coding is different.Equally, record portion 3708 can also be by The voice data comprised in the multiplexed data obtained by being demodulated and carry out the decoding of error correction by demodulation section 3702, conversion For with the voice data after different from the sound encoding system that this voice data is implemented sound encoding system codings, so that number Data are compared less than this voice data according to size or bit rate, and new after recording the voice data multiplexing after conversion Multiplexed data.

Here, the multiplexed data that will obtain by being demodulated and carry out the decoding of error correction by demodulation section 3702 comprises Image data or voice data be transformed to data size or the different image data of bit rate or the process of voice data, example As carried out by stream input and output portion 3703 and signal processing part 3704.Specifically, stream input and output portion 3703 is according to from CPU Deng the instruction in control portion, the multiplexed data that will obtain by being demodulated and carry out the decoding of error correction by demodulation section 3702, point Multiple data from the content etc. for image data, voice data and data broadcasting service.Signal processing part 3704 according to from The instruction in control portion, carry out will separate after image data be transformed to with the moving image encoding side that this image data is implemented The process of image data after the dynamic image encoding method coding that method is different, and the voice data after separating be transformed to The process of voice data sound encoding system coding after different from the sound encoding system that this voice data is implemented.Flow defeated Enter output unit 3703 according to the instruction from control portion, the voice data after the image data after conversion and conversion is carried out multichannel Multiplexing, generates new multiplexed data.Further, signal processing part 3704, both can be the most right according to the instruction from control portion Any one in image data and voice data carries out the process converted, it is also possible to both sides are carried out conversion process.It addition, conversion After image data and the data size of voice data or bit rate both can be determined by user, it is also possible to by record medium Each kind predetermines.

By above-mentioned structure, receiver 3700 can be according to recordable data size in record medium or record portion 3708 records carrying out data or the speed read, change recording image data or the data size of voice data or ratio Special rate.Thus, the most recordable data size in record medium is less than by being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 and entangling Wrong decoding and the situation of the data size of multiplexed data that obtains, or record portion carries out record or the reading of data Speed less than the bit rate of the multiplexed data after being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 in the case of, record portion can record joint Mesh, thus user can read recorded data in the random time after the time of broadcast program, and carry out audiovisual.

It addition, receiver 3700 possesses stream output IF(Interface: interface) 3709, this IF3709 is via communication medium 3730 pairs of external equipments send the multiplexed data after being demodulated by demodulation section 3702.As an example of stream output IF3709, can Enumerate use with Wi-Fi(registered trade mark) (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n etc.), The wireless communication standards such as WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth, Zigbee are the wireless communications method of foundation, after modulating Multiplexed data be sent to the radio communication device of external equipment via wireless medium (being equivalent to communication medium 3730).Separately Outward, stream output IF3709 can also be use with Ethernet (registered trade mark) or USB(Universal Serial Bus), PLC (Power Line Communication), HDMI(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) etc. cable modem Beacon standard is the communication means of foundation, by the multiplexed data after modulation via the wired biography being connected with this stream output IF3709 Transmission path (being equivalent to communication medium 3730) is sent to the wire communication device of external equipment.

By above-mentioned structure, user can utilize receiver 3700 by the respective embodiments described above in external equipment The multiplexed data that shown method of reseptance receives.The utilization of multiplexed data mentioned here, uses including user External equipment audiovisual multiplexed data in real time, or the record portion record multiplexed data possessed by external equipment, with And further other external equipments are sent multiplexed data etc. from external equipment.

Further, in superincumbent explanation, in receiver 3700, stream output IF3709 export by by demodulation section 3702 The multiplexed data demodulating and carrying out the decoding of error correction and obtain, but the number comprised in multiplexed data can also be extracted A part of data according to, and export.Such as, obtaining by being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 and carry out the decoding of error correction Multiplexed data in comprise content of data broadcasting service beyond image data or voice data etc. in the case of, flow defeated Go out IF3709 to extract from the multiplexed data obtained by being demodulated and carry out the decoding of error correction by demodulation section 3702 Image data or voice data, the new multiplexed data after output multi-channel multiplexing.It addition, stream output IF3709 can also be defeated Go out any one in the image data and voice data comprised in the multiplexed data after only being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 many New multiplexed data after the multiplexing of road.

Here, comprise from the multiplexed data obtained by being demodulated and carry out the decoding of error correction by demodulation section 3702 Multiple data extract a part of data carry out the process multiplexed, such as carried out by stream input and output portion 3703.Specifically For, stream input and output portion 3703 is according to from not shown CPU(Central Processing Unit) etc. the finger in control portion Showing, the multiplexed data after being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 is separated in image data, voice data, data broadcasting service Multiple data of appearance etc., the data after separating only are extracted the data specified, and are multiplexed, generate new multiplexing Data.Further, which data is the data after separating extract, and the most both can be determined by user, it is also possible to by stream output Each kind of IF3709 predetermines.

By above-mentioned structure, owing to receiver 3700 can only extract the data of external equipment needs and exports, It is thus able to cut down the communication band consumed because of the output of multiplexed data.

It addition, in superincumbent explanation, stream output IF3709 exports by being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 and carrying out error correction The multiplexed data decoded and obtain, but can also will obtain by being demodulated by demodulation section 3702 and carry out the decoding of error correction To multiplexed data in the image data that comprises, be transformed to with the dynamic image encoding method that this image data is implemented The different image datas after dynamic image encoding method coding, so that data size or bit rate are less than this image data, And the new multiplexed data after the image data multiplexing after exporting conversion.Now, to original image data The dynamic image encoding method implemented and the dynamic image encoding method implementing the image data after conversion both can be according to phases The most different standard, it is also possible to according to same standard, the parameter only used when coding is different.Equally, stream output IF3709 The sound comprised in the multiplexed data that can also will obtain by being demodulated and carry out the decoding of error correction by demodulation section 3702 Data, the sound number after being transformed to the sound encoding system coding different from the sound encoding system that this voice data is implemented According to, so that data size or bit rate are less than this voice data, and export after the voice data multiplexing after conversion New multiplexed data.

Here, the multiplexed data that will obtain by being demodulated and carry out the decoding of error correction by demodulation section 3702 comprises Image data or voice data be transformed to data size or the different image data of bit rate or the process of voice data, example As carried out by stream input and output portion 3703 and signal processing part 3704.Specifically, stream input and output portion 3703 is according to carrying out automatic control The instruction in portion processed, the multiplexed data that will obtain by being demodulated and carry out the decoding of error correction by demodulation section 3702, it is separated into Multiple data of the content etc. of image data, voice data and data broadcasting service.Signal processing part 3704 is according to from control The instruction in portion, carries out the image data after separating and is transformed to with the dynamic image encoding method implementing this image data not With dynamic image encoding method coding after the process of image data, and the voice data after separating is transformed to with right The process of voice data after the sound encoding system coding that sound encoding system that this voice data is implemented is different.Stream input is defeated Go out portion 3703 according to the instruction from control portion, the voice data after the image data after conversion and conversion is carried out multichannel multiple With, generate new multiplexed data.Further, signal processing part 3704, both can be only to shadow according to the instruction from control portion As any one in data and voice data carries out the process that converts, it is also possible to both sides are carried out conversion process.It addition, after Bian Huan Image data and the data size of voice data or bit rate both can be determined by user, it is also possible to by stream output IF3709 Each kind predetermine.

By above-mentioned structure, receiver 3700 can according to and external equipment between communication speed change image number According to or the bit rate of voice data, and export.Thus, even if the communication speed between external equipment less than by by Demodulation section 3702 demodulates and carries out the decoding of error correction and in the case of the bit rate of multiplexed data that obtains, it is also possible to from stream The multiplexed data that output IF is new to external equipment output, thus user can utilize new many in other communicator Road multiplex data.

It addition, receiver 3700 possesses AV(Audio and Visual) output IF(Interface) 3711, to outside Communication medium exports by the decoded signal of video signal of signal processing part 3704 and acoustical signal.As AV output IF3711 one Example, can enumerate use with Wi-Fi(registered trade mark) (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n etc.), the wireless communication standard of WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth, Gigbee etc. be the wireless of foundation Communication means, is sent to the radio communication dress of external equipment by the signal of video signal after modulation and acoustical signal via wireless medium Put.It addition, stream output IF3709 can also be to use with Ethernet (registered trade mark) or the wire communication of USB, PLC, HDMI etc. Standard is the communication means of foundation, by the signal of video signal after modulation and acoustical signal via with this stream output having of being connected of IF3709 Line transmission channel is sent to the wire communication device of external equipment.It addition, stream output IF3709 can also be by analogue signal Original state output image signal and the terminal connecting cable of acoustical signal.

By above-mentioned structure, user can utilize in external equipment and be believed by the decoded image of signal processing part 3704 Number and acoustical signal.

Furthermore, receiver 3700 possesses operation inputting part 3710, the input of accepted user operation.Receiver 3700 is according to pressing The control signal in operation inputting part 3710 it is input to, the switching carrying out power source ON/OFF or the letter received according to the operation of user The language switching of road switching, the presence or absence of Subtitle Demonstration or display, various dynamic from the volume change etc. of audio output unit 3706 output The switching made, or the change of the setting such as the setting of receivable channel.

It addition, receiver 3700 can also possess the function of display antenna grade, this antenna grade represents and is currently connect by this The receiving quality of the signal that receipts machine 3700 receives.Here, antenna grade refers to the index representing following receiving quality, and It is the signal representing signal level, signal quality, the signal that above-mentioned receiving quality such as receives based on receiver 3700 RSSI(Received Signal Strength Indication, Received Signal Strength Indicator, Received signal strength), received electric field strength, C/N(Carrier-to-noise power ratio), BER(Bit Error Rate: bit error rate), packet error rate, frame error ratio and channel condition information (Channel State Etc. Information) calculate.In this case, demodulation section 3702 possesses receiving quality measurement portion, measures the signal received RSSI, received electric field strength, C/N, BER, packet error rate, frame error ratio and channel condition information etc.；Receiver 3700 According to the operation of user, antenna grade (representing the signal of signal level, signal quality) is shown in the discernible form of user In image expressed portion 3707.The display format of antenna grade (representing the signal of signal level, signal quality) both can be display With corresponding numerical value such as RSSI, received electric field strength, C/N, BER, packet error rate, frame error ratio and channel condition informations Form, it is also possible to be to believe according to RSSI, received electric field strength, C/N, BER, packet error rate, frame error ratio and channel status The form of the image that the displays such as breath are different.It addition, receiver 3700 both can show by using shown in the respective embodiments described above Method of reseptance receive and separate after multiple stream s1, s2, each obtain multiple antenna grades (represent signal electricity Flat, the signal of signal quality), it is also possible to show and (represent that signal is electric from multiple stream s1, s2,1 antenna grade obtaining Flat, the signal of signal quality).It addition, send image data or the sound number constituting program in currently used Delamination Transmission mode In the case of according to, it is also possible to by the level (representing the signal of signal quality) of every layer of expression signal.

By above-mentioned structure, user can grasp with the form of numerical value or range estimation and use institute in the respective embodiments described above Antenna grade (representing the signal of signal level, signal quality) when the method for reseptance shown receives.

Further, in superincumbent explanation, possess audio output unit 3706, image display part 3707, note with receiver 3700 Record portion 3708, stream output IF3709 and AV output IF3711 situation as a example by be illustrated, but need not to possess these knots Structure whole.As long as receiver 3700 possess among said structure at least any one, user just can utilize by by demodulating The demodulation in portion 3702 also carries out the decoding of error correction and the multiplexed data that obtains, as long as so each receiver is according to its purposes, At random combination possesses above-mentioned structure.

(multiplexed data)

Below, an example of the structure of multiplexed data is described in detail.As the data structure for broadcast, it is usually MPEG2-transmits stream (TS), illustrates enumerate MPEG2-TS at this as a example by.But, with sending out shown in the respective embodiments described above The data structure of the multiplexed data of delivery method and method of reseptance transmission is certainly not limited to MPEG2-TS, other any data Structure can obtain effect illustrated in above-mentioned each embodiment.

Figure 38 is the accompanying drawing of an example of the structure representing multiplexed data.As shown in figure 38, multiplexed data is structure Become the key element of the program (program or as part thereof of event) provided in each service, e.g. by by video Substantially more than 1 in the stream such as stream, audio stream, presentation graphic stream (PG) and interactive graphic stream (IG) multiplexes and obtains 's.In the case of the program provided with multiplexed data is film, video flowing illustrates main image and subpictures, the sound of film Frequently stream illustrates film master voice part and the secondary sound mixed with this master voice, presentation graphic stream illustrates the captions of film.This In, main image represents the normal images being shown on picture, and subpictures is the image (example shown with little picture in main image The image etc. of text data shown as film outline).It addition, interactive graphic stream is shown through on picture configuring GUI portion The dialog screen that part makes.

The each stream comprised in multiplexed data identifies by distributing to the PID as identifier of each stream.Such as, right For the video flowing distribution 0x1011 of the image of film, audio stream is distributed from 0x1100 to 0x111F, Presentation Graphics is distributed From 0x1200 to 0x121F, interactive graphic stream is distributed from 0x1400 to 0x141F, to the video flowing for film subpictures Distribution from 0x1B00 to 0x1B1F, to for and master voice mixing secondary sound audio stream distribute from 0x1A00 to 0x1A1F.

Figure 39 is the figure that pattern represents the example how multiplexed data to be multiplexed.First, will be by multiple videos The video flowing 3901 of frame composition and the audio stream 3904 that is made up of multiple audio frames, be transformed to PES packet row 3902 respectively And 3905, and it is transformed to TS packet 3903 and 3906.Equally, by presentation graphic stream 3911 and the data of interactive graphics 3914 It is transformed to PES packet row 3912 and 3915 respectively, and is transformed to TS packet 3913 and 3916.Multiplexed data 3917 leads to Cross and these TS packets (3903,3906,3913,3916) are multiplexed as 1 stream and constitute.

How Figure 40 stores video flowing in being shown in PES packet row in further detail.The 1st segment table in Figure 40 shows video The frame of video row of stream.2nd segment table shows that PES packet arranges.As shown in arrow yy1, yy2, yy3, yy4 of Figure 40, in video flowing Several are split by every width picture as I picture, B picture and the P picture of Video Presentation Unit, and preserve In the payload of PES packet.Each PES packet has PES packet header, in PES packet header, stores the display as picture The PTS(Presentation Time-Stamp in moment) and as picture decoding the moment DTS(Decoding Time- Stamp).

Figure 41 is shown in multiplexed data the form of the TS packet of final write.TS packet is that 188Byte is solid The packet of measured length, including: the TS packet header of 4Byte, there is the information of the PID etc. identifying stream；The TS of 184Byte effectively carries Lotus, preserves data；Above-mentioned PES packet is divided, and is saved in TS payload.In the case of bd-rom, to TS number Give the TP_Extra_Header of 4Byte according to bag, constitute the source data packet of 192Byte, in write multiplexed data.At TP_ In Extra_Header describe ATS(Arrival_Time_Stamp) etc. information.ATS represents that this TS packet is to decoder The transmission start time of pid filter.In multiplexed data, as shown in Figure 41 hypomere, arrange source data packet, from many The numbering having started increment of road multiplex data is referred to as SPN(source packet number).

It addition, in the TS packet comprised in multiplexed data, except video flowing, audio stream and presentation graphic stream etc. Outside each stream, also PAT(Program Association Table), PMT(Program Map Table) and PCR (Program Clock Reference) etc..Pat table shows what the PID of the PMT utilized in multiplexed data is, PAT is originally The PID of body logs in 0.PMT have each streams such as the video-audio captions that comprise in multiplexed data PID and with respectively The attribute information (frame rate, aspect ratio etc.) of the stream that PID is corresponding, and there are the various descriptions relevant with multiplexed data Symbol.In descriptor, the duplication that there is instruction multiplexed data allows unallowed copy control information etc..PCR in order to Obtain the ATC(Arrival Time Clock of time shaft as ATS) and the STC of time shaft as PTS DTS The synchronization of (System Time Clock), has the letter of the STC time corresponding for ATS sending decoder to this PCR data bag Breath.

Figure 42 is the figure of the data structure describing PMT in detail.In the beginning of PMT, being configured with PMT packet header, this PMT packet header is remembered State the length etc. of the data comprised in this PMT.Face behind, configures multiple descriptor relevant with multiplexed data.On State copy control information etc. to describe as descriptor.After descriptor, configure and multiple comprise in multiplexed data Each flow relevant stream information.Stream information is made up of flow descriptors, and this flow descriptors describes the Compress softwares for identifying stream The attribute information (frame speed, aspect ratio etc.) of the stream type of device, the PID of stream and stream.Flow descriptors exists in multiplexed data The number of the stream existed.

In the case of being recorded in record medium etc., above-mentioned multiplexed data and multiplexed data message file one Play record.

Figure 43 is the figure of the structure representing this multiplexed data message file.Multiplexed data message file such as Figure 43 Shown in, be the management information of multiplexed data, corresponding to 1 ground with multiplexed data 1, including multiplexed data information, Stream attribute information and entry maps.

Multiplexed data information as shown in figure 43, including system velocity, reproduces start time and reproduces finish time.System The system rate representation multiplexed data maximum transfer rate to the pid filter of System Target Decoder described later.Multichannel is multiple It is set to below system velocity with the interval of the ATS comprised in data.Reproduce the beginning that start time is multiplexed data The PTS of frame of video, reproducing finish time is set as in the PTS of the frame of video of the terminal of multiplexed data plus 1 frame amount Moment of reproduction interval.

Figure 44 is the figure of the structure representing the stream attribute information comprised in multiplexed data message file.Stream attribute information As shown in figure 44, the attribute information about each stream comprised in multiplexed data is logged in by each PID.Attribute information presses video The each of stream, audio stream, presentation graphic stream and interactive graphic stream has different information.Video flowing attribute information has this and regards Frequency stream is how many by the compression of which type of compressed and decompressed device, the exploring degree of each image data that constitutes video flowing, aspect ratio How many and frame rate be how many etc. information.Which type of compressed and decompressed device is audio stream attribute information have this audio stream by The information that compression, the number of channel comprised in this audio stream be how many, is how many etc. corresponding to which kind of language and sampling frequency.These Information decoder initialization etc. before player reproduces.

In the present embodiment, stream type in above-mentioned multiplexed data, that be contained in PMT is utilized.It addition, in note In the case of record has multiplexed data in recording medium, utilize the video flowing attribute letter comprised in multiplexed data information Breath.Specifically, the dynamic image encoding method shown in the respective embodiments described above or dress center following step or Stream type to comprising in PMT of mechanism, this step or mechanism or video flowing attribute information set intrinsic information, and this is intrinsic Information represent the image data being to be generated by the dynamic image encoding method shown in the respective embodiments described above or device This situation.By this structure, it is possible to identify by the dynamic image encoding method shown in the respective embodiments described above or device raw The image data become and the image data of foundation other standards.

Figure 45 illustrates the example including receiving the structure of the video/audio output device 4500 of device 4504, this reception device 4504 receive that send from broadcasting station (base station), comprise image and the data of sound or the data for data broadcast Modulated signal.Further, the structure reception device 3700 corresponding to Figure 37 of device 4504 is received.At video/audio output device In 4500, such as, be equipped with OS(Operating System: operating system), and be equipped with for Internet connection logical T unit 4506(such as WLAN (Local Area Network) or the communicator for Ethernet).Therefore, in display In the part 4501 of image, it is possible to show image and the data of sound simultaneously, or the image in the data of data broadcast 4502 and the hypertext (World Wide Web(WWW: WWW) that provides on the internet) 4503.And, by operation Remote controller (can also be mobile phone or keyboard) 4507, select for data broadcast data in image 4502, because of Some of the special online hypertext 4503 provided, thus change action.Such as, the super literary composition provided on the Internet is being selected In the case of basis 4503, by remote controller, change the website of currently displaying WWW.It addition, have selected image and sound In the case of the data of sound or the image 4502 in the data of data broadcast, by remote controller 4507, send selected The information of channel ((TV) program of selecting, the sound radio selected).Then, IF4505 obtains the letter sent by remote controller Breath, receive device 4504 signal corresponding with the channel selected is demodulated, the process of error correction decoding etc., it is thus achieved that receive number According to.Now, receive device 4504 and include that the transmission method comprised in the signal corresponding with the channel selected is (about this by acquirement A bit, as described in Figure 5.) information in the information of interior control code element, correct set reception action, demodulation method and error correction solution The method of code etc., just can obtain, with this, the data comprised in the data symbols sent by broadcasting station (base station).Above, though So illustrate that user passes through remote controller 4507, select the example of channel, but even with video/audio output device 4500 The selection key carried, selects channel, also becomes and action as above.

Alternatively, it is also possible to utilize the Internet to operate video/audio output device 4500.Such as, from other be connected to because of Special online terminal, records the reservation of (storage) to video/audio output device 4500.(therefore, video-audio output dress Put 4500 as shown in Figure 37, there is record portion 3708.) then, before starting to record, select channel, receive device 4504 right The signal corresponding with the channel selected is demodulated, and performs the process of error correction decoding etc., obtains and receives data.Now, dress is received Put 4504 and include that the transmission method comprised in the signal corresponding with the channel selected is (described in above-mentioned embodiment by acquirement Transmission means, modulation system and error correcting system etc.) (about this point, as described in Figure 5.) information at the letter of interior control code element Breath, the correct method setting reception action, demodulation method and error correction decoding etc., send out thereby, it is possible to obtain by broadcasting station (base station) The data comprised in the data symbols sent.

(other supplement)

In this manual, possess the equipment of dispensing device it is contemplated that: such as broadcasting station, base station, access point, terminal and The communication broadcast equipment of mobile phone (mobile phone) etc., now, possess receive device device it is contemplated that: TV The communication equipment of machine, radio, terminal, personal computer, mobile phone, access point and base station etc..It addition, sending out in the present invention Sending device, reception device is the equipment with communication function, it is also conceivable to this equipment is can be by any interface (example As, USB) it is connected to the form on the device performing application such as television set, radio, personal computer and mobile phone.

It addition, in the present embodiment, the code element in addition to data symbols, such as pilot frequency code element (can also be by pilot code Unit is referred to as introduction, unique word, postamble, reference symbols sn and scattered pilot etc..), the code element of control information etc. can be to appoint Where formula is configured in frame.And, named pilot frequency code element, the code element of control information at this, but any life can be carried out Name method, it is important that function itself.

Pilot frequency code element the most in a transceiver, as long as the known code element using PSK modulation and modulating (or can also By being obtained synchronization, the code element that receiver identification transmitter is sent by receiver.), receiver uses this code element, comes real Execute Frequency Synchronization, time synchronized, (each modulated signal) channel presumption the pushing away of (CSI(Channel State Information) Fixed) and the detection etc. of signal.

It addition, the code element of control information be used to transmit for realize communication beyond (application etc.) data, to Information (the modulation system Error Correction of Coding mode Error Correction of Coding such as currently used in the communications needed for communication object transmission The encoding rate of mode and the set information etc. on upper strata) code element.

Further, the present invention is not limited to whole embodiments, and can carry out various change and implement.Such as, upper State in embodiment, illustrate the situation carried out as communicator, but be not restricted to that this, it is also possible to by this communication means Carry out as software.

It addition, the phase place variation being described above from the method for 2 antennas 2 modulated signals of transmission, but also It is not limited to this, changes the phase place variation of phase place the most regularly, it is also possible to similarly implement, the party Method is, the signal after mapping 4 carries out precoding and changes phase place, generates 4 modulated signals, and enters from 4 antennas Row sends, i.e. the signal after N number of mapping is carried out precoding, generates N number of modulated signal, be transmitted from N root antenna.

It addition, in the system example shown in above-mentioned embodiment, disclose and send 2 modulated signals from 2 antennas, by 2 Root antenna receives the communication system of respective MIMO method, but the present invention can certainly be applied to MISO(Multiple Input Single Output) communication system of mode.In the case of MISO mode, the structure receiving device does not has Fig. 7 institute Antenna 701_Y, radio section 703_Y, channel variation presumption unit 707_1 of modulated signal z1 and modulated signal z2 in the structure shown Channel variation presumption unit 707_2, in this case, by performing the process shown in above-mentioned embodiment 1, it is also possible to push away respectively Determine r1, r2.Further, in identical frequency band, in the same time, it is possible to received, by 1 antenna, the multiple signals sent and solve Code is known technology, in this manual, and the process needed for the phase retrieval that will change in sending side in signal processing part It is appended in the process in conventional art.

It addition, in the system example shown in the explanation of the present invention, disclosure goes out to send 2 modulated signals from 2 antennas, by 2 Root antenna receives the communication system of respective MIMO method, but the present invention can certainly be applied to MISO(Multiple Input Single Output) communication system of mode.In the case of MISO mode, dispensing device is applied precoding Changing with phase place, this point is identical with explanation before this.On the other hand, the structure receiving device does not has in the structure shown in Fig. 7 Antenna 701_Y, radio section 703_Y, channel variation presumption unit 707_1 of modulated signal z1 and the channel variation of modulated signal z2 Presumption unit 707_2, in this case, by performing the process shown in this specification, it is possible to presumption dispensing device is sent Data.Further, in identical frequency band, in the same time, it is possible to received, by 1 antenna, the multiple signals sent and be decoded being week The technology known is (in single antenna reception, as long as implementing the process of (Max-log APP etc.) such as ML computings.), in the present invention In, as long as in the signal processing part 711 of Fig. 7, account for precoding and the demodulation of phase place change used in sending side (detection).

In this manual, employ the vocabulary of " precoding " " precoding weight " " pre-coding matrix " etc., but title Itself can be (to be such as referred to as code book (codebook) arbitrarily.), in this invention it is important that its signal processing Itself.

It addition, in this manual, it is illustrated centered by the situation using OFDM mode as sending method, But be not restricted to that this, in the case of using the multi-carrier mode beyond OFDM mode, carrier way, it is also possible to similarly Implement.At this time it is also possible to employing spread spectrum communication mode.Further, in the case of using carrier way, phase place change will be on time Between direction of principal axis carry out phase place change.

It addition, in this manual, in receiving device, ML computing, APP, Max-log APP, ZF, MMSE etc. is used to enter Having gone explanation, its result, (log-likelihood, logarithm are seemingly to obtain the soft decision result of each bit of the data that dispensing device is sent So than) or hard decision result (" 0 " or " 1 "), but they can also be referred to as detection, demodulate, detect, estimate and divide From.

By stream s1(t), s2(t) (s1(i), s2(i)), both can transmit different data, it is also possible to transmit same number According to.

It addition, in baseband signals s1(i to 2 streams), s2(i) (wherein, i represents (time or frequency (carrier wave)) Sequentially) carry out the phase place change of rule and precoding (sequentially which front can) and generate, after two signal processing Baseband signal z1(i), z2(i) in, baseband signal z1(i by after two signal processing) homophase I become be divided into I₁(i), will Orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i), by baseband signal z2(i after two signal processing) homophase I become be divided into I₂(i), by orthogonal one-tenth It is divided into Q₂(i).At this time it is also possible to implement the replacement of base band composition,

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i), will replace Baseband signal r2(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i), as respectively from transmission antenna 1 Use same frequency to send and baseband signal r1(i after replacement with transmission antenna 2 at synchronization) corresponding modulated signal and With replace after baseband signal r2(i) corresponding modulated signal is such, from different antennas in the synchronization same frequency of use Send with replace after baseband signal r1(i) baseband signal r2(i after corresponding modulated signal and replacement).Alternatively, it is also possible to It is,

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i), will replace Baseband signal r2(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i), will replace Baseband signal r2(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i), will replace Baseband signal r2(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i), will replace Baseband signal r2(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i), orthogonal component is set to Q1(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i), will replace Baseband signal r2(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i), will replace Baseband signal r2(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i), will replace Baseband signal r2(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i), will replace Baseband signal r1(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i), will replace Baseband signal r1(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i), will replace Baseband signal r1(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i), will replace Baseband signal r1(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i), will replace Baseband signal r1(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i), will replace Baseband signal r1(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i), will replace Baseband signal r1(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i), will replace Baseband signal r1(i after changing) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i)

It addition, be described above the signals to 2 streams to carry out the signal processing of both sides, and after replacing two signal processing The same phase constituent of signal and orthogonal component, but be not restricted to that this, it is also possible to unnecessary 2 signals flowed carry out both signals Process, and carry out same phase constituent and the replacement of orthogonal component of the signal after two signal processing.

It addition, in above-mentioned example, illustrate the replacing of baseband signal of synchronization (same frequency ((sub) carrier wave)) Change, but may not be the replacement of the baseband signal of synchronization.As an example, can be such as description of getting off

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i+w), Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i+w), Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i+v), Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i+w), Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i+v), Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i+w), Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i+v), Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i+v), Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i+w), Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i+v), Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i+w), Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i+v), Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i+w), Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to I₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i+w), Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i+v), Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to I₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal r2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₂(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I₁(i+v), Will replace after baseband signal r1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q₁(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I₂(i+w)

Figure 55 is the figure in the expression baseband signal replacement portion 5502 for above-mentioned record is described.As shown in fig. 55, at two Baseband signal z1(i after signal processing) 5501_1, z2(i) in 5501_2, baseband signal z1(i by after two signal processing) The homophase I of 5501_1 becomes to be divided into I₁(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₁(i), and by baseband signal z2 after two signal processing (i) the homophase I of 5501_2 becomes to be divided into I₂(i), orthogonal component is set to Q₂(i).Then, it is assumed that baseband signal r1 after replacement (i) the same phase constituent of 5503_1 is I_r1(i), orthogonal component is Q_r1(i), baseband signal r2(i after replacement) homophase of 5503_2 Composition is I_r2(i), orthogonal component is Q_r2(i) baseband signal r1(i after, then replacing) the same phase constituent I of 5503_1_r1(i), just Hand over composition Q_r1(i) baseband signal r2(i and after replacing) the same phase constituent I of 5503_2_r2(i), orthogonal component Q_r2(i) more than Some illustrated by face is expressed.Further, in this example embodiment, the two of synchronization (same frequency ((sub) carrier wave)) are illustrated The replacement of the baseband signal after individual signal processing, but as mentioned above, it is also possible to it is different moment (different frequencies ((sub) Carrier wave)) two signal processing after the replacement of baseband signal.

1 antenna described in the transmission antenna of dispensing device, the reception antenna receiving device and accompanying drawing can also be by Many antennas are constituted.

In this manual,Represent generality quantifier (universal quantifier),Represent existential quantifier (existential quantifier).

It addition, in this manual, as the such as drift angle on complex plane, the unit of phase place is set to " radian (radian) ".

If make use of complex plane, then as polar display based on plural number, can represent with polar form.To multiple Number z=a+jb(a, b are real numbers, and j is imaginary unit), (a, time b) corresponding, if this point is sat in pole to make point on complex plane Put on and be expressed as [r, θ], then

A=r × cos θ,

B=r × sin θ

[numerical expression 49]

$r=\sqrt{a^2+b^2}$ ... formula (49)

Setting up, r is the absolute value (r=| z |) of z, and θ is drift angle (argument).And, z=a+jb is expressed as re^jθ。

In the explanation of the present invention, baseband signal s1, s2, z1, z2 are complex signal, and so-called complex signal refers to, by homophase Signal is set to I, and when orthogonal signalling are set to Q, it is imaginary unit that complex signal is expressed as I+jQ(j).Now, both can be with I for zero, also Can be with Q for zero.

Figure 46 represents an example of the broadcast system employing the phase place variation illustrated in this specification.In figures 4-6 can, Image coding portion 4601, with image for input, carries out image coding, the data 4602 after image output coding.Acoustic coding portion 4603 with sound for input, carries out acoustic coding, the data 4604 after output acoustic coding.Data encoding portion 4605 with data is Input, carries out the coding (such as data compression) of data, the data 4606 after output data encoding.They are gathered, Just become information source coding portion 4600.

Sending part 4607 is with the number after the data 4602 after image coding, the data 4604 after acoustic coding and data encoding It is input according to 4606, whole as transmission data using some or these data of these data, carry out Error Correction of Coding, tune System, precoding and phase place change etc. process (signal processing in the dispensing device of such as Fig. 3), output send signal 4608_1～ 4608_N.Then, send signal 4608_1～4608_N respectively by antenna 4609_1～4609_N, sent out as electric wave Send.

Acceptance division 4612 with reception signal 4611_1～4611_M that received by antenna 4610_1～4610_M for input, (such as Fig. 7 connects to carry out the process such as frequency replacement, phase place change, the decoding of precoding, log-likelihood calculations and error correction decoding Process in receiving apparatus), output receives data 4613,4615,4617.Information source lsb decoder 4619 with receive data 4613, 4615,4617 is input, and image-decoding portion 4614, with reception data 4613 for input, carries out the decoding of image, image output Signal, and image is shown on television set, display.It addition, voice codec portion 4616 is with reception data 4615 for input, Carry out the decoding of sound, export acoustical signal, and sound is from loudspeaker pass.It addition, data decoding part 4618 is to receive Data 4617 are input, carry out the decoding of data, the information of output data.

It addition, in the embodiment that the present invention has been described above, at that of OFDM mode as explained above Planting in multicarrier transmission mode, the number of the encoder that dispensing device is had can be any quantity.It is thus possible, for instance as Fig. 4 Like that, the method for distribution output, it is of course possible to possess 1 encoder, is also applied to overloading as OFDM mode by dispensing device In ripple transmission means.Now, as long as radio section 310A, 310B of Fig. 4 to be replaced into the OFDM mode correlation processing unit of Figure 12 1301A, 1301B.Now, the explanation of OFDM mode correlation processing unit is as shown in Embodiment 1.

It addition, in embodiment 1, as the example of pre-coding matrix, it is provided that formula (36), but different Ground, it is contemplated that the method using equation below as pre-coding matrix.

[numerical expression 50]

$\left(\begin{array}{cc}w11& w12\\ w21& w22\end{array}\right)=\frac{1}{\sqrt{{\mathrm{\&alpha;}}^2+1}}\left(\begin{array}{cc}{e}^{j0}& {\mathrm{\&alpha;}\&times;e}^{\mathrm{j\&pi;}}\\ {\mathrm{\&alpha;}\&times;e}^{j0}& e^{j0}\end{array}\right)$ ... formula (50)

Further, describe in precoding formula (36), formula (50), set formula (37), formula as the value of α (38), but be not restricted to that this, if being set as α=1, then become simple pre-coding matrix, thus this value is also effective value One of.

It addition, in embodiment A1, the phase place in Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53 becomes In more portion, as the phase place change value for cycle N (in Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53, only One baseband signal is given phase place change, thus becomes phase place change value.), show as PHASE [i] (i=0,1, 2, N-2, N-1(i are the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)).And, in this manual, after to a precoding Baseband signal carry out phase place change time (Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53), only to precoding After baseband signal z2' impart phase place change.Now, PHASE [k] is given as follows.

[numerical expression 51]

Now, if k=0,1,2, N-2, N-1(k are the integer of more than 0 and below N-1).Further it is assumed that N= 5,7,9,11,15, then in receiving device, it is possible to obtain good data receiver quality.

It addition, in this manual, it is described in detail and is sent phase place change side during 2 modulated signals by many antennas Method, but be not restricted to that this, the baseband signal after the mapping of more than 3 modulation systems carries out precoding, phase place change, in advance Baseband signal after the change of coding, phase place carries out the process specified, and in the case of many antennas are transmitted, it is also possible to Sample ground is implemented.

Further, such as the program performing above-mentioned communication means can also be pre-stored in ROM(Read Only Memory) in, by CPU(Central Processor Unit) make this program carry out action.

Alternatively, it is also possible to the program performing above-mentioned communication means is recorded in the storage medium of embodied on computer readable, The program stored in storage medium is recorded in the RAM(Random Access Memory of computer) in, make according to this program Computer carries out action.

And, each structure of the respective embodiments described above etc. is typically as integrated circuit, i.e. LSI(Large Scale Integration) realize.They both can individually carry out single chip, it is also possible to comprise whole structures of each embodiment Become or the mode of part composition carries out single chip.Have employed LSI at this, but according to the difference of integrated level, be also sometimes referred to as For IC(Integrated Circuit), system LSI, super large LSI and greatly LSI.It addition, the method for integrated circuit does not limit In LSI, it would however also be possible to employ special circuit or general processor realize.Can also utilize and can be programmed after LSI manufactures FPGA(Field Programmable Gate Array), or can be by the connection of the circuit unit within LSI and setting The reconfigurable processor of reconstruct.

Furthermore, if passing through progress or the other technologies of derivation of semiconductor technology, and occur in that replacement LSI's is integrated Circuit technology, naturally it is also possible to use this technology to carry out the integrated of each process portion.The application of biotechnology etc. there is also Probability.

(embodiment C1)

In embodiment 1, illustrate the situation of the pre-coding matrix that switching is used when change sends parameter, but In the present embodiment, for the example that it is detailed, illustrate above as described in (other supplement), as sending parameter, at stream s1 (t), s2(t) in, when switching between situation and the situation transmitting same data transmitting different data, switching is made The method of pre-coding matrix and phase place variation together therewith.

In the example of present embodiment, illustrate in the situation sending modulated signal from 2 different transmission antennas respectively Under, in each modulated signal containing same data situation and send in each modulated signal different data situation it Between switch.

Figure 56 represents, an example of the structure of dispensing device when switching over sending method as previously mentioned.In Figure 56, For carrying out the part of action equally with Figure 54, give identical symbol.In Figure 56, and the difference of Figure 54 is, point Join portion 404 with frame structure signal 313 for input.About the action of dispenser 404, Figure 57 is used to illustrate.

Figure 57 represent when sending same data and the action of dispenser 404 during the different data of transmission.Such as Figure 57 Shown in, it is assumed that the data after coding are x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6, then send same data time, the number after distribution According to 405A be expressed as x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6, equally, data 405B after distribution be expressed as x1, x2, x3, x4, x5、x6、···。

On the other hand, when sending different data, data 405A after distribution be expressed as x1, x3, x5, x7, X9, data 405B after distribution be expressed as x2, x4, x6, x8, x10,.

Further, dispenser 404 is according to the frame structure signal 313 as input signal, it is judged that transmission mode is that transmission is same The situation of data still sends the situation of different data.

As above-mentioned additive method, when sending same data as shown in Figure 58, dispenser 404 is as the number after distribution Export according to 405A x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6, to distribution after data 405B do not export.Therefore, tie at frame When structure signal 313 represents " sending same data ", the action of dispenser 404 is as it has been described above, it addition, interleaver in Figure 56 304B, mapping portion 306B are failure to actuate.And, only baseband signal 307A of the output as mapping portion 306A in Figure 56 is for having Effect, becomes the input signal of the both sides of weighting combining unit 308A and 308B.

In the present embodiment, a feature is, is sending the situation of same data and the situation sending different data Between switch sending mode time, pre-coding matrix is switched over.As shown in the formula (36) of embodiment 1, formula (39), Be made up of w11, w12, w21, w22 expression matrix time, pre-coding matrix when sending same data is expressed as.

[numerical expression 52]

$\left(\begin{array}{cc}w11& w12\\ w21& w22\end{array}\right)=\left(\begin{array}{cc}a& 0\\ 0& a\end{array}\right)$ ... formula (52)

In formula (52), a is that real number (although a can also be plural number, but is intended to be believed the base band of input by precoding Number give phase place change, if thus in view of as far as possible do not make circuit scale increase and complicated, the most preferably real number.) it addition, at a In the case of being 1, weighting combining unit 308A, 308B are not weighted the action of synthesis, and input signal are exported by original state.

Therefore, when " sending same data ", as weighting combining unit 308A, 308B output signal, weighting synthesis After baseband signal 309A and weighting synthesis after baseband signal 316B be same signal.

Then, phase place changing unit 5201 is in the case of frame structure signal 313 expression is " sending same data ", to weighting Baseband signal 309A implementing phase change after synthesis, the baseband signal 5202 after output phase place change.Then, phase place changing unit 317B is in the case of frame structure signal 313 represents to be " sending same data ", and baseband signal 316B after synthesizing weighting is real Execute phase place change, baseband signal 309B after output phase place change.Also have, it is assumed that the phase place implemented by phase place changing unit 5201 becomes More e^JA(t)(or e^JA(f), or e^{JA(t, f)}) (wherein, t is the time, and f is frequency) (therefore, e^JA(t)(or e^JA(f), or e^{JA(t, f)}) it is the value being multiplied with the baseband signal inputted.), phase place changing unit 317B the phase place implemented is changed to e^JB(t)(or Person e^JB(f), or e^{JB(t, f)}) (wherein, t is the time, and f is frequency) (therefore, e^JB(t)(or e^JB(f)Or e^{JB(t, f)}) be and institute The value that the baseband signal of input is multiplied.), it is important to meet condition below.

[numerical expression 53]

Exist and meet e^JA(t)≠e^JB(t)Time t

(or, exist and meet e^JA(f)≠e^JB(f)Frequency (carrier wave) f)

(or, exist and meet e^{JA(t, f)}≠_e ^{JB(t, f)}Frequency (carrier wave) f and time t)

Owing to so constituting, so sending signal can alleviate the impact of multipath, therefore in receiving device, Ke Yiti The receiving quality of high data.But (, after phase place change can also be only to baseband signal 309A after weighting synthesis and weighting synthesis Baseband signal 316B in one carry out.)

Further, in Figure 56, in the case of the baseband signal 5202 after phase place change uses OFDM, implement IFFT, frequency Replacements etc. process, and send from transmission antenna.(seeing Figure 13) is (it is therefore contemplated that the baseband signal 5202 after phase place change is figure The signal 1301A of 13.) same, in the case of baseband signal 309B after phase place change uses OFDM, implement IFFT, frequently The process of rate replacement etc., and be transmitted from transmission antenna.(seeing Figure 13) (it is therefore contemplated that the baseband signal after phase place change 309B is the signal 1301B of Figure 13, it is possible to.)

On the other hand, in the case of have selected " sending different data " as transmission mode, such as embodiment 1 institute Showing, any one with formula (36), formula (39) and formula (50) shows.Now, it is important that the phase place changing unit of Figure 56 5201,317B implements the phase place variation different with the situation of " sending same data ".Particularly, in this case, strictly according to the facts Execute described in mode 1, as long as such as not carrying out phase place change as phase place changing unit 5201 carries out phase place change, phase place changing unit 317B More, or phase place changing unit 5201 does not carries out phase place change and phase place changing unit 317B carries out as phase place change, only to 2 Some in individual phase place changing unit carries out phase place change, then LOS environment, NLOS environment both sides under, receiving device can Obtain good data receiver quality.

Further, in the case of have selected " sending different data " as transmission mode, as pre-coding matrix, it is possible to To use formula (52), but if showing with formula (36), formula (50) or formula (39), and use and formula (52) Different pre-coding matrixes, then receiving in device the receiving quality of the data that can improve further under LOS environment.

It addition, present embodiment is illustrated to use OFDM mode as sending method in case of, but It is not limited to this, also is able to similarly implement when using the multi-carrier mode beyond OFDM mode, carrier way.Now, Spread spectrum communication mode can also be used.Further, in the case of using carrier way, phase place changes temporally direction of principal axis and carries out Phase place changes.

Further, as illustrated by embodiment 3, in the situation of the sending method of " sending different data " Under, it is assumed that only data symbols is carried out phase place change.But, sending out of " sending same data " illustrated in the present embodiment During delivery method, phase place change is not limited to data symbols, also transmission signal is sent the pilot frequency code element or control inserted in frame The code element of code element etc. carries out phase place change.(but it is also possible to the code element of pilot frequency code element or control code element etc. is not carried out phase place change More, but in order to obtain diversity gain, phase place change is preferably performed.)

(embodiment C2)

In the present embodiment, illustrate to apply the constructive method of the base station of embodiment C1.

Figure 59 illustrates base station (broadcasting station) and the relation of terminal.Terminal P(5907) receive from base station A(5902A) The transmission signal 5903A that antenna 5904A sends and the transmission signal 5905A from antenna 5906A transmission, carries out the process specified, Obtain and receive data.

Terminal Q(5908) receive from base station A(5902A) antenna 5904A send transmission signal 5903A and from base station B (5902B) the transmission signal 5903B that antenna 5904B sends, carries out the process specified, it is thus achieved that receive data.

Figure 60 and Figure 61 represents, base station A(5902A) from antenna 5904A, antenna 5906A send transmission signal 5903A, Send the frequency distribution of signal 5905A, and base station B(5902B) from the transmission signal of antenna 5904B, antenna 5906B transmission 5903B, the frequency distribution of transmission signal 5905B.In the figure of Figure 60, Figure 61, with transverse axis as frequency, with the longitudinal axis for sending merit Rate.

As shown in Figure 60, base station A(5902A) send transmission signal 5903A, send signal 5905A and base station B (5902B) transmission signal 5903B, the transmission signal 5905B at least service band X and frequency band Y sent, utilizes frequency band X to carry out the 1st The data transmission of channel, it addition, utilize frequency band Y to carry out the data transmission of the 2nd channel.

Therefore, terminal P(5907) receive from base station A(5902A) antenna 5904A send transmission signal 5903A and from The transmission signal 5905A that antenna 5906A sends, extracts frequency band X, carries out the process specified, it is thus achieved that the data of the 1st channel.And, Terminal Q(5908) receive from base station A(5902A) antenna 5904A send transmission signal 5903A and from base station B(5902B) The transmission signal 5903B that antenna 5904B sends, extracts frequency band Y, carries out the process specified, it is thus achieved that the data of the 2nd channel.

Now base station A(5902A is described) and base station B(5902B) structure and action.

Base station A(5902A) and base station B(5902B) as all as illustrated by embodiment C1, possess at Figure 56 and figure The dispensing device constituted in 13.And, base station A(5902A) when being transmitted as Figure 60, on frequency band X, such as embodiment party As illustrated by formula C1, generate different 2 modulated signal (carrying out precoding, phase place change), respectively from the sky of Figure 59 Line 5904A and 5906A sends 2 modulated signals.On frequency band Y, base station A(5902A) in Figure 56, make interleaver 304A, reflect Penetrate portion 306A, weighting combining unit 308A and phase place changing unit 5201 and carry out action, generate modulated signal 5202, from the antenna of Figure 13 The antenna 5904A of 1310A, i.e. Figure 59 sends the transmission signal corresponding with modulated signal 5202.Equally, base station B(5902B) at figure In 56, make interleaver 304A, mapping portion 306A, weighting combining unit 308A and phase place changing unit 5201 carry out action, generate modulation Signal 5202, sends the transmission signal corresponding with modulated signal 5202 from the antenna 5904B of the antenna 1310A of Figure 13, i.e. Figure 59.

Further, about the data creating after the coding of frequency band Y, as shown in Figure 56, after coding can being individually created by base station Data, but the data after the coding that can also will be made by any one base station send other base station to.It addition, as other Method, it is also possible to generated modulated signal by any one base station, the modulated signal generated is passed to other base station.

It addition, in Figure 59, signal 5901 containing from sending mode (" sending same data " or " send different numbers According to ") relevant information, base station, by obtaining this signal, switches the generation method of modulated signal on each frequency band.Here, letter Numbers 5901 as shown in Figure 59, from other equipment or network input, but can also be such as, base station A(5902A) it is main Stand, to base station B(5902B) transmit the signal corresponding with signal 5901.

As description above, in the case of base station " sends different data ", set and its sending method phase The pre-coding matrix being suitable for and phase place variation, generate modulated signal.

On the other hand, in the case of " sending same data ", 2 base stations generate modulated signal respectively and send.Now, Each base station generates the modulated signal for sending from an antenna, and this is equivalent to, time at the same time in view of 2 base stations, at 2 bases In standing, set the pre-coding matrix of formula (52).Further, relevant phase place variation, as illustrated by embodiment C1 As, such as meet the condition of (No. 53).

It addition, the method that frequency band X and frequency band Y can also change transmission over time.Accordingly it is also possible to as Figure 61 that Sample, the elapsed time, frequency distribution as frequency distributing altering is Figure 61 as Figure 60.

By use present embodiment, for " sending same data " and " sending different data " any one in the case of, The effect of the receiving quality that can improve data can be obtained in receiving device, and in dispensing device, having can be real The advantage of sharedization of existing phase place changing unit.

It addition, although present embodiment is illustrated to use OFDM mode as sending method in case of, But be not restricted to that this, in the case of using the multi-carrier mode beyond OFDM mode, carrier way, it is also possible to similarly Implement.At this time it is also possible to employing spread spectrum communication mode.Further, in the case of using carrier way, phase place changes temporally Direction of principal axis carries out phase place change.

Further, as illustrated by embodiment 3, in the situation of the sending method of " sending different data " Under, it is assumed that only data symbols is carried out phase place change.But, sending out of " sending same data " illustrated in the present embodiment During delivery method, phase place change is not limited to data symbols, sends, to sending signal, the pilot frequency code element or control code inserted in frame The code element of unit etc. is also carried out phase place change.(but it is also possible to the code element of pilot frequency code element or control code element etc. is not carried out phase place change More, but in order to obtain diversity gain, phase place change is preferably performed.)

(embodiment C3)

In the present embodiment, illustrate to apply the constructive method of the repeater of embodiment C1.Further, repeater is sometimes Also referred to as relay station.

Figure 62 represents base station (broadcasting station), repeater and the relation of terminal.Base station 6201 as shown in Figure 63, at least sends frequency With X and the modulated signal of frequency band Y.Base station 6201 sends modulated signal respectively from antenna 6202A and antenna 6202B.Relevant now Sending method, Figure 63 will be used explained below.

Repeater A(6203A) to the reception signal 6205A received by reception antenna 6204A and by reception antenna 6206A The reception signal 6207A received implements the process of demodulation etc., it is thus achieved that receive data.And, in order to these reception data are transmitted To terminal, implement transmission and process, generate modulated signal 6209A and 6211A, send from antenna 6210A and 6212A respectively.

Equally, repeater B(6203B) to the reception signal 6205B received by reception antenna 6204B and by reception antenna The reception signal 6207B that 6206B receives implements the process of demodulation etc., it is thus achieved that receive data.And, in order to by these reception data It is transferred to terminal, implements transmission and process, generate modulated signal 6209B and 6211B, send from antenna 6210B and 6212B respectively. Further, set repeater B(6203B at this) as main repeater, export control signal 6208, repeater A(6203A) with this signal be Input.Also, it is not essential however to main repeater is set, it is also possible to by base station 6201 to repeater A(6203A), repeater B (6203B) control information is transmitted respectively.

Terminal P(5907) receive repeater A(6203A) modulated signal that sent, it is thus achieved that data.Terminal Q(5908) connect Receive repeater A(6203A) and repeater B(6203B) signal that sent, it is thus achieved that data.Terminal R(6213) receive repeater B (6203B) modulated signal sent, it is thus achieved that data.

The frequency distribution of the modulated signal that sending that Figure 63 represents that base station sends be in signal, sends from antenna 6202A with And the frequency distribution from the modulated signal of antenna 6202B transmission.In Figure 63, transverse axis is set to frequency, is set to the longitudinal axis send Power.

As shown in Figure 63, the modulated signal sent from antenna 6202A and the modulated signal sent from antenna 6202B at least make With frequency band X and frequency band Y, frequency band X is utilized to carry out the data transmission of the 1st channel, it addition, it is different with the 1st channel to utilize frequency band Y to carry out The 2nd channel data transmission.

And, the data of the 1st channel, as illustrated by embodiment C1, utilize frequency band X, " to send difference Data " pattern be transmitted.Therefore, as shown in Figure 63, from the modulated signal of antenna 6202A transmission and from antenna 6202B The modulated signal sent contains the composition of frequency band X.And, the composition of frequency band X is received by repeater A and repeater B.Thus, frequently Signal after mapping, as illustrated by embodiment 1, embodiment C1, be implemented to prelist by the modulated signal with X Code (weighting synthesis) and phase place change.

The data of the 2nd channel, in Figure 63, utilize the composition of the frequency band Y of the antenna 6202A transmission from Figure 62 to transmit number According to.And, the composition of frequency band Y is received by repeater A and repeater B.

Figure 64 represents, what repeater A, repeater B sent sends the antenna 6210A transmission from repeater A in signal Modulated signal 6209A, the frequency distribution of modulated signal 6211A sent from antenna 6212A, and the antenna from repeater B 6210B send modulated signal 6209B, from antenna 6212B send modulated signal 6211B frequency distribution.In Figure 64, will Transverse axis is set to frequency, and the longitudinal axis is set to transmit power.

As shown in Figure 64, modulated signal 6209A sent from antenna 6210A and the modulated signal sent from antenna 6212A 6211A at least service band X and frequency band Y, it addition, from antenna 6210B send modulated signal 6209B and send out from antenna 6212B Modulated signal 6211B sent at least service band X and frequency band Y, utilizes frequency band X, carries out the data transmission of the 1st channel, it addition, sharp Use frequency band Y, carry out the data transmission of the 2nd channel.

And, the data of the 1st channel are as illustrated by embodiment C1, and service band X, " to send difference Data " pattern be transmitted.Therefore, as shown in Figure 64, from modulated signal 6209A of antenna 6210A transmission and from antenna Modulated signal 6211A that 6212A sends contains the composition of frequency band X.And, the composition of frequency band X is received by terminal P.Equally, such as figure Shown in 64, modulated signal 6209B sent from antenna 6210B and modulated signal 6211B sent from antenna 6212B contain frequency band The composition of X.And, the composition of frequency band X is received by terminal R.Therefore, the modulated signal of frequency band X is such as embodiment 1, embodiment party As illustrated by formula C1, the signal after mapping is implemented precoding (weighting synthesis) and phase place changes.

The data of the 2nd channel are in Figure 64, by from the repeater A(6203A of Figure 62) antenna 6210A and repeater B (6203B) composition of the frequency band Y of the modulated signal that antenna 6210B sends is transmitted.Now, due to from the repeater of Figure 62 The composition of the frequency band Y of modulated signal 6209A that antenna 6210A A(6203A) sends and from repeater B(6203B) antenna The composition of the frequency band Y of modulated signal 6209B that 6210B sends, uses " sending same data " illustrated in embodiment C1 Sending mode.And, the composition of frequency band Y is received by terminal Q.

Below, use Figure 65 that the repeater A(6203A in Figure 62 is described) and repeater B(6203B) structure.

Figure 65 represents an example of the acceptance division of repeater and the structure of sending part, for similarly carrying out action with Figure 56 Part, gives identical symbol.Acceptance division 6203X is with the reception signal 6502a received by reception antenna 6501a and by receiving The reception signal 6502b that antenna 6501b receives is input, the composition of frequency band X is implemented signal processing (separation of signal or The process of synthesis, error correction decoding etc.), it is thus achieved that data 6204X transmitted by base station service band X, output it to dispenser 404, and obtain the information (letter of sending method when also acquisition repeater sends of the sending method comprised in control information Breath), output frame architecture signals 313.

Further, after acceptance division 6203X, it is for generating the process portion for the modulated signal sent on frequency band X.Separately Outward, relevant acceptance division, as shown in Figure 65, it is not only the acceptance division of frequency band X, is also provided additionally with the acceptance division of other frequency bands, In each acceptance division, possesses the process portion for generating the modulated signal for using this frequency band to send.

The action summary of dispenser 404 is identical with the action of dispenser in the base station of embodiment C2.

Repeater A(6203A) and repeater B(6203B) in the case of being transmitted as shown in Figure 64, in frequency band X, As illustrated by embodiment C1, generate different 2 modulated signal (implementing precoding, phase place change), relaying Device A(6203A) and repeater B(6203B) respectively antenna 6210A and 6212A from Figure 62 and the antenna 6210B from Figure 62 and 6212B sends 2 modulated signals.

In frequency band Y, repeater A(6203A) in Figure 65, corresponding to the signal processing part 6500 relevant to frequency band X The process portion relevant to frequency band Y 6500 in (6500 is the signal processing part relevant with frequency band X, but due to for frequency band Y also Possess same signal processing part, thus illustrate being paid the numbering added in 6500.), make interleaver 304A, mapping portion 306A, weighting combining unit 308A and phase place changing unit 5201 carry out action, generate modulated signal 5202, from the antenna of Figure 13 1310A, namely the antenna 6210A of Figure 62 sends the transmission signal corresponding with modulated signal 5202.Equally, repeater B (6203B) in Figure 62, the interleaver 304A on frequency band Y, mapping portion 306A, weighting combining unit 308A and phase place changing unit are made 5201 carry out action, generate modulated signal 5202, and from the antenna 1310A of Figure 13, namely the antenna 6210B of Figure 62 sends and adjusts The transmission signal of signal 5202 correspondence processed.

Further, base station as shown in Figure 66 (Figure 66 is the frame structure of modulated signal that base station sends, and transverse axis be the time, The longitudinal axis is frequency.), send the information that the phase place change of the information 6601 relevant with sending method and repeater enforcement is relevant 6602 and data symbols 6603, repeater is by obtaining the information 6601 relevant with sending method and the phase place with repeater enforcement Change relevant information 6602, it is possible to determine the method sending the phase place change that signal is implemented.It addition, sent in base station In the case of signal does not comprises information 6602 relevant with the phase place change that repeater is implemented in Figure 66, as shown in Figure 62, also Can be with repeater B(6203B) become main frame, to repeater A(6203A) send the instruction of phase place variation.

As description above, in the case of repeater " sends different data ", set and its sending method Corresponding pre-coding matrix and phase place variation, generate modulated signal.

On the other hand, in the case of " sending same data ", 2 repeaters generate modulated signal respectively, and carry out sending out Send.Now, each repeater generates and is used for when the modulated signal that an antenna sends is equivalent to consider at the same time 2 repeaters, In 2 repeaters, set the pre-coding matrix of formula (52).Further, relevant phase place variation, such as embodiment C1 As illustrated by, such as, meet the condition of (numerical expression 53).

It addition, as illustrated by embodiment C1, it is also possible to picture frequency band X is such, and base station, repeater are all from 2 Root antenna sends modulated signal respectively, sends same data from 2 antennas.About now base station and the action of repeater, as As illustrated by embodiment C1.

By using present embodiment, for " sending same data " and " sending different data " any one situation, Can be in receiving device, it is thus achieved that the effect of the receiving quality of data can be improved, and in dispensing device, having can be real The advantage of sharedization of existing phase place changing unit.

It addition, although present embodiment is illustrated to use OFDM mode as sending method in case of, But be not restricted to that this, in the case of using the multi-carrier mode beyond OFDM mode, carrier way, it is also possible to similarly Implement.At this time it is also possible to employing spread spectrum communication mode.Further, in the case of using carrier way, phase place change will be on time Between direction of principal axis carry out phase place change.

Further, as illustrated by embodiment 3, in the situation of the sending method of " sending different data " Under, only data symbols is carried out phase place change.But, the sender of " sending same data " illustrated in the present embodiment During method, phase place change is not limited to data symbols, also transmission signal is sent the pilot frequency code element inserted in frame or controls code element Deng code element carry out phase place change.(but it is also possible to the code element of pilot frequency code element or control code element etc. is not carried out phase place change, But in order to obtain diversity gain, preferably perform phase place change.)

(embodiment C4)

In the present embodiment, will for the phase place variation illustrated with in " embodiment 1 ", " other supplement " not Same phase place variation, illustrates.

In embodiment 1, as the example of pre-coding matrix, it is provided that formula (36), in other supplement, as in advance The example of encoder matrix, it is provided that formula (50).And, in embodiment A1, at Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, figure 29, in the phase place changing unit of Figure 51 and Figure 53, as the phase place change value needed for cycle N (at Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, figure 25, in Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53, owing to only a baseband signal to be given phase place change, thus phase place change value is become.), table Be now PHASE [i] (i=0,1,2, N-2, N-1(i are the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)).And, in this explanation In book, in the case of the baseband signal after a precoding is carried out phase place change (i.e. Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, In Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53), only baseband signal z2' after precoding is imparted phase place change.Now, PHASE is given as follows [k]。

[numerical expression 54]

Now, if k=0,1,2, N-2, N-1(k are the integer of more than 0 and below N-1).

So, in receiving device, particularly when radio propagation environment is LOS environment, it is possible to obtain and improve data The effect of receiving quality.Its reason is, under LOS environment, when not carrying out phase place change, is stable phase relation, but by In carrying out phase place change, and carry out the change of phase relation, therefore avoid the sudden situation degenerated of communication environments.Separately Outward, as the method different with formula (54), it is also possible to give PHASE [k] as follows.

[numerical expression 55]

Now, if k=0,1,2, N-2, N-1(k are the integer of more than 0 and below N-1).

It addition, as other phase place variation, it is also possible to give PHASE [k] as follows.

[numerical expression 56]

Now, if k=0,1,2, N-2, N-1(k are the integer of more than 0 and below N-1) and, Z is fixed value.

It addition, as other phase place variation, it is also possible to give PHASE [k] as follows.

[numerical expression 57]

Now, if k=0,1,2, N-2, N-1(k are the integer of less than 0 and below N-1) and, Z is fixed value.

As above, can change by carrying out phase place as the present embodiment, it is thus achieved that receive device and can obtain good The probability of receiving quality increases such effect.

The phase place change of present embodiment is not limited to the application to carrier way, the most also Can apply.Therefore, for for example with spread spectrum communication mode, OFDM mode, SC-FDMA, SC-OFDM mode, non-patent literary composition Offer the situation of the wavelet OFDM mode etc. shown in 7 grades, it is also possible to similarly implement.As it was previously stated, in the present embodiment, make For carrying out the explanation of phase place change, the most temporally t direction of principal axis carries out phase place change, but identical with embodiment 1, Ke Yihe Carry out when phase place changes same by frequency axis direction, say, that in the present embodiment, the phase place change on t direction In explanation, by t being replaced into f(f: frequency ((sub) carrier wave)), and phase place change application illustrated in present embodiment Phase place in frequency direction changes.It addition, the phase place variation of present embodiment is identical with the explanation of embodiment 1, for Phase place change to T/F direction also is able to application.If it addition, phase place variation illustrated in present embodiment is full Content shown in foot embodiment A1, then in receiving device, it is possible to the probability obtaining good data quality is higher.

(embodiment C5)

In the present embodiment, the phase illustrated with in " embodiment 1 ", " other supplement " and " embodiment C4 " is described The phase place variation that position variation is different.

In embodiment 1, as the example of pre-coding matrix, it is provided that formula (36), in other supplement, as in advance The example of encoder matrix, it is provided that formula (50).And, in embodiment A1, at Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, figure 29, in the phase place changing unit of Figure 51 and Figure 53, as the phase place change value needed for cycle N (at Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, figure 25, in Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53, owing to only a baseband signal to be given phase place change, so becoming phase place change value.), table Be now PHASE [i] (i=0,1,2, N-2, N-1(i are the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)).And, in this explanation In book, in the case of the baseband signal after a precoding is carried out phase place change (i.e. Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53), only baseband signal z2' after precoding is imparted phase place change.

In present embodiment, the feature of phase place variation is, is expressed as cycle N=2N+1.And, for N performance period =2N+1 and the different phase place change value for preparing is N+1.And, among N+1 different phase place change value, n phase place Change value uses 2 times within 1 cycle respectively, and 1 phase place change value uses 1 time, thus N=2N+1 performance period.Below, right Phase place change value in now is described in detail.

The N+1 being set to the switching phase place variation of phase place change value regularly of N=2N+1 performance period and need Individual different phase place change value is PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [i], PHASE [N-1], PHASE [n] (i=0,1,2, n-2, n-1, n(i are the integer of above 0 and below n)).Now, N+1 difference it is expressed as Phase place change value PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [i], PHASE [N-1], the example of PHASE [n] Son.

[numerical expression 58]

Now, if k=0,1,2, n-2, n-1, n(k are the integer of more than 0 and below n).By at formula (58) different for N+1 phase place change value PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [i], PHASE [N- 1], PHASE [n] uses 1 PHASE [0], and use 2 PHASE [1]～PHASE [n] (to use 2 PHASE respectively [1], 2 PHASE [2] are used, use 2 PHASE [N-1], use 2 PHASE [n]), become cycle N=2N+1 Regularly switch phase place change value phase place variation such that it is able to switch with less phase place change value implementation rule The phase place variation of phase place change value, receives device and is obtained in that good data receiver quality.Because phase place to be prepared Change value is less, it is possible to obtain the effect that can reduce dispensing device, receive device.As above, in receiving device, especially It is that radio propagation environment is when being LOS environment, it is possible to obtain the effect of the receiving quality improving data.Its reason is, at LOS environment Under, when not carrying out phase place change, it is stable phase relation, but owing to performing phase place change, and carried out phase relation Change, therefore avoids the sudden situation degenerated of communication environments.It addition, as and the different method of formula (58), it is also possible to Give PHASE [k] as follows.

[numerical expression 59]

Now, if k=0,1,2, n-2, n-1, n(k are the integer of more than 0 and below n).

By phase places change value PHASE [0] different for the N+1 at formula (59), PHASE [1], PHASE [i], PHASE [N-1], PHASE [n] use 1 PHASE [0], and use respectively 2 PHASE [1]～ PHASE [n] (use 2 PHASE [1], use 2 PHASE [2], use 2 PHASE [N-1], use 2 times PHASE [n]), and become the phase place variation switching phase place change value regularly of cycle N=2N+1 such that it is able to relatively The phase place variation of few phase place change value implementation rule ground switching phase place change value, receives device and is obtained in that good number According to receiving quality.Because phase place change value to be prepared is less, it is possible to obtain the effect that can reduce dispensing device, receive device Really.

It addition, as method for distinguishing, it is also possible to give PHASE [k] as follows.

[numerical expression 60]

Now, if k=0,1,2, n-2, n-1, n(k are the integer of more than 0 and below n) and, Z is set to fixed value.

By phase places change value PHASE [0] different for the N+1 at formula (60), PHASE [1], PHASE [i], PHASE [N-1], PHASE [n] use 1 PHASE [0], and use respectively 2 PHASE [1]～ PHASE [n] (use 2 PHASE [1], use 2 PHASE [2], use 2 PHASE [N-1], use 2 times PHASE [n]), and become the phase place variation changing phase place change value regularly of cycle N=2N+1 such that it is able to relatively The phase place variation of few phase place change value implementation rule ground switching phase place change value, receives device and is obtained in that good number According to receiving quality.Because phase place change value to be prepared is less, it is possible to obtain the effect that can reduce dispensing device, receive device Really.

It addition, as method for distinguishing, it is also possible to give PHASE [k] as follows.

[numerical expression 61]

Now, if k=0,1,2, n-2, n-1, n(k are the integer of more than 0 and below n) and, Z is set to fixed value.

By phase places change value PHASE [0] different for the N+1 at formula (61), PHASE [1], PHASE [i], PHASE [N-1], PHASE [n] use 1 PHASE [0], and use respectively 2 PHASE [1]～ PHASE [n] (use 2 PHASE [1], use 2 PHASE [2], use 2 PHASE [N-1], use 2 times PHASE [n]), and become the phase place variation switching phase place change value regularly of cycle N=2N+1, can be with relatively with this The phase place variation of few phase place change value implementation rule ground switching phase place change value, receives device and is obtained in that good number According to receiving quality.Because phase place change value to be prepared is less, it is possible to obtain the effect that can reduce dispensing device, receive device Really.

As above, by implementing phase place change as the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain reception device and can obtain good The effect that the probability of receiving quality increases.

The phase place of present embodiment changes and is not limited to the application to carrier way, in case of multi-carrier transmission, It also is able to application.Therefore, for for example with spread spectrum communication mode, OFDM mode, SC-FDMA, SC-OFDM mode, non-patent The situation of the wavelet OFDM mode etc. shown in document 7 grade, it is also possible to similarly implement.As it was previously stated, in the present embodiment, As carrying out the explanation of phase place change, the most temporally t direction of principal axis carries out phase place change, but identical with embodiment 1, permissible Same with when changing by frequency axis direction execution phase place, say, that in the present embodiment, the phase place change on t direction Explanation in, by t being replaced into f(f: frequency ((sub) carrier wave)), and should phase place change illustrated in present embodiment Phase place for frequency direction changes.It addition, the phase place variation of present embodiment is identical with the explanation of embodiment 1, It also is able to application in the phase place change in T/F direction.

(embodiment C6)

In the present embodiment, describing the situation using following phase place variation in detail, this phase place variation is the most non- Shown in patent documentation 12～non-patent literature 15, use QC(Quasi Cyclic) LDPC(Low-Density Prity- Check) code (but it is also possible to not being QC-LDPC code but LDPC(block) code), LDPC code and BCH code (Bose- Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code) the block code connecting code etc. and Turbo code or Duo-Binary Turbo During the block code of Code etc., the particularly phase place variation switching phase place change value regularly described in embodiment C5. Here, as an example, illustrate in case of 2 streams sending s1, s2.But, compile when using block code symbol During code, it is not necessary to during control information etc., the bit number constituting the block after coding and the bit number constituting block code (but it is also possible to Contain that control information described below etc. wherein.) consistent.When using block code to encode, need control information etc. (such as, CRC(cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameter etc.) time, the bit number constituting the block after coding is sometimes Constitute the bit number sum of bit number and the control information etc. of block code.

When Figure 34 is to represent use block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number.Figure 34 is shown in the dispensing device of such as Fig. 4, sends 2 streams of s1, s2, and " representing when dispensing device has 1 encoder When using block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number ".(now, as transmission side Formula, it would however also be possible to employ single carrier transmission, any one of that multi-carrier transmission of OFDM.)

As shown in figure 34, the bit number of the block after constituting 1 coding in block code is set to 6000 bits.In order to send this 6000 bits, need 3000 code elements when modulation system is QPSK, need 1500 code elements during 16QAM, need 1000 yards during 64QAM Unit.

And, in the dispensing device of Fig. 4, because to send 2 streams simultaneously, so when modulation system is QPSK, front S1 is distributed 1500 code elements by 3000 code elements stated, and s2 distributes 1500 code elements, therefore to send 1500 code elements sent by s1 With 1500 code elements sent by s2, need 1500 time slots (named at this " time slot ").

If similarly considering, when modulation system is 16QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 1 coding Need 750 time slots, when modulation system is 64QAM, need 500 time slots to send the whole bits constituting 1 piece.

Below, the relation in the method changing phase place regularly, between time slot as defined above and phase place is described.

Here, by prepared for the method changing phase place regularly in cycle 5 phase place change value (or phase place change Set) number be set to 5.It is to say, the phase place changing unit of the dispensing device for Fig. 4,5 phases needed for the preparatory period 5 Position change value (or phase place change set).But, as described in embodiment C5, different phase place change values exists 3.From And, among 5 phase place change values needed for the cycle 5, there is identical phase place change value.(as Fig. 6, only to prelisting In the case of baseband signal z2' after Ma carries out phase place change, in order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, as long as preparing 5 phase places Change is worth.It addition, as Figure 26, the both sides of baseband signal z1' after precoding and z2' are carried out phase place change In the case of, for 1 time slot, need 2 phase place change values.These 2 phase place change values are referred to as phase place change set.Therefore, this In the case of Zhong, in order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, gather as long as preparing 5 phase place changes).By 5 needed for the cycle 5 Individual phase place change value (or phase place change set) is expressed as P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4].

Below, illustrate in the method changing phase place regularly, time slot as defined above and the relation of phase place.

When modulation system is QPSK, bit number 6000 bit above-mentioned for sending the block after constituting 1 coding In 1500 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [1] to need It is 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [3] to need It is 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 300 time slots.Its reason is, if in the phase place change value used Middle there is imbalance, then become and employ the data receiver quality that the impact of greater number of phase place change value is bigger.

Equally, when modulation system is 16QAM, at bit number 6000 bit for sending the block after constituting 1 coding Above-mentioned 750 time slots in, use phase place change value P [0] time slot need to be 150 time slots, use phase place change value P [1] time Gap needs to be 150 time slots, use phase place change value P [2] time slot need to be 150 time slots, use phase place change value P [3] time Gap needs to be 150 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 150 time slots.

Equally, when modulation system is 64QAM, at bit number 6000 bit for sending the block after constituting 1 coding Above-mentioned 500 time slots in, use phase place change value P [0] time slot need to be 100 time slots, use phase place change value P [1] time Gap needs to be 100 time slots, use phase place change value P [2] time slot need to be 100 time slots, use phase place change value P [3] time Gap needs to be 100 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 100 time slots.

As above, in the phase place variation of the phase place change value of switching regularly described in embodiment C5, it is being set to use In phase place change value P [0] of N=2N+1 performance period, P [1], P [2N-1], P [2n] (wherein, P [0], P [1], P [2N-1], P [2n] by PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-1], PHASE [n] is constituted.(seeing embodiment C5)) time, when the bit of the block sent after all constituting 1 coding, become using phase place The timeslot number being more worth P [0] is set to K₀, the timeslot number using phase place change value P [1] is set to K₁, using phase place change value P [i] Timeslot number be set to K_i(i=0,1,2,2n-1,2n(i are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n)), become using phase place The timeslot number being more worth P [2n] is set to K_2n, now,

＜ condition #C01 ＞

K₀=K₁==K_i==K_2n, say, that K_a=K_b, (, wherein, a, b= 0,1,2,2n-1,2n(a are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below 2n), a ≠ b)

In the phase place variation of the phase place change value of switching regularly described in embodiment C5, for performance period Different phase place change value PHASE [0] of N=2N+1, PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-1], PHASE In [n], when the bit of the block sent after all constituting 1 coding, the timeslot number using phase place change value PHASE [0] is set For G₀, the timeslot number using phase place change value PHASE [1] is set to G₁, the timeslot number using phase place change value PHASE [i] is set For G_i(i=0,1,2, n-1, n(i are the integer of more than 0 and below n)), using phase place change value PHASE [n] Timeslot number is set to G_n, now, ＜ condition #C01 ＞ can be such as expression of getting off.

＜ condition #C02 ＞

2×G₀=G₁==G_i==G_n, say, that 2 × G₀=G_a, (, wherein, a=1, 2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n))

And, support multiple modulation systems in communication system, in the case of the modulation system supported selects to use, In the modulation system supported, (＜ condition #C02 ＞ sets up ＜ condition #C01 ＞.

But, in the case of supporting multiple modulation systems, in general, according to each modulation system, it is possible to sent out by 1 code element The bit number sent is different (according to circumstances, it is also possible to identical.), difference according to circumstances, occasionally there are and can not meet ＜ condition # The modulation system of C01 ＞ (＜ condition #C02 ＞).In this case, replace ＜ condition #C01 ＞, and meet following condition i.e. Can.

＜ condition #C03 ＞

K_aAnd K_bDifference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_a―K_b| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2,2n-1,2n(a are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n, b It is the integer of more than 0 and below 2n), a ≠ b)

If otherwise expressing ＜ condition #C03 ＞, then become following condition.

＜ condition #C04 ＞

G_aAnd G_bDifference be 0 or 1 or 2, say, that | G_a―G_b| it is 0 or 1 or 2

(Wherein, a, b=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n, and b is 1 Above and the integer of below n), a ≠ b), and,

2×G₀And G_aDifference be 0 or 1 or 2, say, that | 2 × G₀―G_a| it is 0 or 1 or 2

(Wherein, a=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n))

When Figure 35 is to represent use block code, the code element number required for block after 2 codings, the figure of the change of timeslot number.Figure 35 is as shown in the dispensing device of Fig. 3 and the dispensing device of Figure 12, sends 2 streams of s1, s2, and dispensing device has 2 " representing when using block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number " during encoder.(this Time, as transmission means, any one of that multi-carrier transmission of single carrier transmission, OFDM can be used.)

As shown in figure 35, the bit number of the block after the composition in block code 1 being encoded is set to 6000 bits.In order to send this 6000 bits, need 3000 code elements when modulation system is QPSK, need 1500 code elements during 16QAM, need 1000 yards during 64QAM Unit.

And, in the dispensing device of Fig. 3 and the dispensing device of Figure 12, because send 2 streams simultaneously, and there are 2 Encoder, so transmitting different code blocks by 2 streams.Therefore, when modulation system is QPSK, by s1, s2 same 2 encoding blocks are sent in interval, so, such as, send the block after the 1st coding by s1, send the 2nd encoding block by s2, because of This needs 3000 time slots for the block after sending the 1st, the 2nd coding.

If similarly considering, when modulation system is 16QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 2 codings Need 1500 time slots, when modulation system is 64QAM, need 1000 time slots to send the whole bits constituting 2 pieces.

Below, the relation in the method changing phase place regularly, between time slot as defined above and phase place is described.

Here, the phase place change value that the method changing phase place regularly for the cycle 5 is prepared (or phase place change Set) number be set to 5.It is to say, for the phase place changing unit of Fig. 4 dispensing device, 5 phase places needed for the preparatory period 5 Change value (or phase place change set).But, as described in embodiment C5, different phase place change values exists 3.From And, among 5 phase place change values needed for the cycle 5, there is identical phase place change value.(as Fig. 6, only to prelisting In the case of baseband signal z2' after Ma carries out phase place change, in order to the phase place in the cycle of carrying out 5 changes, prepare 5 phase place changes It is worth.It addition, as Figure 26, the both sides of baseband signal z1' after precoding and z2' are carried out the situation of phase place change Under, for 1 time slot, need 2 phase place change values.These 2 phase place change values are referred to as phase place change set.Therefore, this feelings Under condition, in order to the phase place in the cycle of carrying out 5 changes, prepare 5 phase place changes and gather).5 phase places needed for cycle 5 are become More value (or phase place change set) is expressed as P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4].

When modulation system is QPSK, at bit number 6000 × 2 bit for sending the block after constituting 2 codings State in 3000 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 600 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [1] to need It is 600 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 600 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [3] to need It is 600 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 600 time slots.Its reason is, if in the phase place change used Value exists imbalance, then becomes and employ the data receiver quality that the impact of greater number of phase place change value is bigger.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use phase place change value P [0] time slot need to be 600 times, use phase place The time slot of change value P [1] needs to be 600 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 600 times, uses phase place change The time slot of value P [3] needs to be 600 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 600 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd Encoding block, the time slot using phase place change value P [0] is 600 times, and the time slot using phase place change value P [1] is 600 times, uses phase The time slot of position change value P [2] is 600 times, and the time slot using phase place change value P [3] is 600 times, uses phase place change value P [4] Time slot be 600 times.

Equally, when modulation system is 16QAM, at bit number 6000 × 2 ratio for sending the block after constituting 2 codings In special above-mentioned 1500 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 300 time slots, use phase place change value P [1] Time slot needs to be 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 300 time slots, uses phase place change value P [3] Time slot needs to be 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 300 time slots.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 300 times, phase place is used to become The time slot being more worth P [1] needs to be 300 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 300 times, uses phase place change value P [3] time slot needs to be 300 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value to need to be 300 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd encoding block, The time slot using phase place change value P [0] is 300 times, and the time slot using phase place change value P [1] is 300 times, uses phase place change The time slot of value P [2] is 300 times, and the time slot using phase place change value P [3] is 300 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] It it is 300 times.

Equally, when modulation system is 64QAM, at bit number 6000 × 2 ratio for sending the block after constituting 2 codings In special above-mentioned 1000 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 200 time slots, use phase place change value P [1] Time slot needs to be 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 200 time slots, uses phase place change value P [3] Time slot needs to be 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 200 time slots.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 200 times, phase place is used to become The time slot being more worth P [1] needs to be 200 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 200 times, uses phase place change value P [3] time slot needs to be 200 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 200 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd coding Block, the time slot using phase place change value P [0] is 200 times, and the time slot using phase place change value P [1] is 200 times, uses phase place to become The time slot being more worth P [2] is 200 times, use phase place change value P [3] time slot be 200 times, use phase place change value P [4] time Gap is 200 times.

As above, in the phase place variation of the phase place change value of switching regularly described in embodiment C5, it is being set to use In phase place change value P [0] of N=2N+1 performance period, P [1], P [2N-1], P [2n] (wherein, P [0], P [1], P [2N-1], P [2n] by PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-1], PHASE [n] is constituted.(seeing embodiment C5)) time, when the bit of the block sent after all constituting 2 codings, become using phase place The timeslot number being more worth P [0] is set to K₀, the timeslot number using phase place change value P [1] is set to K₁, using phase place change value P [i] Timeslot number be set to K_i(i=0,1,2,2n-1,2n(i are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n)), become using phase place The timeslot number being more worth P [2n] is set to K_2n, now,

＜ condition #C05 ＞

K₀=K₁==K_i==K_2n, say, that K_a=K_b, (, wherein, a, b= 0,1,2,2n-1,2n(a are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below 2n), a ≠ b)

When the bit of the block sent after all constituting the 1st coding, the number of times using phase place change value P [0] is set to K_0,1, the number of times using phase place change value P [1] is set to K_1,1, the number of times using phase place change value P [i] is set to K_{I, 1}(i=0, 1,2,2n-1,2n(i are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n)), the number of times using phase place change value P [2n] is set to K_{2n, 1}, now,

＜ condition #C06 ＞

K_0,1=K_1,1==K_{I, 1}==K_{2n, 1}, say, that K_{A, 1}=K_{B, 1}, ( Its In, a, b=0,1,2,2n-1,2n(a are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below 2n) and, a ≠ b)

When the bit of the block sent after all constituting the 2nd coding, the number of times using phase place change value P [0] is set to K_0,2, the number of times using phase place change value P [1] is set to K_1,2, the number of times using phase place change value P [i] is set to K_{I, 2}(i=0, 1,2,2n-1,2n(i are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n)), the number of times using phase place change value P [2n] is set to K_{2n, 2}, now,

＜ condition #C07 ＞

K_0,2=K_1,2==K_{I, 2}==K_{2n, 2}, say, that K_{A, 2}=K_{B, 2}, ( Its In, a, b=0,1,2,2n-1,2n(a are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below 2n) and, a ≠ b).

In the phase place variation of the phase place change value of switching regularly described in embodiment C5, for performance period Different phase place change value PHASE [0] of N=2N+1, PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-1], PHASE In [n], when the bit of the block sent after all constituting 2 codings, the timeslot number using phase place change value PHASE [0] is set For G₀, the timeslot number using phase place change value PHASE [1] is set to G₁, the timeslot number using phase place change value PHASE [i] is set For G_i(i=0,1,2, n-1, n(i are the integer of more than 0 and below n)), using phase place change value PHASE [n] Timeslot number is set to G_n, now, ＜ condition #C05 ＞ can be such as expression of getting off.

＜ condition #C08 ＞

2×G₀=G₁==G_i==G_n, say, that 2 × G₀=G_a, (Wherein, a=1, 2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n))

When the bit of the block sent after all constituting the 1st coding, the number of times using phase place change value PHASE [0] is set For G_0,1, the number of times using phase place change value PHASE [1] is set to K_1,1, the number of times using phase place change value PHASE [i] is set For G_{I, 1}(i=0,1,2, n-1, n(i are the integer of more than 0 and below n)), using phase place change value PHASE [n] Number of times be set to G_{N, 1}, now,

＜ condition #C09 ＞

2×G_0,1=G_1,1==G_{I, 1}==G_{N, 1}, say, that 2 × G_0,1=G_{A, 1}, (Its In, a=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n))

When the bit of the block sent after all constituting the 2nd coding, the number of times using phase place change value PHASE [0] is set For G_0,2, the number of times using phase place change value PHASE [1] is set to G_1,2, the number of times using phase place change value PHASE [i] is set For G_{I, 2}(i=0,1,2, n-1, n(i are the integer of more than 0 and below n)), using phase place change value PHASE [n] Number of times be set to G_{N, 2}, now,

＜ condition #C10 ＞

2×G_0,2=G_1,2==G_{I, 2}==G_{N, 2}, say, that 2 × G_0,2=G_{A, 2}, (Its In, a=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n))

And, support multiple modulation systems in communication system, in the case of the modulation system supported selects to use, In the modulation system supported, ＜ condition #C05 ＞ ＜ condition #C06 ＞ ＜ condition #C07 ＞ (＜ condition #C08 ＞ ＜ condition # C09 ＞ ＜ condition #C10 ＞ sets up.

But, in the case of supporting multiple modulation systems, in general, according to each modulation system, it is possible to sent out by 1 code element The bit number sent is different (according to circumstances, it is also possible to identical.), difference according to circumstances, occasionally there are and can not meet ＜ condition # The C05 ＞ ＜ condition #C06 ＞ ＜ condition #C07 ＞ (modulation system of ＜ condition #C08 ＞ ＜ condition #C09 ＞ ＜ condition #C10 ＞. In this case, replace ＜ condition #C05 ＞ ＜ condition #C06 ＞ ＜ condition #C07 ＞, and meet following condition.

＜ condition #C11 ＞

K_aAnd K_bDifference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_a―K_b| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2,2n-1,2n(a are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n, b Be the integer of more than 0 and below 2n), a ≠ b)

＜ condition #C12 ＞

K_{A, 1}And K_{B, 1}Difference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_{A, 1}―K_{B, 1}| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2,2n-1,2n(a are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n, b It is the integer of more than 0 and below 2n), a ≠ b)

＜ condition #C13 ＞

K_{A, 2}And K_{B, 2}Difference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_{A, 2}―K_{B, 2}| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2,2n-1,2n(a are the integer of more than 0 and below 2n, b It is the integer of more than 0 and below 2n), a ≠ b)

If otherwise expressing ＜ condition #C11 ＞ ＜ condition #C12 ＞ ＜ condition #C13 ＞, then become following bar Part.

＜ condition #C14 ＞

G_aAnd G_bDifference be 0 or 1 or 2, say, that | G_a―G_b| it is 0 or 1 or 2

(Wherein, a, b=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n, b be 1 with Go up and the integer of below n), a ≠ b) and

2×G₀And G_aDifference be 0 or 1 or 2, say, that | 2 × G₀―G_a| it is 0 or 1 or 2

(Wherein, a=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n))

＜ condition #C15 ＞

G_{A, 1}And G_{B, 1}Difference be 0 or 1 or 2, say, that | G_{A, 1}―G_{B, 1}| it is 0 or 1 or 2

(Wherein, a, b=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n, b be 1 with Go up and the integer of below n), a ≠ b), and

2×G_0,1And G_{A, 1}Difference be 0 or 1 or 2, say, that | 2 × G_0,1―G_{A, 1}| it is 0 or 1 or 2

(Wherein, a=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n))

＜ condition #C16 ＞

G_{A, 2}And G_{B, 2}Difference be 0 or 1 or 2, say, that | G_{A, 2}―G_{B, 2}| it is 0 or 1 or 2

(Wherein, a, b=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n, b be 1 with Go up and the integer of below n), a ≠ b), and

2×G_0,2And G_{A, 2}Difference be 0 or 1 or 2, say, that | 2 × G_0,2―G_{A, 2}| it is 0 or 1 or 2

(Wherein, a=1,2, n-1, n(a are the integer of more than 1 and below n))

As above, by the block after coding is associated, in the phase used to transmit encoding block with the foundation of phase place change value Uneven disappearance in the change value of position, it is possible in receiving device, it is thus achieved that improve the effect of the receiving quality of data.

In the present embodiment, in the method changing phase place regularly, for the phase place variation of cycle N, need N Individual phase place change value (or phase place change set).Now, as N number of phase place change value (or phase place change set), P is prepared [0], P [1], P [2], P [N-2], P [N-1], but also have on frequency axis direction, press P [0], P [1], P [2], P [N-2], the tactic method of P [N-1], but be not necessarily limited to this, it is also possible to by making N number of phase Position change value (or phase place change set) P [0], P [1], P [2], P [N-2], P [N-1] identical with embodiment 1, The block of time shaft, frequency-time axle is configured code element, changes phase place.Further, illustrate the phase place variation of cycle N, but Even if being the N number of phase place change value of random use (or phase place change set), it is also possible to obtain same effect, say, that It is not necessary to use N number of phase place change value (or phase place change set) in the way of possessing the cycle of rule, receiving dress In putting, in order to obtain higher data receiver quality, it is important to meet condition stated above.

Alternatively, it is also possible to Existential Space multiplexed MIMO transmission means, pre-coding matrix are fixing MIMO transmission mode, sky Time block coding mode, only sending 1 stream and change the pattern of method of phase place regularly, dispensing device (broadcasting station, base station) can To select any one sending method from these modes.

Further, so-called spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means refers to as shown in non-patent literature 3, respectively from different skies Line sends signal s1, s2 that the modulation system to select maps, and the MIMO transmission mode that so-called pre-coding matrix is fixing refers to , only implement precoding (not performing phase place change).It addition, so-called space-time block coding mode refer to non-patent literature 9, 16, the transmission means shown in 17.1 stream of so-called only transmission refers to the signal s1 mapping the modulation system to select Carry out the process specified, and the method sent from antenna.

It addition, use the transmission means of multicarrier as OFDM, as the 1st carrier group being made up of multiple carrier waves, by 2nd carrier group different with the 1st carrier group that multiple carrier waves are constituted, like that, is realized multicarrier biography by multiple carrier groups Defeated, it is also possible to by each carrier group, it is set as that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, pre-coding matrix are fixing MIMO transmission side Formula, space-time block coding mode, only send 1 stream and change any one of method of phase place regularly, particularly, just have selected rule For then changing (sub) carrier group after the method for phase place, preferably implement present embodiment.

Further, in the case of the baseband signal after a precoding is carried out phase place change, such as by the phase place of P [i] When change value is set to " X radian ", in the phase place changing unit of Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53, will e^jXIt is multiplied with baseband signal z2' after precoding.And, in the feelings that the baseband signal after two precodings is carried out phase place change Under condition, such as when the phase place change set of P [i] being set to " X radian " and " Y radian ", at Figure 26, Figure 27, Figure 28, Figure 52 and figure In the phase place changing unit of 54, by e^jXIt is multiplied with baseband signal z2' after precoding, by e^jYWith baseband signal z1' after precoding It is multiplied.

(embodiment C7)

In the present embodiment, illustrate as shown in non-patent literature 12～non-patent literature 15, use QC(Quasi Cyclic) LDPC(Low-Density Prity-Check) code (but it is also possible to not being QC-LDPC code but LDPC(block) Code), LDPC code and BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code) connect the block code of code etc., Turbo code or During the block code of person Duo-Binary Turbo Code etc., make the situation after embodiment A1, embodiment C6 vague generalization.? This, as an example, illustrate in case of 2 streams sending s1, s2.But, when using block code to encode, no When needing control information etc., constitute the bit number of the block after coding and constitute the bit number of block code (but it is also possible to contain wherein There is that control information described below etc..) consistent.When using block code to encode, need (such as, the CRC such as control information (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameter etc.) time, the bit number constituting the block after coding is to constitute block code sometimes Bit number and the bit number sum of control information etc..

When Figure 34 is to represent use block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number.Figure 34 is shown in the dispensing device of such as Fig. 4, sends 2 streams of s1, s2, and " representing when dispensing device has 1 encoder When using block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number ".(now, as transmission means, Can use single carrier transmission, OFDM that multi-carrier transmission any one.)

As shown in figure 34, the bit number of the block after the composition in block code 1 being encoded is set to 6000 bits.In order to send this 6000 bits, need 3000 code elements when modulation system is QPSK, need 1500 code elements during 16QAM, need 1000 yards during 64QAM Unit.

And, in the dispensing device of Fig. 4, owing to sending 2 streams simultaneously, so when modulation system is QPSK, aforementioned 3000 code elements s1 is distributed 1500 code elements, s2 is distributed 1500 code elements, therefore to send 1500 code elements that sent by s1 and 1500 code elements sent by s2, need 1500 time slots (named at this " time slot ".).

If similarly considering, when modulation system is 16QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 1 coding Need 750 time slots, when modulation system is 64QAM, need 500 time slots to send the whole bits constituting 1 piece.

Below, the relation in the method changing phase place regularly, between time slot as defined above and phase place is described.

Here, by prepared for the method changing phase place regularly in cycle 5 phase place change value (or phase place change Set) number be set to 5.Phase place change value (or the phase place that will be prepared for the method changing phase place regularly in cycle 5 Change set) it is set to P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4].But, in P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4], as long as At least contain more than 2 different phase place changes to be worth and (can also contain phase in P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4] Same phase place change value.).(as Fig. 6, in the case of only baseband signal z2' after precoding being carried out phase place change, In order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, it is worth as long as preparing 5 phase place changes.It addition, as Figure 26, to precoding After baseband signal z1' and in the case of the both sides of z2' carry out phase place change, for 1 time slot, need 2 phase place change values.Will These 2 phase place change values are referred to as phase place change set.Therefore, in this case, in order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, as long as Prepare 5 phase place changes to gather).

When modulation system is QPSK, bit number 6000 bit above-mentioned for sending the block after constituting 1 coding In 1500 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [1] to need It is 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [3] to need It is 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 300 time slots.Its reason is, if in the phase place change value used Middle there is imbalance, then become and employ the data receiver quality that the impact of greater number of phase place change value is bigger.

Equally, when modulation system is 16QAM, at bit number 6000 bit for sending the block after constituting 1 coding Above-mentioned 750 time slots in, use phase place change value P [0] time slot need to be 150 time slots, use phase place change value P [1] time Gap needs to be 150 time slots, use phase place change value P [2] time slot need to be 150 time slots, use phase place change value P [3] time Gap needs to be 150 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 150 time slots.

Equally, when modulation system is 64QAM, at bit number 6000 bit for sending the block after constituting 1 coding Above-mentioned 500 time slots in, need use phase place change value P [0] time slot need to be 100 time slots, use phase place change value P [1] Time slot need to be 100 time slots, use phase place change value P [2] time slot need to be 100 time slots, use phase place change value P [3] Time slot need to be 100 time slots, use phase place change value P [4] time slot need to be 100 time slots.

As above, the phase place change value in the phase place variation of the phase place change value of switching regularly of cycle N is expressed as P [0]、P[1]、···、P[N-2]、P[N-1].Wherein, P [0], P [1], P [N-2], P [N-1] at least by 2 with Upper different phase place change value is constituted.(can also P [0], P [1], in P [N-2], P [N-1] containing identical phase Position change value.) when the bit of the block sent after all constituting 1 coding, the timeslot number using phase place change value P [0] is set For K₀, the timeslot number using phase place change value P [1] is set to K₁, the timeslot number using phase place change value P [i] is set to K_i(i= 0,1,2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the timeslot number using phase place change value P [N-1] is set to K_N-1, now,

＜ condition #C17 ＞

K₀=K₁==K_i==K_N-1, say, that K_a=K_b, (Wherein, a, b =0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ b)

And, support multiple modulation systems in communication system, carry out the feelings selecting to use from the modulation system supported Under condition, in the modulation system supported, ＜ condition #C17 ＞ sets up.

But, in the case of supporting multiple modulation systems, in general, according to each modulation system, it is possible to sent out by 1 code element The bit number sent is different (according to circumstances, it is also possible to identical.), difference according to circumstances, occasionally there are and can not meet ＜ condition # The modulation system of C17 ＞.In this case, preferably replace ＜ condition #C17 ＞, and meet following condition.

＜ condition #C18 ＞

K_aAnd K_bDifference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_a―K_b| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

When Figure 35 is to represent use block code, the code element number required for block after 2 codings, the figure of the change of timeslot number.Figure 35 is as shown in the dispensing device of Fig. 3 and the dispensing device of Figure 12, sends 2 streams of s1, s2, and dispensing device has 2 " when representing use block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number " during encoder.(this Time, as transmission means, can use single carrier transmission, OFDM that multi-carrier transmission any one.)

As shown in figure 35, the bit number of the block after the composition in block code 1 being encoded is set to 6000 bits.In order to send this 6000 bits, need 3000 code elements when modulation system is QPSK, need 1500 code elements during 16QAM, need 1000 yards during 64QAM Unit.

And, in the dispensing device of Fig. 3 and the dispensing device of Figure 12, owing to sending 2 streams simultaneously, and there are 2 Encoder, so by 2 streams, transmitting different symbolic blocks.Therefore, when modulation system is QPSK, utilize s1, s2, same One 2 encoding blocks of interval interior transmission, so, such as, send the block after the 1st coding by s1, send the 2nd encoding block by s2, Therefore to send the block after the 1st, the 2nd coding to need 3000 time slots.

If similarly considering, when modulation system is 16QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 2 codings Need 1500 time slots, when modulation system is 64QAM, need 1000 time slots to send the whole bits constituting 2 pieces.

Below, the relation in the method changing phase place regularly, between time slot as defined above and phase place is described.

Here, by prepared for the method changing phase place regularly in cycle 5 phase place change value (or phase place change Set) number be set to 5.It is to say, for the phase place changing unit of Fig. 4 dispensing device, 5 phase places needed for the preparatory period 5 Change value (or phase place change set) P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4].But, at P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4] in, just can (can also be at P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P as long as at least containing more than 2 different phase place change values [4] containing identical phase place change value in.).(as Fig. 6, only baseband signal z2' after precoding is carried out phase place change In the case of more, in order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, it is worth as long as preparing 5 phase place changes.It addition, as Figure 26 that Sample, in the case of the both sides of baseband signal z1' after precoding and z2' are carried out phase place change, for 1 time slot, needs 2 phases Position change value.These 2 phase place change values are referred to as phase place change set.Therefore, in this case, for the phase of implementation cycle 5 Position change, gathers as long as preparing 5 phase place changes).By needed for the cycle 55 phase place change values (or phase place change collection Close) it is expressed as P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4].

When modulation system is QPSK, at bit number 6000 × 2 bit for sending the block after constituting 2 codings State in 3000 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 600 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [1] to need It is 600 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 600 time slots, use the time slot of phase place change value P [3] to need It is 600 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 600 time slots.Its reason is, if in the phase place change used Value exists imbalance, then becomes and employ the data receiver quality that the impact of greater number of phase place change value is bigger.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 600 times, phase place is used to become The time slot being more worth P [1] needs to be 600 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 600 time slots, uses phase place change The time slot of value P [3] needs to be 600 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 600 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd Encoding block, the time slot using phase place change value P [0] is 600 times, and the time slot using phase place change value P [1] is 600 times, uses phase The time slot of position change value P [2] is 600 time slots, and the time slot using phase place change value P [3] is 600 times, uses phase place change value P [4] time slot is 600 times.

Equally, when modulation system is 16QAM, at bit number 6000 × 2 ratio for sending the block after constituting 2 codings In special above-mentioned 1500 time slots, need the time slot using phase place change value P [0] to need to be 300 time slots, use phase place change value P [1] time slot needs to be 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 300 time slots, uses phase place change value P [3] time slot needs to be 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 300 time slots.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 300 times, phase place is used to become The time slot being more worth P [1] needs to be 300 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 300 time slots, phase place change value P [3] time slot needs to be 300 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 300 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd coding Block, the time slot using phase place change value P [0] is 300 times, and the time slot using phase place change value P [1] is 300 times, uses phase place to become The time slot being more worth P [2] is 300 time slots, and the time slot using phase place change value P [3] is 300 times, uses phase place change value P [4] Time slot is 300 times.

Equally, when modulation system is 64QAM, at bit number 6000 × 2 ratio for sending the block after constituting 2 codings In special above-mentioned 1000 time slots, need the time slot using phase place change value P [0] to need to be 200 time slots, use phase place change value P [1] time slot needs to be 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 200 time slots, uses phase place change value P [3] time slot needs to be 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 200 time slots.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place change value P [0] to need to be 200 times, phase place is used to become The time slot being more worth P [1] needs to be 200 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [2] to need to be 200 time slots, uses phase place change The time slot of value P [3] needs to be 200 times, uses the time slot of phase place change value P [4] to need to be 200 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd Encoding block, the time slot using phase place change value P [0] is 200 times, and the time slot using phase place change value P [1] is 200 times, uses phase The time slot of position change value P [2] is 200 time slots, and the time slot using phase place change value P [3] is 200 times, uses phase place change value P [4] time slot is 200 times.

As above, the phase place change value in the phase place variation of the phase place change value of conversion regularly of cycle N is expressed as P [0]、P[1]、P[2]、···、P[N-2]、P[N-1].But, P [0], P [1], P [2], P [N-2], P [N-1] extremely It is made up of more than 2 different phase place change values less.(can also P [0], P [1], P [2], P [N-2], P [N-1] In containing identical phase place change value.) when the bit of the block sent after all constituting 2 codings, using phase place change value P [0] timeslot number is set to K₀, the timeslot number using phase place change value P [1] is set to K₁, use phase place change value P [i] time Gap number is set to K_i(i=0,1,2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), using phase place change value P [N- 1] timeslot number is set to K_N-1, now,

＜ condition #C19 ＞

K₀=K₁==K_i==K_N-1, say, that K_a=K_b, (Wherein, a, b =0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ b)

When the bit of the block sent after all constituting the 1st coding, the number of times using phase place change value P [0] is set to K_0,1, the number of times using phase place change value P [1] is set to K_1,1, the number of times using phase place change value P [i] is set to K_{I, 1}(i=0, 1,2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the number of times using phase place change value P [N-1] is set to K_N-1,1, now,

＜ condition #C20 ＞

K_0,1=K_1,1==K_{I, 1}==K_N-1,1, say, that K_{A, 1}=K_{B, 1}, ( Its In, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ B)

When the bit of the block sent after all constituting the 2nd coding, the number of times using phase place change value P [0] is set to K_0,2, the number of times using phase place change value P [1] is set to K_1,2, the number of times using phase place change value P [i] is set to K_{I, 2}(i=0, 1,2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the number of times using phase place change value P [N-1] is set to K_N-1,2, now,

＜ condition #C21 ＞

K_0,2=K_1,2==K_{I, 2}==K_N-1,2, say, that K_{A, 2}=K_{B, 2}, ( Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1) and, a ≠ b)

And, support multiple modulation systems in communication system, in the case of the modulation system supported selects to use, In the modulation system supported, ＜ condition #C19 ＞ ＜ condition #C20 ＞ ＜ condition #C21 ＞ sets up.

But, in the case of supporting multiple modulation systems, in general, according to each modulation system, it is possible to sent out by 1 code element The bit number sent is different (according to circumstances, it is also possible to identical.), difference according to circumstances, occasionally there are and can not meet ＜ condition # The modulation system of C19 ＞ ＜ condition #C20 ＞ ＜ condition #C21 ＞.In this case, ＜ condition #C19 ＞ ＜ condition #C20 is replaced ＞ ＜ condition #C21 ＞, and meet following condition.

＜ condition #C22 ＞

K_aAnd K_bDifference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_a―K_b| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

＜ condition #C23 ＞

K_{A, 1}And K_{B, 1}Difference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_{A, 1}―K_{B, 1}| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

＜ condition #C24 ＞

K_{A, 2}And K_{B, 2}Difference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_{A, 2}―K_{B, 2}| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

As above, associated with the foundation of phase place change value by the block after realizing coding, in the phase that transmission encoding block is used Uneven disappearance in the change value of position, so in receiving device, it is possible to obtain the effect of the receiving quality improving data.

In the present embodiment, in the method changing phase place regularly, for the phase place variation of cycle N, need N Individual phase place change value (or phase place change set).Now, as N number of phase place change value (or phase place change set), standard Standby P [0], P [1], P [2], P [N-2], P [N-1], and also have on frequency axis direction, press P [0], P [1], P [2], P [N-2], the tactic method of P [N-1], but might not be not limited to this, it is also possible to N number of by making Phase place change value (or phase place change set) P [0], P [1], P [2], P [N-2], P [N-1] and embodiment 1 phase With, the block of time shaft, frequency-time axle is configured code element, changes phase place.Also have, although be set to the phase place change side of cycle N Method is illustrated, but even if using N number of phase place change value (or phase place change set) at random, it is also possible to obtain same Effect, say, that be not necessarily required in the way of having the well-regulated cycle to use (or the phase place change of N number of phase place change value Set), in receiving device, obtain the aspect of higher data receiver quality, it is important to meet bar illustrated in above Part.

Alternatively, it is also possible to Existential Space multiplexed MIMO transmission means, pre-coding matrix are fixing MIMO transmission mode, sky Time block coding mode, only sending 1 stream and change the mode of method of phase place regularly, dispensing device (broadcasting station, base station) can To select any one sending method from these modes.

Further, so-called spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means refers to as shown in non-patent literature 3, respectively from different skies Line sends the method for signal s1, s2 that the modulation system to select maps, and so-called pre-coding matrix is fixing MIMO transmission Mode refers to the mode only implementing precoding (not carrying out phase place change).It addition, so-called space-time block coding mode refers to Transmission means shown in non-patent literature 9,16,17.1 stream of so-called only transmission refers to the modulation system to select The signal of the signal s1 mapped carries out the process specified, and the method sent from antenna.

It addition, use the transmission means of that multicarrier of OFDM, as the 1st carrier group being made up of multiple carrier waves, 2nd carrier group different with the 1st carrier group that be made up of multiple carrier waves, like that, is realized overloading by multiple carrier groups Ripple transmits, it is also possible to by each carrier group, is set as that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, pre-coding matrix are that fixing MIMO passes Defeated mode, space-time block coding mode, only transmission 1 flow and change any one of phase place regularly, particularly, just have selected rule For (sub) carrier group after the method for ground change phase place, preferably implement present embodiment.

Further, in the case of the baseband signal after a precoding is carried out phase place change, such as, by the phase place of P [i] When change value is set to " X radian ", in the phase place changing unit of Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 6, Figure 12, Figure 25, Figure 29, Figure 51 and Figure 53, will e^jXIt is multiplied with baseband signal z2' after precoding.And, in the feelings that the baseband signal after two precodings is carried out phase place change Under condition, such as when the phase place change set of P [i] being set to " X radian " and " Y radian ", at Figure 26, Figure 27, Figure 28, Figure 52 and figure In the phase place changing unit of 54, by e^jXIt is multiplied with baseband signal z2' after precoding, by e^jYWith baseband signal z1' after precoding It is multiplied.

(embodiment D1)

In the present embodiment, first the variation of embodiment 1 is described.Figure 67 is dispensing device in present embodiment Structure one example, for carrying out the part of action equally with Fig. 3, gives identical symbol, it addition, later for saying in Fig. 3 The bright part similarly carrying out action, the description thereof will be omitted.And, Figure 67 and Fig. 3 is a difference in that, in weighting combining unit just It is inserted with the part in baseband signal replacement portion 6702 below.Thus, after, with the action around baseband signal replacement portion 6702 it is Center illustrates.

Figure 21 represents the structure of weighting combining unit (308A, 308B).In figure 21 with the region of dotted line be weighting close One-tenth portion.Baseband signal 307A is multiplied with w11, generates w11 s1(t), and be multiplied with w21, generate w21 s1(t).Equally, base Band signal 307B with w12 is multiplied, and generates w12 s2(t), and be multiplied with w22, generate w22 s2(t).It follows that obtain z1 (t)=w11 s1(t)+w12 s2(t) and z2(t)=w21 s1(t)+w22 s2(t).Now, s1(t) and s2(t) Knowable to the explanation of embodiment 1, become BPSK(Binary Phase Shift Keying), QPSK, 8PSK(8Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM, 32QAM(32Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM, 256QAM, 16APSK(16Amplitude Phase Shift Keying) etc. the baseband signal of modulation system.Here, two weighting synthesis Portion uses fixing pre-coding matrix to perform weighting, and as pre-coding matrix, has based on following formula as an example Or the condition of formula (64) and the method that uses formula (62) (63).But, this is an example, and the value of α is not limited to formula (63), formula (64), it is also possible to be set to other value, such as, be set to 1 by α, and α can also be 0(α can be the reality of more than 0 Number, α can also be imaginary number.).

Further, pre-coding matrix is

[numerical expression 62]

$\left(\begin{array}{cc}w11& w12\\ w21& w22\end{array}\right)=\frac{1}{\sqrt{{\mathrm{\&alpha;}}^2+1}}\left(\begin{array}{cc}{e}^{j0}& {\mathrm{\&alpha;}\&times;e}^{j0}\\ {\mathrm{\&alpha;}\&times;e}^{j0}& e^{\mathrm{j\&pi;}}\end{array}\right)$ ... formula (62)

Wherein, in above-mentioned formula (62), α is

[numerical expression 63]

$\mathrm{\&alpha;}=\frac{\sqrt{2}+4}{\sqrt{2}+2}$ ... formula (63)

Or, in above-mentioned formula (62), α is

[numerical expression 64]

$\mathrm{\&alpha;}=\frac{\sqrt{2}+3+\sqrt{5}}{\sqrt{2}+3-\sqrt{5}}$ ... formula (64)

It addition, pre-coding matrix is not limited to formula (62), as long as and with

[numerical expression 65]

$\left(\begin{array}{cc}w11& w12\\ w21& w22\end{array}\right)=\left(\begin{array}{cc}a& b\\ c& d\end{array}\right)$ ... formula (65)

A=Ae^jδ11, b=Be^jδ12, c=Ce^jδ21, d=De^jδ22Express.It addition, any one of a, b, c, d also may be used To be " zero ".For example, it is also possible to (1) a is zero, b, c, d are not zero, and (2) b is zero, and a, c, d are not zero, and (3) c is zero, a, b, d Not being zero, (4) d is zero, and a, b, c are not zero.

Alternatively, it is also possible to 2 values among a, b, c, d are set to zero.Such as, (1) a and d is zero, and b, c are not zero, (2) b And c is zero, and a, d be not zero such method be effective.

Further, when changing any one of modulation system, error correcting code and encoding rate thereof, the pre-coding matrix used is carried out Set and change, it is also possible to fixing its pre-coding matrix of use.

Below, the baseband signal replacement portion 6702 in Figure 67 is described.After baseband signal replacement portion 6702 is with weighting synthesis Signal 316B after signal 309A and weighting synthesis is input, carries out baseband signal switching, baseband signal 6701A after output switching And baseband signal 6701B after replacing.Further, about the conversion details of baseband signal, as use illustrated by Figure 55.This The signal of the replacement for carrying out baseband signal of the replacement of the baseband signal of embodiment is different with Figure 55.Below, for The replacement of the baseband signal of present embodiment, uses Figure 68 to illustrate.

In Figure 68, will weighting synthesis after signal 309A(p1(i)) homophase I composition be expressed as I_p1(i), by orthogonal Q Composition is expressed as Q_p1(i), and will weighting synthesis after signal 316B(p2(i)) homophase I composition be expressed as I_p2(i), will just Q composition is handed over to be expressed as Q_p2(i).And, will replace after baseband signal 6701A(q1(i)) homophase I composition be expressed as I_q1(i), Quadrature Q components is expressed as Q_q1(i), and will replace after baseband signal 6701B(q2(i)) homophase I composition be expressed as I_q2 (i), quadrature Q components is expressed as Q_q2(i).(wherein, i represents (time or frequency (carrier wave)) sequentially.Example at Figure 67 In, i is the time, but when Figure 67 is applied to as Figure 12 the situation using OFDM mode, i can also be that frequency (carries Ripple).Later, will illustrate for this point.)

Now, baseband signal replacement portion 6702 can also carry out the replacement of base band composition,

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i), will Baseband signal q2(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i)

As respectively from transmission antenna 1 and transmission antenna 2 synchronization use same frequency send with replace after base Band signal q1(i) corresponding modulated signal and with replace after baseband signal q2(i) corresponding modulated signal like that, from different Antenna synchronization use same frequency send with replace after baseband signal q1(i) after corresponding modulated signal and replacement Baseband signal q2(i).Alternatively, it is also possible to be,

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i), will Baseband signal q2(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i), will Baseband signal q2(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i), will Baseband signal q2(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i), will Baseband signal q2(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i), will Baseband signal q2(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i), will Baseband signal q2(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i), will Baseband signal q2(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i), will Baseband signal q1(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i), will Baseband signal q1(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i), will Baseband signal q1(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i), will Baseband signal q1(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i), will Baseband signal q1(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i), will Baseband signal q1(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i), will Baseband signal q1(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i), will Baseband signal q1(i after replacement) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i)

It addition, above, although illustrate that the signal 309A's after weighting synthesis and the signal 316B after weighting synthesis is same Phase constituent and the replacement of orthogonal component, but be not restricted to that this, it is also possible to is carrying out the signal more than 2 signals with phase constituent and just Hand over the replacement of composition.

It addition, in above-mentioned example, although illustrate the baseband signal of synchronization (same frequency ((sub) carrier wave)) Replacement, but may not be the replacement of the baseband signal of synchronization (same frequency ((sub) carrier wave)).As an example, may be used With description of such as getting off.

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i+ W), will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i+ W), will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i+ V), will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i+ W), will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i+ V), will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i+ W), will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i+ V), will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i+ V), will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i+ W), will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i+ V), will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i+ W), will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i+ V), will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i+ W), will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to Q_p2(i+ W), will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i+w)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i+ V), will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to I_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to Q_p1(i+v)

Will replace after baseband signal q2(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p2(i+w), orthogonal component is set to I_p1(i+ V), will replace after baseband signal q1(i) same phase constituent be set to Q_p1(i+v), orthogonal component is set to I_p2(i+w)

Will weighting synthesis after signal 309A(p1(i)) homophase I composition be expressed as I_p1(i), quadrature Q components is expressed as Q_p1(i), and will weighting synthesis after signal 316B(p2(i)) homophase I composition be expressed as I_p2(i), by quadrature Q components table Reach for Q_p2(i).And, will replace after baseband signal 6701A(q1(i)) homophase I composition be expressed as I_q1(i), orthogonal Q is become Divide and be expressed as Q_q1(i), and will conversion after baseband signal 6701B(q2(i)) homophase I composition be expressed as I_q2(i), by orthogonal Q Composition is expressed as Q_q2(i).

Figure 68 is the figure for description above is described, as it was previously stated, the signal 309A(p1(i after synthesis will be weighted)) Homophase I composition is expressed as I_p1(i), quadrature Q components is expressed as Q_p1(i) the signal 316B(p2 after, and weighting being synthesized (i) homophase I composition) is expressed as I_p2(i), quadrature Q components is expressed as Q_p2(i).And, baseband signal 6701A after replacing (q1(i) homophase I composition) is expressed as I_q1(i), quadrature Q components is expressed as Q_q1(i), and will replace after baseband signal Homophase I composition 6701B(q2(i)) is expressed as I_q2(i), quadrature Q components is expressed as Q_q2(i).

Then, baseband signal 6701A(q1(i after replacement)) homophase I composition I_q1(i), quadrature Q components Q_q1(i) and replace Change rear baseband signal 6701B(q2(i)) homophase I composition I_q2(i), quadrature Q components Q_q2(i) by stated above some Express.

And, as respectively from transmission antenna 312A and transmission antenna 312B synchronization use same frequency send with Baseband signal 6701A(q1(i after replacement)) corresponding modulated signal and with replace after baseband signal 6701B(q2(i)) corresponding Modulated signal is such, from different antennas baseband signal 6701A(q1 after synchronization uses same frequency to send and replaces (i) corresponding modulated signal and with replace after baseband signal 6701B(q2(i)) corresponding modulated signal.

Phase place changing unit 317B is with baseband signal 6701B and the information 315 relevant with signal processing method after replacing for defeated Enter, change the phase place of baseband signal 6701B after this signal is replaced regularly, and export.So-called change regularly refers to It is, within the predetermined cycle (such as every n code element (n is the integer of more than 1) or the most predetermined time), according to predetermined phase Position change pattern changes phase place.The details of relevant phase place change pattern, as illustrated by embodiment 4.

Signal 309B after radio section 310B changes with phase place is input, implements orthogonal modulation, frequency band restriction, frequency replacement And the process of amplification etc., output sends signal 311B, sends signal 311B and is exported as electric wave from antenna 312B.

Also have, although Figure 67 as shown in Figure 3, illustrates to exist the situation of multiple encoder, but for Figure 67, such as Fig. 4 Possessing encoder and dispenser like that, the signal making dispenser export respectively becomes the input signal of interleaver, and hereafter abides by Follow the situation of the structure of Figure 67, it is also possible to be allowed to and the most similarly carry out action.

Fig. 5 represents an example of the frame structure in present embodiment on the time shaft of dispensing device.Code element 500_1 be for Receiving the code element of device notice sending method, such as, transmission is in order to transmit error correcting system, this encoding rate that data symbols is used Information and in order to transmit the information etc. of the modulation system that data symbols is used.

Code element 501_1 be for estimate dispensing device send modulated signal z1(t) { wherein, t is the time } channel become Dynamic code element.Code element 502_1 by (on time shaft) symbol number u send modulated signal z1(t) data symbols, code element 503_1 be by symbol number u+1 send modulated signal z1(t) data symbols.

Code element 501_2 is for estimating modulated signal z2(t that dispensing device sends) channel of { but, t is the time } becomes Dynamic code element.Code element 502_2 be by symbol number u send modulated signal z2(t) data symbols, code element 503_2 is by code element Numbering u+1 send modulated signal z2(t) data symbols.

Now, at z1(t) code element and z2(t) code element in, the code element of synchronization (same time) use same (altogether With) frequency, it is transmitted from transmission antenna.

Modulated signal z1(t that dispensing device sends is described) and modulated signal z2(t) and receive the reception signal in device R1(t), r2(t) relation.

In Figure 5,504#1,504#2 represent the transmission antenna in dispensing device, and 505#1,505#2 represent in reception device Reception antenna, dispensing device from transmission antenna 504#1 send modulated signal z1(t), from transmission antenna 504#2 send modulation letter Number z2(t).Now, modulated signal z1(t) and modulated signal z2(t) take same (common) frequency (frequency band).Assume to send out The each transmission antenna sending device and the channel variation of each antenna receiving device are respectively h11(t), h12(t), h21(t), h22 (t), the reception signal that the reception antenna 505#1 of reception device receives is r1(t), the reception antenna 505#2 receiving device connects The reception signal received is r2(t), then relational expression below is set up.

[numerical expression 66]

$\left(\begin{array}{c}r1\left(t\right)\\ r2\left(t\right)\end{array}\right)=\left(\begin{array}{cc}h11\left(t\right)& h12\left(t\right)\\ h21\left(t\right)& h22\left(t\right)\end{array}\right)\left(\begin{array}{c}z1\left(t\right)\\ z2\left(t\right)\end{array}\right)$ ... formula (66)

Figure 69 is and the method for weighting (precoding (Precoding) method) in present embodiment, the replacement of baseband signal And the accompanying drawing that phase place variation is relevant, weighting combining unit 600 is by whole to weighting combining unit 308A of Figure 67 and the both sides of 308B Weighting combining unit after conjunction.As shown in Figure 69, flow s1(t) and stream s2(t) corresponding to baseband signal 307A of Fig. 3 and 307B, also That is, become and become according to the homophase I compositions of baseband signal of mapping of modulation system such as QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, orthogonal Q Point.And, as the frame structure of Figure 69, flow s1(t) be s1(u by the signal representation of symbol number u), by symbol number u+1 Signal representation be s1(u+1),.Equally, flow s2(t) be s2(u by the signal representation of symbol number u), code element is compiled The signal representation of number u+1 is s2(u+1),.And, weighting combining unit 600 is with baseband signal 307A(s1 in Figure 67 (t)) and 307B(s2(t)) and the information relevant with signal processing method 315 be input, implementation basis has with signal processing method The weighting of information 315 closed, the signal 309A(p1(t after the weighting synthesis of output Figure 67)), 316B(p2(t)).

Now, p1(t) assume that in fixing pre-coding matrix F, the vector of the 1st row is W1=(w11, w12), then can use Equation below (67) is expressed.

[numerical expression 67]

P1 (t)=W1s1 (t) ... formula (67)

On the other hand, p2(t) assume that in pre-coding matrix F, the vector of the 2nd row is W2=(w21, w22), then can use down The formula (68) in face is expressed.

[numerical expression 68]

P2 (t)=W2s2 (t) ... formula (68)

Thus, pre-coding matrix F can express by equation below.

[numerical expression 69]

$F=\left(\begin{array}{cc}w11& w12\\ w21& w22\end{array}\right)$ ... formula (69)

Implement baseband signal replacement after, replace after baseband signal 6701A(q1(i)) homophase I composition I_q1(i), just Hand over Q composition Q_q1And replace after baseband signal 6701B(q2(i)) homophase I composition I_q2(i), quadrature Q components Q_q2And P1(t) as relation and p2(t) is the brightest.Further it is assumed that the phase place change formula obtained by phase place changing unit For y(t), then baseband signal 309B(q2'(i after phase place change)) can express with equation below (70).

[numerical expression 70]

q₂′(t)=y(t)q₂(y) ... formula (70)

Here, y(t) it is the formula for changing phase place in a predetermined manner, for example, it is assumed that the cycle is 4, then the moment The phase place change formula of u such as can be expressed with formula (71).

[numerical expression 71]

y(u)=e^j0... formula (71)

Equally, the phase place change formula of moment u+1 such as can be expressed with formula (72).

[numerical expression 72]

$y(u+1)=e^{j\frac{\mathrm{\&pi;}}{2}}$ ... formula (72)

It is to say, the phase place change formula of moment u+k can be expressed with formula (73).

[numerical expression 73]

$y(u+k)=e^{j\frac{\mathrm{k\&pi;}}{2}}$ ... formula (73)

Further, formula (71)～a phase place modification only example of the rule shown in (73).

The cycle of the phase place change of rule is not limited to 4.If the number in this cycle increases, then existing can be only by its journey Degree, promotes that the probability that the receptivity (the most correct is error-correcting performance) receiving device improves (is not to say that the cycle is the biggest The best, but preferably avoid 2 the least values.).

It addition, in the phase place modification shown in above-mentioned formula (71)～(73), represent and make it rotate the phase of regulation successively The structure of position (in above-mentioned formula, for pi/2 respectively) but it also may do not make it rotate identical phase mass, and change randomly Phase place.Such as, y(t) can also be according to the predetermined cycle, that order change as shown in formula (74) or formula (75) is multiplied Phase place.It is essential that change the phase place of modulated signal regularly in the rule change of phase place, for phase place to be changed For degree, although be preferably equalization as far as possible, such as, for-π radian to π radian, become and be uniformly distributed, but can also be Random.

[numerical expression 74]

$\begin{array}{c}{e}^{j0}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{2\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{3\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{4\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\\ \&RightArrow;e^{\mathrm{j\&pi;}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{6\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{7\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{8\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{9\mathrm{\&pi;}}{5}}\end{array}$ ... formula (74)

[numerical expression 75]

$\begin{array}{c}{e}^{j\frac{\mathrm{\&pi;}}{2}}\&RightArrow;e^{\mathrm{j\&pi;}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{3\mathrm{\&pi;}}{2}}\&RightArrow;e^{j2\mathrm{\&pi;}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{\mathrm{\&pi;}}{4}}\\ \&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{3}{4}\mathrm{\&pi;}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{5\mathrm{\&pi;}}{4}}\&RightArrow;e^{j\frac{7\mathrm{\&pi;}}{4}}\end{array}$ ... formula (75)

So, the weighting combining unit 600 of Fig. 6 just use predetermined fixing precoding weight to perform precoding, base band Signal replacement portion implements the conversion of above-mentioned baseband signal, and phase place changing unit changes its change degree regularly, while change The phase place of the signal inputted.

Under LOS environment, if employing special pre-coding matrix, then may improve receiving quality significantly, but root According to the situation of ground wave, this special pre-coding matrix because of receive time the phase place of ground wave, amplitude component and different.But, Under LOS environment, there is certain rule, if change the phase place sending signal, the then reception of data regularly according to this rule Quality is greatly improved.The present invention proposes the signal processing method improving LOS environment.

Fig. 7 represents an example of the structure receiving device 700 in present embodiment.Radio section 703_X is with by antenna The reception signal 702_X that 701_X receives is input, implements the process of frequency transformation, quadrature demodulation etc., exports baseband signal 704_X。

Channel variation presumption unit 705_1 in modulated signal z1 sent by dispensing device is defeated with baseband signal 704_X Enter, extract reference symbols sn 501_1 of channel presumption in Fig. 5, the value corresponding for h11 of presumption and formula (66), output channel Presumption signal 706_1.

Channel variation presumption unit 705_2 in modulated signal z2 sent by dispensing device is defeated with baseband signal 704_X Enter, extract reference symbols sn 501_2 of channel presumption in Fig. 5, the value corresponding for h12 of presumption and formula (66), output channel Presumption signal 706_2.

Radio section 703_Y, with the reception signal 702_Y that received by antenna 701_Y for input, implements frequency transformation, orthogonal The process of demodulation etc., exports baseband signal 704_Y.

Channel variation presumption unit 707_1 in modulated signal z1 sent by dispensing device with baseband signal 704_Y is Input, extracts reference symbols sn 501_1 of channel presumption in Fig. 5, and the value corresponding for h21 of presumption and formula (66), output is believed Road presumption signal 708_1.

Channel variation presumption unit 707_2 in modulated signal z2 sent by dispensing device is defeated with baseband signal 704_Y Enter, extract reference symbols sn 501_2 of channel presumption in Fig. 5, the value corresponding for h22 of presumption and formula (66), output channel Presumption signal 708_2.

Control information lsb decoder 709 is with baseband signal 704_X and 704_Y for input, and being used for of detection Fig. 5 notifies sender Code element 500_1 of method, the information-related signal 710 of the sending method that output and dispensing device are notified.

Signal processing part 711 is with baseband signal 704_X, 704_Y, channel presumption signal 706_1,706_2,708_1,708_ 2 and the information-related signal 710 of sending method that notified with dispensing device be input, carry out detection, decoding, output receives Data 712_1 and 712_2.

Below, the action of the signal processing part 711 of Fig. 7 is described in detail.Fig. 8 represents the signal processing part in present embodiment One example of the structure of 711.Fig. 8 mainly includes INNER MIMO detection section, software-redundancy decoder and coefficient generating unit.Relevant should The method repeatedly decoded in structure, although elaborate details in non-patent literature 2, non-patent literature 3, but non-patent literature 2, the MIMO transmission mode described in non-patent literature 3 is spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, and the transmission side in present embodiment The difference of formula and non-patent literature 2, non-patent literature 3 is, is a kind of to change the phase place of signal in company with time rule, and Use pre-coding matrix, the most also implement the MIMO transmission mode that baseband signal is replaced.Can (channel) from formula (66) Precoding weight matrices F(pre-coding matrix here in matrix H (t), Figure 69 is not receive the fixing of change in signal at 1 Matrix), the matrix of the phase place that obtained by the phase place changing unit of Figure 69 change formula be set to Y(t) (Y(t here) change according to t) And the conversion of baseband signal, derive and receive vector R(t)=(r1(t), r2(t))^TWith flow vector S(t)=(s1(t), s2 (t))^TRelation, to receiving vector R(t) application non-patent literature 2, the coding/decoding method of non-patent literature 3, and can implement MIMO detection.

Thus, the information of the coefficient generating unit 819 of Fig. 8 sending method to be notified with dispensing device (is used for determining institute The fixing pre-coding matrix that uses and the information of phase place change pattern when changing phase place) relevant signal 818(corresponds to The 710 of Fig. 7) for input, the information-related signal 820 of output and signal processing method.

INNER MIMO detection section 803, with the information-related signal 820 with signal processing method for input, utilizes this letter Number, carry out the decoding of detection repeatedly, its action is illustrated.

In the signal processing part of the structure shown in Fig. 8, owing to repeatedly decoding (detection repeatedly), need to perform Figure 10 Shown that processing method.First, 1 code word (or 1 frame) and the 1 of modulated signal (stream) s2 of modulated signal (stream) s1 is implemented The decoding of code word (or 1 frame).Its result is, from software-redundancy decoder, it is thus achieved that 1 code word of modulated signal (stream) s1 (or 1 Frame) and the log-likelihood ratio (LLR:Log-Likelihood of each bit of 1 code word (or 1 frame) of modulated signal (stream) s2 Ratio).Then, this LLR is used again to carry out detection decoding.Perform repeatedly this operation (to be referred to as repeatedly decoding by this operation (detection repeatedly).).Below, in by the manufacture method of the log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of the code element with the special time in 1 frame being The heart illustrates.

In fig. 8, storage part 815 corresponds to baseband signal 704_X of Fig. 7 with baseband signal 801X(.), channel presumption letter Number group 802X(is corresponding to channel presumption signal 706_1,706_2 of Fig. 7.), baseband signal 801Y(corresponding to Fig. 7 base band letter Number 704_Y.) and channel presumption ensemble 802Y(corresponding to Fig. 7 channel presumption signal 708_1,708_2.) for inputting, in order to Realize decoding (detection repeatedly) repeatedly, and store the matrix calculated and be used as deforming channel signal group.Then, storage part 815 Export above-mentioned signal when needed, be used as baseband signal 816X, deformation channel presumption ensemble 817X, baseband signal 816Y and Deformation channel presumption ensemble 817Y.

For action thereafter, the situation of initial detection will be separately illustrated and repeatedly decode the situation of (detection repeatedly).

Situation ＞ of the initial detection of ＜

INNER MIMO detection section 803 is with baseband signal 801X, channel presumption ensemble 802X, baseband signal 801Y and letter Presumption ensemble 802Y in road is input.Here, using modulated signal (stream) s1, modulated signal (stream) s2 modulation system as 16QAM illustrates.

First INNER MIMO detection section 803 is asked for according to channel presumption ensemble 802X and channel presumption ensemble 802Y The candidate signal point corresponding with baseband signal 801X.Figure 11 represents situation at this moment.In fig. 11, ● (stain) is in IQ plane Candidate signal point, owing to modulation system is 16QAM, thus candidate signal point exist 256.But (, in fig. 11, because Schematic diagram is shown, so not shown 256 candidate signal points is whole.) here, suppose that 4 bits that transmitted by modulated signal s1 For b0, b1, b2, b3, modulated signal s2 4 bits transmitted are b4, b5, b6, b7, the most in fig. 11, exist with (b0, b1, B2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) corresponding candidate signal point.Then, received signal points 1101(is asked for corresponding to baseband signal 801X.) and candidate signal point each between squared euclidean distance.Then, by the variances sigma of noise²Divided by each squared Euclidean Distance.Therefore, try to achieve the variance using noise divided by the candidate signal point corresponding with (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) and to connect Receive the value after signaling point squared euclidean distance, i.e. E_X(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7).Further, each baseband signal, modulation Signal s1, s2 are complex signals.

Equally, according to channel presumption ensemble 802X and channel presumption ensemble 802Y, ask for and baseband signal 801Y pair The candidate signal point answered, asks for received signal points (corresponding to baseband signal 801Y.Squared euclidean distance between), uses noise Variances sigma²Divided by squared euclidean distance.Thus, try to achieve with the variance of noise divided by with (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) Value after corresponding candidate signal point and received signal points squared euclidean distance, i.e. E_Y(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7).

Then, E is asked for_X(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7)+E_Y(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7)=E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7).

INNER MIMO detection section 803 exports E(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7), it is used as signal 804.

Log-likelihood calculations portion 805A, with signal 804 for input, calculates the log-likelihood (log of bit b0, b1, b2 and b3 Likelihood), output log-likelihood signal 806A.But, in the calculating of log-likelihood, logarithm when will calculate " 1 " is seemingly Log-likelihood so and time " 0 ".Shown in its computational methods such as formula (28), formula (29) and formula (30), about details, non- Shown in patent documentation 2, non-patent literature 3.

Equally, log-likelihood calculations portion 805B, with signal 804 for input, calculates the logarithm of bit b4, b5, b6 and b7 seemingly So, output log-likelihood signal 806B.

Deinterlacer (807A), with log-likelihood signal 806A for input, is implemented and the interleaver (interleaver of Figure 67 (304A)) corresponding release of an interleave, the log-likelihood signal 808A after output release of an interleave.

Equally, deinterlacer (807B), with log-likelihood signal 806B for input, is implemented and the interleaver (interleaver of Figure 67 (304B)) corresponding release of an interleave, the log-likelihood signal 808B after output release of an interleave.

Log-likelihood calculations portion 809A, with the log-likelihood signal 808A after release of an interleave for input, calculates by the volume of Figure 67 The log-likelihood ratio (LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio) of the bit after code device 302A coding, exports log-likelihood ratio signal 810A。

Equally, log-likelihood calculations portion 809B, with the log-likelihood signal 808B after release of an interleave for input, calculates by scheming The log-likelihood ratio (LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio) of the bit after the encoder 302B coding of 67, exports log-likelihood Ratio signal 810B.

Software-redundancy decoder 811A, with log-likelihood ratio signal 810A for input, is decoded, and it is decoded right to export Number likelihood ratio 812A.

Equally, software-redundancy decoder 811B, with log-likelihood ratio signal 810B for input, is decoded, after output decoding Log-likelihood ratio 812B.

＜ decodes the situation of (detection repeatedly), number of occurrence k ＞ repeatedly

Interleaver (813A) with the decoded log-likelihood ratio 812A obtained in the decoding of the software-redundancy of kth-1 time is Input, interlocks, the log-likelihood ratio 814A after output is staggered.Now, the interleaving mode of interleaver (813A) and Figure 67 The interleaving mode of interleaver (304A) is identical.

Interleaver (813B) with the decoded log-likelihood ratio 812B obtained in the decoding of the software-redundancy of kth-1 time is Input, interlocks, the log-likelihood ratio 814B after output is staggered.Now, the interleaving mode of interleaver (813B) and Figure 67 The interleaving mode of interleaver (304B) is identical.

INNER MIMO detection section 803 is with baseband signal 816X, deformation channel presumption ensemble 817X, baseband signal 816Y, deformation channel presumption ensemble 817Y, staggered after log-likelihood ratio 814A and staggered after log-likelihood ratio 814B be Input.Here, baseband signal 801X, channel presumption ensemble 802X, baseband signal 801Y and channel presumption ensemble are not used 802Y, but use baseband signal 816X, deformation channel presumption ensemble 817X, baseband signal 816Y and deformation channel presumption letter The reason of number group 817Y is, owing to repeatedly decoding, and to produced time delay.

The difference of action when action when repeatedly decoding of INNER MIMO detection section 803 and initial detection is, Log-likelihood ratio 814B after using the log-likelihood ratio 814A after interlocking when signal processing and interlocking.INNER MIMO detection Portion 803, first with during initial detection similarly, ask for E(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7).Additionally, after always according to interlocking Log-likelihood ratio 814A and staggered after log-likelihood ratio 914B, ask for and formula (11), coefficient that formula (32) is corresponding.So After, use the coefficient that this is obtained, revise E(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) value, its value is set to E'(b0, b1, B2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7), and export as signal 804.

Log-likelihood calculations portion 805A, with signal 804 for input, calculates the log-likelihood (log of bit b0, b1, b2 and b3 Likelihood), output log-likelihood signal 806A.But, in the calculating of log-likelihood, calculate log-likelihood time " 1 " And log-likelihood time " 0 ".Its computational methods such as formula (31), formula (several 32), formula (33), formula (34) and formula (35) Shown in, represent in non-patent literature 2, non-patent literature 3.

Equally, log-likelihood calculations portion 805B, with signal 804 for input, calculates the logarithm of bit b4, b5, b6 and b7 seemingly So, output log-likelihood signal 806B.The later action of deinterlacer is identical with initial detection.

Further, in fig. 8 it is shown that the structure of signal processing part when carrying out detection repeatedly, but detection is obtaining repeatedly Good receiving quality aspect not necessarily structure, it is also possible to be not have structure division needed for detection the most repeatedly, interleaver The structure of 813A, 813B.Now, INNER MIMO detection section 803 does not carry out detection repeatedly.

Further, as shown in non-patent literature 5 grade, it is possible to use QR decomposition carries out initial detection, repeatedly detection.Separately Outward, as shown in non-patent literature 11, it is also possible to perform MMSE(Minimum Mean Square Error), ZF(Zero Forcing) linear operation, carries out initial detection.

Fig. 9 is the structure of the signal processing part different with Fig. 8, contrasts with Figure 67, is by the encoder being applicable to Fig. 4, divides Join the signal processing part used by modulated signal that the dispensing device in portion is sent.With Fig. 8 be a difference in that software-redundancy decodes The number of device, software-redundancy decoder 901, with log-likelihood ratio signal 810A, 810B for input, is decoded, after output decoding Log-likelihood ratio 902.Dispenser 903, with decoded log-likelihood ratio 902 for input, is allocated.For portion in addition Point, then become the action identical with Fig. 8.

As above, as in the present embodiment, the dispensing device in mimo transmission system sends multiple modulation from many antennas During signal, it is multiplied by pre-coding matrix, and changes phase place over time, perform the change of this phase place regularly, it is possible to Under the LOS environment that ground wave is taken as the leading factor, it is thus achieved that compared with when transmitting with using conventional spatial multiplexing MIMO, improve reception device The effect of the receiving quality of middle data.

In the present embodiment, especially for receive device structure, define antenna number so that its action to be described, but Even if antenna number increases, it is also possible to similarly implement.It is to say, the antenna number in reception device does not give present embodiment Action, effect bring impact.

It addition, in the present embodiment, as coding, it is not particularly limited to LDPC code, it addition, about coding/decoding method, make It is also not necessarily limited to and the example of product decoding for software-redundancy decoder, also has other software-redundancy coding/decoding method, such as, BCJR Algorithm, SOVA algorithm, Max-log-MAP algorithm etc..Relevant details, represents in non-patent literature 6.

It addition, above, be illustrated as a example by carrier way, but be not restricted to that this, carry out multicarrier biography In the case of defeated, it is also possible to similarly implement.Thus, for for example with spread spectrum communication mode, OFDM mode, SC-FDMA, The situation of the wavelet OFDM mode etc. shown in SC-OFDM mode, non-patent literature 7 etc., it is also possible to similarly implement.It addition, In the present embodiment, the code element beyond data symbols, such as pilot frequency code element (introduction, unique word etc.), the transmission of control information Can be configured in any way in frame by code element etc..

Below, as an example of multi-carrier mode, illustrate to use example during OFDM mode.

Figure 70 represents the structure of dispensing device when using OFDM mode.In Figure 70, for Fig. 3, Figure 12 and Figure 67 Similarly carry out the part of action, enclose identical symbol.

OFDM mode correlation processing unit 1201A, with the signal 309A after weighting for input, implements the place that OFDM mode is relevant Reason, output sends signal 1202A.Equally, the signal 309B after OFDM mode correlation processing unit 1201B changes with phase place is defeated Entering, output sends signal 1202B.

Figure 13 represents an example of OFDM mode correlation processing unit 1201A of Figure 70, structure later for 1201B, with Figure 70's Part relevant for 1201A～312A is 1301A～1310A, and the part relevant to 1201B～312B is 1301B～1310B.

Serial-parallel conversion portion 1302A performs baseband signal 1301A(after replacing corresponding to the base band letter after the replacement of Figure 70 Number 6701A) serial-parallel conversion, export parallel signal 1303A.

Sequence portion 1304A, with parallel signal 1303A for input, is ranked up, the signal 1305A after output sequence.Further, Relevant sequence, will be described in detail later.

Inverse fast fourier transform portion 1306A, with the signal 1305A after sequence for input, implements inverse fast Flourier and becomes Change, the signal 1307A after output inverse Fourier transform.

Radio section 1308A, with the signal 1307A after inverse Fourier transform for input, implements the place of frequency transformation and amplification etc. Reason, exports modulated signal 1309A, and modulated signal 1309A is exported as electric wave from antenna 1310A.

Serial-parallel conversion portion 1302B corresponds to the signal after the phase place change of Figure 12 to the signal 1301B(after change phase place 309B), carry out serial-parallel conversion, export parallel signal 1303B.

Sequence portion 1304B, with parallel signal 1303B for input, is ranked up, the signal 1305B after output sequence.Further, Relevant sequence, will be described in detail later.

Inverse fast fourier transform portion 1306B, with the signal 1305B after sequence for input, implements inverse fast Flourier and becomes Change, the signal 1307B after output inverse Fourier transform.

Radio section 1308B, with the signal 1307B after inverse Fourier transform for input, implements the place of frequency transformation and amplification etc. Reason, exports modulated signal 1309B, and modulated signal 1309B is exported as electric wave from antenna 1310B.

In the dispensing device of Figure 67, because being not the transmission means using multicarrier, so as shown in Figure 69, to become The mode in 4 cycles changes phase place, temporally the code element after the change of direction of principal axis configuration phase.In the employing OFDM mode shown in Figure 70 Multicarrier transmission mode in the case of, it is of course possible to expect carrying out as shown in Figure 67 the conversion of precoding, baseband signal, on time Between code element after direction of principal axis configuration change phase place, and in each (sub) carrier wave, carry out the mode of above-mentioned process, but in overloading In the case of ripple transmission means, it is considered to use the method that frequency axis direction or frequency axis time shaft both sides carry out configuring.? Below, this point is illustrated.

Figure 14 represents, the sort method of code element in sequence portion 1301A, 1301B of the temporal Figure 13 of transverse axis frequency, the longitudinal axis One example, frequency axis is made up of (sub) carrier wave 0～(sub) carrier wave 9, and modulated signal z1 and z2 use same at synchronization (time) Frequency band, Figure 14 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 14 (B) represents the sequence of the code element of modulated signal z2 Method.Serial-parallel conversion portion 1302A, for the code element of baseband signal 1301A after the conversion as input, numbers in order as # 0、#1、#2、#3、···.Here, it is contemplated that the situation in cycle 4, thus #0, #1, #2, #3 are a periodic quantity.If it is same Ground considers, then #4n, #4N+1, #4n+2, #4n+3(n are the integer of more than 0) it is a periodic quantity.

Now, as Figure 14 (a), it is configured to regularly, starts to configure code element #0, #1, #2, # in order from carrier wave 0 3, configure code element #0 to #9 in the moment 1, subsequently, configure code element #10 to #19 in the moment 2.Further, modulated signal z1 It is complex signal with z2.

Equally, serial-parallel conversion portion 1302B is to changing the code element of the signal 1301B after phase place as input, in order Numbered #0, #1, #2, #3,.Here, it is contemplated that the situation in cycle 4, thus #0, #1, #2, #3 perform not respectively Same phase place change, #0, #1, #2, #3 are a periodic quantity.If similarly considering, then #4n, #4N+1, #4n+2, #4n+3(n are 0 Above integer) perform different phase place changes respectively, #4n, #4N+1, #4n+2, #4n+3 are a periodic quantity.

Now, as Figure 14 (b), it is configured to regularly, starts to configure code element #0, #1, #2, # in order from carrier wave 0 3, configure code element #0 to #9 in the moment 1, subsequently, configure code element #10 to #19 in the moment 2.

And, 1 periodic quantity when the code element group 1402 shown in Figure 14 (B) is to use the phase place variation shown in Figure 69 Code element, code element #0 is the code element during phase place using Figure 69 moment u, and code element #1 is the code during phase place using Figure 69 moment u+1 Unit, code element #2 is the code element during phase place using Figure 69 moment u+2, and code element #3 is the code during phase place using Figure 69 moment u+3 Unit.Therefore, in code element #x, x mod4(with 4 divided by x time remainder, therefore, mod:modulo) when being 0, code element #x is to make By the code element during phase place of Figure 69 moment u, when x mod4 is 1, code element #x is the code during phase place using Figure 69 moment u+1 Unit, when x mod4 is 2, code element #x is the code element during phase place using Figure 69 moment u+2, and when x mod4 is 3, code element #x is Use the code element during phase place of Figure 69 moment u+3.

Further, in the present embodiment, modulated signal z1 shown in Figure 14 (A) does not changes phase place.

It is so, in the case of the multicarrier transmission mode using OFDM mode etc., different with the when of single carrier transmission, Having can be by the feature of frequency axis direction arrangement code element.And, about the aligning method of code element, however it is not limited to Figure 14's is that Aligning method.For other example, Figure 15, Figure 16 is used to illustrate.

Figure 15 represents in sequence portion 1301A, 1301B of the transverse axis frequency different with Figure 14, the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis One example of the sort method of code element, Figure 15 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 15 (B) represents modulation letter The sort method of the code element of number z2.The difference of Figure 15 (A) (B) and Figure 14 is, the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1 Different with the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z2, in Figure 15 (B), code element #0 to #5 is configured at carrier wave 4 to carrier wave 9 In, code element #6 to #9 is configured in carrier wave 0 to 3, subsequently, with same rule, code element #10 to #19 is configured at each carrier wave In.Now, identical with Figure 14 (B), when the code element group 1502 shown in Figure 15 (B) is to use the phase place variation shown in Fig. 61 The code element of periodic quantity.

Figure 16 represents the transverse axis frequency different with Figure 14, sequence portion 1301A, 1301B ISN of the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis Sort method one example of unit, Figure 16 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 16 (B) represents modulated signal z2 The sort method of code element.The difference of Figure 16 (A) (B) and Figure 14 is, in fig. 14, code element is configured to carrier wave successively In, in contrast, in figure 16, code element is not configured in carrier wave successively.It is certainly, in figure 16, identical with Figure 15, it is also possible to The sort method making the code element of modulated signal z1 is different with the sort method of modulated signal z2.

Figure 17 represents the transverse axis frequency different with Figure 14～16, sequence portion 1301A, 1301B of the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis Sort method one example of interior code element, Figure 17 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 17 (B) represents modulation letter The sort method of the code element of number z2.In Figure 14～16, code element is arranged by frequency axis direction, and in fig. 17, utilize Frequency, the both sides of time shaft configure code element.

In Figure 69, illustrate by 4 time slots switching phase places change time example, and here, with by 8 time slots conversion feelings Illustrate as a example by shape.The code element of 1 periodic quantity when the code element group 1702 shown in Figure 17 is to use phase place variation is (therefore, It is 8 code elements), code element #0 is the code element during phase place using moment u, and code element #1 is the code element during phase place using moment u+1, code Unit #2 is the code element during phase place using moment u+2, and code element #3 is the code element during phase place using moment u+3, and code element #4 is to make By the code element during phase place of moment u+4, code element #5 is the code element during phase place using moment u+5, and code element #6 is to use moment u+6 Phase place time code element, code element #7 be use moment u+7 phase place time code element.Therefore, in code element #x, it is 0 at x mod8 Time, code element #x is the code element during phase place using moment u, when x mod8 is 1, when code element #x is the phase place using moment u+1 Code element, when x mod8 is 2, code element #x be use moment u+2 phase place time code element, when x mod8 is 3, code element #x is Using the code element during phase place of moment u+3, when x mod8 is 4, code element #x is the code element during phase place using moment u+4, at x When mod8 is 5, code element #x is the code element during phase place using moment u+5, and when x mod8 is 6, code element #x is to use moment u+6 Phase place time code element, when x mod8 is 7, code element #x be use moment u+7 phase place time code element.Code element at Figure 17 is arranged In row method, to use temporally direction of principal axis be 4 time slots, by frequency axis direction be 2 time slots amount to 4 × 2=8 time slot, be configured with 1 The code element of periodic quantity, but now, it is assumed that the number of the code element of 1 periodic quantity is that m × n code element is (it is to say, the phase place being multiplied is deposited In m × n kind.), configuring the axial time slot of the frequency (carrier number) that the code element of 1 periodic quantity used is n, temporally direction of principal axis The time slot used is m, then be set to m ＞ n.Now, the phase place of ground wave more relaxes, and the variation of time-axis direction and The axial variation of frequency is compared and is more relaxed.Therefore, present embodiment is performed in order to reduce the impact of stable ground wave Rule phase place change, thus perform phase place change cycle in wish reduce ground wave variation.Therefore, m ＞ n it is set to ?.If it addition, in view of above problem, and only by frequency axis direction or the most temporally compared with direction of principal axis sequence code element, As shown in Figure 17, the both sides utilizing frequency axis and time shaft are ranked up, it is thus achieved that the probability that ground wave becomes stable is higher, and And the such effect of effect that can be easily obtained the present invention.But, if pressing the arrangement of frequency axis direction, then the variation of frequency axis is the most acute Strong, the probability of diversity gain can be obtained so existing, carrying out the side of sequence hence with the both sides of frequency axis and time shaft Method is not necessarily optimal method.

Figure 18 represents the transverse axis frequency different with Figure 17, sequence portion 1301A, 1301B ISN of the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis One example of the sort method of unit, Figure 18 (A) represents the sort method of the code element of modulated signal z1, and Figure 18 (B) represents modulated signal The sort method of the code element of z2.Although Figure 18 with Figure 17 is identical, utilize frequency, time shaft both sides to configure code element, but and The difference of Figure 17 is, in fig. 17, makes frequency direction preferential, subsequently, and temporally direction of principal axis configuration code element, in contrast, In figure 18, make time-axis direction preferential, press frequency axis direction configuration code element subsequently.In figure 18, code element group 1802 is to use The code element of 1 periodic quantity during phase place variation.

Further, at Figure 17, Tu18Zhong, identical with Figure 15, even if being configured to symbol arranging method and the tune of modulated signal z1 The symbol arranging method of signal z2 processed is different, it is also possible to similarly implement, and can obtain higher receiving quality furthermore it is possible to obtain Such effect.It addition, at Figure 17, Tu18Zhong, even if configuring code element as Figure 16 the most successively, it is also possible to similarly implement, It addition, be obtained in that and can obtain the such effect of higher receiving quality.

Figure 22 represents and the most different transverse axis frequencies, sequence portion 1301A, 130B ISN of the temporal Figure 13 of the longitudinal axis One example of the sort method of unit.Consider that 4 time slots as moment u～u+3 of use Fig. 6 change the situation of phase place regularly. In place of feature it is in fig. 22, although by frequency axis direction order arrangement code element, but when advancing along time-axis direction, make to follow Ring carries out n(n=1 in the example of Figure 22) symbol cyclic displacement.4 shown in frequency axial code element group 2210 in Figure 22 In code element, it is assumed that perform the phase place change of moment u～u+3 of Fig. 6.

Now, in the code element of #0, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u, perform to use moment u+1 in #1 Phase place phase place change, in #2 perform use moment u+2 phase place phase place change, in #3 perform use moment u+3 Phase place phase place change.

For code element group 2220 axial for frequency too, in the code element of #4, perform to use the phase place of moment u Phase place change, in #5 perform use moment u+1 phase place phase place change, in #6 perform use moment u+2 phase place Phase place change, in #7 perform use moment u+3 phase place phase place change.

Although in the code element of time 1, having carried out the change of above-mentioned that phase place, but be because on time-axis direction Carry out cyclic shift, so for code element group 2201,2202,2203,2204, the change of phase place to be carried out as follows.

In the code element group 2201 of time-axis direction, in the code element of #0, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u, In #9, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+1, in #18, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+2, In #27, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+3.

In the code element group 2202 of time-axis direction, perform to use the phase place of the phase place of moment u to become in the code element of #28 More, in #1, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+1, perform to use the phase place of the phase place of moment u+2 to become in #10 More, in #19, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+3.

In the code element group 2203 of time-axis direction, perform to use the phase place of the phase place of moment u to become in the code element of #20 More, in #29, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+1, perform to use the phase place of the phase place of moment u+2 to become in #2 More, in #11, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+3.

In the code element group 2204 of time-axis direction, perform to use the phase place of the phase place of moment u to become in the code element of #12 More, in #21, perform to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+1, in #30, perform to use the phase place of the phase place of moment u+2 Change, performs to use the phase place change of the phase place of moment u+3 in #3.

Feature in Figure 22 is, such as when being conceived to the code element of #11, and the code of the axial both sides of frequency of synchronization Unit (#10 with #12) all utilizes the phase place different with #11 to carry out the change of phase place, and the time shaft of the same carrier wave of #11 code element The code element (#2 with #20) of the both sides in direction all utilizes the phase place different with #11 to carry out the change of phase place.And, this is not limited to # The code element of 11, all exist in both sides in frequency axis direction and time-axis direction code element code element whole in there is the code with #11 The feature that unit is identical.Accordingly, because effectively changing phase place, it is not easily susceptible to the impact on ground wave stability state, so data The improved probability of receiving quality increase.

In fig. 22, being set to n=1 and be illustrated, but be not restricted to that this, being set to n=3 can also similarly implement. It addition, in fig. 22, arranging code element by frequency axis, when the time is advanced axially relative, circulating because having the configuration sequence making code element The feature of displacement, and achieve features described above, but above-mentioned to realize also by random (can also be rule) configuration code element Method as feature.

Further, in the present embodiment, although as the variation of embodiment 1, it is shown that insert base before changing in phase place The structure in band signal replacement portion, but present embodiment and embodiment 2 can also be combined, at Figure 26, Tu28Zhong, performing Insert the transformation component of baseband signal before phase place change and implement.Therefore, in fig. 26, phase place changing unit 317A is with base after conversion Band signal 6701A(q1(i)) for input, phase place changing unit 317B with conversion after baseband signal 6701B(q2(i)) for input.Separately Outward, also it is same for phase place changing unit 317A and phase place changing unit 317B of Figure 28.

Below, it is distributed in when being disclosed in from the point of view of dispensing device reception device everywhere, no matter receives device and be arranged in Where, each device that receives all obtains the good method used by data receiver quality.

Figure 31 represents in the transmission mode changing phase place regularly, and the multi-carrier mode using OFDM mode is the most m- An example of the frame structure of a part of code element of signal on frequency axis.

Figure 31 represents corresponding with the baseband signal after the conversion of the input as phase place changing unit 317B shown in Figure 67 The frame structure of modulated signal z2', 1 square expression code element (but, because having been carried out precoding, thus usually contain s1 and The signal of s2 both sides, and according to the structure of pre-coding matrix, be a signal of s1 and s2 the most sometimes.).

Here, the code element 3100 of the carrier wave 2 of Figure 31, moment $ 2 it is conceived to.Also have, although describing at this is carrier wave, but The most sometimes address is subcarrier.

In carrier wave 2, the code element the most adjacent with moment $ 2, the namely code element 3103 of the moment $ 1 of carrier wave 2 With the respective channel status of code element 3101 of moment $ 3 and carrier wave 2, the channel status of the code element 3100 of moment $ 2, dependency is very High.

Equally, in moment $ 2, in the code element of the most adjacent frequency of frequency axis direction and carrier wave 2, namely carrier wave 1, time Carve the code element 3104 of $ 2 and moment $ 2, the code element 3104 of carrier wave 3 channel status all and carrier wave 2, the code element 3100 of moment $ 2 Channel status, dependency is the highest.

As it has been described above, the channel status of the respective channel status of code element 3101,3102,3103,3104 and code element 3100 it Between dependency the highest.

In this manual, in the sending method changing phase place regularly, as the phase place being multiplied, prepare N kind phase Position (but, N is the integer of more than 2).In the code element shown in Figure 31, such as, append " e^j0" such description, it means that, To the signal z2' in 6 in this code element, it is multiplied by " e^j0" and change phase place.It is to say, describe in each code element of Figure 31 Value is y(t in formula (70)) value.

In the present embodiment, the code element adjoined each other on this frequency axis direction is openly utilized and/or in time shaft side The situation that the dependency of the channel status of the code element upwards adjoined each other is higher, obtains higher data receiver receiving device side The code element configuration of the code element after the change phase place of quality.

As the condition obtaining higher data receiver quality in this reception side, it is considered to condition #D1-1, condition #D1-2.

＜ condition #D1-1 ＞

As shown in Figure 69, in the sending method that baseband signal q2 after conversion is changed regularly phase place, using In the case of multicarrier transmission mode as OFDM, time X carrier wave Y is that the code element of data transmission (is called below for number According to code element), code element, i.e. time X-1 carrier wave Y and time X+1 carrier wave Y adjacent on time-axis direction are numeric data codes Unit, baseband signal q2 after the conversion corresponding with these 3 data symbols, i.e. time X carrier wave Y, time X-1 carrier wave Y and In baseband signal q2 after each conversion on time X+1 carrier wave Y, it is carried out different phase place changes.

＜ condition #D1-2 ＞

As shown in Figure 69, in the sending method that baseband signal q2 after conversion is changed regularly phase place, using In the case of multicarrier transmission mode as OFDM, time X carrier wave Y is that the code element of data transmission (is called below for number According to code element), code element, i.e. time X carrier wave Y-1 and time X carrier wave Y+1 adjacent on frequency axis direction are data symbols Time, baseband signal q2 after the conversion corresponding with these 3 data symbols, i.e. time X carrier wave Y, time X carrier wave Y-1 And in baseband signal q2 after each conversion on time X carrier wave Y+1, it is carried out different phase place changes.

And, there is the data symbols meeting ＜ condition #D1-1 ＞.

Similarly there are the data symbols meeting ＜ condition #D1-2 ＞.

The reason deriving this ＜ condition #D1-1 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-2 ＞ is as follows.

Certain code element (hereafter address code element A) is there is in sending signal, each with the code element that this code element A adjoins in time From channel status as it has been described above, and dependency between the channel status of code element A higher.

Therefore, if 3 code elements adjacent on temporally employ different phase places, then under LOS environment, even if code element A is that (although having obtained higher receiving quality as SNR, but the phase relation being because ground wave is very poor receiving quality Very poor situation, so being the state that degenerates of receiving quality), for remaining 2 code elements adjacent with code element A, it is possible to obtain The probability of good receiving quality is the highest, its result is, is obtained in that good receiving quality after error correction decoding.

Equally, in sending signal, there is certain code element (hereafter address is code element A), adjoin in frequency with this code element A The respective channel status of code element as it has been described above, and dependency between the channel status of code element A higher.

Thus, if employing different phase places in 3 code elements adjoined by frequency, then under LOS environment, even if code element A is that (although obtaining higher receiving quality as SNR, but the phase relation being because ground wave is very poor receiving quality Very poor situation, so being the state that degenerates of receiving quality), for remaining 2 code elements adjacent with code element A, it is possible to obtain The probability of good receiving quality is the highest, its result is, is obtained in that good receiving quality after error correction decoding.

If it addition, combination ＜ condition #D1-1 ＞ and ＜ condition #D1-2 ＞, then, in receiving device, existing and can make data The probability that is further enhanced of receiving quality.It is thus possible to derive following condition.

＜ condition #D1-3 ＞

As Figure 69, in the sending method that baseband signal q2 after conversion is changed regularly phase place, using In the case of multicarrier transmission mode as OFDM, time X carrier wave Y is that the code element of data transmission (is called below for number According to code element), code element, i.e. time X-1 carrier wave Y and the time X+1 carrier wave Y adjacent at temporally direction of principal axis are numeric data codes Unit, and when being all data symbols by code element, i.e. time X carrier wave Y-1 and the time X carrier wave Y+1 that frequency axis direction is adjacent, Baseband signal q2 conversion after corresponding with these 5 data symbols, i.e. time X carrier wave Y, time X-1 carrier wave Y, time X+ In baseband signal q2 after each conversion on 1 carrier wave Y, time X carrier wave Y-1 and time X carrier wave Y+1, it is carried out not Same phase place change.

Here, " different phase place changes " are supplemented.Phase place change defines in 0 radian to 2 π radians.Such as, false Being located in time X carrier wave Y, the phase place that baseband signal q2 after converting Figure 69 is implemented is changed to e^{J θ X, Y}, carry at time X-1 In ripple Y, the phase place that baseband signal q2 after converting Figure 69 is implemented is changed to e^{J θ X-1, Y}, in time X+1 carrier wave Y, to figure The phase place that baseband signal q2 after 69 conversion is implemented is changed to e^{J θ X+1, Y}, then 0 radian θ_{X, Y}＜ 2 π, 0 radian θ_{X-1, Y}＜ 2 π, 0 Radian θ_{X+1, Y}＜ 2 π.Therefore, in ＜ condition #D1-1 ＞, θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X-1, Y}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X+1, Y}And θ_{X+1, Y}≠θ_{X-1, Y}Set up. If it is also contemplated that, in ＜ condition #D1-2 ＞, θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X, Y-1}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X, Y+1}And θ_{X, Y-1}≠θ_{X-1, Y+1}Set up, at ＜ bar In part #D1-3 ＞, θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X-1, Y}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X+1, Y}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X, Y-1}And θ_{X, Y}≠θ_{X, Y+1}And θ_{X-1, Y}≠θ_{X+1, Y}And θ_{X-1, Y}≠ θ_{X, Y-1}And θ_{X-1, Y}≠θ_{X, Y+1}And θ_{X+1, Y}≠θ_{X, Y-1}And θ_{X+1, Y}≠θ_{X, Y+1}And θ_{X, Y-1}≠θ_{X, Y+1}Set up.

And, there is the data symbols meeting ＜ condition #D1-3 ＞.

Figure 31 is the example of ＜ condition #D1-3 ＞, and it is arranged as, to the figure corresponding with the code element 3100 being equivalent to code element A Phase place that baseband signal q2 after the replacement of 69 is multiplied, to the figure corresponding with the code element 3101 that this code element 3100 adjoins in time Phase place that baseband signal q2 after the replacement of Figure 69 that baseband signal q2 after the replacement of 69 is corresponding with 3103 is multiplied and right The replacement of Figure 69 that baseband signal q2 after the replacement of Figure 69 that the code element 3102 adjacent with in frequency is corresponding is corresponding with 3104 After the phase place that is multiplied of baseband signal q2 mutually different, therefore, although very poor at the receiving quality receiving side code element 3100 because The receiving quality of its adjacent code element becomes the highest, so receiving quality higher after can also ensure that error correction decoding.

Figure 32 represents according to this condition, change phase place and the configuration example of code element that obtains.

As can be seen from Figure 32, in arbitrary number according in code element, to its phase place frequency axis direction and the both sides of time-axis direction On the degree of phase place that changed of the code element that adjoins each other be all mutually different phase place amount of change.By so constituting, it is possible to The error correcting capability in reception device is made to be further enhanced.

It is to say, in Figure 32, when there is data symbols in the code element that temporally direction of principal axis is adjacent, ＜ condition #D1- 1 ＞ sets up in whole X, whole Y.

Equally, in Figure 32, when there is data symbols in the code element adjacent by frequency direction, ＜ condition #D1-2 ＞ exists Whole X, whole Y set up.

Equally, the code element adjacent by frequency direction exists data symbols, and the code element adjoined at temporally direction of principal axis In when there is data symbols, ＜ condition #D1-3 ＞ sets up in whole X, whole Y.

Below, with stated above, baseband signal q2 after 2 conversion is carried out (seeing Figure 68) when phase place changes Example, illustrates.

In the case of giving phase place change to baseband signal q1 after replacing and the both sides of baseband signal q2 after replacing, Phase place variation has several methods.For this point, it is described in detail.

As method 1, the phase place of baseband signal q2 after replacement changes as previously mentioned, it is assumed that perform phase place as shown in Figure 32 Change.In Figure 32, the phase place change of baseband signal q2 after replacement is set to the cycle 10.But, as it was previously stated, in order to meet ＜ Condition #D1-1 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-2 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-3 ＞, in (sub) carrier wave 1, changes over time to the base after replacing The phase place change that band signal q2 implements.Although (in Figure 32, implement this change, but the cycle 10 can also be set to, and real Execute other phase place variation) and, the phase place of baseband signal q1 after replacement changes as shown in Figure 33, the base band letter after replacement The value carrying out phase place change of 1 periodic quantity in cycle 10 is set to necessarily by the phase place change of number q2.In fig. 33, (replace comprising The phase place change of baseband signal q2 after changing) in the moment $ 1 of 1 periodic quantity, the phase place change of baseband signal q1 after replacement Value is set to e^j0, within the next one comprises the moment $ 2 of (the phase place change of baseband signal q2 after replacement) 1 periodic quantity, after replacement Baseband signal q1 phase place change value be set to e^jπ/9、···、。

Further, in the code element shown in Figure 33, such as, " e is appended^j0" such description, it means that, in this code element The signal q1 of Figure 26 is multiplied by " e^j0" and change phase place.

The phase place of baseband signal q1 after replacement changes as shown in Figure 33, baseband signal q2 after replacement after precoding The value carrying out phase place change of 1 periodic quantity in cycle 10 is set to necessarily by phase place change, carries out the value of phase place change along with 1 cycle The numbering of amount changes together.(as it has been described above, in fig. 33, in 1 periodic quantity of the 1st, it is set to e^j, in 1 periodic quantity of the 2nd, It is set to e^jπ/9、···.)

By constructed as described above, the phase place change of baseband signal q2 after replacement is the cycle 10, and can obtain following effect: Consider baseband signal q1 after replacement phase place change and replace after baseband signal q2 phase place change both sides time week Phase becomes bigger than 10.Accordingly, there exist the probability making the data receiver quality of reception device improve.

As method 2, the phase place of baseband signal q2 after replacement changes as previously mentioned, it is assumed that perform phase place as shown in Figure 32 Change.In Figure 32, the phase place change of baseband signal q2 after replacement is set to the cycle 10.But, as it was previously stated, in order to make full Foot ＜ condition #D1-1 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-2 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-3 ＞, in (sub) carrier wave 1, it is right to have changed in company with the time The phase place change that baseband signal q2 after replacement is implemented.(in Figure 32, although implement this change, but can also be set to In the cycle 10, be other phase place variation) and, the phase place of baseband signal q1 after replacement changes as Figure 30, after replacement The phase place change of baseband signal q2 perform and phase place change in different cycle 3 in cycle 10.

Further, in the code element shown in Figure 30, such as, " e is appended^j0" such description, it means that, in this code element Baseband signal q1 after replacement, is multiplied by " e^j0" and change phase place.

By constructed as described above, the phase place change of baseband signal q2 after replacement is the cycle 10, and is obtained in that following effect: Consider baseband signal q1 after replacement phase place change and replace after baseband signal q2 phase place change both sides time week Phase becomes 30, it is possible to the phase place of baseband signal q2 after making the phase place of baseband signal q1 after considering replacement change and replace becomes Cycle during both sides more becomes bigger than 10.Accordingly, there exist the probability making the data receiver quality of reception device improve.As One effective ways of method 2, will replace after baseband signal q1 phase place change cycle be set to N, will replace after base When the cycle of the phase place change of band signal q2 is set to M, if particularly N and M is the relation of prime number each other, then exists and consider replacement After baseband signal q1 phase place change and replace after baseband signal q2 phase place change both sides time cycle can set For arriving the most greatly the cycle of N × M such advantage, even and if N and M be the relation of prime number each other, it is also possible to increase the cycle.

Further, above-mentioned phase place variation is an example, however it is not limited to this, no matter perform to become by frequency axis direction More, the most temporally direction of principal axis carries out phase place change, or the block of temporally-frequency carries out phase place change, has energy the most equally Enough effects improving the data receiver quality received in device.

In addition to frame structure stated above, it is also conceivable to insert pilot frequency code element (SP between data symbols (Scattered Pilot)) or the code element etc. of transmission control information.Phase place now is changed, is described in detail.

Figure 47 represents modulated signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1' and the modulated signal (base band after replacement Signal q2) z2' T/F axle on frame structure, Figure 47 (a) be modulated signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or Frame structure on the T/F axle of z1', Figure 47 (b) is the time m-frequency of modulated signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2' Frame structure on rate axle.In Figure 47,4701 represent pilot frequency code element, and 4702 represent data symbols, and data symbols 4702 is for replacing After baseband signal or and replace after baseband signal implemented phase place change code element.

Figure 47, as shown in Figure 69, represents that code element configuration when baseband signal q2 after replacing performs phase place change is (the most right Baseband signal q1 after replacement performs phase place change).(also, although in Figure 69, represent that temporally direction of principal axis carries out phase place change Situation more, but in Figure 69, be equivalent to by time t is replaced into carrier wave f, carry out becoming by the phase place of frequency direction More, and be equivalent to by time t is replaced into time t, frequency f, say, that (t) be replaced into (t, f), temporally frequency is carried out The block of rate carries out phase place change.) therefore, describe the numeric representation phase place in the code element of baseband signal q2 after the replacement of Figure 47 Change value.Further, baseband signal q1(z1 after the replacement of Figure 47) code element owing to not carrying out phase place change, thus do not describe Numerical value.

In Figure 47, important point is, the phase place change for baseband signal q2 after replacing is to data symbols, the most real Execute the code element enforcement of precoding and baseband signal replacement.(describing here is code element, but in code element described herein, Because implementing precoding, so the code element containing s1 and the code element both sides of s2.) thus, not to the pilot code inserted in z2' Unit's implementing phase change.

Figure 48 represents, modulated signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1' and the modulated signal (base band after replacement Signal q2) z2' T/F axle on frame structure, Figure 48 (a) be modulated signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or Frame structure on the T/F axle of z1', Figure 48 (b) is the time m-frequency of modulated signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2' Frame structure on rate axle.In Figure 48,4701 represent pilot frequency code element, and 4702 represent data symbols, and data symbols 4702 is for implementing Precoding and the code element of phase place change.

Figure 48 represents, baseband signal q2 after baseband signal q1 after replacing and replacement carries out code element during phase place change Configuration.Therefore, the numerical tabular in the code element of baseband signal q2 after describing baseband signal q1 after the replacement of Figure 48 and replacing Show the change value of phase place.

In Figure 48, important point is, the phase place change to baseband signal q1 after replacing is to data symbols, i.e. implements Cross the code element enforcement of precoding and baseband signal replacement, it addition, the phase place change to baseband signal q2 after replacing is logarithm According to code element, i.e. implemented what the code element that precoding and baseband signal replace was implemented.(describing here is code element, but institute here In the code element described, because having been carried out precoding, so the code element containing s1 and the code element both sides of s2.) therefore, not to z1' The pilot frequency code element implementing phase change of middle insertion, it addition, not to the pilot frequency code element implementing phase change inserted in z2'.

Figure 49 represents, modulated signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1' and the modulated signal (base band after replacement Signal q2) z2' T/F axle on frame structure, Figure 49 (a) be modulated signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or Frame structure on the T/F axle of z1', Figure 49 (b) is the time m-frequency of modulated signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2' Frame structure on rate axle.In Figure 49,4701 is pilot frequency code element, and 4702 is data symbols, and 4901 is zero symbol, and base band letter Number same phase constituent I=0, orthogonal component Q=0.Now, data symbols 4702 was for implementing precoding or precoding and phase place The code element of change.The constructive method being a difference in that code element in addition to data symbols of Figure 49 and Figure 47, and at modulation letter Number z1' is inserted on time and the carrier wave of pilot frequency code element, and modulated signal z2' becomes zero symbol, on the contrary, in modulated signal z2' Being inserted on time and the carrier wave of pilot frequency code element, modulated signal z1' becomes zero symbol.

Figure 49 as shown in Figure 69, represents that code element configuration when baseband signal q2 after replacing carries out phase place change is (the most right Baseband signal q1 after replacement carries out phase place change).(also, although temporally direction of principal axis shown in Figure 69 carries out phase place change Situation more, but in figure 6, be equivalent to by time t is replaced into carrier wave f, perform to change by the phase place of frequency direction, And be equivalent to by time t is replaced into time t, frequency f, say, that (t) is replaced into (t, f), carrys out temporally frequency Block perform phase place change.) therefore, the change of the numeric representation phase place in the code element of description baseband signal q2 after Figure 49 replaces More it is worth.Further, the code element of baseband signal q1 after Figure 49 replacement is not owing to performing phase place change, thus do not describes numerical value.

In Figure 49, important point is, the phase place change to baseband signal q2 after replacing is to data symbols, i.e. implements Cross the code element enforcement of precoding and baseband signal replacement.(describing here is code element, but in the code element here described, Because having been carried out precoding, so the code element containing s1 and the code element both sides of s2.) therefore, not to the pilot code inserted in z2' Unit's implementing phase change.

Figure 50 represents modulated signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1' and the modulated signal (base after replacement Band signal q2) z2' T/F axle on frame structure, Figure 50 (a) be modulated signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or Frame structure on the T/F axle of person z1', Figure 50 (b) be modulated signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2' time m- Frame structure on frequency axis.In Figure 50,4701 is pilot frequency code element, and 4702 is data symbols, and 4901 is zero symbol, and base band The same phase constituent I=0 of signal, orthogonal component Q=0.Now, data symbols 4702 was for implementing precoding or precoding and phase The code element of position change.The constructive method being a difference in that code element in addition to data symbols of Figure 50 and Figure 48, and in modulation Signal z1' is inserted on time and the carrier wave of pilot frequency code element, and modulated signal z2' becomes zero symbol, on the contrary, in modulated signal Z2' is inserted on time and the carrier wave of pilot frequency code element, and modulated signal z1' becomes zero symbol.

Figure 50 represents code element when baseband signal q2 after baseband signal q1 after replacing and replacement carries out phase place change Configuration.Therefore, the numerical tabular in the code element of baseband signal q2 after describing baseband signal q1 after the replacement of Figure 50 and replacing Show the change value of phase place.

In Figure 50, important point is, the phase place change to baseband signal q1 after replacing is to data symbols, i.e. implements Cross the code element enforcement of precoding and baseband signal replacement, it addition, the phase place change to baseband signal q2 after replacing is logarithm According to code element, i.e. implemented what the code element that precoding and baseband signal replace was implemented.(describing here is code element, but institute here In the code element described, because having been carried out precoding, so the code element containing s1 and the code element both sides of s2.) therefore, not to z1' The pilot frequency code element implementing phase change of middle insertion, it addition, not to the pilot frequency code element implementing phase change inserted in z2'.

Figure 51 represents the modulated signal of the frame structure generating Figure 47, Figure 49, the structure of the dispensing device that fraud state is transmitted An example, for carrying out the part of action equally with Fig. 4, enclose identical symbol.Further, in Figure 51, although not shown figure Baseband signal replacement portion shown in 67 or Figure 70, but contrast with Figure 51, identical with Figure 67 or Figure 70, as long as in weighting synthesis Baseband signal replacement portion is inserted between portion and phase place changing unit.

In Figure 51, weighting combining unit 308A, 308B, phase place changing unit 317B and baseband signal replacement portion are only at frame structure Signal 313 represent be data symbols timing when just carry out action.

Pilot frequency code element (the doubling as zero symbol to generate) generating unit 5101 of Figure 51 represents it is pilot frequency code element at frame structure signal 313 In the case of (and zero symbol), baseband signal 5102A of output pilot frequency code element and 5102B.

Although not shown in the frame structure of Figure 47 to Figure 50, but not implementing precoding (and not implementing phase using Rotate), such as send the mode (in this case, not from another root antenna transmission signal) of modulated signal from 1 antenna, or In the case of the transmission means using space-time code (particularly space-time block code) sends control information code element, control information code element 5104 with control information 5103, frame structure signal 313 for input, when frame structure signal 313 expression is to control information code element, defeated Go out to control baseband signal 5102A of information code element, 5102B.

Radio section 310A, 310B of Figure 51 according to as input multiple baseband signals among frame structure signal 313, from Multiple baseband signals select desired baseband signal.Then, implementing the relevant signal processing of OFDM, output is according to frame structure respectively Modulated signal 311A, 311B.

Figure 52 represents the modulated signal of frame structure generating Figure 48, Figure 50, and the structure of the dispensing device being transmitted One example, for carrying out the part of action equally with Fig. 4, Figure 51, encloses identical symbol.The phase place changing unit that Figure 51 is added 317A only just carries out action the timing that frame structure signal 313 expression is data symbols when.About other, then become and The action that Figure 51 is identical.Further, in Figure 52, although the baseband signal replacement portion shown in not shown Figure 67 or Figure 70, but Contrast with Figure 52, identical with Figure 67 or Figure 70, replace as long as inserting baseband signal between weighting combining unit and phase place changing unit Portion.

Figure 53 is the constructive method of the dispensing device different with Figure 51.Further, in Figure 53, although not shown Figure 67 or figure Baseband signal replacement portion shown in 70, but contrast with Figure 53, identical with Figure 67 or Figure 70, as long as in weighting combining unit and phase Baseband signal replacement portion is inserted between the changing unit of position.Below, difference is illustrated.Phase place changing unit 317B As shown in Figure 53, with multiple baseband signals for input.Then, in the case of frame structure signal 313 expression is data symbols, phase Baseband signal 316B implementing phase after precoding is changed by position changing unit 317B.Then, represent it is to lead at frame structure signal 313 In the case of frequency code unit (or zero symbol) or control information code element, phase place changing unit 317B stops the action of phase place change, The baseband signal of each code element is exported by original state.(as explanation, it is believed that implement by force and " e^j0" corresponding phase place rotates.)

Selection portion 5301, with multiple baseband signals for input, selects the baseband signal of the code element shown in frame structure signal 313 And export.

Figure 54 is the constructive method of the dispensing device different with Figure 52.Further, in Figure 54, although not shown Figure 67 or figure Baseband signal replacement portion shown in 70, but contrast with Figure 54, identical with Figure 67 or Figure 70, as long as in weighting combining unit and phase Baseband signal replacement portion is inserted between the changing unit of position.Below, difference is illustrated.Phase place changing unit 317B As shown in Figure 54, with multiple baseband signals for input.Then, in the case of frame structure signal 313 expression is data symbols, phase Baseband signal 316B implementing phase after precoding is changed by position changing unit 317B.Then, represent it is to lead at frame structure signal 313 In the case of frequency code unit (or zero symbol) or control information code element, phase place changing unit 317B stops the action of phase place change, The baseband signal of each code element is exported by original state.(as explanation, it is believed that implement by force and " e^j0" corresponding phase place rotates.)

Equally, phase place changing unit 5201 as shown in Figure 54, with multiple baseband signals for input.Then, at frame structure signal In the case of 313 represent data symbols, the baseband signal 309A implementing phase after precoding is changed by phase place changing unit 5201. Then, in the case of frame structure signal 313 represents to be pilot frequency code element (or zero symbol) or control information code element, phase place becomes More portion 5201 stops the action of phase place change, exports the baseband signal of each code element by original state.(as explanation, it is believed that implement by force With " e^j0" corresponding phase place rotates.)

In superincumbent explanation, although be illustrated as a example by pilot frequency code element, control code element and data code element, but also Being not limited to this, and it is essential that if using the transmission method different with precoding, such as single antenna sends, when using sky The code element that the transmission means of block code etc. are transmitted, does not the most give phase place change, in contrast, the most important It is, for implementing the code element of precoding and baseband signal replacement to carry out phase place change.

Thus, inventive feature is, is not to carry out phase place change in whole code elements of frame structure on T/F axle More, and only phase place change is given to the signal implementing precoding and baseband signal replacement.

Below, describe in detail as shown in non-patent literature 12～non-patent literature 15, use QC(Quasi Cyclic) LDPC(Low-Density Prity-Check) code (may not be QC-LDPC code, but LDPC code), LDPC code and BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code) connects code, the Turbo code employing truncation or Duo-Binary During the block code of Turbo Code etc., to change phase place regularly method.Here, as an example, to send 2 streams of s1, s2 Situation as a example by illustrate.But, when using block code to encode, it is not necessary to during control information etc., after constituting coding The bit number of the bit number of block and composition block code is (but it is also possible to contain that control information described below etc. wherein.) Unanimously.When using block code to encode, need (such as, CRC(cyclic redundancy check) such as control information, pass Defeated parameter etc.) time, the bit number constituting the block after coding is the bit of bit number and the control information etc. that constitute block code the most sometimes Number sum.

When Figure 34 is to represent use block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number.Figure 34 is such as to encoder and dispenser as the dispensing device application drawing 4 of Figure 69, Figure 70, sends 2 streams of s1, s2, and And dispensing device " represents when using block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, timeslot number when having 1 encoder The figure of change ".(now, as transmission means, it is possible to use as single carrier transmission, OFDM multi-carrier transmission certain One.)

As shown in figure 34, the bit number of the block after the composition in block code 1 being encoded is set to 6000 bits.In order to send this 6000 bits, need 3000 code elements when modulation system is QPSK, need 1500 code elements during 16QAM, need 1000 yards during 64QAM Unit.

And, in above-mentioned dispensing device, because to send 2 streams simultaneously, so when modulation system is QPSK, front 3000 code elements stated distribute 1500 code elements to s1, distribute 1500 code elements to s2, therefore to send 1500 code elements sent by s1 With 1500 code elements sent by s2, need 1500 time slots (named at this " time slot ".).

If similarly considering, when modulation system is 16QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 1 coding Need 750 time slots, when modulation system is 64QAM, need 500 time slots to send the whole bits constituting 1 piece.

Below, illustrate in the method changing phase place regularly, between time slot as defined above and the phase place being multiplied Relation.

Here, by order to change phase place change value (or phase place change set) that the method for phase place prepared regularly Number is set to 5.It is to say, for the phase place changing unit of above-mentioned dispensing device, (or phase place becomes to prepare 5 phase place change values More set).(as shown in Figure 69, in the case of only baseband signal q2 after replacing being carried out phase place change, for the implementation cycle The phase place change of 5, prepares 5 phase place changes and is worth.It addition, to the base band letter after baseband signal q1 after replacing and replacement In the case of the both sides of number q2 carry out phase place change, for 1 time slot, need 2 phase place change values.By these 2 phase place change values It is referred to as phase place change set.Therefore, in this case, in order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, 5 phase place change set are prepared ) these 5 phase place change values (or phase place change set) are expressed as PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE[3]、PHASE[4]。

When modulation system is QPSK, bit number 6000 bit above-mentioned for sending the block after constituting 1 coding In 1500 time slots, using the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 300 time slots, the time slot needs of use phase place PHASE [1] are 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [3] to need when being 300 Gap, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 300 time slots.Its reason is, if there is imbalance in the phase place used, then The impact employing greater number of phase place is relatively big, in receiving device, becomes the data receiver quality depending on this impact.

Equally, when modulation system is 16QAM, at bit number 6000 bit for sending the block after constituting 1 coding Above-mentioned 750 time slots in, use phase place PHASE [0] time slot need to be 150 time slots, use phase place PHASE [1] time slot need Being 150 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 150 time slots, the time slot needs of use phase place PHASE [3] are 150 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 150 time slots.

Equally, when modulation system is 64QAM, at bit number 6000 bit for sending the block after constituting 1 coding Above-mentioned 500 time slots in, use phase place PHASE [0] time slot need to be 100 time slots, use phase place PHASE [1] time slot need Being 100 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 100 time slots, the time slot needs of use phase place PHASE [3] are 100 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 100 time slots.

As above, in the method changing phase place regularly, in the phase place change value (or phase place change set) that will prepare Be set to N number of (N number of different phase place is expressed as PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1]) time, when the bit of the block sent after all constituting 1 coding, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [0] It is set to K₀, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [1] is set to K₁, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [i] is set to K_i(i=0, 1,2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [N-1] is set to K_N-1, Now,

＜ condition #D1-4 ＞

K₀=K₁==K_i==K_N-1, say, that K_a=K_b, (Wherein, a, b =0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ b)

And, support multiple modulation systems in communication system, in the case of the modulation system supported selects to use, In the modulation system supported, ＜ condition #D1-4 ＞ sets up.

But, in the case of supporting multiple modulation systems, in general, according to each modulation system, it is possible to sent out by 1 code element The bit number sent is different (according to circumstances, the most identical.), difference according to circumstances, occasionally there are and can not meet ＜ condition # The modulation system of D1-4 ＞.In this case, replace ＜ condition #D1-4 ＞ and meet following condition.

＜ condition #D1-5 ＞

K_aAnd K_bDifference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_a―K_b| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

Figure 35 is to represent when using block code, the code element number required for block after 2 codings, the figure of the change of timeslot number. Figure 35 is as shown in the dispensing device of Figure 67 and the dispensing device of Figure 70, sends 2 streams of s1, s2, and dispensing device has 2 " when representing use block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number " during individual encoder.(this Time, as transmission means, it would however also be possible to employ single carrier transmission, some of that multi-carrier transmission of OFDM.)

As shown in figure 35, the bit number of the block after constituting 1 coding in block code is set to 6000 bits.In order to send this 6000 bits, need 3000 code elements when modulation system is QPSK, need 1500 code elements during 16QAM, need 1000 yards during 64QAM Unit.

And, in the dispensing device of Figure 67 and the dispensing device of Figure 70, because to send 2 streams simultaneously, and have 2 Individual encoder, so transmitting different code blocks by 2 streams.Therefore, when modulation system is QPSK, utilize s1, s2, same 2 encoding blocks are sent in one interval, so such as being sent the block after the 1st coding by s1, by s2 transmission the 2nd encoding block, therefore, for Send the block after the 1st, the 2nd coding and need 3000 time slots.

If similarly considering, when modulation system is 16QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 2 codings Need 1500 time slots, when modulation system is 64QAM, need 1000 time slots to send the whole bits constituting 2 encoding blocks.

Below, illustrate in the method changing phase place regularly, between time slot as defined above and the phase place being multiplied Relation.

Here, by the phase place change value (or phase place change set) for preparing to change the method for phase place regularly Number is set to 5.It is to say, for the dispensing device of Figure 67 and the phase place changing unit of the dispensing device of Figure 70, prepare 5 phase places Change value (or phase place change set).(as shown in Figure 69, only baseband signal q2 after replacing is carried out the feelings of phase place change Under condition, in order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, prepare 5 phase place changes and be worth.It addition, to the baseband signal after replacing In the case of the both sides of baseband signal q2 after q1 and replacement carry out phase place change, for 1 time slot, need 2 phase place change values. These 2 phase place change values are referred to as phase place change set.Therefore, in this case, in order to the phase place of implementation cycle 5 changes, accurate Standby 5 phase places change is gathered) these 5 phase place change values (or phase place change set) are expressed as PHASE [0], PHASE [1]、PHASE[2]、PHASE[3]、PHASE[4]。

When modulation system is QPSK, at bit number 6000 × 2 bit for sending the block after constituting 2 codings Stating in 3000 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 600 time slots, the time slot needs of use phase place PHASE [1] are 600 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 600 time slots, use the needs of phase place PHASE [3] to need when being 600 Gap, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 600 time slots.Its reason is, if there is imbalance in the phase place used, then The impact employing large number of phase place is relatively big, in receiving device, becomes the receiving quality of the data depending on this impact.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 600 times, use phase place The time slot of PHASE [1] needs to be 600 times, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 600 times, uses phase place PHASE [3] Time slot need to be 600 times, use phase place PHASE [4] time slot need to be 600 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd encoding block, make Being 600 times with the time slot of phase place PHASE [0], the time slot using phase place PHASE [1] is 600 times, uses phase place PHASE [2] Time slot is 600 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [3] is 600 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [4] is 600 times.

Equally, when modulation system is 16QAM, at bit number 6000 × 2 ratio for sending the block after constituting 2 codings In special above-mentioned 1500 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 300 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [1] Needing is 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [3] to need It is 300 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 300 time slots.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 300 times, use phase place The time slot of PHASE [1] needs to be 300 times, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 300 times, uses phase place PHASE [3] Time slot need to be 300 times, use phase place PHASE [4] time slot need to be 300 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd encoding block, make Being 300 times with the time slot of phase place PHASE [0], the time slot using phase place PHASE [1] is 300 times, uses phase place PHASE [2] Time slot is 300 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [3] is 300 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [4] is 300 times.

Equally, when modulation system is 64QAM, at bit number 6000 × 2 ratio for sending the block after constituting 2 codings In special above-mentioned 1000 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 200 time slots, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [1] Needing is 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [3] to need It is 200 time slots, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [4] to need to be 200 time slots.

It addition, in order to send the 1st encoding block, use the time slot of phase place PHASE [0] to need to be 200 times, use phase place The time slot of PHASE [1] needs to be 200 times, uses the time slot of phase place PHASE [2] to need to be 200 times, uses phase place PHASE [3] Time slot need to be 200 times, use phase place PHASE [4] time slot need to be 200 times, it addition, in order to send the 2nd encoding block, make Being 200 times with the time slot of phase place PHASE [0], the time slot using phase place PHASE [1] is 200 times, uses phase place PHASE [2] Time slot is 200 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [3] is 200 times, and the time slot using phase place PHASE [4] is 200 times.

As above, in the method changing phase place regularly, in the phase place change value (or phase place change set) that will prepare Be set to N number of (N number of different phase place be expressed as PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1]) time, when sending the block bit after all constituting 2 codings, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [0] is set For K₀, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [1] is set to K₁, the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [i] is set to K_i(i=0,1, 2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the timeslot number using phase place PHASE [N-1] is set to K_N-1, this Time,

＜ condition #D1-6 ＞

K₀=K₁==K_i==K_N-1, say, that K_a=K_b, (Wherein, a, b =0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ b)

When the bit of the block sent after all constituting the 1st coding, the number of times using phase place PHASE [0] is set to K_0,1, The number of times using phase place PHASE [1] is set to K_1,1, the number of times using phase place PHASE [i] is set to K_{I, 1}(i=0,1, 2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the number of times using phase place PHASE [N-1] is set to K_N-1,1, this Time,

＜ condition #D1-7 ＞

K_0,1=K_1,1==K_{I, 1}==K_N-1,1, say, that K_{A, 1}=K_{B, 1}, ( Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1) and, a ≠ b)

When the bit of the block sent after all constituting the 2nd coding, the number of times using phase place PHASE [0] is set to K_0,2, The number of times using phase place PHASE [1] is set to K_1,2, the number of times using phase place PHASE [i] is set to K_{I, 2}(i=0,1, 2, N-1(i is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1)), the number of times using phase place PHASE [N-1] is set to K_N-1,2, this Time,

＜ condition #D1-8 ＞

K_0,2=K_1,2==K_{I, 2}==K_N-1,2, say, that K_{A, 2}=K_{B, 2}, ( Its In, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1), a ≠ B)

And, support multiple modulation systems in communication system, in the case of the modulation system supported selects to use, In the modulation system supported, ＜ condition #D1-6 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-7 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-8 ＞ sets up.

But, in the case of supporting multiple modulation systems, in general according to each modulation system, it is possible to sent out by 1 code element The bit number sent is different (according to circumstances, the most identical.), difference according to circumstances, occasionally there are and can not meet ＜ condition # The modulation system of D1-6 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-7 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-8 ＞.In this case, ＜ condition #D1-6 ＞ ＜ bar is replaced Part #D1-7 ＞ ＜ condition #D1-8 ＞ and meet following condition.

＜ condition #D1-9 ＞

K_aAnd K_bDifference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_a―K_b| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

＜ condition #D1-10 ＞

K_{A, 1}And K_{B, 1}Difference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_{A, 1}―K_{B, 1}| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 Above and the integer of below N-1), a ≠ b)

＜ condition #D1-11 ＞

K_{A, 2}And K_{B, 2}Difference be 0 or 1, say, that | K_{A, 2}―K_{B, 2}| it is 0 or 1

(Wherein, a, b=0,1,2, N-1(a is the integer of more than 0 and below N-1, and b is 0 The integer of above below N-1), a ≠ b)

As above, by the block after coding is associated, in the phase used to transmit encoding block with the phase place foundation being multiplied Uneven disappearance in Wei, it is possible to obtain the such effect of receiving quality improving data in receiving device.

Above, in the method changing phase place regularly, for the phase place variation of cycle N, N number of phase place is needed to become More value (or phase place change set).Now, as N number of phase place change value (or phase place change set), prepare PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1], but also have on frequency axis direction, press PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], the tactic method of PHASE [N-1], but and differ Fixed limit is in this, it is also possible to by by N number of phase place change value (or phase place change set) PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1], the block of time shaft, frequency-time axle is configured code element, changes phase place. Also have, although the phase place variation as cycle N is illustrated, but even if the N number of phase place change value of random use (or Phase place change set) it also is able to obtain same effect, say, that it is not necessarily intended in the way of having the well-regulated cycle use N number of phase place change value (or phase place change set), but in receiving device, obtain the aspect of higher data receiver quality, It is important for meeting condition stated above.

Alternatively, it is also possible to Existential Space multiplexed MIMO transmission means, pre-coding matrix are fixing MIMO transmission mode, sky Time block coding mode, only send 1 stream and change the mode of method of phase place, dispensing device (broadcasting station, base station) regularly Some sending method can be selected from these modes.

Further, so-called spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means refers to as shown in non-patent literature 3, respectively from different Antenna sends the method for signal s1, s2 of mapping with selected modulation system, and so-called pre-coding matrix is fixing MIMO Transmission means refers to the mode only implementing precoding (not performing phase place change).It addition, so-called space-time block coding mode refers to , the transmission means shown in non-patent literature 9,16,17.1 stream of so-called only transmission refers to the process performing regulation, The method sending the signal of the signal s1 mapped with selected modulation system from antenna.

It addition, use the transmission means of multicarrier as OFDM, as the 1st carrier group being made up of multiple carrier waves, by 2nd carrier group different with the 1st carrier group that multiple carrier waves are constituted, such, multiple carrier groups achieve multicarrier Transmission, it is also possible in each carrier group, is set as that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, pre-coding matrix are that fixing MIMO passes Defeated mode, space-time block coding mode, only transmission 1 flow and change regularly some of phase method, particularly, for selecting For changing (sub) carrier group after the method for phase place regularly, preferably implement mode above.

Further, illustrated in this specification content can be with the enforcement precoding illustrated by present embodiment, base band letter Number replacement and the dispensing device combination of phase place change use, especially for phase place change illustrated in present embodiment Portion, it is possible to be applied in combination in this specification illustrated whole contents relevant with phase place change.

(embodiment D2)

In the present embodiment, the explanation occasion at the dispensing device of Fig. 4, the dispensing device to Fig. 4 have been adapted to OFDM The occasion of that multi-carrier mode of mode and the dispensing device of Figure 67, Figure 70 is applied an encoder as Fig. 4 With the initialization performing phase place change when phase place changes regularly under the occasion of dispenser, illustrated by among this specification Method.

As shown in non-patent literature 12～non-patent literature 15, it is considered to use QC(Quasi Cyclic) LDPC(Low- Density Prity-Check) code (may not be QC-LDPC code, but LDPC code), LDPC code and BCH code (Bose- Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code) connect code, the Turbo code employing truncation or Duo-Binary Turbo The situation changing phase place regularly during the block codes such as Code.

Here, as an example, illustrate in case of 2 streams sending s1, s2.But, enter when using block code During row coding, it is not necessary to during control information etc., the bit number constituting the block after coding and the bit number constituting block code (but, also That control information described below etc. can be contained wherein.) consistent.When using block code to encode, need to control letter Breath etc. (such as, CRC(cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameter etc.) time, constitute the bit number of the block after coding also Sometimes it is the bit number sum of bit number and the control information etc. that constitute block code.

When Figure 34 is to represent use block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number.Figure 34 is shown in the dispensing device of such as Fig. 4, sends 2 streams of s1, s2, and " representing when dispensing device has 1 encoder When using block code, the code element number required for block after 1 coding, the figure of the change of timeslot number ".(now, as transmission means, Some of that multi-carrier transmission of single carrier transmission, OFDM can also be used.)

As shown in figure 34, the bit number of the block after the composition in block code 1 being encoded is set to 6000 bits.In order to send this 6000 bits, need 3000 code elements when modulation system is QPSK, need 1500 code elements during 16QAM, need 1000 yards during 64QAM Unit.

And, in above-mentioned dispensing device, because to send 2 streams simultaneously, so when modulation system is QPSK, front 3000 code elements stated distribute 1500 code elements to s1, distribute 1500 code elements to s2, therefore, in order to send 1500 code elements sent by s1 Send 1500 code elements with by s2, need 1500 time slots (to be named as " time slot " at this.).

If similarly considering, when modulation system is 16QAM, in order to send whole bits of the block after constituting 1 coding Need 750 time slots, when modulation system is 64QAM, need 500 time slots to send the whole bits constituting 1 piece.

Below, it is considered to that frame structure of Figure 71, dispensing device send the situation of modulated signal.Figure 71 (a) represents Modulated signal z1' or z1(are sent by antenna 312A) time and frequency axis on frame structure.Adjust it addition, Figure 71 (b) represents Signal z2(processed is sent by antenna 312B) time and frequency axis on frame structure.Now, modulated signal z1' or z1 make The frequency (frequency band) that is currently in use with modulated signal z2 of frequency (frequency band) identical, there is modulated signal z1' at synchronization Or z1 and modulated signal z2.

As shown in Figure 71 (a), dispensing device sends introduction (control code element) in interval A, is for passing communication object The code element of defeated control information, particularly, contains at this for transmission the 1st, the information of the modulation system of the 2nd encoding block.Send dress Put transmission the 1st encoding block in interval B.Dispensing device sends the 2nd encoding block in interval C.

Dispensing device sends introduction (control code element) in interval D, is for the code to communication object transmission control information Unit, particularly, contain at this for transmission the 3rd, the 4th, the information of the modulation system of encoding block.Dispensing device is in interval The 3rd encoding block is sent in E.Dispensing device sends the 4th encoding block in interval F.

As shown in Figure 71 (b), dispensing device sends introduction (control code element) in interval A, is for passing communication object The code element of defeated control information, particularly, contains at this for transmission the 1st, the information of the modulation system of the 2nd encoding block.Send dress Put transmission the 1st encoding block in interval B.Dispensing device sends the 2nd encoding block in interval C.

Dispensing device sends introduction (control code element) in interval D, is for the code to communication object transmission control information Unit, particularly, contain at this for transmission the 3rd, the 4th, the information of the modulation system of encoding block.Dispensing device is in district Between send the 3rd encoding block in E.Dispensing device sends the 4th encoding block in interval F.

Figure 72 represents, in the case of transmitting encoding block as Figure 34, particularly in the 1st encoding block, as modulation The timeslot number that mode uses when employing 16QAM, and in order to transmit the 1st encoding block, need 750 time slots.

Equally, represent in the 2nd encoding block, the timeslot number used when employing QPSK as modulation system, and in order to Transmit the 2nd encoding block, need 1500 time slots.

Figure 73 represents, in the case of transmitting encoding block as Figure 34, particularly in the 3rd encoding block, as modulation The timeslot number that mode uses when employing QPSK, and in order to transmit the 3rd encoding block, need 1500 time slots.

Then, as illustrated by this specification, it is considered to not to modulated signal z1, i.e. sent by antenna 312A Modulated signal carries out phase place change, and modulated signal z2, the modulated signal that i.e. sent by antenna 312B are carried out phase place change Situation.Now, at Figure 72, Tu73Zhong, the method performing phase place change is represented.

First, as premise, in order to carry out phase place change, prepare 7 different phase place change values, by 7 phase place changes It is worth named #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6.It addition, phase place change is regular and uses periodically.It is to say, phase place change Be worth as #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, that Sample, rule and change periodically.

As shown in Figure 72, first in the 1st piece of encoding block, owing to there are 750 time slots, if thus by phase place change value from #0 Begin to use, then become #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #0, #1, #2, #4, #5, #6, #0, the 750th time slot makes Terminate with #0.

It follows that each time slot application phase place of the 2nd encoding block is changed.In this manual, as it is assumed that be applied to Multi-casting communication, the situation of broadcast, thus consider that certain receives terminal and need not the 1st encoding block, and only extract the feelings of the 2nd encoding block Shape.In this case, employ phase place change value #0 to send the time slot at the 1st encoding block end, therefore, in order to transmit 2 encoding blocks, most start just to use phase place change value #1.As such, it is possible to expect following method.

(a): how aforesaid terminal monitors the 1st encoding block is sent, say, that monitor at the 1st encoding block In the transmission of end time slot, phase place change value is that pattern, estimates the phase place used in the time slot that the 2nd encoding block starts most Change value

B (): in order to not implement (a), the phase place that dispensing device transmission uses in the time slot started most of the 2nd encoding block becomes The information being more worth

A, in the case of (), terminal needs to monitor the transmission of the 1st encoding block, so power consumption increases, in the case of (b), The efficiency of transmission causing data declines.

Therefore, leave some room for improvement in the distribution of above-mentioned that phase place change value.It is therefore proposed that will be in order to transmit each volume The method that the time slot started most of code block and the phase place change value that uses are set to fix.Thus, as shown in Figure 72, in order to transmit The time slot started most of 2 encoding blocks and the phase place change value that uses and make to transmit the time slot started most of the 1st encoding block Phase place change value identical, be set to #0.

Equally, as shown in Figure 73, the phase place change value used to transmit the time slot started most of the 3rd encoding block is not It is set to #3, but identical with the phase place change value used to transmit the time slot started most of the 1st, the 2nd encoding block, it is set to # 0。

By constructed as described above, it is possible to obtain the such effect of problem that can suppress to produce in (a) and (b).

Further, in the present embodiment, although illustrate the phase place initialized method of change value by each encoding block, also It is exactly the phase place change value used in the time slot started most of any one encoding block method that is fixed as #0, but as other Method, it is also possible to implement with frame unit.Such as, in the code element used by information after transmission introduction or control symbol transmission, The phase place change value used in the time slot started most can also be fixed as #0.

(embodiment D3)

Further, in above-mentioned each embodiment, the precoding used in precoding with plural number performance weighting combining unit Matrix, but pre-coding matrix can also be showed with real number.

It is to say, such as by 2 map after (modulation system used) baseband signal be set to s1(i), s2(i) (wherein, i is time or frequency), is set to z1(i by the baseband signal after obtain because of precoding 2 precodings), z2 (i).Then same phase constituent, it is assumed that (modulation system used) baseband signal s1(i after mapping) is I_s1(i), orthogonal Composition is Q_s1(i), (modulation system used) baseband signal s2(i after mapping) same phase constituent be I_s2(i), orthogonal Composition is Q_s2(i), baseband signal z1(i after precoding) same phase constituent be I_z1(i), orthogonal component is Q_z1(i), precoding After baseband signal z2(i) same phase constituent be I_z2(i), orthogonal component is Q_z2(i), then use be made up of real number to prelist Code matrix H_r, relational expression below is just set up.

[numerical expression 76]

$\left(\begin{array}{c}{I}_{z1}\left(i\right)\\ Q_{z1}\left(i\right)\\ I_{z2}\left(i\right)\\ Q_{z2}\left(i\right)\end{array}\right)=H_r\left(\begin{array}{c}{I}_{s1}\left(i\right)\\ Q_{s1}\left(i\right)\\ I_{s2}\left(i\right)\\ Q_{s2}\left(i\right)\end{array}\right)$ ... formula 76

Wherein, the pre-coding matrix H being made up of real number_rIt is expressed as.

[numerical expression 77]

$H_r=\left(\begin{array}{cccc}{a}_{11}& a_{12}& a_{13}& a_{14}\\ a_{21}& a_{22}& a_{23}& a_{24}\\ a_{31}& a_{32}& a_{33}& a_{34}\\ a_{41}& a_{42}& a_{43}& a_{44}\end{array}\right)$ ... formula 77

Now, a₁₁、a₁₂、a₁₃、a₁₄、a₂₁、a₂₂、a₂₃、a₂₄、a₃₁、a₃₂、a₃₃、a₃₄、a₄₁、a₄₂、a₄₃、a₄₄It it is real number.Wherein, {a₁₁=0 and a₁₂=0 and a₁₃=0 and a₁₄=0} is false, { a₂₁=0 and a₂₂=0 and a₂₃=0 and a₂₄=0} is false, { a₃₁ =0 and a₃₂=0 and a₃₃=0 and a₃₄=0} is false, { a₄₁=0 and a₄₂=0 and a₄₃=0 and a₄₄=0} is false.And, {a₁₁=0 and a₂₁=0 and a₃₁=0 and a₄₁=0} is false, { a₁₂=0 and a₂₂=0 and a₃₂=0 and a₄₂=0} is false, { a₁₃ =0 and a₂₃=0 and a₃₃=0 and a₄₃=0} is false, { a₁₄=0 and a₂₄=0 and a₃₄=0 and a₄₄=0} is false.

(embodiment E1)

In the present embodiment, illustrate to be applied to employ DVB(Digital Video Broadcasting: numeral regards Frequency broadcast)-T2(T:Terrestrial) and standard broadcast system in situation.First, illustrate to employ the wide of DVB-2 standard The frame structure of broadcast system.

Figure 74 represents the frame structure summary of the signal that broadcasting station sends under DVB-T2 standard.Under DVB-T2 standard, because of For using OFDM mode, so temporally-frequency axis constitutes frame.Figure 74 represents the frame structure on T/F axle, frame By P1Signalling data (P1 signaling data) (7401), L1Pre-Signalling data (data before L1 signaling) (7402), L1Post-Signalling data (data after L1 signaling) (7403), Common PLP (share PLP) (7404) and PLP#1～#N(7405_1～7405_N) constitute (PLP:Physical Layer Pipe: physical layer pipe).(here, will L1Pre-Signalling data(7402), L1Post-Signalling data(7403) be referred to as P2 code element.) so, just will By P1Signalling data(7401), L1Pre-Signalling data(7402), L1Post-Signalling data (7403), Common PLP(7404) and PLP#1～#N(7405_1～7405_N) the frame named T2 frame that constitutes, become frame knot One unit of structure.

P1Signalling data(7401) it is that device carries out signal detection, Frequency Synchronization (also comprises frequency shift (FS) in reception Presumption) used by code element, meanwhile, FFT(Fast Fourier Transform: fast fourier transform in transmission frame) big Little information and with SISO(Single-Input Single-Output: single-input single-output)/MISO(Multiple- Input Single-Output: multiple-input and multiple-output) which mode send the information etc. of modulated signal.(in SISO mode In the case of, it is the mode sending a modulated signal, in the case of MISO mode, is the method sending multiple modulated signals, Further, the space-time block code shown in non-patent literature 9,16 and 17 is employed.)

By L1Pre-Signalling data(7402), transmit send the protection interval used in frame information and In order to cut down PAPR(Peak to Average Power Ratio) and the relevant information of the signal processing method that performs, transmission Modulation system, error correcting system (FEC:Forward Error Correction) during L1Post-Signalling data, entangle The wrong information of encoding rate of mode, the size of L1Post-Signalling data and the information of information size, pilot frequency mode The solid numbered information of information, unit (cell) (frequency domain) and employ normal mode and mode of extension (at normal mode and Under mode of extension, the sub-carrier number being used in data transmission is different.) the information etc. of which mode.

By L1Post-Signalling data(7403), the information of transmission PLP number is relevant with the frequency domain used Information, the solid numbered information of each PLP, the modulation system used for transmitting each PLP, error correcting system, the volume of error correcting system The information etc. of the block number that the information of code check and each PLP send.

Common PLP(7404), PLP#1～#N(7405_1～7405_N) be transmission region used by data.

In the frame structure of Figure 74, although P1Signalling data(7401), L1Pre-Signalling data (7402), L1Post-Signalling data(7403), Common PLP(7404) and PLP#1～#N(7405_1～6105_ N) describing is to be transmitted with the form of time-division, but it practice, there is signal of more than two kinds at synchronization.By its example It is shown in Figure 75.As shown in Figure 75, the most sometimes at synchronization, there is L1Pre-Signalling data, L1Post- Signalling data and Common PLP, or at synchronization, there is PLP#1, PLP#2.It is to say, each signal is simultaneously Use mode and the mode of frequency division of time-division, constitute frame.

Figure 76 represents for the dispensing device in (such as broadcasting station) under DVB-T2 standard, apply to after precoding (or After person's precoding and baseband signal are replaced) signal perform structure one example of the dispensing device after the sending method of phase place change.

PLP signal generating unit 7602 is with the data of many PLP of transmission data 7601(of PLP) and control signal 7609 For input, according to the information of Error Correction of Coding of each PLP comprised in control signal 7609, the information of the information etc. of modulation system, Implement based on Error Correction of Coding, the mapping of modulation system, (orthogonal) baseband signal 7603 of output PLP.

P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605 sends data 7604 and control signal 7609 for inputting, according to control with P2 code element The information of error correction of the P2 code element comprised in signal 7609 processed, the information of information etc. of modulation system, implement based on Error Correction of Coding, The mapping of modulation system, (orthogonal) baseband signal 7606 of output P2 code element.

Control signal generating unit 7608 sends data 7604 for defeated with transmission the data 7607 and P2 code element of P1 code element Enter, each code element group (P1Signalling data(7401), L1Pre-Signalling data(7402 in output Figure 74), L1Post-Signalling data(7403), Common PLP(7404), PLP#1～#N(7405_1～7405_N)) send out Delivery method (error correcting code, the encoding rate of error correcting code, modulation system, block length, frame structure, include regularly switching precoding square The sending method of battle array is at the interior sending method selected, pilot frequency code element insertion method, IFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform: inverse fast fourier transform) information etc. of/FFT, the information of PAPR cutting method and protection interval insertion side The information of method) information, be used as control signal 7609.

Frame constituting portion 7610 with the baseband signal 7603 of PLP, the baseband signal 7606 of P2 code element and control signal 7609 is Input, according to the information of the frame structure comprised in control signal, implements the sequence on frequency, time shaft, and output is according to frame structure , (orthogonal) baseband signal 7611_1(of stream 1 map after signal, namely based on the baseband signal of modulation system used) And the signal after (orthogonal) baseband signal 7611_2(mapping of stream 2, namely base band letter based on the modulation system used Number).

Signal processing part 7612 is with baseband signal 7611_1, baseband signal 7611_2 of stream 2 and the control signal 7609 of stream 1 For input, export modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing based on the sending method comprised in control signal 7609) and Modulated signal 2(7613_2 after signal processing).

Here it is as sending method, to select to after precoding that (or precoding and baseband signal replace in place of feature After changing) signal when performing the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, Figure 28, Figure 29 And Figure 69 is identical, implement the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is performed the place of phase place change Reason, performed modulated signal 1(7613_1 after the signal of this signal processing becomes signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).

Pilot tone insertion section 7614_1 is with modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and control signal 7609 be input, According to the information that the insertion method with pilot frequency code element comprised in control signal 7609 is relevant, modulated signal after signal processing Pilot frequency code element, modulated signal 7615_1 after output pilot frequency code element insertion is inserted in 1(7613_1).

Pilot tone insertion section 7614_2 is with modulated signal 2(7613_2 after signal processing) and control signal 7609 be input, According to the information that the insertion method with pilot frequency code element comprised in control signal 7609 is relevant, modulated signal after signal processing Pilot frequency code element, modulated signal 7615_2 after output pilot frequency code element insertion is inserted in 2(7613_2).

IFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) portion 7616_1 with pilot frequency code element insert after modulation letter Number 7615_1 and control signal 7609 are input, according to the information of the IFFT method comprised in control signal 7609, implement IFFT, Signal 7617_1 after output IFFT.

IFFT portion 7616_2 is input with modulated signal 7615_2 after pilot frequency code element insertion and control signal 7609, according to The information of the IFFT method comprised in control signal 7609, implements IFFT, the signal 7617_2 after output IFFT.

PAPR reduction portion 7618_1 is with the signal 7617_1 after IFFT and control signal 7609 for input, according to control signal The information relevant with PAPR reduction comprised in 7609, implements the process needed for PAPR cuts down to the signal 7617_1 after IFFT, Signal 7619_1 after output PAPR reduction.

PAPR reduction portion 7618_2 is with the signal 7617_2 after IFFT and control signal 7609 for input, according to control signal The information relevant with PAPR reduction comprised in 7609, implements the process needed for PAPR cuts down to the signal 7617_2 after IFFT, Signal 7619_2 after output PAPR reduction.

Protection interval insertion section 7620_1 is input with the signal 7619_1 after PAPR reduction and control signal 7609, according to The information that comprise in control signal 7609 and protection interval insertion method is relevant, in the signal 7619_1 after PAPR cuts down Insert protection interval, the signal 7621_1 after the insertion of output protection interval.

Protection interval insertion section 7620_2 is input with the signal 7619_2 after PAPR reduction and control signal 7609, according to The information that comprise in control signal 7609 and protection interval insertion method is relevant, in the signal 7619_2 after PAPR cuts down Insert protection interval, the signal 7621_2 after the insertion of output protection interval.

P1 code element insertion section 7622 is spaced the signal after inserting with the signal 7621_1 after the insertion of protection interval, protection The transmission data 7607 of 7621_2 and P1 code element are input, generate the letter of P1 code element from the transmission data 7607 of P1 code element Number, the signal 7621_1 after protection interval is inserted, additional P1 code element, export the signal 7623_1 after additional P1 code element, with And the signal 7621_2 after protection interval is inserted, additional P1 code element, export the signal 7623_2 after additional P1 code element.Also Have, the signal of P1 code element both can the signal 7623_1 after addition of P1 code element, addition of P1 code element after signal 7623_2 Both sides add, alternatively, it is also possible to be attached in any one.In the case of being attached in one, for attached signal quilt , in not additional signal, there is the signal of zero as baseband signal in additional interval.

Wireless processing section 7624_1 signal 7623_1 after additional P1 code element, control signal 7609 are input, implement The process of frequency transformation, amplification etc., output sends signal 7625_1.Then, send signal 7625_1 to be made from antenna 7626_1 Export for electric wave.

Wireless processing section 7624_2 is input with the signal 7623_2 after the process of P1 code element, control signal 7609, implements The process of frequency transformation, amplification etc., output sends signal 7625_2.Then, send signal 7625_2 to be made from antenna 7626_2 Export for electric wave.

Figure 77 represents after P1 code element, P2 code element, Common PLP being sent, sends the frequency in the case of multiple PLP One example of the frame structure of rate-time shaft.In Figure 77, the signal after stream s1(mapping, i.e. based on the modulation system used base Band signal) in frequency axis, use subcarrier #1～subcarrier #M, equally, the signal after stream s2(mapping, i.e. based on the tune used The baseband signal of mode processed) in frequency axis, also use subcarrier #1～subcarrier #M.Thus, in s1, s2 both sides, same In the case of the synchronization of subcarrier exists code element, same frequency exists the code element of two streams.It addition, as real at other Like that, after using precoding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out phase place change to execute explanation in mode Sending method in the case of, by s1, s2 use pre-coding matrix be weighted and synthesize (additionally, according to circumstances, then carrying out Baseband signal is replaced), the most also carry out phase place change.Thus, if the signal obtained here being set to z1, z2, then Z1, z2 are exported from antenna respectively.

As shown in Figure 77, interval 1 uses stream s1, the code element group 7701 of stream s2 transmission PLP#1, it is assumed that use shown in Figure 23 MIMO transmission mode (not carrying out the mode of the phase place change) transmission that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or pre-coding matrix are fixed Data.

The interval 2 code element groups 7702 using stream s1 transmission PLP#2, it is assumed that transmit number by sending a modulated signal According to.

Interval 3 use stream s1, the code element group 7703 of stream s2 transmission PLP#3, it is assumed that use to after precoding (or precoding and Baseband signal replace after) signal carry out phase place change sending method transmission data.

Interval 4 use stream s1, the code element group 7704 of stream s2 transmission PLP#4, it is assumed that use shown in non-patent literature 9,16,17 Space-time block code transmission data.

In the case of broadcasting station sends each PLP as shown in Figure 77, in the reception device sending signal receiving Figure 77, It is to be appreciated that the sending method of each PLP.Thus, as in above-mentioned middle narration, need to use the L1Post-as P2 code element The 7403 of Signalling data(Figure 74) transmit the information of the sending method of each PLP.Hereinafter, the structure to P1 code element now One example of the constructive method of one-tenth method and P2 code element illustrates.

Represent the concrete example of the control information using P1 code element to send in table 2.

［ table 2 ］

In DVB-T2 standard, by the control information (information of 3 bits) of S1, it is possible to judge whether to use DVB-T2's Standard, in the case of this external use DVB-T2 standard, receives device and can interpolate that the sending method of use.

As represented in above-mentioned table 2, in the case of setting " 000 " in the S1 information as 3 bits, transmission Modulated signal is according to " modulated signal of DVB-T2 standard sends ".

Additionally, in the case of setting " 001 " in the S1 information as 3 bits, the modulated signal of transmission is according to " using The transmission of the space-time block code of DVB-T2 standard ".

In DVB-T2 standard, " 010 "～" 111 " is in order to be " Reserve " (reservation) in the future.Here, in order to use The present invention there is compatibility with DVB-T2, in the case of setting such as " 010 " in the S1 information as 3 bits (as long as It is the most permissible beyond " 000 " " 001 "), represent that the modulated signal sent is according to the standard beyond DVB-T2, the reception device of terminal If it is known that this information is " 010 ", then it is able to know that the standard beyond the modulated signal foundation DVB-T2 that broadcasting station sends.

Then, modulated signal that broadcasting station the sends structure according to the P2 code element in the case of the standard beyond DVB-T2 is described The example of one-tenth method.In initial example, the method for the P2 code element utilized in DVB-T2 standard is illustrated.

In table 3, the 1st of the control information sent by the L1Post-Signalling data in P2 code element is represented Example.

［ table 3 ］

It addition, in above-mentioned table 3, each abbreviation uses under following meaning.

Mono-modulated signal of SISO:Single-Input Single-Output(sends, and receives with an antenna)

Mono-modulated signal of SIMO:Single-Input Multiple-Output(sends, and receives with multiple antennas)

Multiple modulated signals are sent by MISO:Multiple-Input Single-Output(with multiple antennas, with one Antenna receives)

Multiple modulated signals are sent by MIMO:Multiple-Input Multiple-Output(with multiple antennas, with many Individual antenna receives)

" PLP_MODE " of the information as 2 bits shown in table 3, as shown in Figure 77, is used to each PLP(in Figure 77 Code element group representation with the code element group of PLP#1 to #4.Hereinafter, in order to simple and omit record " code element group ") sending method To the control information of terminal notification, the information of PLP_MODE exists according to each PLP.That is, in the case of Figure 77, will be used for The information of the PLP_MODE of PLP#1, the information of PLP_MODE for PLP#2, the information of PLP_MODE for PLP#3, use Information in the PLP_MODE of PLP#4 sends from broadcasting station.Certainly, terminal is by demodulating this information (additionally, also enter Row error correction decoding), broadcasting station is capable of identify that in PLP the transmission means used.

In the case of being set as " 00 " as " PLP_MODE ", by this PLP with the side of " sending a modulated signal " Formula transmission data.In the case of being set as " 01 ", this PLP is with multiple modulated signals of space-time block coding " transmission carried out " Mode transmits data.In the case of being set as " 10 ", this PLP uses " after precoding, (or precoding and baseband signal replace Signal afterwards) carries out the sending method of phase place change " transmission data.In the case of being set as " 11 ", this PLP uses and " prelists MIMO method that code matrix is fixing or spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means " transmission data.

It addition, in the case of being set as certain of " 01 "～" 11 " as " PLP_MODE ", need broadcasting station tool What kind of process body is implemented and (such as the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change The concrete changing method of sending method, the space-time block coding method of use, the structure of matrix that uses as pre-coding matrix) To terminal transmission.Hereinafter the constructive method of the control information different from table 3 of the structure of the control information comprised now is carried out Explanation.

Table 4 is that the table 3 from the information of control sent by the L1Post-Signalling data in P2 code element is different 2nd example.

［ table 4 ］

As table 4, there is " PLP_MODE " of information as 1 bit, as " the MIMO_ of information of 1 bit MODE ", as 2 bits information " MIMO_PATTERN#1 ", as " MIMO_PATTERN#2 " of information of 2 bits, these are 4 years old Individual control information is as shown in Figure 77, and being used to each PLP(is PLP#1 to #4 in Figure 77) sending method to terminal notification Information, thus, these 4 control information exist according to each PLP.That is, in the case of Figure 77, the PLP_ of PLP#1 will be used for The information of the information/MIMO_PATTERN#2 of the information/MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of MODE, for PLP# The information of the information/MIMO_PATTERN#2 of the information/MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of the PLP_MODE of 2, Information/the MIMO_PATTERN#2 of information/MIMO_PATTERN#1 of information/MIMO_MODE for the PLP_MODE of PLP#3 Information, for the information/MIMO_ of information/MIMO_PATTERN#1 of information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE of PLP#4 The information of PATTERN#2 sends from broadcasting station.Certainly, terminal is by demodulating this information (additionally, be also carried out error correction solution Code), it is possible to identify the transmission means that broadcasting station uses in PLP.

In the case of being set as " 0 " as " PLP_MODE ", this PLP is transmitted by " sending a modulated signal " Data.In the case of being set as " 1 ", this PLP is with " sending the multiple modulated signals having carried out space-time block coding ", to " pre- After coding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change ", " pre-coding matrix is fixed MIMO method ", certain mode of " spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means " transmit data.

In the case of " PLP_MODE " is set to " 1 ", the information of " MIMO_MODE " is effective information, in conduct " MIMO_MODE " and in the case of being set as " 0 ", do not use the letter of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Number carry out the sending method of phase place change and transmit data.In the case of being set as " 1 " as " MIMO_MODE ", use The signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the sending method transmission data of phase place change.

Be set to " 1 " at " PLP_MODE ", in the case of " MIMO_MODE " be set to " 0 ", " MIMO_PATTERN# 1 " information is effective information, in the case of being set as " 00 " as " MIMO_PATTERN#1 ", uses space-time block code Transmission data.In the case of being set as " 01 ", use and use pre-coding matrix #1 to be weighted the precoding of synthesis regularly Method transmission data.In the case of being set as " 10 ", use and use pre-coding matrix #2 to be weighted the pre-of synthesis regularly Coded method transmission data.(wherein, pre-coding matrix #1 and pre-coding matrix #2 is different matrix.) it is being set as " 11 " In the case of, use spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means transmission data.

Be set to " 1 " at " PLP_MODE ", in the case of " MIMO_MODE " be set to " 1 ", " MIMO_PATTERN# 2 " information is effective information, in the case of being set as " 00 " as " MIMO_PATTERN#2 ", uses and becomes phase place After the precoding of more #1, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method transmission data of phase place change. In the case of being set as " 01 ", the letter of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after using the precoding to phase place change #2 Number carry out the sending method transmission data of phase place change.In the case of being set as " 10 ", use and phase place change #3 is prelisted After Ma, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method transmission data of phase place change.It is being set as In the case of " 11 ", after using the precoding to phase place change #4, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out phase The sending method transmission data of position change.Here, phase place change #1～#4 is respectively different method, but the most so-called different Method, if such as setting #A from #B as different methods, then has

Identical phase place is included among the multiple phase places change used in the multiple phase places change used in #A and #B Change, but the cycle is different；

There is the phase place change value being included in #A but be not included in #B；

The multiple phase places being not included in #A using in the phase place change used in the method for #B change this 3 sides Method.

In above-mentioned, it is assumed that by the control information of table 3, table 4 by the L1Post-Signalling data in P2 code element Send and be illustrated.But, in DVB-T2 standard, restricted in the quantity of information that can send as P2 code element.Cause And, by adding table 3, the information of table 4 in addition to needing by the information of the P2 symbol transmission in DVB-T2 standard, exceeding In the case of the information quantitative limitation that can send as P2 code element, as shown in Figure 78, as long as arranging Signalling PLP (7801), the control information needed in the standard beyond DVB-T2 standard (can also be a part, i.e. uses L1Post- Both sides' transmission of Signalling data and Signalling PLP) the most permissible.It addition, in Figure 78, be set to as Figure 74 Frame structure, but be not limited to such frame structure, it is also possible to as the L1Pre-signalling data etc. of Figure 75, The region of m-specific carrier wave when Signalling PLP is distributed to specific on T/F axle, i.e. time In m-frequency axis, how being distributed by Signalling PLP can.

As described above, by using multicarrier transmission mode as OFDM mode and DVB-T2 standard being protected While holding compatibility, can select the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Sending method, it is possible to obtain LOS environment to obtain higher receiving quality and higher transmission speed can being obtained Advantage.It addition, in the present embodiment, as the transmission means of carrier group can be set, enumerate that " spatial multiplexing MIMO passes Defeated mode, use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Signal carries out the sending method of phase place change, the transmission means of space-time block coding, only transmission stream s1 ", but it is not limited to this.

Further, " the MIMO of the pre-coding matrix that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, use are fixed can be selected with broadcasting station Mode, the sending method of phase place change that the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out, empty time block Coding, only send stream s1 transmission means " example be illustrated but it also may be not that these whole sending methods are The sending method that can select, such as,

Can select to use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to (or precoding and base band letter after precoding After number replacing) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change, space-time block coding, only send the sender of transmission means of stream s1 Method

Can select to use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to (or precoding and base band letter after precoding After number replacing) signal carry out the sending method of the sending method of phase place change, space-time block coding

Can select to use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to (or precoding and base band letter after precoding After number replacing) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change, only send the sending method of transmission means of stream s1

Can select the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method, the sending method of space-time block coding, the only transmission means of transmission stream s1

Use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Signal carry out the sending method of phase place change

Can select the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method, the sending method of space-time block coding

Can select the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out sending out of phase place change The sending method of delivery method, the only transmission means of transmission stream s1

Like that, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change by comprising Sending method, it is possible to obtain the data transmission that can carry out in LOS environment at a high speed and the reception being able to ensure that reception device The effect of data quality.

At this time, it may be necessary to set the S1 in P1 code element as in above-mentioned middle narration, and as P2 code element, as with table 3 The establishing method (establishing method of the transmission means of each PLP) of different control information such as can consider table 5.

［ table 5 ］

Table 5 point different from table 3 is to be Reserve (reservation) this point when " PLP_MODE " is set to " 11 ".This Sample, the transmission means that can select in the transmission means as PLP be above-mentioned middle expression example as in the case of, if root According to the transmission means that can select quantity, such as make the bit number of the PLP_MODE of composition table 3, table 5 become big or diminish just may be used With.

About table 4 too, such as (or precoding and base band after only supporting precoding as MIMO transmission mode After signal is replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change in the case of, it is not necessary to the control information of " MIMO_MODE ". Additionally, in " MIMO_PATTERN#1 ", the situation of the existing MIMO method the most not supporting pre-coding matrix to fix, also have not Need the situation of the control information of " MIMO_PATTERN#1 ", additionally, need not multiple MIMO fixing at pre-coding matrix In the case of the pre-coding matrix used in mode, it is also possible to be not the control information of 2 bits but the control information of 1 bit, And then, in the case of can setting multiple pre-coding matrix, it is also possible to be the control information of more than 2 bits.

About " MIMO_PATTERN#2 " can also it is also contemplated that, after as to precoding (or precoding and base band letter After number replacing) signal carry out the changing method that the sending method of phase place change changes without multiple phase places in the case of, May not be the control information of 2 bits and be the control information of 1 bit, and then, cutting of multiple phase place change can set In the case of changing method, it is also possible to be the control information of more than 2 bits.

Additionally, in the present embodiment, with set the antenna number of dispensing device as 2 situation be illustrated, but do not limit Due to this, in the case of bigger than 2, as long as it is the most permissible to send control information too.Now, in order to except using 2 antennas to send out Send the situation also implementing to use 4 antennas to send modulated signal beyond the situation of modulated signal, occur to need to increase to constitute each control The situation of the bit number of information.Now, send control information with P1 code element, send control information this point with P2 code element and upper The situation stating middle explanation is same.

About the frame structure of code element group of the PLP that broadcasting station sends, illustrate to carry out in the way of the time-division as shown in Figure 77 The method sent, and below its variation is illustrated.

Figure 79 represents on frequency-time axle different from Figure 77, after transmission P1 code element, P2 code element, Common PLP One example of the collocation method of the code element of stream s1 and s2.In Figure 79, it is recited as the code element of the PLP#1 of the code element table diagram 77 of " #1 " 1 code element in Qun.Equally, 1 code element in the code element group of the PLP#2 being recited as the code element table diagram 77 of " #2 ", it is recited as 1 code element in the code element group of the PLP#3 of the code element table diagram 77 of " #3 ", is recited as the PLP#4 of the code element table diagram 77 of " #4 " Code element group in 1 code element.Further, as Figure 77, PLP#1 is to use the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission side shown in Figure 23 The MIMO transmission mode that formula or pre-coding matrix are fixed transmits data.Further, PLP#2 is by sending a modulated signal Transmit data.PLP#3 carries out phase place change for using to the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Sending method transmission data more.PLP#4 is to use space-time block code transmission data.

In Figure 79, in s1, s2 both sides, the synchronization at same subcarrier (being carrier wave described in Figure 79) exists In the case of code element, same frequency exists the code element of two streams.It addition, as explanation in other embodiments, In the case of using after precoding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change, S1, s2 use pre-coding matrix is weighted and synthesizes (additionally, according to circumstances, then carry out baseband signal replacement), except this The most also carry out phase place change.Thus, if the signal obtained here to be set to z1, z2, then z1, z2 is defeated from antenna respectively Go out.

Points different for Figure 79 from Figure 77 is, as described above, in Figure 77, illustrates multiple PLP in the way of the time-division The example of configuration, and in Figure 79, different from Figure 77, use the mode of time-division and the mode of frequency division simultaneously, make multiple PLP deposit ?.I.e., such as in the moment 1, there is the code element of PLP#1 and the code element of PLP#2, in the moment 3, there is code element and the PLP#4 of PLP#3 Code element.In such manner, it is possible to according to (being made up of 1 moment, the 1 subcarrier) index (#X that each symbol allocation is different；X=1, 2) the code element of PLP.

It addition, in Figure 79, in order to simply, only exist " #1 " " #2 " in the moment 1, but be not limited to this, it is also possible to There is the code element of the PLP of the index beyond the PLP of " #1 " " #2 " in the moment 1, additionally, the pass of the index of the subcarrier in moment 1 and PLP System is not limited to Figure 79, and the code element of the PLP which index sub-carrier distributes can.Additionally, equally other moment also The code element of the PLP which index sub-carrier distributes can.

Figure 80 represents on the frequency-time axle after the transmission P1 code element different from Figure 77, P2 code element, Common PLP One example of the collocation method of the code element of stream s1 and s2.Distinctive part in Figure 80 is, in T2 frame, in the biography as PLP Defeated mode and with multiple antennas be sent as basic in the case of, it is impossible to select " only sending the transmission means of stream s1 ".

Thus, in Figure 80, it is assumed that the code element group 8001 of PLP#1 is by " spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or use are solid The MIMO method of fixed pre-coding matrix " transmit data.Assume that the code element group 8002 of PLP#2 is by " to (or pre-after precoding After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change " transmit data.Assume the code element of PLP#3 Group 8003 transmits data by " space-time block code ".Further, the PLP code element group in the T2 frame that the code element group 8003 of PLP#3 is later By " spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix ", " to (or pre-after precoding After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change ", certain sending method of " space-time block code " comes Transmission data.

Figure 81 represents on frequency-time axle different from Figure 79, after transmission P1 code element, P2 code element, Common PLP One example of the collocation method of the code element of stream s1 and s2.In Figure 81, it is recited as the code element of the PLP#1 of the code element table diagram 80 of " #1 " 1 code element in Qun.Equally, 1 code element in the code element group of the PLP#2 being recited as the code element table diagram 80 of " #2 ", it is recited as 1 code element in the code element group of the PLP#3 of the code element table diagram 80 of " #3 ".Further, with Figure 80 it is similarly assumed that PLP#1 uses figure The MIMO transmission mode that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means shown in 23 or pre-coding matrix are fixed transmits data.And, it is assumed that PLP#2 uses and the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the sending method transmission of phase place change Data.Assume that PLP#3 uses space-time block code transmission data.

In Figure 81, in s1, s2 both sides, the synchronization at same subcarrier (being carrier wave described in Figure 81) exists In the case of code element, same frequency exists the code element of two streams.It addition, as explanation in other embodiments, In the case of using after precoding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change, S1, s2 use pre-coding matrix is weighted and synthesizes (additionally, according to circumstances, then carry out baseband signal replacement), except this The most also carry out phase place change.Thus, if the signal obtained here to be set to z1, z2, then z1, z2 is defeated from antenna respectively Go out.

In Figure 81, different from Figure 80, use the mode of time-division and the mode of frequency division simultaneously, make multiple PLP exist.That is, Code element and the code element of PLP#2 of PLP#1 is such as there is in the moment 1.In such manner, it is possible to according to (being made up of 1 moment, 1 subcarrier) Each code element and distribute different index (#X；X=1,2) the code element of PLP.

It addition, in Figure 81, in order to simply, only exist " #1 " " #2 " in the moment 1, but be not limited to this, it is also possible to There is the code element of the PLP of the index beyond the PLP of " #1 " " #2 " in the moment 1, additionally, the pass of the index of the subcarrier in moment 1 and PLP System is not limited to Figure 81, and the code element of the PLP which index sub-carrier distributes can.Additionally, equally other moment also The code element of the PLP which index sub-carrier distributes can.On the other hand, it is also possible to as the moment 3, the most only The code element of one PLP of distribution.That is, the code element of PLP how being distributed in the frame method of T/F can.

So, in T2 frame, there is not the PLP that use " only sends the transmission means of stream s1 ", it is possible to suppression terminal The dynamic range receiving signal received, it is possible to obtain enabling to the effect that the probability of good receiving quality uprises Really.

It addition, in Figure 81 during explanation, and to select as sending method, " spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or use are solid The MIMO method of fixed pre-coding matrix ", " signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place The sending method of change ", the example of certain of " space-time block code " is illustrated, but need not make the whole energy of these sending methods Enough selections, can also be such as,

Can select " signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding to be carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method ", " space-time block code ", " using the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix "

Can select " signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding to be carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method ", " space-time block code "

Can select " signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding to be carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method ", " using the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix ".

In above-mentioned, the situation that there is multiple PLP be illustrated, only exist one in T2 frame below in T2 frame The situation of individual PLP illustrates.

Figure 82 represents and only exists in the case of a PLP, the frame of stream s1 and s2 on T/F axle in T2 frame One example of structure.It is being " control code element " described in Figure 82, but it means that in the P1 code element of above-mentioned middle explanation and P2 code element etc. Code element.Further, in Figure 82, use interval 1 to send 1T2 frame, equally, use interval 2 to send 2T2 frame, use interval 3 Send 3T2 frame, use interval 4 to send 4T2 frame.

Additionally, in Figure 82, in 1T2 frame, send the code element group 8101 of PLP#1-1, as sending method, select " MIMO method of the pre-coding matrix that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or use are fixed ".

In 2T2 frame, send the code element group 8102 of PLP#2-1, as sending method, select " to send a modulation letter Number method ".

In 3T2 frame, send the code element group 8103 of PLP#3-1, as sending method, select " to (or pre-after precoding After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change ".

In 4T2 frame, send the code element group 8104 of PLP#4-1, as sending method, select " space-time block code ".

In Figure 82, in s1, s2 both sides, in the case of the synchronization of same subcarrier exists code element, same Frequency exists the code element of two streams.It addition, as explanation in other embodiments, after using precoding (or pre- After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change in the case of, s1, s2 are used precoding square Battle array is weighted and synthesizes (additionally, according to circumstances, then carry out baseband signal replacement), the most also carries out phase place change. Thus, if the signal obtained here to be set to z1, z2, then z1, z2 are exported from antenna respectively.

By so, owing to can consider that the transmission speed of data, the data receiver quality of terminal set according to each PLP Determine sending method, it is possible to realize the raising of the transmission speed of data and the receiving quality of data guarantee satisfactory to both parties.It addition, P1 code element, the example of constructive method of control information of transmission method etc. of P2 code element (according to circumstances, being SignallingPLP) If as above-mentioned table 2 is constituted to table 5, then can implement equally.Points different for Figure 82 from Figure 77 is, the frame at Figure 77 etc. is tied In structure, owing to having multiple PLP in a T2 frame, so needing the control information of the transmission method etc. for multiple PLP, but In the case of the frame structure of Figure 82, owing to only existing a PLP in a T2 frame, so only needing for this PLP The control information of transmission method etc..

In above-mentioned, describe use P1 code element, P2 code element (according to circumstances, being Signalling PLP) transmission about The method of the information of the transmission method of PLP, the most especially to not using P2 code element to transmit the information of the transmission method about PLP Method illustrate.

Figure 83 be broadcasting station be the object of transmission data terminal corresponding to be not DVB-T2 standard standard in the case of , frame structure on T/F axle.In Figure 83, give identical label for the structure as Figure 74.Figure 83's Frame is by P1Signalling data(7401), 1Signalling data(8301), 2Signalling data (8302), Common PLP(7404), PLP#1～#N(7405_1～7405_N) constitute (PLP:Physical Layer Pipe).So, by P1Signalling data(7401), 1Signalling data(8301), 2Signalling Data(8302), Common PLP(7404), PLP#1～#N(7405_1～7405_N) unit that frame is a frame that constitutes.

By P1Signalling data(7401), it is being to carry out signal detection, Frequency Synchronization (also for receiving device Estimate including frequency shift (FS)) code element while, in this case it is desirable to transmission is used for identifying whether being the frame of DVB-T2 standard Data, such as according to the S1 represented in table 2, the signal that is/is not DVB-T2 standard.

Can consider by 1Signalling data(8301) the transmission such as protection interval of use in sending frame Information, about in order to cut down PAPR(Peak to Average Power Ratio: papr) and the letter that carries out The information of number processing method, modulation system when transmitting 2Signalling data, error correcting system, the encoding rate of error correcting system Information, the size of 2Signalling data and the information of information size, the information of pilot frequency mode, unit (frequency domain) intrinsic The method of the information etc. of which kind of mode of information, general mode and the mode of extension of numbering.Now, 1Signalling data (8301) need not to transmit the data according to DVB-T2 standard.

By 2Signalling data(8302) transmit the information of the quantity of such as PLP, about the frequency domain used Information, the solid numbered information of each PLP, the modulation system that uses to transmit each PLP, error correcting system, error correcting system The information etc. of the block number that the information of encoding rate, each PLP send.

In the frame structure of Figure 83, describe 1Signalling data(8301), 2Signalling data (8302), L1Post-Signalling data(7403), Common PLP(7404), PLP#1～#N(7405_1～7405_ N) send in the way of the time-division, but actually there is two or more signals at synchronization.This example is represented in Figure 84.As Shown in Figure 84, also with the presence of synchronization 1Signalling data, 2Signalling data, Common PLP, Or the situation of PLP#1, PLP#2 is there is at synchronization.That is, each signal uses the mode of time-division and the mode of frequency division and structure simultaneously Framing.

Figure 85 represents that the dispensing device for the standard (such as broadcasting station) different from DVB-T2 uses explanation so far The signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the dispensing device of the sending method of phase place change An example of structure.In Figure 85, the part for action as Figure 76 gives identical label, about the explanation of this action As described above.

Control signal generating unit 7608 with the 1st, the transmission data 8501 of 2Signalling data, P1 code element Sending data 7607 is input, and (sending method of each code element group in Figure 83 is included error correction number, the encoding rate of error correction number, tune Mode processed, block length, frame structure, include the sending method switching pre-coding matrix regularly the interior sender selected Method, pilot frequency code element insertion method, IFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) information etc. of/FFT, PAPR cut down The information of method, the information of protection interval insertion method) information export as control signal 7609.

Control symbol signal generating unit 8502 with the 1st, the transmission data 8501 of 2Signalling data, control letter Numbers 7609 is input, based on the 1st be included in control signal 7609, the information of error correction of 2Signalling data, tune The information of the information etc. of mode processed, is carried out based on Error Correction of Coding, the mapping of modulation system, output the 1st, 2Signalling (orthogonal) baseband signal 8503 of data.

In the case of Figure 85, frame constituting portion 7610 replaces the base that the P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605 shown in Figure 76 generates Band signal 7606 and using control symbol signal generating unit 8502 generate baseband signal 8503 as input.

Then, the system of the standard different from DVB-T2 is used (or precoding and baseband signal replace to after precoding The frame structure sending signal in the broadcasting station (base station) when signal afterwards) carries out the sending method of phase place change, the information that controls (are led to Cross P1 code element and the 1st, 2Signalling data send information) transmission method use Figure 77 to explain.

Figure 77 represent by P1 code element, the 1st, 2Signalling data, Common PLP send after send multiple PLP In the case of frequency-time axle on an example of frame structure.In Figure 77, stream s1 use in frequency axis subcarrier #1～ Subcarrier #M, equally, stream s2 also uses subcarrier #1～subcarrier #M in frequency axis.Thus, in s1, s2 both sides, same In the case of the synchronization of one subcarrier exists code element, same frequency exists the code element of two streams.It addition, as at other In embodiment, explanation is like that, and after using precoding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out phase place change In the case of sending method more, it is weighted and synthesizes (additionally, according to circumstances, then entering by s1, s2 use pre-coding matrix Row baseband signal is replaced), the most also carry out phase place change.Thus, if the signal obtained here is set to z1, z2, Then z1, z2 are exported from antenna respectively.

As shown in Figure 77, interval 1 uses stream s1, the code element group 7701 of stream s2 transmission PLP#1, it is assumed that use shown in Figure 23 The MIMO transmission mode that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or pre-coding matrix are fixed transmits data.

The interval 2 code element groups 7702 using stream s1 transmission PLP#2, it is assumed that transmit number by sending a modulated signal According to.

Interval 3 use stream s1, the code element group 7703 of stream s2 transmission PLP#3, it is assumed that use to after precoding (or precoding and Baseband signal replace after) signal carry out phase place change sending method transmission data.

Interval 4 use stream s1, the code element group 7704 of stream s2 transmission PLP#4, it is assumed that use space-time block code transmission data.

In the case of broadcasting station sends each PLP as shown in Figure 77, in the reception device sending signal receiving Figure 64, It is to be appreciated that the sending method of each PLP.Thus, as above-mentioned middle narration, need to use the 1st, 2Signalling data Transmit the information of the sending method of each PLP.Hereinafter, to the constructive method of P1 code element now and the 1st, 2Signalling One example of the constructive method of data illustrates.The concrete such as table 2 using the control information of P1 code element transmission is such.

In DVB-T2 standard, according to the control information (information of 3 bits) of S1, it is possible to judge whether to use DVB-T2's Standard, additionally, in the case of using DVB-T2 standard, receive device and can interpolate that the sending method of use.As 3 bits S1 information and in the case of being set as " 000 ", the modulated signal of transmission is according to " modulated signal of DVB-T2 standard is sent out Send ".

Additionally, in the case of setting " 001 " in the S1 information as 3 bits, the modulated signal of transmission is according to " using The transmission of the space-time block code of DVB-T2 standard ".

In DVB-T2 standard, " 010 "～" 111 " is in order to be " Reserve " in the future.Here, in order to apply the present invention Using with DVB-T2, there is compatibility and as in the case of the S1 information setting such as " 010 " of 3 bits (as long as " 000 " Beyond " 001 " the most just can), represent the standard beyond the modulated signal foundation DVB-T2 sent, if the reception device of terminal is known This information of road is " 010 ", then be able to know that the standard beyond the modulated signal foundation DVB-T2 that broadcasting station sends.

Then, illustrate modulated signal that broadcasting station sends according to the 1st in the case of the standard beyond DVB-T2, the The example of the constructive method of 2Signalling data.1st, the 1st example of the control information of 2Signalling data is table 3 Like that.

" PLP_MODE " of the information as 2 bits shown in table 3, as shown in Figure 77, is used to each PLP(in Figure 77 PLP#1 to #4) sending method exist according to each PLP to the control information of terminal notification, the information of PLP_MODE. That is, in the case of Figure 77, the information of the PLP_MODE of PLP#1 will be used for, be used for the information of the PLP_MODE of PLP#2, be used for The information of the PLP_MODE of PLP#3, information for the PLP_MODE of PLP#4 send from broadcasting station.Certainly, terminal is led to Cross and this information is demodulated (additionally, also carrying out error correction decoding), it is possible to identify the transmission means that broadcasting station uses in PLP.

In the case of being set as " 00 " as " PLP_MODE ", this PLP is passed by " sending a modulated signal " Transmission of data.In the case of being set as " 01 ", this PLP is passed by multiple modulated signals of space-time block coding " transmission carried out " Transmission of data.In the case of being set as " 10 ", this PLP uses " to (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Signal carries out the sending method of phase place change " transmission data.In the case of being set as " 11 ", this PLP uses " pre-coding matrix Fixing MIMO method or spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means " transmit data.

It addition, in the case of being set as certain of " 01 "～" 11 " as " PLP_MODE ", need broadcasting station concrete Implement what kind of process and (such as the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out sending out of phase place change The concrete Phase-switching method of delivery method, the space-time block coding method of use, the knot of matrix that uses as pre-coding matrix Structure) to terminal transmission.Hereinafter the constructive method of the control information different from table 3 of the structure of the control information comprised now is entered Row explanation.

1st, the 2nd example of the control information of 2Signalling data is that table 4 is such.

As table 4, there is " PLP_MODE " of information as 1 bit, as " the MIMO_ of information of 1 bit MODE ", as 2 bits information " MIMO_PATTERN#1 ", as " MIMO_PATTERN#2 " of information of 2 bits, these are 4 years old Individual control information is as shown in Figure 77, and being used to each PLP(is PLP#1 to #4 in Figure 77) sending method to terminal notification Information, thus, these 4 control information exist according to each PLP.That is, in the case of Figure 77, the PLP_ of PLP#1 will be used for The information of the information/MIMO_PATTERN#2 of the information/MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of MODE, for PLP# The information of the information/MIMO_PATTERN#2 of the information/MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of the PLP_MODE of 2, Information/the MIMO_PATTERN#2 of information/MIMO_PATTERN#1 of information/MIMO_MODE for the PLP_MODE of PLP#3 Information, for the information/MIMO_ of information/MIMO_PATTERN#1 of information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE of PLP#4 The information of PATTERN#2 sends from broadcasting station.Certainly, by this information of terminal is demodulated (additionally, also carry out error correction solution Code), it is possible to identify the transmission means that broadcasting station uses in PLP.

In the case of being set as " 0 " as " PLP_MODE ", this PLP is transmitted by " sending a modulated signal " Data.In the case of being set as " 1 ", this PLP is with " transmission carry out space-time block coding after multiple modulated signals ", " to prelisting After Ma, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change ", " pre-coding matrix is fixing MIMO method ", certain mode of " spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means " transmit data.

In the case of " PLP_MODE " is set to " 1 ", the information of " MIMO_MODE " is effective information, in conduct " MIMO_MODE " and in the case of being set as " 0 ", do not use the letter of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Number carry out the sending method of phase place change and transmit data.In the case of being set as " 1 " as " MIMO_MODE ", use The signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the sending method transmission data of phase place change.

It is set in the case of " 1 " and " MIMO_MODE " be set to " 0 " at " PLP_MODE ", " MIMO_ PATTERN#1 " information be effective information.Now, in the case of being set as " 00 " as " MIMO_PATTERN#1 ", Use space-time block code transmission data.In the case of being set as " 01 ", use and use pre-coding matrix #1 to be weighted regularly The method for precoding transmission data of synthesis.In the case of being set as " 10 ", use and use pre-coding matrix #2 to carry out regularly The method for precoding transmission data of weighting synthesis.(wherein, pre-coding matrix #1 and pre-coding matrix #2 is different matrix.) In the case of being set as " 11 ", use spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means transmission data.

It is set in the case of " 1 " and " MIMO_MODE " be set to " 1 " at " PLP_MODE ", " MIMO_ PATTERN#2 " information be effective information.Now, in the case of being set as " 00 " as " MIMO_PATTERN#2 ", Use phase place change #1's the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the transmission of phase place change Method transmission data.In the case of being set as " 01 ", use phase place change #2 to after precoding (or precoding and base band letter Number replace after) signal carry out phase place change sending method transmission data.In the case of being set as " 10 ", phase place is used to become The sending method transmission number that the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change of more #3 According to.In the case of being set as " 11 ", use phase place change #4 to (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Signal carry out phase place change sending method transmission data.Here, phase place change #1～#4 is respectively different methods, now So-called different method, if such as setting #A and #B as different methods, then has

Identical phase place is comprised among the multiple phase places change used in the multiple phase places change used in #A and #B Change, but the cycle is different；

There is the phase place change value being included in #A but be not included in #B；

The phase place change used in the method for #B is not included in #A 3 sides of the multiple phase places change used Method.

In above-mentioned, it is assumed that by table 3, table 4 control information by the 1st, 2Signalling data sends and carries out Explanation.In the case, have and need not, in order to transmit control information, the advantage utilizing PLP especially.

As above, by using multicarrier transmission mode as OFDM mode, and can carry out and DVB- While the identification of T2 standard, for the standard different from DVB-T2 can select to after precoding (or precoding and base band letter After number replacing) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change, it is possible to obtain to obtain higher reception product for LOS environment Matter and the advantage that higher transmission speed can be obtained.It addition, in the present embodiment, as setting carrier group Transmission means, has enumerated and " spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, has used the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to precoding The signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change, space-time block coding, only sends stream afterwards The transmission means of s1 ", but it is not limited to this.

Further, " the MIMO of the pre-coding matrix that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, use are fixed can be selected with broadcasting station Mode, the sending method of phase place change that the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out, empty time block Coding, only send stream s1 transmission means " example be illustrated but it also may be not to select these whole transmissions The sending method of method, such as, as

Can select to use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to (or precoding and base band letter after precoding After number replacing) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change, space-time block coding, only send the sender of transmission means of stream s1 Method

Can select to use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to (or precoding and base band letter after precoding After number replacing) signal carry out the sending method of the sending method of phase place change, space-time block coding

Can select to use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to (or precoding and base band letter after precoding After number replacing) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change, only send the sending method of transmission means of stream s1

Can select the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method, the sending method of space-time block coding, the only transmission means of transmission stream s1

Use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix, to (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Signal carry out the sending method of phase place change

Can select the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method, the sending method of space-time block coding

Can select the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out sending out of phase place change The sending method of delivery method, the only transmission means of transmission stream s1

Like that, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change by comprising Sending method, it is possible to obtain the data transmission that can carry out in LOS environment at a high speed and the reception being able to ensure that reception device The effect of data quality.

Now, as in above-mentioned middle narration, need to set the S1 in P1 code element, and as the 1st, 2Signalling Data, as the establishing method (establishing method of the transmission means of each PLP) of the control information different from table 3, it may be considered that example Such as table 5.

Table 5 point different from table 3 is to be Reserve when being " 11 " when making " PLP_MODE ".So, in the biography as PLP The transmission means that defeated mode can select is in the case of as the example of above-mentioned middle expression, as long as according to the biography that can select The quantity of defeated mode such as makes the bit number of the PLP_MODE of composition table 3, table 5 become big or diminish.

About table 4 too, such as (or precoding and base band after only supporting precoding as MIMO transmission mode After signal is replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change in the case of, it is not necessary to the control information of " MIMO_MODE ". Additionally, in " MIMO_PATTERN#1 ", such as, in the case of not supporting the MIMO method that pre-coding matrix is fixed, also have not Need the situation of the control information of " MIMO_PATTERN#1 ", additionally, need not multiple MIMO fixing at pre-coding matrix In the case of the pre-coding matrix used in mode, it is also possible to be not the control information of 2 bits but the control information of 1 bit, And then, can also be the control information of more than 2 bits in the case of can setting multiple pre-coding matrix.

Also be able to about " MIMO_PATTERN#2 " it is also contemplated that, as to (or precoding and baseband signal after precoding After replacement) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change without multiple phase place variations in the case of, it is also possible to no It is the control information of 2 bits but the control information of 1 bit, and then, in the case of can setting multiple phase place variation, Can also be the control information of more than 2 bits.

Additionally, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated with the situation that antenna number is 2 of dispensing device, but does not limit In this, as long as it is the most permissible to send control information in the case of bigger than 2 too.Now, in order to except using 2 antennas to send tune Also implement the situation using 4 antennas to send modulated signal beyond the situation of signal processed, occur to need to increase to constitute each control information The situation of bit number.Now, with P1 code element send control information, with the 1st, 2Signalling data send control information As this point with the situation in above-mentioned middle explanation is.

About the frame structure of code element group of the PLP that broadcasting station sends, illustrate to carry out in the way of the time-division as shown in Figure 77 The method sent, and below its variation is illustrated.

Figure 79 represents on frequency-time axle different from Figure 77, after transmission P1 code element, P2 code element, Common PLP One example of the collocation method of the code element of stream s1 and s2.

1 code element in Figure 79, in the code element group of the PLP#1 being recited as the code element table diagram 77 of " #1 ".Equally, record For " #2 " code element table diagram 77 PLP#2 code element group in 1 code element, be recited as the PLP# of the code element table diagram 77 of " #3 " 1 code element in the code element group of 3,1 code element in the code element group of the PLP#4 being recited as the code element table diagram 77 of " #4 ".Further, As Figure 77, PLP#1 is that the MIMO using the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means shown in Figure 23 or pre-coding matrix to fix passes Defeated mode transmits data.Further, PLP#2 is to transmit data by one modulated signal of transmission.PLP#3 is for using in advance After coding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method transmission data of phase place change.PLP#4 For using space-time block code transmission data.

In Figure 79, in s1, s2 both sides, in the case of the synchronization of same subcarrier exists code element, same Frequency exists the code element of two streams.It addition, as explanation in other embodiments, after using precoding (or pre- After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change in the case of, s1, s2 are used precoding square Battle array is weighted and synthesizes (additionally, according to circumstances, then carry out baseband signal replacement), the most also carries out phase place change. Thus, if the signal obtained here to be set to z1, z2, then z1, z2 are exported from antenna respectively.

Points different for Figure 79 from Figure 77 is, as described above, in Figure 77, illustrates multiple PLP in the way of the time-division The example of configuration, and in Figure 79, different from Figure 77, use the mode of time-division and the mode of frequency division simultaneously, make multiple PLP deposit ?.I.e., such as in the moment 1, there is the code element of PLP#1 and the code element of PLP#2, in the moment 3, there is code element and the PLP#4 of PLP#3 Code element.In such manner, it is possible to according to (being made up of 1 moment, the 1 subcarrier) index (#X that each symbol allocation is different；X=1, 2) the code element of PLP.

It addition, in Figure 79, in order to simply, only exist " #1 " " #2 " in the moment 1, but be not limited to this, it is also possible to There is the code element of the PLP of the index beyond the PLP of " #1 " " #2 " in the moment 1, additionally, the pass of the index of the subcarrier in moment 1 and PLP System is not limited to Figure 79, and the code element of the PLP which index sub-carrier distributes can.Additionally, equally other moment also The code element of the PLP which index sub-carrier distributes can.

Figure 80 represent the transmission P1 code element different from Figure 77, the 1st, after 2Signalling data, Common PLP One example of the collocation method of the code element of stream s1 and s2 on frequency-time axle.Distinctive part in Figure 80 is, at T2 frame In, in the case of being sent as substantially with multiple antennas in the transmission means as PLP, it is impossible to select " only to send the biography of stream s1 Defeated mode ".

Thus, in Figure 80, it is assumed that the code element group 8001 of PLP#1 is by " spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or use are solid The MIMO method of fixed pre-coding matrix " transmit data.Assume that the code element group 8002 of PLP#2 is by " to (or pre-after precoding After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change " transmit data.Assume the code element of PLP#3 Group 8003 transmits data by " space-time block code ".Further, the PLP code element group in the T2 frame that the code element group 8003 of PLP#3 is later By " spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or use the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix ", " to (or pre-after precoding After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change ", certain sending method of " space-time block code " comes Transmission data.

Figure 81 represents different from Figure 79, sends P1 code element, the 1st, after 2Signalling data, Common PLP One example of the collocation method of the code element of stream s1 and s2 on frequency-time axle.

1 code element in Figure 81, in the code element group of the PLP#1 being recited as the code element table diagram 80 of " #1 ".Equally, record For " #2 " code element table diagram 80 PLP#2 code element group in 1 code element, be recited as the PLP# of the code element table diagram 80 of " #3 " 1 code element in the code element group of 3.Further, with Figure 80 it is similarly assumed that PLP#1 uses the spatial multiplexing MIMO shown in Figure 23 to transmit The MIMO transmission mode that mode or pre-coding matrix are fixed transmits data.And, it is assumed that PLP#2 uses (or pre-after precoding Coding and baseband signal replace after) signal carry out phase place change sending method transmission data.Assume block when PLP#3 uses empty Code transmission data.

In Figure 81, in s1, s2 both sides, in the case of the synchronization of same subcarrier exists code element, same Frequency exists the code element of two streams.It addition, as explanation in other embodiments, after using precoding (or pre- After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change in the case of, s1, s2 are used precoding square Battle array is weighted and synthesizes (additionally, according to circumstances, then carry out baseband signal replacement), the most also carries out phase place change. Thus, if the signal obtained here to be set to z1, z2, then z1, z2 are exported from antenna respectively.

Points different for Figure 81 from Figure 80 is, as described above, in Figure 80, illustrates multiple PLP in the way of the time-division The example of configuration, but in Figure 81, different from Figure 80, use the mode of time-division and the mode of frequency division simultaneously, make multiple PLP deposit ?.Code element and the code element of PLP#2 of PLP#1 i.e., is such as there is in the moment 1.In such manner, it is possible to according to (by 1 moment, 1 subcarrier structure Become) each code element and distribute different index (#X；X=1,2) the code element of PLP.

It addition, in Figure 81, in order to simply, only exist " #1 " " #2 " in the moment 1, but be not limited to this, it is also possible to There is the code element of the PLP of the index beyond the PLP of " #1 " " #2 " in the moment 1, additionally, the pass of the index of the subcarrier in moment 1 and PLP System is not limited to Figure 81, and the code element of the PLP which index sub-carrier distributes can.Additionally, equally other moment also The code element of the PLP which index sub-carrier distributes can.On the other hand, it is also possible to as the moment 3, the most only The code element of one PLP of distribution.That is, the code element of PLP how being distributed in the frame method of T/F can.

So, in unit frame, there is not the PLP that use " only sends the transmission means of stream s1 ", it is possible to suppression is eventually The dynamic range receiving signal that end receives, it is possible to what the probability obtaining enabling to good receiving quality uprised Effect.

It addition, in Figure 81 during explanation, and to select as sending method, " spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or use are solid The MIMO method of fixed pre-coding matrix ", " signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place The sending method of change ", the example of certain of " space-time block code " is illustrated, but need not make the whole energy of these sending methods Enough selections, can also be such as,

Can select " signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding to be carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method ", " space-time block code ", " using the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix "

Can select " signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding to be carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method ", " space-time block code "

Can select " signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding to be carried out sending out of phase place change Delivery method ", " using the MIMO method of fixing pre-coding matrix ".

In above-mentioned, the situation that there is multiple PLP in unit frame is illustrated, but below in unit frame only The situation that there is a PLP illustrates.

Figure 82 represent only exist in unit frame in the case of a PLP, stream s1 and s2 on T/F axle One example of frame structure.

It is being " control code element " described in Figure 82, but it means that the P1 code element and the 1st, in above-mentioned middle explanation The code element of 2Signalling dataP2 etc..Further, in Figure 82, use interval 1 to send the 1st unit frame, equally, use interval 2 send the 2nd unit frame, use interval 3 to send the 3rd unit frame, use interval 4 to send the 4th unit frame.

Additionally, in Figure 82, in the 1st unit frame, send the code element group 8101 of PLP#1-1, as sending method, select " MIMO method of the pre-coding matrix that spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means or use are fixed ".

In the 2nd unit frame, send the code element group 8102 of PLP#2-1, as sending method, select " to send a modulation The method of signal ".

In the 3rd unit frame, send the code element group 8103 of PLP#3-1, as sending method, select " to after precoding (or After precoding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change ".

In the 4th unit frame, send the code element group 8104 of PLP#4-1, as sending method, select " space-time block code ".

In Figure 82, in s1, s2 both sides, in the case of the synchronization of same subcarrier exists code element, same Frequency exists the code element of two streams.After using precoding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out phase In the case of the sending method of position change, s1, s2 use pre-coding matrix is weighted and synthesizes (additionally, according to circumstances, so After carry out baseband signal replacement), the most also carry out phase place change.Thus, if the signal obtained here is set to z1, Z2, then export from antenna respectively by z1, z2.

By so, owing to can consider that the transmission speed of data, the data receiver quality of terminal set according to each PLP Determine sending method, it is possible to realize the raising of the transmission speed of data and the receiving quality of data guarantee satisfactory to both parties.It addition, P1 code element, the 1st, if the example of the constructive method of the control information of the transmission method etc. of 2Signalling data is as the most above-mentioned Table 2 is constituted like that to table 5, then can implement equally.Different points is, in the frame structure of Figure 77 etc., due to a unit Frame has multiple PLP, so need the control information of transmission method etc. for multiple PLP, but at the frame structure of Figure 82 In the case of, owing to only existing a PLP in a unit frame, so only needing the transmission method etc. for this PLP Control information.

In the present embodiment, illustrate to the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding to be carried out Phase place change sending method be applied to use DVB standard system in the case of application process.Now, after to precoding The example of the sending method that the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out phase place change is as in this manual Represent such.Additionally, in the present embodiment, it is special address mode to control information, but address mode is not to this Oolemma affects.

Then, the space-time block code of narration in this specification include present embodiment is illustrated.

Figure 94 represents the structure of modulated signal when using space-time block code.The space-time block coding portion (9402) of Figure 94 with based on The baseband signal of certain modulated signal is input.Such as, space-time block coding portion (9402) with code element s1, code element s2, be Input.Then, as Figure 94, carry out space-time block coding, z1(9403A) for " being s1 as code element #0 ", " as code element #1 be- s2^*", " being s3 as code element #2 ", " be-s4 as code element #3^*", z2(9403B) it is " being s2 as code element #0 ", " makees It is s1 for code element #1^*", " being s4 as code element #2 ", " be s3 as code element #3^*”···.Now, in code element #X in z1, z2 Code element #X sent from different antennas respectively by same frequency in the same time.It addition, the joining of the code element of space-time block code Put and be not limited to time orientation, it is also possible to configure on frequency axis direction, it is also possible in the code element formed with T/F In Qun appropriately configured.Additionally, space-time block code can also use other of the example in Figure 94 as space-time block coding method Space-time block code implements each embodiment of this specification.

(embodiment E2)

In the present embodiment, explain use and explanation in embodiment E1 is used the logical of DVB-T2 standard After communication system uses after precoding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change Method time method of reseptance and receive device structure.

Figure 86 represents that the dispensing device in the broadcasting station of Figure 76 have employed to after precoding that (or precoding and baseband signal replace One example of the structure receiving device of terminal when signal afterwards) carries out the sending method of phase place change, about dynamic as Fig. 7 The part made gives identical label.

In Figure 86, P1 symbol detection lsb decoder 8601 receives the signal that broadcasting station sends, by with baseband signal 704_ X, 704_Y be input to detect P1 code element, carry out signal detection, temporal frequency synchronize while can be (by being demodulated And error correction decoding) the control information that obtains being included in P1 code element obtains, P1 code element control information 8602 exported.

OFDM mode association process portion 8600_X and 8600_Y controls information 8602 for inputting, based on this information with P1 code element Change is for the signal processing method (signal processing of Fourier transform etc.) of OFDM mode.(as described in embodiment E1 Like that, the information of the transmission method being because the signal that broadcasting station sends is included in P1 code element.) OFDM mode association process portion 8600_X and 8600_Y is by based on baseband signal 704_X after set signal processing method demodulation and 704_Y output.

P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 with baseband signal 704_X, 704_Y, And P1 code element control information 8602 is input, controls information based on P1 code element and carry out signal processing, be demodulated (including error correction solution Code), P2 code element control information 8604 is exported.

Control information generation unit 8605, will with P1 code element control information 8602 and P2 code element control information 8604 for input (relevant with reception action) control information package (bundle), exports as control signal 8606.Further, control signal 8606 As shown in Figure 86, inputted to each portion.

Signal processing part 711 is with signal 706_1,706_2,708_1,708_2,704_X, 704_Y and control signal 8606 For inputting, based on being included in transmission means in control signal 8606, that use, modulation system, error correction in order to transmit each PLP Coded system, the encoding rate of Error Correction of Coding, the information of block size etc. of error correction number, the process be demodulated, decoded, output receives Data 712.

Now, using spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means in order to transmit PLP, using fixing pre-coding matrix MIMO method, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out certain of the sending method of phase place change In the case of individual transmission means, according to the output result of channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) with connect Receive (base band) signal, utilize the relation sending signal to be received (base band) signal, be demodulated.It addition, using prelisting In the case of the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change after Ma, channel is utilized to become The output result of dynamic presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) and reception (base band) signal and the relation of formula (48) It is demodulated.

Figure 87 represents that the dispensing device in the broadcasting station of Figure 85 uses to after precoding that (or precoding and baseband signal replace One example of the structure receiving device of terminal when signal afterwards) carries out the sending method of phase place change, for Fig. 7, Figure 86 The part of same action gives identical label.

The point receiving device different from the reception device of Figure 86 of Figure 87 is that the reception device of Figure 86 is able to receive that DVB-T2 Standard and the signal of standard beyond it and obtain data, in contrast, the reception device of Figure 87 can only receive DVB-T2 mark Signal beyond standard and obtain data.

In Figure 87, P1 symbol detection lsb decoder 8601 receives the signal that broadcasting station sends, by with baseband signal 704_ X, 704_Y are input detection P1 code element, while carrying out signal detection, temporal frequency synchronization, (by being demodulated and error correction Decoding) obtain the control information that is included in P1 code element, P1 code element control information 8602 is exported.

OFDM mode association process portion 8600_X and 8600_Y controls information 8602 for inputting, based on this information with P1 code element Change is for the signal processing method of OFDM mode.(because as described in embodiment E1, the signal that broadcasting station sends The information of transmission method be included in P1 code element.) OFDM mode association process portion 8600_X and 8600_Y will be based on set Signal processing method demodulation after baseband signal 704_X and 704_Y output.

1st, 2Signalling data demodulation section 8701 controls information with baseband signal 704_X, 704_Y and P1 code element 8602 is input, controls information based on P1 code element and carries out signal processing, is demodulated (including error correction decoding), by the 1st, the 2Signalling data controls information 8702 and exports.

Control information generation unit 8605 and control letter with P1 code element control information the 8602 and the 1st, 2Signalling data Breath 8702 is input, by (relevant with reception action) control information package, exports as control signal 8606.Further, control Signal 8606, as shown in Figure 86, is inputted to each portion.

Signal processing part 711 is with signal 706_1,706_2,708_1,708_2,704_X, 704_Y and control signal 8606 For inputting, based on being included in transmission means in control signal 8606, that use, modulation system, error correction in order to transmit each PLP Coded system, the encoding rate of Error Correction of Coding, the information of block size etc. of error correction number, the process be demodulated, decoded, number will be received According to 712 outputs.

Now, using spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means in order to transmit PLP, using fixing pre-coding matrix MIMO method, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out certain of the sending method of phase place change In the case of individual transmission means, according to the output result of channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) with connect Receive (base band) signal, utilize the relation sending signal to be received (base band) signal, be demodulated.It addition, using prelisting In the case of the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change after Ma, channel is utilized to become The output result of dynamic presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) and reception (base band) signal and the relation of formula (48) It is demodulated.

Figure 88 represent corresponding to DVB-T2 standard and corresponding to the standard beyond DVB-T2 terminal receive device Structure, the part for action as Fig. 7, Figure 86 gives identical label.

The point receiving device different from the reception device of Figure 86, Figure 87 of Figure 88 is that the reception device of Figure 88 possesses P2 code Unit or the 1st, 2Signalling data demodulation section 8801, so as to DVB-T2 standard and the signal of the standard beyond it Both sides be demodulated.

P2 code element or the 1st, 2Signalling data demodulation section 8801 is with baseband signal 704_X, 704_Y and P1 code element Control information 8602 is input, controls information based on P1 code element, it is judged that the signal received corresponds to the letter of DVB-T2 standard Number, also correspond to the signal (such as can be judged) of standard beyond it by table 2, carry out signal processing, solve Adjust (including error correction decoding), receive the control information 8802 of information what standard corresponding to signal be export comprising.About Part beyond it, for the action as Figure 86, Figure 87.

As above, represent such structure receiving device in the present embodiment by making, receive and implementing The signal that the dispensing device in the broadcasting station described in mode E1 sends, by implementing suitable signal processing, it is possible to received The data that quality is higher.Particularly, after receiving precoding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) is carried out During the signal of sending method of phase place change, in LOS environment, it is possible to realize raising and the data receiver of the efficiency of transmission of data The raising of quality satisfactory to both parties.

It addition, in the present embodiment, owing to illustrating and the sending method in the broadcasting station of narration in embodiment E1 The corresponding structure receiving device, so the structure making reception antenna number receive device when being two is illustrated, but The antenna number receiving device is not limited to two, can implement too if more than 3, now, due to diversity gain Improve, it is possible to make the receiving quality of data improve.Additionally, the transmission antenna number at the dispensing device making broadcasting station is 3 Above, time to make transmission modulated signal number be more than 3, by making the reception antenna number receiving device of terminal increase, too can Enough enforcement.Even if additionally, the antenna number receiving device is 1, it is also possible to use maximum likelihood detection (Maximum Likelihood detection) or the maximum likelihood detection of approximation.Now, as sending method, it is preferred to employ in advance After coding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change.

Additionally, carry out the transmission of phase place change about to the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Method, however it is not limited to the specific example recorded in this manual, if take to carry out precoding then carry out phase place change, Or carry out the structure of phase place change before it, present embodiment can be implemented the most equally.

(embodiment E3)

Recorded by embodiment E1 DVB-T2 standard is used precoding after (or precoding and baseband signal replace In the system of the sending method that signal afterwards) carries out phase place change, there is the insertion specifying pilot tone with L1Pre-Signalling The control information of pattern.In the present embodiment, illustrate with during L1pre-signalling change pilot tone intercalation model, in advance After coding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the application process of the sending method of phase place change.

Figure 89, Figure 90 represent use identical frequency domain multiple modulated signals are sent from multiple antennas sending method time One example of the frame structure on the frequency-time axle of DVB-T2 standard.At Figure 89, Tu90Zhong, transverse axis represents frequency i.e. carrier number Code, longitudinal axis express time, (A) represents that the frame structure of modulated signal z1 of the embodiment of explanation so far, (B) expression arrive this Till the frame structure of modulated signal z2 of embodiment of explanation.Give as number of carriers " f0, f1, f2, ", make The index of " t1, t2, t3, " is given for the time.Further, at Figure 89, Tu90Zhong, same number of carriers, same time Code element be the code element being present in same frequency, synchronization.

Figure 89, Figure 90 are the examples of the on position of the pilot frequency code element in DVB-T2 standard.(in DVB-T2 standard, In the case of using multiple antenna to send multiple modulated signals, the method about the on position of pilot tone exists 8 kinds, and Figure 89, Figure 90 represents two therein.) Figure 89, Tu90Zhong, the two of the code element describe the code element for pilot tone, transmitting for data Plant code element.As illustrated in other embodiments, after using precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) Signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change or the fixing method for precoding of pre-coding matrix, for modulated signal z1 Data transmission code element be stream s1 with stream s2 weighting after synthesis after code element, additionally, for modulated signal z2 data transmission Code element also for stream s1 with stream s2 weighting synthesis after code element.But (, after using precoding (or precoding and base band After signal is replaced) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change in the case of, also have the situation carrying out phase place change again) make In the case of space-time block code, spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission means, the code element that the data for modulated signal z1 are transmitted is stream s1 Or the code element of certain of stream s2, additionally, the code element for the data transmission of modulated signal z2 is also certain flowing s1 or stream s2 Code element.At Figure 89, Tu90Zhong, the code element for pilot tone is imparted certain of index of " PP1 " or " PP2 ", at " PP1 " and In " PP2 ", for the pilot frequency code element of different constructive methods.As in above-mentioned middle narration, in DVB-T2 standard, broadcasting station energy Enough specify certain insertion method of 8 kinds of pilot interposition methods (the insertion frequency in the frame of pilot frequency code element is different), Figure 89, Tu90Biao Show two kinds of pilot interposition methods in above-mentioned 8 kinds.Further, the letter of pilot interposition method that will select from 8 kinds about broadcasting station Cease as L1Pre-Signalling data that describe in embodiment E1, in P2 code element, to the end as sending object End transmission.

Then, to along with pilot interposition method, to the letter of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding The application process of number sending method carrying out phase place change illustrates.As an example, if to (or precoding and base after precoding After band signal is replaced) signal to carry out the multiple different phase place change value of the preparation in the sending method of phase place change be 10 Kind, phase place change value is expressed as F ［ 0 ］, F ［ 1 ］, F ［ 2 ］, F ［ 3 ］, F ［ 4 ］, F ［ 5 ］, F ［ 6 ］, F ［ 7 ］, F ［ 8 ］, F ［ 9 ］.Will be at figure Frame structure on the frequency-time axle of 89 is carried out use the letter of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding The situation during distribution of phase place change value when number carrying out the sending method of phase place change represents in Figure 91, by the frequency at Figure 90 The frame structure of rate-time is carried out use and the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place The situation during distribution of phase place change value during the sending method of change represents in Figure 92.Such as, the modulation at Figure 91 (A) is believed Number frame structure of z1, Figure 91 (B) modulated signal z2 frame structure any one in, be all recited as in the code element of f1, t1 " #1 ", but it means that the code element of f1, t1 is carried out phase place change by the phase place change value using F ［ 1 ］.Thus, at Figure 91, Figure 92 In, at carrier wave fx(x=0,1,2), ty(y=1,2,3) code element described in be " #Z " in the case of, meaning The code element fx, ty is carried out phase place change by the phase place change value using F ［ Z ］.

Certainly, in the frame structure on the frequency-time axle of Figure 91, Figure 92, the insertion method of pilot frequency code element is (between insertion Every) different.Additionally, do not use for pilot frequency code element, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out The sending method of phase place change.Therefore, at Figure 91, Tu92Zhong, even if all using same period (as to (or pre-after precoding After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out the number of different phase place change values that the sending method of phase place change prepares Amount) the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the sending method of phase place change, by Figure 91, Figure 92 understand, even in Figure 91, Figure 92 also occur same carrier wave, the code element of same time, distribution phase place change value also Different situations.Such as, the code element of f5, t2 of Figure 91 represents " #7 ", carries out phase place change by the phase place change value of F ［ 7 ］.Separately On the one hand, the code element of f5, t2 of Figure 92 represents " #8 ", carries out phase place change by the phase place change value of F ［ 8 ］.

Thus, broadcasting station would indicate that the control of pilot frequency mode (pilot interposition method) by L1Pre-Signalling data Information processed sends, but represent the control information of this pilot frequency mode while representing pilot interposition method, by table 3 or table 4 Control information have selected as the transmission method of broadcast station transmission PLP to after precoding that (or precoding and baseband signal replace After changing) signal carry out the sending method of phase place change in the case of, it is also possible to represent (or precoding and base band after precoding After signal is replaced) signal carry out the distribution method of the phase place change value in the sending method of phase place change.Thus, receive broadcast The reception device of the terminal of sent modulated signal of standing is by obtaining the expression pilot tone mould in L1Pre-Signaling data The control information of formula, it is possible to know and the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change The distribution method of the phase place change value in sending method.(now, using by the control information of table 3 or table 4 as broadcast station transmission The transmission method of PLP and have selected and the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Premised on sending method.) it addition, illustrate used here as L1Pre-Signalling data, but there is not P2 code element In the case of the frame structure of Figure 83, pilot frequency mode and expression are to the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding The control information of the distribution method carrying out the phase place change value in the sending method of phase place change is present in the 1st, In 2Signalling data.

Hereinafter, other example is described.Table 6 represents that the phase place corresponding to modulation system changes pattern example.

［ table 6 ］

Such as, as table 6, determine while specified modulation mode after to precoding (or precoding and base band After signal is replaced) signal carry out the phase place change value used in the sending method of phase place change in the case of, it is possible to above-mentioned Illustrate similarly to consider, by only transmit the transmission method of the control information of the pilot frequency mode of P2 code element, PLP control information and The control information of modulation system, the reception device of terminal is by obtaining these control information, it is possible to estimate (or pre-after precoding After coding and baseband signal are replaced) signal carry out (the frequency-time axle of phase place change value of sending method of phase place change On) distribution method.It addition, in table 6, in the row of phase place change pattern, "-" represents and does not carries out phase place change, " #A " " # B " " #C " represent respectively carry out #A, #B, #C phase place change.Equally, as was the case with table 1, in specified modulation mode and error correction number Method while determine that after to precoding the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out sending out of phase place change In the case of the phase place change value used in delivery method, by only transmitting the control information of the pilot frequency mode of P2 code element, the biography of PLP The control information of transmission method and the control information of modulation system, the method for error correction number, the reception device of terminal is by obtaining these Control information, it is possible to estimate and the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the transmission of phase place change (on frequency-time axle) distribution method of the phase place change value of method.

But, different from table 1, table 6, though determining modulation mode, also be able to select two or more different in advance After coding the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carry out the sending method of phase place change certain (for instance, it is possible to From the cycle different the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the sending method of phase place change Middle selection, or can from phase place change value self different to the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding Carry out the sending method of phase place change selects), even if or determining modulation mode, error correcting system, also be able to select two kinds with On different the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the sending method of phase place change Certain, even if or determine error correcting system, also be able to select two or more different to (or precoding and base band after precoding After signal is replaced) signal carry out certain of sending method of phase place change in the case of, as table 4, transmit precoding The signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the switching side of phase place change value of sending method of phase place change afterwards Method, but in addition, it is also possible to transmit and carry out phase about to the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding The information of (on frequency-time axle) distribution method of the phase place change value of position change.

By now and carry out phase place change about to the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding The structure of information-related control information of (on frequency-time axle) distribution method of phase place change value of sending method Example is shown in Table 7 below.

［ table 7 ］

PHASE_FRAME_ARRANGEMENT(2 bit)	Control information content
		00	Distribution method #1 in the frame of phase place change value
01	Distribution method #2 in the frame of phase place change value
		10	Distribution method #3 in the frame of phase place change value
11	Distribution method #4 in the frame of phase place change value

For example, it is assumed that the dispensing device in broadcasting station have selected Figure 89 as the intercalation model of pilot tone, and as in advance After coding, the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change and the method that have selected A. Now, the dispensing device in broadcasting station can select figure as (on the frequency-time axle) distribution method of phase place change value 91, certain of Figure 93.For example, it is assumed that in the case of the dispensing device in broadcasting station have selected Figure 91, by " the PHASE_ of table 7 FRAME_ARRANGEMENT " it is set as " 00 ", in the case of have selected Figure 93, by " the PHASE_FRAME_ of table 7 ARRANGEMENT " it is set as " 01 ".Further, the reception device of terminal is by obtaining the control information of table 7, it is possible to know phase place (on frequency-time axle) distribution method of change value.It addition, the control information of table 7 can be transmitted by P2 code element, Additionally it is possible to by the 1st, 2Signalling data is transmitted.

As above, it is achieved based on pilot interposition method, to after precoding, (or precoding and baseband signal replace Signal afterwards) carries out the distribution method of the phase place change value of the sending method of phase place change, and, by by this distribution method Information is reliably transmitted to sending object, it is possible to the device that receives obtaining the terminal as sending object is capable of the biography of data The satisfactory to both parties effect of the raising of the raising of defeated efficiency and the receiving quality of data.

It addition, in the present embodiment, illustrate that the signal number that sends making broadcasting station is the situation of 2, but make broadcasting station The transmission antenna number of dispensing device be more than 3, time to make transmission modulated signal number be more than 3, can implement too.This Outward, the sending method of phase place change is carried out about to the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding, not It is defined in the specific example recorded in this manual, if taking to carry out precoding then carry out phase place change or at it Carry out the structure of phase place change before, present embodiment can be implemented the most equally.

Further, the constructive method of pilot signal is not limited to present embodiment, uses precoding in receiving device In the case of the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) carries out the sending method of phase place change afterwards, as long as can lead The signal of the relation going out formula (48) just can be (for example, it may be receive device to know the pilot signal that dispensing device sends in advance Known signal.).It addition, about this point, it is possible to whole middle throughout the description about the present invention uses.

It addition, at the accompanying drawing of the dispensing device associated with the invention of this specification, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Figure 12, Figure 13, Figure 51, figure 52, in Figure 67, Figure 70, Figure 76, Figure 85 etc., when set the modulated signal sent from two transmission antennas be respectively modulated signal #1, During modulated signal #2, how the average transmitting power of modulated signal #1 and the average transmitting power of modulated signal #2 set all may be used With.Such as, in the case of the average transmitting power of two modulated signals is set as difference, by using at general channel radio The technology of transmission power control used in communication system, it is possible to by the average transmitting power of modulated signal #1 and modulated signal #2 Average transmitting power is set as difference.Now, transmission power control both can be in the state of baseband signal (such as, in use The mapping time point of modulation system is transmitted power control) under carry out the power of signal and control, it is also possible to antenna nearby Power amplifier (power amplifier) is transmitted power control.

(about cyclic Q delay)

Application to the Cyclic Q Delay recorded in this manual illustrates.Described in non-patent literature 10 Cyclic Q Delay(circulation Q postpones) summary.Hereinafter, the generation method to s1, s2 during use Cyclic QDelay Specific example illustrate.

Figure 95 represents an example of the configuration that modulation system is the signaling point in homophase I-orthogonal Q plane during 16QAM.When If input bit is b0, b1, b2, b3, b0b1b2b3 is certain of the value of 0000 to 1111, such as, is being used by b0b1b2b3 During 0000 expression, select the signaling point 9501 of Figure 95, using the value of same phase constituent based on signaling point 9501 as baseband signal Same phase constituent, using the value of orthogonal component based on signaling point 9501 as the orthogonal component of baseband signal.It is it at b0b1b2b3 When he is worth too, same phase constituent and the orthogonal component of baseband signal are generated.

Figure 96 represent apply circulation Q postpone time for from (binary system) data genaration modulated signal s1(t) (t: time Between) (or s1(f), f: frequency) and s2(t) (t: time) (or s2(f), f: frequency) the example of structure of signal generating unit.

Mapping portion 9602 is with data 9601 and control signal 9606 for input, according to modulation methods based on control signal 9606 Formula, such as, in the case of have selected 16QAM as modulation system, map according to the rule of Figure 95, after output maps The same phase constituent 9603_A of baseband signal and orthogonal component 9603_B.It addition, modulation system is not limited to 16QAM, at it Can implement too in the case of his modulation system.

Now, data b01 of time point 1 corresponding with b0, b1, b2, b3 of Figure 95, b11, b21, b31 are represented.Map Portion 9602 data b01 based on time point 1, b11, b21, b31, the same phase constituent I1 of the baseband signal of output time point 1 and orthogonal one-tenth Divide Q1.Equally, mapping portion 9602 exports same phase constituent I2 and orthogonal component Q2 of the baseband signal of time point 2,.

Storage and signal replacement portion 9604 with the same phase constituent 9603_A of baseband signal and orthogonal component 9603_B, control letter Numbers 9606 is input, based on control signal 9606, by same phase constituent 9603_A and the storage of orthogonal component 9603_B of baseband signal, Carry out the restructuring of signal, by modulated signal s1(t) (9605_A) and modulated signal s2(t) (9605_B) output.It addition, about tune Signal s1(t processed), s2(t) generation method illustrating in detail below.

As recorded in the description, to modulated signal s1(t), s2(t) implement precoding and phase place change.Now, As represented in this manual, it is also possible to the letter of implementing phase change, power change, signal replacement etc. in certain stage Number process.Further, will be by modulated signal s1(t), s2(t) carry out precoding and phase place change and modulated signal r1 that obtains (t) and r2(t) use same frequency band to send in identical (sharing) time.

It addition, in above-mentioned, be illustrated with time shaft t, but when using the multicarrier load mode of OFDM etc., can With by s1(t), s2(t) consider make s1(f), s2(f) (f:() carrier wave).Now, will be by modulated signal s1(f), s2(f) Modulated signal r1(f that application switches the method for precoding of pre-coding matrix regularly and obtains) and r2(f) identical (sharing) Time sends (certainly, r1(f), r2(f) be the signal of same frequency band).Additionally, as represented in this manual, it is also possible to By s1(t), s2(t) consider to make s1(t, f), s2(t, f).

Then, to modulated signal s1(t), s2(t) generation method illustrate.When Figure 97 is to use circulation Q to postpone, S1(t), s2(t) the 1st example of generation method.

Figure 97 (a) represents same phase constituent and the orthogonal component of the baseband signal obtained by the mapping portion 9602 of Figure 96.Such as figure Shown in 97(a), in addition as carried out the explanation in the mapping portion 9602 of Figure 96, with the same phase constituent I1 of the baseband signal of time point 1 And the same of baseband signal of the same phase constituent I2 of the baseband signal of orthogonal component Q1, time point 2 and orthogonal component Q2, time point 3 coordinate Point I3 and orthogonal component Q3, order, mapping portion 10302 is by the same phase constituent of baseband signal and orthogonal component output.

Figure 97 (b) represents the same of baseband signal when carrying out signal replacement in the storage and signal replacement portion 9604 of Figure 96 The example of the group of phase constituent and orthogonal component.In Figure 97 (b), by time point 1 and time point 2, time point 3 and time point 4, time point 5 and time Point 6, i.e. time point 2i+1 and time point 2i+2(i is the integer of more than 0) as group, in group, such as, carry out at time point 1 and time point 2 The replacement of the orthogonal component of baseband signal.

Thus, the same phase constituent of baseband signal does not carry out the replacement of signal, so the same phase constituent of the baseband signal of time point 1 For I1, the same phase constituent of the baseband signal of time point 2 is I2, and the same phase constituent of the baseband signal of time point 3 is I3,.

Further, the orthogonal component of baseband signal is owing to carrying out the replacement of signal in group, so the baseband signal of time point 1 Orthogonal component is Q2, and the orthogonal component of the baseband signal of time point 2 is Q1, and the orthogonal component of the baseband signal of time point 3 is Q4, time point The orthogonal component of the baseband signal of 4 is Q3,.

Figure 97 (c) represents modulated signal s1 when the method that application implementation precoding and phase place change, before precoding (t), s2(t) an example of structure.Such as, as shown in Figure 97 (c), the baseband signal that will generate as Figure 97 (b) is alternately To s1(t), s2(t) distribution.Thus, s1(t) the 1st time slot be (I1, Q2), s2(t) the 1st time slot be (I2, Q1).S1(t) The 2nd time slot be (I3, Q4), s2(t) the 2nd time slot be (I4, Q3),.

It addition, Figure 97 is illustrated as a example by time-axis direction, but if frequency axis direction can be implemented too (being as above-mentioned middle explanation).Now, describe as s1(f), s2(f).

Further, the s1(t to nth slot) and the s2(t of nth slot) carry out precoding and phase place change, obtain nth slot Precoding and phase place change after signal r1(t), r2(t).About this point, it is that explanation is such in this manual.

Figure 98 represents the s1(t of the nth slot for obtaining Figure 97), s2(t) the constructive method different from Figure 96.Reflect Penetrate portion 9802 with data 9801, control signal 9804 for input, carry out based on the modulation system according to control signal 9804, example Such as the mapping of the replacement in view of Figure 97, generate the signal (the same phase constituent of baseband signal and orthogonal component) after mapping, from reflecting Signal after penetrating generates modulated signal s1(t) (9803_A) and modulated signal s2(t) (9803_B) export.It addition, modulation letter Number s1(t) (9803_A) is identical with modulated signal 9605_A of Figure 96, additionally, modulated signal s2(t) (9803_B) with Figure 96's Modulated signal 9605_B is identical, as shown in being Figure 97 (c).Thus, modulated signal s1(t) the 1st time slot of (9803_A) is (I1, Q2), modulated signal s2(t) the 1st time slot of (9803_B) is (I2, Q1), modulated signal s1(t) (9803_A) the 2nd time Gap is (I3, Q4), modulated signal s2(t) the 2nd time slot of (9803_B) is (I4, Q3),.

In order to supplement, in the mapping portion 9802 of Figure 98, modulated signal s1(t) the 1st time slot of (9803_A) (I1, Q2), modulated signal s2(t) the generation method of the 1st time slot (I2, Q1) of (9803_B) illustrates.

In Figure 98,9801 is data, and sets the data of time point 1 as b01, b11, b21, b31, if the data of time point 2 are b02、b12、b22、b32.The mapping portion 9802 of Figure 98 generates above-mentioned according to b01, b11, b21, b31 and b02, b12, b22, b32 I1, Q1, I2, the Q2 illustrated.Further, the mapping portion 9802 of Figure 98 can generate modulated signal s1(t according to I1, Q1, I2, Q2), S2(t).

Figure 99 represents the s1(t of the nth slot for obtaining Figure 97), s2(t) the composition side different from Figure 96, Figure 98 Method.Mapping portion 9901_A, with data 9801, control signal 9804 for input, is carried out based on the modulation methods according to control signal 9804 Formula, such as in view of the mapping of replacement of Figure 97, generate signal (the same phase constituent of baseband signal and the orthogonal one-tenth after mapping Point), generate modulated signal s1(t according to the signal after mapping) (9803_A) export.Mapping portion 9901_B is with data 9801, control Signal 9804 processed is input, carries out based on the modulation system according to control signal 9804, replacement that such as consider Figure 97 Map, generate the signal (the same phase constituent of baseband signal and orthogonal component) after mapping, generate modulation according to the signal after mapping Signal s2(t) (9803_B) export.

It addition, as the data 9801 of input of mapping portion 9901_A and the data of input as mapping portion 9901_B 9801 yes identical data.Additionally, modulated signal s1(t) (9803_A) identical with modulated signal 9605_A of Figure 96, this Outward, modulated signal s2(t) (9803_B) identical with modulated signal 9605_B of Figure 96, as shown in being Figure 97 (c).

Thus, modulated signal s1(t) the 1st time slot of (9803_A) is (I1, Q2), modulated signal s2(t) (9803_B) 1st time slot is (I2, Q1), modulated signal s1(t) the 2nd time slot of (9803_A) is (I3, Q4), modulated signal s2(t) (9803_ B) the 2nd time slot is (I4, Q3),.

In order to supplement, in the mapping portion 9901_A of Figure 99, modulated signal s1(t) the 1st time slot of (9803_A) (I1, Q2) generation method illustrates.In Figure 99,9801 is data, if the data of time point 1 are b01, b11, b21, b31, if time The data of point 2 are b02, b12, b22, b32.The mapping portion 9901_A of Figure 99 according to b01, b11, b21, b31 and b02, b12, B22, b32 generate I1, Q2 of described above.Further, the mapping portion 9901_A of Figure 99 can generate modulated signal s1 according to I1, Q2 (t).

Modulated signal s2(t in the mapping portion 9901_B of Figure 99) the generation side of the 1st time slot (I2, Q1) of (9803_B) Method illustrates.In Figure 99,9801 is data, if the data of time point 1 are b01, b11, b21, b31, if the data of time point 2 are b02、b12、b22、b32.The mapping portion 9901_B of Figure 99 is according in b01, b11, b21, b31 and b02, b12, b22, b32 generation State bright I2, Q1.Further, the mapping portion 9901_B of Figure 99 can be according to I2, and Q1 generates s2(t).

Then, Figure 100 represents s1(t when using circulation Q to postpone), s2(t) generation method different from Figure 97 The 2nd example.It addition, in Figure 100, give for the part (the same phase constituent of baseband signal and orthogonal component) identical with Figure 97 Identical label.

Figure 100 (a) represents same phase constituent and the orthogonal component of the baseband signal obtained by the mapping portion 9602 of Figure 96.Figure It is 100(a) identical with Figure 97 (a), so explanation is omitted.

Figure 100 (b) represents the s1(t carried out before signal replacement), s2(t) the same phase constituent of baseband signal and orthogonal component Structure, in Figure 100 (b), the baseband signal of time point 2i+1 is assigned to s1(t), the baseband signal of time point 2i+2 be allocated To s2(t) integer of more than 0 (i be).

Figure 100 (c) represents the baseband signal carried out in the storage and signal replacement portion 9604 of Figure 96 when signal is replaced Same phase constituent and the example of group of orthogonal component.The feature (points different from Figure 97) of Figure 100 (c) is at s1(t) in carry out Signal replace and at s2(t) in carry out signal replacement.

Thus, in Figure 100 (c), relative to Figure 100 (b), at s1(t) in carry out the replacement of Q1 and Q3, carry out Q5 and Q7 Replacement, carry out same replacement later.Additionally, in Figure 100 (c), relative to Figure 100 (b), at s2(t) in carry out Q2 and The replacement of Q4, carries out the replacement of Q6 and Q8, carries out same replacement later.

Thus, s1(t) the same phase constituent of baseband signal of the 1st time slot be I1, orthogonal component is Q3, s2(t) the 1st time The same phase constituent of the baseband signal of gap is I2, and orthogonal component is Q4.Additionally, s1(t) the same of baseband signal of the 2nd time slot coordinate Being divided into I3, orthogonal component is Q1, s2(t) the same phase constituent of baseband signal of the 2nd time slot be I4, orthogonal component is Q2.3rd, 4th time slot represents as Figure 100 (c), and later time slot is too.

Further, the s1(t to nth slot) and the s2(t of nth slot) carry out precoding and phase place change, obtain nth slot Precoding and phase place change after signal r1(t), r2(t).About this point, it is that explanation is such in this manual.

Figure 101 represents the s1(t of the nth slot for obtaining Figure 100), s2(t) the constructive method different from Figure 96. Mapping portion 9802 with data 9801, control signal 9804 for input, carry out based on the modulation system according to control signal 9804, Such as consider the mapping of the replacement of Figure 100, generate the signal (the same phase constituent of baseband signal and orthogonal component) after mapping, root Modulated signal s1(t is generated according to the signal after mapping) (9803_A) and modulated signal s2(t) (9803_B) export.It addition, adjust Signal s1(t processed) (9803_A) is identical with modulated signal 9605_A of Figure 96, additionally, modulated signal s2(t) (9803_B) and figure Modulated signal 9605_B of 96 is identical, as shown in being Figure 100 (c).Thus, modulated signal s1(t) (9803_A) the 1st time Gap is (I1, Q3), modulated signal s2(t) the 1st time slot of (9803_B) is (I2, Q4), modulated signal s1(t) (9803_A) 2 time slots are (I3, Q1), modulated signal s2(t) the 2nd time slot of (9803_B) is (I4, Q2),.

In order to supplement, in the mapping portion 9802 of Figure 101, modulated signal s1(t) the 1st time slot of (9803_A) be (I1, Q3), modulated signal s2(t) the 1st time slot of (9803_B) is (I2, Q4), modulated signal s1(t) the 2nd time slot of (9803_A) is (I3, Q1), modulated signal s2(t) the generation method that the 1st time slot is (I4, Q2) of (9803_B) illustrates.

In Figure 101,9801 is data, if the data of time point 1 are b01, b11, b21, b31, if the data of time point 2 are B02, b12, b22, b32, if the data of time point 3 are b03, b13, b23, b33, if the data of time point 4 be b04, b14, b24, b34.The mapping portion 9802 of Figure 101 according to b01, b11, b21, b31 and b02, b12, b22, b32 and b03, b13, b23, b33 and B04, b14, b24, b34 generate I1, Q1, I2, Q2, I3, Q3, I4, Q4 of described above.Further, mapping portion 9802 energy of Figure 101 Enough generate modulated signal s1(t according to I1, Q1, I2, Q2, I3, Q3, I4, Q4), s2(t).

Figure 102 represents the s1(t of the nth slot for obtaining Figure 100), s2(t) the composition different from Figure 96, Figure 101 Method.Dispenser 10201, with data 9801, control signal 9804 for input, distributes data based on control signal 9804, by the 1st Data 10202_A and the output of the 2nd data 10202_B.Mapping portion 9901_A is with the 1st data 10202_A, control signal 9804 for defeated Enter, carry out mapping based on the modulation system according to control signal 9804, that such as consider the replacement of Figure 100, generate and map After signal (the same phase constituent of baseband signal and orthogonal component), according to map after signal generate modulated signal s1(t) (9803_A) and export.Mapping portion 9901_B, with the 2nd data 10202_B, control signal 9804 for input, is carried out based on according to control The modulation system of signal 9804 processed, such as in view of the mapping of replacement of Figure 100, generate the signal (baseband signal after mapping Same phase constituent and orthogonal component), generate modulated signal s2(t according to the signal after mapping) (9803_B) export.

Modulated signal s1(t) the 1st time slot of (9803_A) is (I1, Q3), modulated signal s2(t) (9803_B) the 1st time Gap is (I2, Q4), modulated signal s1(t) the 2nd time slot of (9803_A) is (I3, Q1), modulated signal s2(t) (9803_B) 2 time slots are (I4, Q2),.

In order to supplement, modulated signal s1(t in the mapping portion 9901_A of Figure 102) (9803_A) the 1st time slot (I1, Q3), the generation method of the 2nd time slot (I3, Q1) illustrates.In Figure 102,9801 is data, if the data of time point 1 be b01, B11, b21, b31, if the data of time point 2 are b02, b12, b22, b32, if the data of time point 3 are b03, b13, b23, b33, if The data of time point 4 are b04, b14, b24, b34.Dispenser 10201 is by data b01 of time point 1, b11, b21, b31 and time point 3 Data b03, b13, b23, b33 export as the 1st data 10202_A, by data b02 of time point 2, b12, b22, b32 and time point 4 Data b04, b14, b24, b34 export as the 2nd data 802_B.The mapping portion 9901_A of Figure 102 according to b01, b11, b21, B31 and b03, b13, b23, b33 generate the 1st time slot (I1, Q3), the 2nd time slot (I3, Q1).It is also carried out same after the 3rd time slot Operation.

Modulated signal s2(t in the mapping portion 9901_B of Figure 102) the 1st time slot (I2, Q4) of (9803_B), the 2nd time The generation method of gap (I4, Q2) illustrates.The mapping portion 9901_B of Figure 102 is according to data b02 of time point 2, b12, b22, b32 And data b04 of time point 4, b14, b24, b34 generation the 1st time slot (I2, Q4), the 2nd time slot (I4, Q2).After the 3rd time slot also Carry out same operation.

Above, the method postponing two circulation Q is illustrated, but replaces carrying out signal as Figure 97 in time slot In the case of changing, demodulation (detection) portion receiving device can suppressing the quantity of candidate signal point, can make so having The advantage that computing scale (circuit scale) diminishes.On the other hand, as Figure 100 at s1(t) signal in, s2(t) letter In the case of carrying out signal replacement in number, although in demodulation (detection) portion receiving device, the quantity of candidate signal point becomes many, But time diversity gain (being frequency diversity gain in the case of being replaced on the frequency axis) can be obtained, there is connecing of data Receive the advantage that quality improves the most further.

It addition, in the above description, illustrate as a example by during 16QAM setting modulation system, but be not limited to this, close Situation in the modulation system of QPSK, 8QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM etc. can be implemented too.

Additionally, the method that circulation Q postpones is not limited to above-mentioned two method.Such as, in above-mentioned two example, the most right The orthogonal component of baseband signal is replaced but it also may will replace with phase constituent.Additionally, be replaced (example at two time points As, at time point 1 and time point 2, the orthogonal component of baseband signal is replaced) but it also may carry out the same of baseband signal at multiple time points The signal of phase constituent or (can also be " and ") orthogonal component is replaced.Thus, as Figure 97 (a), producing the same of baseband signal Phase constituent and orthogonal component, it is circulated in the case of Q postpones, for " there is the baseband signal after the circulation Q delay of time point i Be represented as Ii with phase constituent, the orthogonal component of baseband signal after the circulation Q of time point i postpones is represented as Qj(i ≠ j) code Unit " or " the same phase constituent that there is the baseband signal after the circulation Q delay of time point i is represented as Ij, the circulation Q of time point i postpones After the orthogonal component of baseband signal be represented as Qi(i ≠ j) code element " or " there is the base band after the circulation Q of time point i postpones The same phase constituent of signal is represented as Ij, the circulation Q of time point i postpone after the orthogonal component of baseband signal be represented as Qk(i ≠ J, i ≠ k, j ≠ k) code element ".

Further, to modulated signal s1(t obtained by implementing circulation Q described above to postpone) (or s1(f) or s1 (t, f)), modulated signal s2(t) (or s2(f) or s2(t, f)) implement precoding and phase place change (wherein, as in this specification Middle expression is such, it is also possible to the signal processing of implementing phase change, power change, signal replacement etc. in certain stage).This Time, as precoding and the method for phase place change implementing to be suitable for the modulated signal postponing to obtain by implementing circulation Q, permissible Use the whole enforcement precodings and the method for phase place change illustrated in this manual.

(embodiment F1)

In embodiment E1, about the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding being carried out The sending method of phase place change is applied to use the situation in the broadcast system of DVB-T2 standard and be applied to use and DVB- Situation in the broadcast system of the standard that T2 standard is different is illustrated.In the present embodiment, illustrate for embodiment E1 applies the situation of the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna.

Figure 103 (a) is to represent to send (SISO) and multiple antennas transmission (MISO about 1 antenna in DVB-T2 standard (STBC: space-time block code)) the figure of restriction.As shown in non-patent literature 9, in DVB-T2 standard, it is possible to select with frame overall Carrying out 1 antenna transmission or multiple antennas sends, in the case of multiple antennas sends, P1 code element sends identical signal from whole antennas. I.e., it is possible to select 1 antenna to send together with whole PLP with the L1 signaling data sent by P2 code element or multiple antennas sends.

Figure 103 (b) represents the expectation to standard from now on.DVB-T2 standard is compared with the DVB-T standard of prior-generation, and it is relatively Big feature is the transmission parameter that modulation system, encoding rate, the time interleaving degree of depth etc. can be selected independently according to each PLP. Send or multiple antennas transmission accordingly, it is desirable to 1 antenna can be selected independently according to each PLP.Further it is desirable to send with P2 code element L1 signaling data also be able to select 1 antenna to send or multiple antennas sends.

As shown in Figure 103 (b), as being used for making it possible to be mixed 1 antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission in frame Problem, has the on position (configuration mode) of pilot frequency code element.As shown in non-patent literature 9, as a kind of SP of pilot frequency code element The configuration mode of (Scattered Pilot) is mutually different in 1 antenna sends (SISO) and multiple antennas transmission (MISO).By This, as shown in Figure 75 like that (identical OFDM symbol) the most in the same time exist multiple PLP#1, PLP#2, as shown in Figure 77 PLP#1 is that multiple antennas sends, PLP#2 is that in the case of 1 antenna sends, the configuration mode of SP can not define.

As the solution for this problem, Figure 104 represents the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna.As Shown in Figure 104, multiple antennas is set in frame and sends (MISO, MIMO) subframe and 1 antenna transmission (SISO) subframe.Specifically, By the PLP(example of MISO and/or MIMO: Common PLP, PLP#1) gather and multiple antennas is set and sends subframe, use multiple antennas Transmission SP configuration mode (if transmission antenna number is identical, then can be the common SP configuration mode of MISO and MIMO).Another Aspect, by the PLP(example of SISO: PLP#2～PLP#N) gather and 1 antenna is set and sends subframe, use 1 antenna transmission SP to join Put pattern.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), use DVB-T2 standard Control information that standard transmission in addition needs (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to arrange as shown in Figure 105 based on transmission antenna The subframe structure of configuration.

Additionally, use 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is possible to the subframe of configuration based on transmission antenna is set Structure.

Subframe structure by configuration based on transmission antenna illustrated above, it is possible to the configuration mode of definition SP, at frame It is capable of 1 antenna in Nei to send and being mixed that multiple antennas sends.

Generate the structure of dispensing device of the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna illustrated above at Figure 76 or figure Represent in 85.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1, frame constituting portion 7610 generates illustrated above based on sending out The subframe structure of the configuration of antennas.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

Corresponding with the sending method of the subframe structure generating configuration based on transmission antenna illustrated above and dispensing device Receive device structure represent in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2, in frame It is mixed 1 antenna to send and in the case of multiple antennas transmission, also by the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna, channel Variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) can suitably estimate channel variation.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, mixed Conjunction also is able to employing in the case of there is 1 antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission and sending, receive.

(embodiment F2)

In embodiment F1, the situation of the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna is illustrated.? In present embodiment, can realize, receiving side, the transmission frame structure that the presumption of transmission path improves with respect to embodiment F1 Illustrate.

Figure 106 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative to the figure at embodiment F1 The subframe structure of the configuration based on transmission antenna represented in 104, is to use sub-frame in each subframe beginning OFDM symbol Starting symbol (subframe start element), in the final OFDM symbol of each subframe use sub-frame closing The transmission frame structure of symbol (subframe terminates code element).But, sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame Closing symbol can also be selected independently according to each subframe and whether set, it is also possible to by sub-in each subframe Whether frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol sets independently of each other.

Figure 107 is to represent sub-frame starting symbol and an example of sub-frame closing symbol Figure.As shown in Figure 107, for sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol, compare Other OFDM symbol make SP density uprise.Specifically, the sub-carrier positions existed at SP all configures SP.

Before sub-frame starting symbol and be other subframe after sub-frame closing symbol Or P2 code element or P1 code element, they have different SP configuration modes (P1 code element does not exist SP configuration mode itself).Thus, exist Receive device transmission path (channel variation) presumption process in, it is impossible to cross over subframe and in time orientation (OFDM symbol direction) On carry out interpolation processing.Thus, frame beginning is being defined SP with final OFDM symbol with the rule identical with other OFDM symbol In the case of configuration mode, the beginning part of subframe and the interpolation precision of last part are deteriorated.

As shown in Figure 107, if arranging sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing Symbol, then in these OFDM symbol, SP exist sub-carrier positions, i.e. carry out time orientation interpolation processing son load All there is SP in ripple position.Thereby, it is possible to improve the beginning part of subframe and the interpolation precision of last part.

As in embodiment F1 represent Figure 105 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission exist The control information needed in standard beyond DVB-T2 standard (can also be a part, i.e. use L1Post-Signalling Data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to sub-frame starting is set Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to sub-frame starting is set Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

By use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol Transmission frame structure, it is possible to realize receive side transmission path presumption improve.

Generate and use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol The structure of dispensing device sending frame structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except saying in embodiment E1 and F1 Beyond bright point, frame constituting portion 7610 also generates and uses sub-frame starting symbol and sub-illustrated above The transmission frame structure of frame closing symbol.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing illustrated above with generation Symbol send the sending method of frame structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2 and F1, in frame, it is mixed 1 antenna sends and multiple antennas transmission In the case of, by using the transmission frame of sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol to tie Structure, channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) also be able to estimate accurately subframe the beginning part and The channel variation of last part.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

(embodiment F3)

In embodiment F1, the situation of the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna is illustrated.? In present embodiment, about the configuration of transmission antenna, then the situation of the polarization (polarization) considering transmission antenna is entered Row explanation.

Figure 108 A～Figure 108 D is the figure of the form representing various radio network.Especially, Figure 108 A(a) it is to represent current Figure at DVB-T2 active service network (SISO) that Britain uses.V is used as transmission, the most each 1 of reception antenna (Vertical: vertical) polarization.

Figure 108 B(b) it is the figure of the Distributed-MISO (DISTRIBUTED MIS O) representing and utilizing existing transmission antenna. For Figure 108 A(a) use the SISO radio network that V polarizes, build and use V pole with different dispatching stations for (pair) The MISO radio network changed.In the structure shown here, it is also possible to support SISO.

Figure 108 C(c) it is the figure of the structure representing Co-sited-MIMO (co-sited formula MIMO).For Figure 108 A(a) make With the SISO radio network of V polarization, as sending, reception antenna and add H(Horizontal: level) antenna that polarizes, structure Build the MIMO radio network using V-H polarization.In the structure shown here, it is also possible to support MISO and SISO.

Figure 108 D(d) it is the figure representing the structure combined by Distributed-MISO Yu Co-sited-MIMO.

As above, radio network from now on can consider also to comprise the form of polarization.For each broadcast operator, uncommon Prestige freely selects these forms, can import in desired period.Thus, should all prop up in broadcast standard from now on Hold these radio network forms.

Such as Figure 108 D(d) shown in, in multiple antennas sends, even identical transmission antenna number, V/H sends and V/V sends out The transmission path characteristic sent is the most different.Thus, if making them be mixed in identical OFDM symbol, then have and receiving side The problem of path presumption can not be transmitted.

As the solution for this problem, Figure 109 represents configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) Subframe structure.As shown in Figure 109, V/H-MIMO subframe, V/V-MISO subframe and V-SISO subframe are set in frame.Concrete and Speech, by the PLP(example of V/H-MIMO: Common PLP) gather and V/H-MIMO subframe is set, use V/H-MIMO SP to configure Pattern.Additionally, by the PLP(example of V/V-MISO: PLP#1) gather and V/V-MISO subframe is set, use V/V-MISO SP to join Put pattern.Additionally, the PLP(example of set V-SISO: PLP#2～PLP#N) and V-SISO subframe is set, use V-SISO SP to join Put pattern.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is possible to configuration based on transmission antenna is set and (is also contemplated for pole Change) subframe structure.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is possible to configuration based on transmission antenna is set and (also examines Consider polarization) subframe structure.

Subframe structure by configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) illustrated above, it is possible to realize receiving side Transmission path presumption.

Generate the knot of the dispensing device of the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) illustrated above Structure represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except in embodiment E1 explanation point in addition to, frame constituting portion 7610 also generate with Shown on the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (be also contemplated for polarization).

The most distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, having carried out the signal of this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

With generate configuration based on transmission antenna illustrated above (being also contemplated for polarization) subframe structure sending method and The structure receiving device that dispensing device is corresponding represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, except explanation in embodiment E2 Beyond Dian, in the case of being mixed the sending method that polarization is different in frame, channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2, 707_1,707_2) it also is able to suitably estimate channel by the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) Variation.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 109 example as subframe structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO Frame, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, be illustrated with the V H polarization that polarized as different polarization, but it is not limited to this.

(embodiment F4)

In embodiment F3, illustrate to use the feelings of the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) Condition.In the present embodiment, can realize, receiving side, the transmission that the presumption of transmission path improves with respect to embodiment F3 Frame structure illustrates.

Figure 110 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative at embodiment F3 The subframe structure of the configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) represented in Figure 109, in each subframe beginning OFDM symbol Use sub-frame starting symbol, in the final OFDM symbol of each subframe, use sub-frame closing The transmission frame structure of symbol.But, sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol is also Whether can set independently according to each subframe, it is also possible in each subframe by sub-frame starting symbol and Whether sub-frame closing symbol sets independently of each other.

As shown in Figure 107 of embodiment F2, if arranging sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame Closing symbol, then in these OFDM symbol, SP exist sub-carrier positions, i.e. carry out at the interpolation of time orientation All there is SP in the sub-carrier positions of reason.Thereby, it is possible to improve the beginning part of subframe and the interpolation precision of last part.

As in embodiment F1 represent Figure 105 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB- The control information that needs in standard beyond T2 standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to arrange sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol。

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to sub-frame starting is set Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

By use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol Transmission frame structure, it is possible to realize receive side transmission path presumption improve.

Generate use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol The structure of dispensing device sending frame structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except saying in embodiment E1 and F3 Beyond bright point, frame constituting portion 7610 also generates use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-illustrated above The transmission frame structure of frame closing symbol.

The most distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, having carried out the signal of this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing illustrated above with generation Symbol send the sending method of frame structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2 and F3, in frame, it is mixed the feelings of the different sending method of polarization Under condition, by using sub-frame starting symbol and the transmission frame structure of sub-frame closing symbol, Channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) can estimate the beginning part and the terminal part of subframe accurately The channel variation divided.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 110 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO Subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization as different polarization, but it is not limited to this.

It addition, in above embodiment F1～F4, illustrate the subframe structure relative with frame.Equally, for super The shorter frame structure that the frame structure that level frame (super frame) is relative etc. are relative with longer frame, it would however also be possible to employ above The content of embodiment F1～F4.

As long as those skilled in the art is the most certainly it will be appreciated that answer the content of embodiment F1～F4 super frame With, if specifically describing an example, then will constitute each T2 frame and the FEF(Future of the super frame of DVB-T2 standard Extension Frames: following extension frame) regard the subframe represented in above-mentioned embodiment F1～F4 as, as a T2 frame Or the data that send of FEF are fixed as certain of SISO, MISO and/or MIMO.Further, the transmission data sent in each frame Can also be according to SISO data acquisition system being formed or the data of MISO and/or MIMO data acquisition system are raw The frame become.

It addition, in above-mentioned embodiment F1～F4, clearly insert starting to make the division between subframe become Symbol and closing symbol.In the case of observing with frame unit, owing to reception side easily to be determined the beginning of frame P1 code element is inserted into the beginning of frame, is then inserted into the PS code element that SP density compared with other OFDM symbol is higher, as long as so There is in field for the present invention the people of common knowledge, it becomes possible to understand the insertion that need not starting symbol. But, although say it is to need not, but this be only be recited as because of the difference that can be sufficiently carried out interframe without, in view of logical The reliability of letter and stability, there be not undesirable condition even if inserting yet.In the case, as long as in beginning (the P1 code element of frame Insert starting symbol the most permissible before).

(embodiment G1)

In embodiment F1, illustrate to use the situation of the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna.In this enforcement In mode, the situation that the configuration about transmission antenna further contemplates transmit power illustrates.

As shown in the table of the bottom right of Figure 111, it is considered to although identical multiple antennas sends but from the transmit power of each antenna Different patterns.If transmit power is different, then transmission path characteristic is different.Thus, if making them in identical OFDM symbol In be mixed, then have receive side can not be transmitted path presumption problem.

As the solution for this problem, in Figure 111, represent that configuration based on transmission antenna (is also contemplated for sending merit Rate) subframe structure.As shown in Figure 111, multiple antennas is set in frame and sends (MISO, MIMO)-pwr1 subframe, multiple antennas transmission (MISO, MIMO)-pwr2 subframe and 1 antenna send (SISO) subframe.Specifically, by the PLP of MISO and/or MIMO, The power of transmission antenna 1 and 2 is all the PLP(example of P/2: Common PLP) set, arranges multiple antennas and sends-pwr1 subframe, adopts With multiple antennas send-pwr1 SP configuration mode (if transmission antenna number is identical with transmit power, then be capable of MISO and The common SP configuration mode of MIMO).Additionally, power in the PLP of MISO and/or MIMO, transmission antenna 1 and 2 is respectively The PLP(example of 3P/4, P/4: PLP#1) set, multiple antennas is set and sends-pwr2 subframe, use multiple antennas to send-pwr2 SP and join Put pattern.On the other hand, by the PLP(example of SISO: PLP#2～PLP#N) set, 1 antenna is set and sends subframe, use 1 antenna Send and use SP configuration mode.But, in this embodiment, the transmit power of the PLP of SISO is the most identical, but in different situations, Need to be divided into respectively different subframe.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is possible to arranges configuration based on transmission antenna (be also contemplated for transmission Power) subframe structure.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is possible to configuration based on transmission antenna is set and (also examines Consider transmit power) subframe structure.

Subframe structure by configuration (being also contemplated for transmit power) based on transmission antenna illustrated above, it is possible to connect Receive the transmission path presumption of side.

Generate the dispensing device of the subframe structure of configuration (being also contemplated for transmit power) based on transmission antenna illustrated above Structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1, frame constituting portion 7610 is the most raw Become the subframe structure of configuration (being also contemplated for transmit power) based on transmission antenna illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

Sender with the subframe structure generating configuration (being also contemplated for transmit power) based on transmission antenna illustrated above Method and dispensing device corresponding receive device structure represent in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, except saying in embodiment E2 Beyond bright point, though exist be identical multiple antennas send or single antenna send from the transmit power of each antenna not In the case of same pattern, by the subframe structure of configuration (being also contemplated for transmit power) based on transmission antenna, channel variation pushes away Determine portion (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) and can suitably estimate channel variation.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission also are able to use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 111 example as subframe structure, but it is not limited to this.

(embodiment G2)

Feelings in embodiment G1, to the subframe structure using configuration (being also contemplated for transmit power) based on transmission antenna Condition is illustrated.And in the present embodiment, be capable of transmitting path with respect to embodiment G1 in reception side and push away The fixed transmission frame structure improved illustrates.

Figure 112 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative at embodiment G1 In Figure 110 represent configuration (being also contemplated for transmit power) based on transmission antenna subframe structure, each subframe start OFDM code Unit uses sub-frame starting symbol, in the final OFDM symbol of each subframe, uses sub-frame closing The transmission frame structure of symbol.But, sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol is also Can be selected independently according to each subframe and whether set, it is also possible to mutually be selected independently in each subframe and whether set sub- Frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

As shown in Figure 107 of embodiment F2, if arranging sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame Closing symbol, then in these OFDM symbol, SP exist sub-carrier positions, i.e. carry out at the interpolation of time orientation All there is SP in the sub-carrier positions of reason.Thereby, it is possible to improve the beginning part of subframe and the interpolation precision of last part.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to arrange sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol。

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to sub-frame starting is set Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

By use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol Transmission frame structure, it is possible to realize receive side transmission path presumption improve.

Generate use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol The structure of dispensing device sending frame structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except saying in embodiment E1 and G1 Beyond bright point, frame constituting portion 7610 also generates use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-illustrated above The transmission frame structure of frame closing symbol.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Process, carry out modulated signal 1(7613_1 after the signal after this signal processing becomes signal processing) and signal processing after tune Signal 2(7613_2 processed).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing illustrated above with generation Symbol send the sending method of frame structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2 and G1, although being that identical multiple antennas sends or single sky existing Line sends but in the case of the pattern that the transmit power of each antenna is different, by using sub-frame starting The transmission frame structure of symbol and sub-frame closing symbol, channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_ 1,707_2) the beginning part of subframe and the channel variation of last part can be estimated accurately.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up Although holding, to comprise be that identical multiple antennas sends or single antenna sends but sending out from the different pattern of the transmit power of each antenna It also is able in the case of delivery method use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 112 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this.

(embodiment G3)

In embodiment F3, the situation of the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) is entered Go explanation.In the present embodiment, the configuration (being also contemplated for polarization) about transmission antenna is further contemplated the situation of transmit power Illustrate.

As shown in the table of the bottom right of Figure 113, it is considered to although being such as that V/V-MISO sends but from the transmit power of each antenna Different patterns.If transmit power is different, then transmission path characteristic is different.Thus, if making them in identical OFDM symbol In be mixed, then have receive side can not be transmitted path presumption problem.

As the solution for this problem, represent in Figure 113 configuration based on transmission antenna (be also contemplated for polarization and Transmit power) subframe structure.As shown in Figure 113, V/H-MIMO subframe, V-SISO subframe, V/V-MISO-are set in frame Pwr1 subframe, V/V-MISO-pwr2 subframe.Specifically, by power in the PLP of V/V-MISO, transmission antenna 1 and 2 all PLP(example for P/2: PLP#2) set, V/V-MISO-pwr1 subframe is set, uses V/V-MISO-pwr1 SP configuration mode. Additionally, by PLP(example in the PLP of V/V-MISO, that transmission antenna 1 and 2 power is respectively 3P/4, P/4: PLP#3～PLP# N) set, arranges V/V-MISO-pwr2 subframe, uses V/V-MISO-pwr2 SP configuration mode.On the other hand, by V/H- The PLP(example of MIMO: Common PLP) set, V/H-MIMO subframe is set, uses V/H-MIMO SP configuration mode.By V- The PLP(example of SISO: PLP#1) set, V-SISO subframe is set, uses V-SISO SP configuration mode.But, in this embodiment, The PLP of V/H-MIMO and V-SISO only exists 1 respectively, but in the case of the PLP that there is respectively different transmit power, needs It is divided into respectively different subframe.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is possible to arranges configuration based on transmission antenna (be also contemplated for polarize And transmit power) subframe structure.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is possible to configuration based on transmission antenna is set and (also examines Consider polarization and transmit power) subframe structure.

Subframe structure by configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization and transmit power) illustrated above, it is possible to It is received the transmission path presumption of side.

Generate the transmission dress of the subframe structure of the configuration (being also contemplated for polarization and transmit power) of transmission antenna illustrated above The structure put represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1, frame constituting portion 7610 is also Generate the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization and transmit power) illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Process, carry out modulated signal 1(7613_1 after the signal after this signal processing becomes signal processing) and signal processing after tune Signal 2(7613_2 processed).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The subframe structure of the configuration of based on transmission antenna (be also contemplated for polarization and transmit power) illustrated above with generation Sending method and dispensing device corresponding receive device structure represent in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, except at embodiment In E2 beyond the point of explanation, although comprising polarization in existence to be the same from multiple antennas transmission or single antenna transmission but from each sky In the case of the pattern that the transmit power of line is different, by configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization and transmit power) Subframe structure, channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) can suitably estimate channel variation.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up Although hold comprise polarization all comprise and identical multiple antennas send or single antenna send but from the transmit power of each antenna not It also is able in the case of the sending method of same pattern use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 113 example as subframe structure, but it is not limited to this.

Additionally, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization as different polarization, but it is not limited to this.

(embodiment G4)

In embodiment G3, to the subframe knot using configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization and transmit power) The situation of structure is illustrated.In the present embodiment, it is capable of transmitting road in reception side with respect to embodiment G3 The transmission frame structure that footpath presumption improves illustrates.

Figure 114 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative at embodiment G3 The subframe structure of the configuration based on transmission antenna (be also contemplated for polarization and transmit power) represented in Figure 113, start in each subframe OFDM symbol uses sub-frame starting symbol, in the final OFDM symbol of each subframe, uses sub-frame The transmission frame structure of closing symbol.But, sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing Symbol can also be selected independently according to each subframe and whether set, it is also possible to setting is mutually selected independently in each subframe Whether sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

As shown in Figure 107 of embodiment F2, if arranging sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame Closing symbol, then in these OFDM symbol, SP exist sub-carrier positions, i.e. carry out at the interpolation of time orientation All there is SP in the sub-carrier positions of reason.Thereby, it is possible to improve the beginning part of subframe and the interpolation precision of last part.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to arrange sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol。

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to sub-frame starting is set Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

By use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol Transmission frame structure, it is possible to realize receive side transmission path presumption improve.

Generate use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol The structure of dispensing device sending frame structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except saying in embodiment E1 and G3 Beyond bright point, frame constituting portion 7610 also generates use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-illustrated above The transmission frame structure of frame closing symbol.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69, carries out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out the place of phase place change Reason, carry out modulated signal 1(7613_1 after the signal after this signal processing becomes signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing illustrated above with generation Symbol send the sending method of frame structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2 and G3, although being the same from multiple antennas within existence comprises and is polarized in Send or single antenna sends but in the case of the pattern that the transmit power of each antenna is different, by using sub-frame Starting symbol and the transmission frame structure of sub-frame closing symbol, channel variation presumption unit (705_1, 705_2,707_1,707_2) the beginning part of subframe and the channel variation of last part can be estimated accurately.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up Though hold comprise be polarized in be the same from multiple antennas send or single antenna send from the transmit power of each antenna not Can use in the case of the sending method of same pattern.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 114 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this.

Additionally, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization as different polarization, but it is not limited to this.

It addition, in above embodiment G1～G4, illustrate the subframe structure relative with frame.Equally, for super The shorter frame structure that the level relative frame structure of frame etc. are relative with longer frame, it would however also be possible to employ above embodiment G1～ The content of G4.

As long as those skilled in the art, the most certainly it will be appreciated that adopt the content of embodiment G1～G4 super frame With, if specifically describing an example, then will constitute each T2 frame and the FEF(Future of the super frame of DVB-T2 standard Extension Frames) regard the subframe represented in above-mentioned embodiment G1～G4 as, send as a T2 frame or FEF Data are fixed as certain of SISO, MISO and/or MIMO.Further, the transmission data sent in each frame can also be root According to by SISO data acquisition system and also be the identical data of transmit power used when antenna sends and the frame generated, Or by MISO and/or MIMO data acquisition system and also be the identical data of transmit power used when antenna sends And the frame generated.

It addition, in above-mentioned embodiment G1～G4, clearly insert starting to make the division between subframe become Symbol and closing symbol.In the case of observing with frame unit, owing to reception side easily to be determined the beginning of frame P1 code element is inserted into the beginning of frame, is then inserted into the PS code element that SP density compared with other OFDM symbol is higher, as long as so There is in field for the present invention the people of common knowledge, it becomes possible to understand the insertion that need not starting symbol. But, although say it is to need not, but this be only be recited as because of the difference that can be sufficiently carried out interframe without, in view of logical The reliability of letter and stability, there be not undesirable condition even if inserting yet.In the case, as long as in beginning (the P1 code element of frame Insert starting symbol the most permissible before).

(embodiment H1)

In embodiment F1, the situation of the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna is illustrated.? In present embodiment, the more suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame is illustrated.

Figure 115 represents the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna, particularly shows in view of the suitable subframe in frame The situation of order.Understanding compared with Figure 104 of embodiment F1, multiple antennas sends (MISO, MIMO) subframe and 1 antenna sends (SISO) order of subframe is replaced.This represents, the P2 code element sending L1 signaling data is that 1 antenna sends (SISO), after inciting somebody to action Continuous subframe sends (SISO) subframe as 1 antenna identical with P2 code element.

If in the midway transmission antenna number change of frame, then for receiving side, in this change point, the reception of each antenna Power is instantaneous to be changed significantly.For receiving the instantaneity change of power, receiving side particularly AGC(Automatic Gain Control: automatic growth control) process and follow with being difficult to instantaneity at this change point.Thus, the deterioration of receptivity is brought.

In the subframe structure shown in Figure 104 of embodiment F1, the change point of such transmission antenna number has two.Separately On the one hand, in the subframe structure of Figure 115, the change point of such transmission antenna number is reduced to 1.Thereby, it is possible to suppression The deterioration of receptivity.

Additionally, in the subframe structure of Figure 115, by making the follow-up subframe in P2 code element be 1 day identical with P2 code element Line sends (SISO) subframe, it is possible to the PLP of the remaining area transmission SISO of P2 code element.Shown in Figure 104 of embodiment F1 Subframe structure in, simply the remaining area of P2 code element is filled (padding), from next code element, is set to multiple antennas sends (MISO, MIMO) subframe.Thereby, it is possible to cut down the expense (overhead) brought because of filling.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Both transmission of Signalling PLP) in the case of too, it is possible to have in frame suitable is set as shown in Figure 116 The subframe structure of ordering of sub-frames.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is possible to arrange there is the suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame Subframe structure.

It addition, in the subframe structure of Figure 115, the P2 code element illustrating transmission L1 signaling data is that 1 antenna sends (SISO) example.On the other hand, it is in the case of multiple antennas sends (MISO, MIMO) in P2 code element, as shown in Figure 117, logical Crossing and making follow-up subframe is that the multiple antennas identical with P2 code element sends (MISO, MIMO) subframe, it is possible to obtain the subframe with Figure 115 The effect that the example of structure is identical.

Suitable ordering of sub-frames by the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna illustrated above, it is possible to cut down and send out The change point of antennas number and suppress the deterioration of receptivity and cut down the expense brought by filling.

Generate the dispensing device of the subframe structure (suitable ordering of sub-frames) of configuration based on transmission antenna illustrated above Structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1, frame constituting portion 7610 generates The subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames) illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

Sender with the subframe structure (suitable ordering of sub-frames) generating configuration based on transmission antenna illustrated above Method and dispensing device corresponding receive device structure represent in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, except saying in embodiment E2 Beyond bright point, by the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames), at OFDM mode association In reason portion (8600_X, 8600_Y), particularly reduce the frequency of the instantaneous change receiving power that AGC process is difficult to follow Degree.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

(embodiment H2)

Feelings in embodiment H1, to the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames) Condition is illustrated.In the present embodiment, the presumption of transmission path can be realized receiving side with respect to embodiment H1 The transmission frame structure improved illustrates.

Figure 118 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative at embodiment H1 The subframe structure of the configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames) represented in Figure 115 starts OFDM symbol in each subframe Middle employing sub-frame starting symbol, in the final OFDM symbol of each subframe use sub-frame closing The transmission frame structure of symbol.But, sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol is also Can be selected independently according to each subframe and whether set, it is also possible to by sub-frame starting in each subframe Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol selects whether to set independently of each other.

As shown in Figure 107 of embodiment F2, if arranging sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame Closing symbol, then in these OFDM symbol, SP exist sub-carrier positions, i.e. carry out at the interpolation of time orientation All there is SP in the sub-carrier positions of reason.Thereby, it is possible to improve the beginning part of subframe and the interpolation precision of last part.

As in embodiment H1 represent Figure 116 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB- The control information that needs in standard beyond T2 standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to arrange sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol。

Additionally, use 1Signalling data(8301 as the Figure 83 represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to sub-frame starting is set Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

By use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol Transmission frame structure, it is possible to realize receive side transmission path presumption improve.

Generate use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol The structure of dispensing device sending frame structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except saying in embodiment E1 and H1 Beyond bright point, frame constituting portion 7610 generates use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame illustrated above The transmission frame structure of closing symbol.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing illustrated above with generation Symbol send the sending method of frame structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, send out with multiple antennas even if being mixed 1 antenna transmission in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2 and H1 in frame Situation about sending, by using sub-frame starting symbol and the transmission frame of sub-frame closing symbol Structure, channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) also can estimate accurately subframe the beginning part and The channel variation of last part.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 118 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this.

(embodiment H3)

In embodiment F3, the situation of the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) is entered Go explanation.In the present embodiment, then to the suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame illustrate.

Figure 119 represents the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization), particularly shows in view of in frame The situation of suitable ordering of sub-frames.Understand compared with Figure 109 of embodiment F3, V/H-MIMO subframe and V-SISO subframe Order substituted for.It means that by L1 signaling data send P2 code element be V-SISO send, make follow-up subframe for and P2 code The V-SISO subframe that unit is identical.

If although the midway transmission antenna number change of frame or transmission antenna number be identical but polarization change, then for For receiving side, at its change point, the reception power instantaneity ground of each antenna changes significantly.For receiving the instantaneity of power Change, receive side particularly AGC(Automatic Gain Control) process this change point instantaneity follow more tired Difficult.Thus, the deterioration of receptivity is brought.

In the subframe structure shown in Figure 109 of embodiment F3, the change point of such transmission antenna number or polarization has 3 Individual.On the other hand, in the subframe structure of Figure 119, the change point of such transmission antenna number or polarization is reduced to two.By This, it is possible to the deterioration of suppression receptivity.

Additionally, in the subframe structure of Figure 119, by making follow-up subframe be the V-SISO subframe identical with P2 code element, Can be with the PLP of the remaining area transmission V-SISO of P2 code element.In the subframe structure shown in Figure 109 of embodiment F3, only It is that the remaining area of P2 code element is filled, starts to become many V/H-MIMO subframe from next code element.Thereby, it is possible to cut down because filling The expense brought.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Both transmission of Signalling PLP) in the case of too, it is possible to the son with suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame is set Frame structure.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is possible to arrange there is the suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame Subframe structure.

It addition, in the subframe structure of Figure 119, represent that by the P2 code element that L1 signaling data sends be the example that V-SISO sends Son.On the other hand, in the case of P2 code element e.g. V/V-MISO sends, as shown in Figure 120, by making follow-up subframe be The V/V-MISO subframe identical with P2 code element, it is possible to obtain the effect that the example of subframe structure with Figure 119 is identical.

By the suitable subframe in the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) illustrated above Sequentially, it is possible to cut down transmission antenna number or the change point of polarization and suppress the deterioration of receptivity, and cut down and bring because filling Expense.

Generate the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) illustrated above The structure of dispensing device represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1, frame is constituted Portion 7610 generates the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

With the subframe knot generating configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) illustrated above The sending method of structure and dispensing device corresponding receive device structure represent in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, except implementing In mode E2 beyond the point of explanation, by the subframe of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) Structure, in OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y), particularly reduces the reception that AGC process is difficult to follow The frequency of the instantaneity change of power.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate Figure 119 and Figure 120 example as subframe structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H- SISO subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment H4)

In embodiment H3, to using configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) The situation of subframe structure is illustrated.In the present embodiment, can realize receiving side with respect to embodiment H3 The transmission frame structure that the presumption of transmission path improves illustrates.

Figure 121 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative to the figure at embodiment H3 The subframe structure of the configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) represented in 119, is in each subframe Beginning OFDM symbol uses sub-frame starting symbol, in the final OFDM symbol of each subframe, uses sub- The transmission frame structure of frame closing symbol.But, sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame Closing symbol can also be selected independently according to each subframe and whether set, it is also possible to by sub-in each subframe Frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol selects whether to set independently of each other.

As the Figure 107 at embodiment F2 represents like that, if arrange sub-frame starting symbol with Sub-frame closing symbol, then, in these OFDM symbol, the sub-carrier positions that exists at SP, i.e. carry out time side To the sub-carrier positions of interpolation processing all there is SP.Thereby, it is possible to improve the beginning part of subframe and inserting of last part Mend precision.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to arrange sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol。

Additionally, use 1Signalling data(8301 as the Figure 83 represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to sub-frame starting is set Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

By use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol Transmission frame structure, it is possible to realize receive side transmission path presumption improve.

Generate use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol The structure of dispensing device sending frame structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except saying in embodiment E1 and H3 Beyond bright point, frame constituting portion 7610 generates use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame illustrated above The transmission frame structure of closing symbol.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing illustrated above with generation Symbol send the sending method of frame structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2 and H3, in frame, it is mixed the feelings of the different sending method of polarization Under condition, by using sub-frame starting symbol and the transmission frame structure of sub-frame closing symbol, Channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) also is able to the beginning part estimating subframe accurately with final The channel variation of part.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 121 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO Subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment H5)

Feelings in embodiment H1, to the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames) Condition is illustrated.In the present embodiment, to the suitable ordering of sub-frames in the frame being additionally contemplates that transmit power switch mode Illustrate.

Figure 122 is the figure of the example of the transmit power switch mode representing SISO and MISO/MIMO.Particularly, Figure 122 A () represents the figure of the example of differentiated pattern between the transmit power of SISO and MISO/MIMO.In this mode, at SISO In only distribute transmit power P to transmission antenna-1, to transmission antenna-1 and 2 respectively each distribution transmit powers in MISO/MIMO P/2。

On the other hand, Figure 122 (b) is to represent not have differentiated pattern between the transmit power of SISO and MISO/MIMO The figure of example.In this mode, in SISO, transmission antenna-1 and 2 are respectively allocated transmit power P, P/4, at MISO/MIMO In also distribute identical transmit power.In SISO, it is also possible to send such as identical with transmission antenna-1 from transmission antenna-2 Signal.Or, it is also possible to carry out by stream s1(t), s2(t) (s1(i), and s2(i)) transmit identical data, carry out Fig. 6, figure 25, the process of the phase place change as shown in Figure 26, Figure 27, Figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69.In the case, carried out at this signal Reason signal in Figure 76 or Figure 85, become modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation letter Number 2(7613_2).

In the transmit power of Figure 122 (a) in the example of differentiated pattern, due in MISO/MIMO to send sky Line-1 and 2 gives constant power, so being the structure performance of MISO/MIMO taken out of fully.But, at SISO and MISO/ During switching between MIMO, transmission antenna-1 and 2 all transmit powers change.

On the other hand, do not have in the transmit power shown in Figure 122 (b) differentiated pattern due in MISO/MIMO Difference is had, it is possible to occur some to deteriorate in the performance of MISO/MIMO between transmission antenna-1 and 2 power given. But, during switching between SISO and MISO/MIMO, transmit power can be remained necessarily by transmission antenna-1 and 2.This Outward, in existing SISO dispatching station, it is possible to while the transmit power of the existing transmission antenna-1 kept in SISO, by because of The power that additional transmission antenna-2 brings increases suppression at about 1dB.

Hereinafter, especially to not having the situation of differentiated pattern to illustrate between the transmit power shown in Figure 122 (b).

Figure 123 represents the situation of the subframe structure shown in Figure 115 of embodiment H1.Understand at SISO subframe and MISO/ During the switching of MISO subframe, also become the change not having transmit power.

Figure 124 represents the feelings that the order of SISO subframe with MISO/MISO subframe is replaced by the subframe structure relative to Figure 123 Condition.Then, it is known that the change of transmit power does not occur in frame.Thus, in order to prevent especially for AGC process in reception side Impact, it is known that as long as and SISO and MISO/MIMO independently make not have difference person each other for subframe front and back between transmit power The most permissible.Thus, the degree of freedom of ordering of sub-frames improves.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, transmit power switch mode can be further contemplated and arrange and have The subframe structure of the suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, transmit power switch mode can be further contemplated and arrange There is the subframe structure of suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame.

Additionally, Figure 125 represents the situation of the subframe structure shown in Figure 117 of embodiment H1.In MISO/MISO subframe and During the switching of SISO subframe, it is known that also there is no the change of transmit power.

Figure 126 is to represent that the subframe structure relative to Figure 125 substituted for MISO/MISO subframe and the order of SISO subframe Situation.Then, it is known that the change of transmit power does not occur in frame.It follows that in order to prevent especially for AGC in reception side The impact that processes, as long as and SISO and MISO/MIMO independently make not have difference person with each other as front and back between transmit power Subframe is the most permissible.Thus, the degree of freedom of ordering of sub-frames improves.

By in the subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for transmit power switch mode) illustrated above Suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is possible to cut down the change point of transmit power and suppress the deterioration of receptivity.Furthermore it is possible to improve son The degree of freedom of frame sequential.

Generate configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that transmit power switching mould illustrated above Formula) the structure of dispensing device of subframe structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except explanation in embodiment E1 Beyond Dian, frame constituting portion 7610 also generates configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that send out illustrated above Send power switch mode) subframe structure.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

Configuration of based on transmission antenna (the suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that transmit power switch illustrated above with generation Pattern) the sending method of subframe structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device represent in Figure 86～Figure 88.But It is that, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2, by configuration based on transmission antenna, (suitable ordering of sub-frames, also examines Consider transmit power switch mode) subframe structure, in OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y), cut down especially AGC process is difficult to the frequency of the instantaneity change receiving power followed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

(embodiment H6)

In embodiment H5, to using configuration (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that transmit power based on transmission antenna Switch mode) the situation of subframe structure be illustrated.In the present embodiment, receiving with respect to embodiment H5 Side is capable of transmitting the transmission frame structure of path presumption improvement and illustrates.

Figure 127 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative at embodiment H5 The subframe of the configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) represented in Figure 124 Structure uses sub-frame starting symbol, in the final OFDM symbol of each subframe in each subframe beginning OFDM symbol The transmission frame structure of middle employing sub-frame closing symbol.But, sub-frame starting symbol and Sub-frame closing symbol can also be selected independently according to each subframe and whether set, it is also possible in each subframe Select independently of each other whether to set by sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

As shown in Figure 107 of embodiment F2, if arranging sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame Closing symbol, then in these OFDM symbol, SP exist sub-carrier positions, i.e. carry out at the interpolation of time orientation All there is SP in the sub-carrier positions of reason.Thereby, it is possible to improve the beginning part of subframe and the interpolation precision of last part.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to arrange sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol。

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to sub-frame starting is set Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

By use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol Transmission frame structure, it is possible to realize receive side transmission path presumption improve.

Generate use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol The structure of dispensing device sending frame structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except saying in embodiment E1 and H5 Beyond bright point, frame constituting portion 7610 generates use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame illustrated above The transmission frame structure of closing symbol.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing illustrated above with generation Symbol send the sending method of frame structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2 and H5, in frame, it is mixed 1 antenna sends and multiple antennas transmission In the case of, by using the transmission frame of sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol to tie Structure, channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) also be able to estimate accurately subframe the beginning part and The channel variation of last part.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 127 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this.

(embodiment H7)

In embodiment H3, to using configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) The situation of subframe structure is illustrated.In the present embodiment, suitable in the frame further contemplating transmit power switch mode Ordering of sub-frames illustrate.

Figure 128 is the figure of the example of the transmit power switch mode (being also contemplated for polarization) representing SISO and MISO/MIMO.Special Not, Figure 128 (a) is to represent the figure of the example of differentiated pattern in the transmit power of SISO and MISO/MIMO.At this mould In formula, in SISO, only distribute transmit power P to transmission antenna-1, to transmission antenna-1 and 2 each point respectively in MISO/MIMO Power P/2 are sent in allocation.

On the other hand, Figure 128 (b) is to represent not have differentiated pattern between the transmit power of SISO and MISO/MIMO The figure of example.In this mode, in SISO, transmission antenna-1 and 2 being respectively allocated transmit power P, P/4, at MISO/MIMO The transmit power that middle distribution is identical.Such as identical with transmission antenna-1 letter can also be sent from transmission antenna-2 in SISO Number.Or, it is also possible to carry out by stream s1(t), s2(t) (s1(i), s2(i)) transmit identical data, carry out Fig. 6, Figure 25, The process of the phase place change as shown in Figure 26, Figure 27, Figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69.In the case, this signal processing has been carried out Signal in Figure 76 or Figure 85, become modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulated signal 2 (7613_2).

In the transmit power of Figure 128 (a) in the example of differentiated pattern, due in MISO/MIMO to send sky Line-1 and 2 gives constant power, so being the structure of the performance that can take MISO/MIMO fully out of.But, SISO with During switching between MISO/MIMO, transmission antenna-1 and 2 transmit power all change.

On the other hand, shown in Figure 128 (b) do not have in transmit power differentiated pattern due in MISO/MIMO Difference is had, it is possible to occur some to deteriorate in the performance of MISO/MIMO between transmission antenna-1 and 2 power given. But, during switching between SISO and MISO/MIMO, transmit power can be remained necessarily by transmission antenna-1 and 2.This Outward, in existing SISO dispatching station, it is possible to while the transmit power of the existing transmission antenna-1 in keeping SISO, will be because chasing after Add the power increase suppression about 1dB that transmission antenna-2 brings.

Hereinafter, especially to not having the situation of differentiated pattern to illustrate between the transmit power shown in Figure 128 (b).

Figure 129 represents the situation of the subframe structure shown in Figure 119 of embodiment H3.Understand at V-SISO subframe and V/V- During the switching of MISO subframe, polarization also be necessarily, does not has the change of transmit power.

Figure 130 represents what the order of V-SISO subframe with V/V-MISO subframe was replaced by the subframe structure relative to Figure 129 Situation.Understand then occur in frame polarization or transmit power change simply to the switching point of V/H-MIMO subframe.Thus Understand, in order to receive the impact that side prevents from processing especially for AGC, as long as independently make polarization with SISO and MISO/MIMO Necessarily and do not have difference person the most permissible for subframe front and back each other between transmit power.Thus, the degree of freedom of ordering of sub-frames improves.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, transmit power switch mode can be further contemplated and arrange and have The subframe structure of the suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, transmit power switch mode can be further contemplated and arrange There is the subframe structure of suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame.

Additionally, Figure 131 represents the situation of the subframe structure shown in Figure 120 of embodiment H3, by V/V-MISO subframe with The order of V/H-MIMO subframe is replaced.Thus, in frame occur polarization or transmit power change be only to V/H-MIMO The switching point of frame.

Figure 132 represents what the order of V/V-MISO subframe and V-SISO subframe was replaced by the subframe structure relative to Figure 131 Situation.Understand being only to the switching point of V/H-MIMO subframe of change that polarization or transmit power then occur in frame.

It follows that in order to receive side prevent especially for AGC process impact, as long as with SISO and MISO/MIMO Unrelated and make polarization certain and do not have difference person the most permissible for subframe front and back each other in transmit power.Thus, ordering of sub-frames Degree of freedom improve.

Son by configuration based on transmission antenna (considering polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) illustrated above Suitable ordering of sub-frames in frame structure, it is possible to cut down polarization and the change point of transmit power and suppress the deterioration of receptivity. Furthermore it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of ordering of sub-frames.

Generate configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that send merit illustrated above Rate switch mode) the structure of dispensing device of subframe structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except at embodiment E1 Beyond the point of middle explanation, frame constituting portion 7610 also generate configuration based on transmission antenna illustrated above (suitable ordering of sub-frames, Consider polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) subframe structure.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

Configuration of based on transmission antenna (the suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that send illustrated above with generation Power switch mode) the sending method of subframe structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device in Figure 86～Figure 88 Represent.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2, by configuration based on transmission antenna, (suitable subframe is suitable Sequence, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) subframe structure, OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, The frequency of the instantaneous change receiving power that AGC process is difficult to follow is reduced especially in 8600_Y).

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate Figure 129～Figure 132 example as subframe structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H- SISO subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment H8)

In embodiment H7, to using configuration based on transmission antenna, (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, also examines Consider transmit power switch mode) the situation of subframe structure be illustrated.In the present embodiment, with respect to embodiment party Formula H7 is capable of transmitting the transmission frame structure of path presumption improvement and illustrates in reception side.

Figure 133 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative to the figure at embodiment H7 The configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) represented in 130 Subframe structure, be to use sub-frame starting symbol, final in each subframe in each subframe beginning OFDM symbol OFDM symbol uses the transmission frame structure of sub-frame closing symbol.But, sub-frame starting Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol can also be selected independently according to each subframe and whether set, it is also possible to Select independently of each other to set by sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol in each subframe Whether determine.

As shown in Figure 107 of embodiment F2, if arranging sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame Closing symbol, then in these OFDM symbol, SP exist sub-carrier positions, i.e. carry out at the interpolation of time orientation All there is SP in the sub-carrier positions of reason.Thereby, it is possible to improve the beginning part of subframe and the interpolation precision of last part.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to arrange sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol。

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to sub-frame starting is set Symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.

By use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol Transmission frame structure, it is possible to realize receive side transmission path presumption improve.

Generate use sub-frame starting symbol illustrated above and sub-frame closing symbol The structure of dispensing device sending frame structure represent in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except saying in embodiment E1 and H7 Beyond bright point, frame constituting portion 7610 also generates use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-illustrated above The transmission frame structure of frame closing symbol.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing illustrated above with generation Symbol send the sending method of frame structure and the structure receiving device corresponding to dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E2 and H7, in frame, it is mixed 1 antenna sends and multiple antennas transmission In the case of, by using the transmission frame of sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol to tie Structure, channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) also be able to estimate accurately subframe the beginning part and The channel variation of last part.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 133 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment H9)

Feelings in embodiment H1, to the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames) Condition is illustrated.In the present embodiment, the instantaneity change with respect to embodiment H1, for reception power is connecing Receive side to be particular enable to carry out the transmission frame structure that the high speed of AGC follows and illustrate.

Figure 134 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative to the figure at embodiment H1 The subframe structure of the configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames) represented in 115, as transmission antenna number The subframe beginning OFDM symbol of change point use AGC to synchronize the transmission frame structure with preamble (preamble).

4 points that the character required AGC synchronization with preamble is preferably following.

(1) signal (for overhead reduction) of relatively short period of time length

(2) signal of the composition of frequency domain as much as possible is comprised relative to subframe

(3) amplitude is certain signal (for AGC high-speed synchronous) as far as possible in the time domain

(4) signal (in order to also have in multi-path environment by the relevant higher matching brought) that dependency is higher

As meeting the signal of these character, such as, can enumerate linear frequency modulation (chirp) signal.Specifically, it is phase Position characteristic frequency and the linear FM signal of 2 function representations of time.But, AGC synchronization preamble does not limit In linear FM signal.

By this AGC synchronization preamble, the high speed also being able to realize AGC in the case of transmission antenna number changes chases after With.

As in embodiment H1 represent Figure 116 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB- The control information that needs in standard beyond T2 standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to AGC synchronization preamble is set.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to AGC synchronization preamble is set.

It addition, in the transmission frame structure of Figure 134, illustrating the P2 code element that L1 signaling data sends is that 1 antenna sends (SISO) example.On the other hand, in the case of P2 code element is multiple antennas transmission (MISO, MIMO) too, it is possible to obtain The effect identical with the example sending frame structure of Figure 134.Specifically, represent relative in Figure 117 of embodiment H1 The subframe structure of configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames), be the son at the change point as transmission antenna number Frame beginning OFDM symbol uses the transmission frame structure of AGC synchronization preamble.Represented in Figure 135.

Transmission frame structure by use AGC synchronization preamble illustrated above, it is possible to realize receiving the AGC of side The raising of energy.

Generate the structure of the dispensing device sending frame structure of use AGC synchronization preamble illustrated above at Figure 76 Or Figure 85 represents.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and H1, frame constituting portion 7610 also generates above institute The transmission frame structure of the use AGC synchronization preamble shown.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

With the sending method sending frame structure generating the use synchronization preamble of AGC illustrated above and dispensing device The corresponding structure receiving device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, except in embodiment E2 and H1 explanation point with Outward, in frame, it is mixed 1 antenna sends and in the case of multiple antennas transmission, by using sending out of AGC synchronization preamble Send frame structure, in OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y), also be able in the case of transmission antenna number changes The high speed carrying out AGC is followed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

Additionally, illustrate Figure 134, Figure 135 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this.

(embodiment H10)

In embodiment H3, to using configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) The situation of subframe structure is illustrated.In the present embodiment, with respect to embodiment H3, for receive power wink The transmission frame structure that the change of time property is followed in the high speed receiving side and be particular enable to carry out AGC illustrates.

Figure 136 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative to the figure at embodiment H3 The subframe structure of the configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) represented in 119, is as sending out The subframe beginning OFDM symbol of the change point of antennas number or polarization uses the transmission frame structure of AGC synchronization preamble. As AGC synchronization preamble, equally enumerate linear FM signal with embodiment H9, but be not limited to this.

By this AGC synchronization preamble, it also is able to carry out AGC's in the case of transmission antenna number or polarization change Follow at a high speed.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to AGC synchronization preamble is set.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to AGC synchronization preamble is set.

It addition, in the transmission frame structure of Figure 136, illustrating the P2 code element that L1 signaling data sends is that V-SISO sends Example.On the other hand, P2 code element e.g. V/V-MISO send in the case of too, it is possible to obtain with Figure 136 send out Send the effect that the example of frame structure is identical.Specifically, relative in Figure 120 of embodiment H3 represent based on send sky The subframe structure of the configuration (being also contemplated for polarization, suitable ordering of sub-frames) of line, is in the change as transmission antenna number or polarization The subframe beginning OFDM symbol of point uses the transmission frame structure of AGC synchronization preamble.Represented in Figure 137.

Transmission frame structure by use AGC synchronization preamble illustrated above, it is possible to realize receiving the AGC of side The raising of energy.

Generate the structure of the dispensing device sending frame structure of use AGC synchronization preamble illustrated above at Figure 76 Or Figure 85 represents.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and H3, frame constituting portion 7610 also generates above institute The transmission frame structure of the use AGC synchronization preamble shown.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

With the sending method sending frame structure generating the use synchronization preamble of AGC illustrated above and dispensing device The corresponding structure receiving device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, except in embodiment E2 and H3 explanation point with Outward, in frame, it is mixed 1 antenna sends and in the case of multiple antennas transmission, by using sending out of AGC synchronization preamble Send frame structure, in OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y), in the case of transmission antenna number or polarization change The high speed also being able to carry out AGC is followed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate Figure 136, Figure 137 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment H11)

In embodiment H5, to using configuration (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that transmit power based on transmission antenna Switch mode) the situation of subframe structure be illustrated.In the present embodiment, with respect to embodiment H5, for Receive the transmission frame structure that the instantaneity change of power follows in the high speed receiving side and be particular enable to carry out AGC to illustrate.

Figure 123～Figure 126 is configuration based on transmission antenna (the suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is also considered that send out of embodiment H5 Send power switch mode) subframe structure.According to these figures, there is not the change point of transmit power.It follows that be not required to Want AGC synchronization preamble as embodiment H9～H10.

More than according to, in the case of the change point that there is not transmit power, it is also possible to do not use AGC synchronization preamble Code.But, in the case of there is the change point of transmit power, it would however also be possible to employ AGC synchronization preamble.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, in the case of the change point that there is not transmit power, it is possible to Not use AGC synchronization preamble.But, in the case of there is the change point of transmit power, it would however also be possible to employ AGC is same Step preamble.

Additionally, using 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, in the situation of the change point that there is not transmit power Under, it is also possible to do not use AGC synchronization preamble.But, in the case of there is the change point of transmit power, it is also possible to adopt With AGC synchronization preamble.

The structure generating the illustrated above dispensing device sending frame structure represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except In embodiment E1 and H5 beyond the point of explanation, frame constituting portion 7610 is in the case of the change point that there is not transmission antenna number AGC synchronization preamble can not also be used.But, in the case of there is the change point of transmit power, it would however also be possible to employ AGC synchronization preamble.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

With the sending method sending frame structure generating the use synchronization preamble of AGC illustrated above and dispensing device The corresponding structure receiving device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, except in embodiment E2 and H5 explanation point with Outward, in frame, it is mixed 1 antenna sends and in the case of multiple antennas sends, by transmission frame structure illustrated above, In OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y), in the case of transmit power changes, it also is able to carry out the high speed of AGC Follow.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 123～Figure 126 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this.

(embodiment H12)

In embodiment H7, to using configuration based on transmission antenna, (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, also examines Consider transmit power switch mode) the situation of subframe structure be illustrated.In the present embodiment, with respect to embodiment party Formula H7, the transmission frame structure followed in the high speed receiving side and be particular enable to carry out AGC for receiving the instantaneity change of power enter Row explanation.

Figure 138 is the figure sending frame structure representing present embodiment.Specifically, relative to the figure at embodiment H7 The configuration based on transmission antenna (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) represented in 129 Subframe structure, be to start in the subframe of the change point as transmit power or polarization OFDM symbol to use AGC synchronize with front The transmission frame structure of synchronous code.As AGC synchronization preamble, equally enumerate linear frequency modulation letter with embodiment H9 Number, but it is not limited to this.

By this AGC synchronization preamble, in the case of transmit power or polarization change, it also is able to carry out the height of AGC Speed is followed.

As in embodiment E1 represent Figure 78 Signalling PLP(7801 is being set), transmission at DVB-T2 The control information that needs in standard beyond standard (can also be a part, i.e. with L1Post-Signalling data and Signalling PLP both transmission) in the case of too, it is also possible to AGC synchronization preamble is set.

Additionally, use 1Signalling data(8301 the Figure 83 as represented in embodiment E1), the 2Signalling data(8302) frame structure in the case of too, it is also possible to AGC synchronization preamble is set.

It addition, the configuration based on transmission antenna for representing in Figure 130～Figure 132 of embodiment H7 is (suitable Ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) subframe structure, by make respectively as send merit The subframe beginning OFDM symbol of the change point of rate or polarization uses the transmission frame structure of AGC synchronization preamble, it is possible to point Do not obtain the effect identical with the transmission frame structure example of Figure 138.They are illustrated respectively in Figure 139～Figure 141.

Transmission frame structure by use AGC synchronization preamble illustrated above, it is possible to realize receiving the AGC of side The raising of energy.

The illustrated above structure generating the dispensing device sending frame structure using AGC synchronization preamble is at Figure 76 Or Figure 85 represents.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and H7, frame constituting portion 7610 also generates above institute The transmission frame structure of the use AGC synchronization preamble shown.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

With the sending method sending frame structure generating the use synchronization preamble of AGC illustrated above and dispensing device The corresponding structure receiving device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, except in embodiment E2 and H7 explanation point with Outward, in frame, it is mixed 1 antenna sends and in the case of multiple antennas transmission, by using sending out of AGC synchronization preamble Send frame structure, in OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y), in the case of transmit power or polarization change also The high speed that can carry out AGC is followed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 138～Figure 141 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

It addition, in above embodiment H1～H12, illustrate the subframe structure relative with frame.Equally, for super The shorter frame structure that the level relative frame structure of frame etc. are relative with longer frame, it would however also be possible to employ above embodiment H1～ The content of H12.

Super frame is used by the content of embodiment H1～H12, as long as those skilled in the art the most certainly can Understanding, if specifically describing an example, then meaning to constitute each T2 frame of super frame and the FEF(Future of DVB-T2 standard Extension Frames) regard the subframe represented in above-mentioned embodiment H1～H12 as, send as a T2 frame or FEF Data be fixed as certain of SISO, MISO and/or MIMO.Further, dispensing device is whether by the data set of SISO The SISO frame that closes, by which kind of of the MISO/MIMO frame of the data acquisition system of MISO and/or MIMO, for constituting the control of each frame Code element and then its data symbols, be set to so that the bar number of (1) antenna that uses in the transmission of two code elements, (2) sky The polarization polarity of line, the transmit power of (3) antenna, (4) antenna polarization polarity consistent with certain in transmit power and carry out Send.

It addition, in above-mentioned embodiment H1～H12, clearly insert starting to make the division between subframe become Symbol and closing symbol.In the case of observing with frame unit, owing to reception side easily to be determined the beginning of frame P1 code element is inserted into the beginning of frame, is then inserted into the PS code element that SP density compared with other OFDM symbol is higher, as long as so There is in field for the present invention the people of common knowledge, it becomes possible to understand the insertion that need not starting symbol. But, although say it is to need not, but this be only be recited as because of the difference that can be sufficiently carried out interframe without, in view of logical The reliability of letter and stability, there be not undesirable condition even if inserting yet.In the case, as long as in beginning (the P1 code element of frame Insert starting symbol the most permissible before).

(embodiment J1)

As shown in Figure 103 (b) of embodiment F1, as point desired to standard from now on, can enumerate

1 antenna can be selected independently according to each PLP to send or multiple antennas transmission；

And then, the L1 signaling data sent by P2 code element also is able to select 1 antenna to send or multiple antennas sends.

In order to realize these, need the L1 signaling data of new transmission control information.In the present embodiment, to relative to For embodiment F1, the new L1 signaling data needed illustrates.

As shown in the table 2 of embodiment E1, in DVB-T2 standard, used P1 code element, by the control information (3 of S1 The information of bit), define

In frame entirety, 1 antenna sends (T2_SISO)

In frame entirety, multiple antennas sends (T2_MISO)

Signal (NOT_T2) beyond DVB-T2 standard.

In order to successfully shift to standard from now on from current standard, it is desirable to be able to by DVB-T2 standard and mark from now on Accurate (such as DVB-T3, DVB-T4) transmits in a time multiplexed way, it is possible to use P1 code element identification they.Such as at DVB-T3 In, in order to meet the transmission method shown in Figure 103 (b) of embodiment F1, the definition from DVB-T2 standard is different, the control of S1 Information can not represent the transmission antenna number that frame is overall.

As the solution for this problem, Figure 142 (a) represents the control information (information of 3 bits) of S1.Remove Beyond the table 2 of embodiment E1, such as, as the definition of DVB-T3 standard, newly arrange

L1 signaling data is that 1 antenna sends (T3_L1_SISO)

L1 signaling data is that multiple antennas (MISO) sends (T3_L1_MISO)

L1 signaling data is that multiple antennas (MIMO) sends (T3_L1_MIMO).

Further, as shown in the table 3 of embodiment E1～table 5, the sending method (SISO, MISO, MIMO) of each PLP is used L1 signaling data transmits.

And then, the control information of the subframe structure as shown in Figure 104～Figure 105 about embodiment F1 is represented In Figure 142 (b).By the type (SUB-FRAME_TYPE) of number of sub frames (NUM_SUB-FRAME) and each subframe, the OFDM of each subframe Code element number (SUB-FRAME_NUM_SYMBOLS), each subframe SP configuration mode (SUB-FRAME_PILOT_PATTERN) with L1 Signaling data transmits.Thereby, it is possible to expression subframe structure.

By control information and the definition of L1 signaling data of S1 illustrated above, in frame, it is capable of 1 antenna sends With being mixed that multiple antennas sends.

Generate the structure of the control information of S1 illustrated above and the dispensing device of L1 signaling data in Figure 76 or Figure 85 Represent.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and F1, P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605(controls code element letter Number generating unit 8502), control signal generating unit 7608, P1 code element insertion section 7622 generate S1 illustrated above control information and L1 signaling data.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Process, carry out modulated signal 1(7613_1 after the signal after this signal processing becomes signal processing) and signal processing after tune Signal 2(7613_2 processed).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

With the control information generating S1 illustrated above and the sending method of L1 signaling data and corresponding the connecing of dispensing device The structure of receiving apparatus represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and F1 is put and adds following place Reason.Being mixed 1 antenna in frame send and in the case of multiple antennas transmission, carry out P1 symbol detection, demodulation section 8601 is by S1 Decoding, obtains the sending method (SISO, MISO, MIMO) of L1 signaling data.Sending method based on the L1 signaling data obtained, Being decoded by L1 signaling data, P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 obtains about each The sending method (SISO, MISO, MIMO) of PLP and the information of subframe structure.

Based on these L1 signaling datas obtained, it is demodulated the decoding of PLP with channel selection.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

(embodiment J2)

In embodiment F2, to using sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing The transmission frame structure of symbol is illustrated.In the present embodiment, to the L1 signaling newly needed relative to embodiment F2 Data illustrate.

Figure 143 (b) represents about the use sub-frame starting as shown in Figure 106 of embodiment F2 The control information of the subframe structure of symbol and sub-frame closing symbol.By number of sub frames (NUM_SUB-FRAME), The presence or absence (SUB-FRAME_STARTING_SYMBOL) of the sub-frame starting symbol of each subframe, each subframe The presence or absence (SUB-FRAME_CLOSING_SYMBOL) of sub-frame closing symbol is transmitted with L1 signaling data.By This, it is possible to represent and use sub-frame starting symbol and the subframe structure of sub-frame closing symbol.

Definition by L1 signaling data illustrated above, it is possible to the transmission path realizing receiving side estimates carrying of precision High.

The structure of the dispensing device generating L1 signaling data illustrated above represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except In embodiment E1 and F2 beyond the point of explanation, P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502), Control signal generating unit 7608 generates L1 signaling data illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Process, carry out modulated signal 1(7613_1 after the signal after this signal processing becomes signal processing) and signal processing after tune Signal 2(7613_2 processed).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

With the control information generating S1 illustrated above and the sending method of L1 signaling data and corresponding the connecing of dispensing device The structure of receiving apparatus represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and F2 is put and adds following place Reason.L1 signaling data is decoded by P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603, obtains about respectively Information with presence or absence of the presence or absence of the sub-frame starting symbol of subframe and sub-frame closing symbol. Based on these L1 signaling datas obtained, channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) can utilize sub- Frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing symbol estimates the beginning part and of subframe accurately The channel variation that terminal part divides.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

(embodiment J3)

In embodiment F1, the situation of the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna is illustrated.? In present embodiment, receiving, to relative to embodiment F1, the L1 letter that the change point of transmission antenna number can easily be detected in side Data are made to illustrate.

In Figure 144, represent that the subframe structure shown in the Figure 104 to embodiment F1 has added the change of transmission antenna number The figure of point.According to Figure 144, multiple antennas sends the beginning of (MISO, MIMO) subframe and transmission (SISO) subframe beginning of 1 antenna is to send The change point of antenna number.

Corresponding L1 signaling data is represented in Figure 145 (a).This L1 signaling data (L1_ALLPLPS_XIXO_ MIXTURE) L1 signaling data and full PLP are represented

Only exist SISO(=0)

Only exist MISO/MIMO(=1)

It is mixed SISO and MISO/MIMO(=2).

Thus, L1_ALLPLPS_XIXO_MIXTURE=0,1 represents the change point that there is not transmission antenna number.

On the other hand, in the case of the subframe structure shown in Figure 144, ALLPLPS_XIXO_MIXTURE=2, expression is deposited Change point at transmission antenna number.In the case, by the control about subframe shown in Figure 142 (b) of embodiment J2 Information, it is known that the multiple antennas as the change point of transmission antenna number sends the beginning of (MISO, MIMO) subframe and 1 antenna sends (SISO) subframe beginning location.

Alternatively, it is also possible to use P1 code element to be passed through by above L1 signaling data (L1_ALLPLPS_XIXO_MIXTURE) The control information (information of 3 bits) of S1 sends.Such as, the sending method (SISO, MISO, MIMO) of L1 signaling data is uniquely Situation about determining is preferred.The control information (information of 3 bits) of corresponding S1 is represented in Figure 145 (b).Except reality Execute beyond the table 2 of mode E1, as the definition of such as DVB-T3 standard, newly arrange

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that 1 antenna sends (T3_SISO_only)

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) sends (T3_MIXO_only)

By L1 signaling data and PLP, it is mixed 1 antenna and sends and multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) transmission (T3_ SISO&MIXO_mixed).

Thus, T3_SISO_only, T3_MIXO_only represent the change point that there is not transmission antenna number.On the other hand, In the case of the subframe structure shown in Figure 144, T3_SISO&MIXO_mixed, represent the change point that there is transmission antenna number.

By L1 signaling data illustrated above or the definition of the control information of S1, it is possible to easily detection receives sending out of side The change point of antennas number.

Generate the structure of dispensing device of the control information of L1 signaling data illustrated above or S1 in Figure 76 or Figure 85 Represent.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and F1, control signal generating unit 7608, P2 symbol signal are raw One-tenth portion 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502) or P1 code element insertion section 7622 generate L1 signaling data illustrated above or The control information of S1.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

Sending method and corresponding the connecing of dispensing device with the control information generating L1 signaling data illustrated above or S1 The structure of receiving apparatus represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and F1 is put and adds following place Reason.L1 signaling data is decoded by P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603, or carries out P1 code Unit's detection, S1 is decoded, obtains information with presence or absence of the change point about transmission antenna number by demodulation section 8601.There is transmission antenna In the case of the change point of number, P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 also obtains Figure 142 The control information about subframe shown in (b), it is possible to the change point (regularly) of detection transmission antenna number.At the transmission antenna obtained The change point (regularly) of number, OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y, 8601_X, 8601_Y) especially can also be by AGC processes high speed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

(embodiment J4)

In embodiment F3, the situation of the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna (being also contemplated for polarization) is entered Go explanation.In the present embodiment, to relative to embodiment F3 can receive side easily detect transmission antenna number or The L1 signaling data of the change point of polarization illustrates.

In Figure 146, represent that the subframe structure shown in the Figure 109 for embodiment F3 has added transmission antenna number or pole The figure of the change point changed.It is to send out according to the beginning of Figure 146, V/H-MIMO subframe, the beginning of V/V-MISO subframe, the beginning of V-SISO subframe Antennas number or the change point of polarization.

Corresponding L1 signaling data is represented in Figure 147 (a).This L1 signaling data (L1_ALLPLPS_Y/Z_ XIXO_MIXTURE) represent that L1 signaling data and full PLP are

Only exist SISO(=0)

Only exist V/V-MIXO(=1)

Only exist V/H-MIXO(=2)

Two or more (=3) it is mixed in SISO, V/V-MIXO, V/H-MIXO.

Here, MIXO represents MISO or MIMO.Thus, L1_ALLPLPS_Y/Z_XIXO_MIXTURE=0,1,2 represents not There is the change point of transmission antenna number and polarization.

On the other hand, in the case of the subframe structure shown in Figure 146, ALLPLPS_XIXO_Y/Z_MIXTURE=3, table Show the change point that there is transmission antenna number or polarization.In the case, if comprised about subframe structure in L1 signaling data Control information, then understand transmission antenna number or as polarization change point V/H-MIMO subframe start, V/V-MISO subframe Beginning, V-SISO subframe beginning location.

Alternatively, it is also possible to use P1 code element, by the control information (information of 3 bits) of S1 by above L1 signaling data (L1_ALLPLPS_Y/Z_XIXO_MIXTURE) send.Such as, sending method (V-SISO, H-SISO, the V/ of L1 signaling data V-MISO, V/H-MISO, V/V-MIMO, V/H-MIMO) situation about determining uniquely is preferred.Figure 147 (b) represents with The control information (information of 3 bits) of the S1 of its correspondence.In addition to the table 2 of embodiment E1, such as DVB-T3 standard Definition, newly arrange

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that 1 antenna sends (T3_SISO_only)

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that the multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) by V/V sends (T3_V/V-MIXO_only)

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that the multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) by V/H sends (T3_V/H-MIXO_only)

According to L1 signaling data and PLP, it is mixed 1 antenna and sends, sent out by the multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) of V/V Send, send (T3_SISO&V/V-MIXO&V/H-MIXO_mixed) by the multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) of V/H.

Thus, T3_SISO_only, T3_V/V-MIXO_only, T3_V/H-MIXO_only represent and there is not transmission antenna Number and the change point of polarization.On the other hand, in the case of the subframe structure shown in Figure 146, it is T3_SISO&V/V-MIXO&V/ H-MIXO_mixed, represents the change point that there is transmission antenna number or polarization.

By L1 signaling data illustrated above or the definition of the control information of S1, it is possible to easily detect and receive side Transmission antenna number or the change point of polarization.

Generate the structure of dispensing device of the control information of L1 signaling data illustrated above or S1 in Figure 76 or Figure 85 Represent.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and F3, control signal generating unit 7608, P2 symbol signal are raw One-tenth portion 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502) or P1 code element insertion section 7622 generate L1 signaling data illustrated above or The control information of S1.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

Sending method and corresponding the connecing of dispensing device with the control information generating L1 signaling data illustrated above or S1 The structure of receiving apparatus represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and F3 is put and adds following place Reason.L1 signaling data is decoded by P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603, or carries out P1 code Unit's detection, S1 is decoded, obtains information with presence or absence of the change point about transmission antenna number or polarization by demodulation section 8601.Send out existing In the case of the change point of antennas number or polarization, P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 Obtain the information about subframe structure again, it is possible to detection transmission antenna number or the change point (regularly) of polarization.In the transmission obtained The change point (regularly) of antenna number or polarization, OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y, 8601_X, 8601_Y) is also AGC can be made especially to process high speed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 146 example as subframe structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO Frame, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment J5)

In embodiment H5, to the subframe structure using configuration based on transmission antenna, (suitable ordering of sub-frames, also examines Consider transmit power switch mode) situation be illustrated.In the present embodiment, make connecing to relative to embodiment H5 The L1 signaling data receiving the change point that transmit power can easily be detected in side illustrates.

Figure 148 A represents relative to the subframe structure shown in Figure 124 of embodiment H5, about Figure 122 (a) Suo Shi Pattern 1(between the transmit power of SISO and MISO/MIMO, have difference) situation added the figure of change point of transmit power. According to Figure 148 A, multiple antennas sends the beginning of (MISO, MIMO) subframe and transmission (SISO) subframe beginning of 1 antenna is transmit power Change point.

On the other hand, Figure 124 of embodiment H5 represents for pattern 2(shown in Figure 122 (b) at SISO and MISO/ The transmit power of MIMO does not has difference) situation added the figure of change point of transmit power.It is represented again at figure In 148B.According to Figure 148 B, even if sending the beginning of (MISO, MIMO) subframe and 1 antenna transmission (SISO) at multiple antennas Frame starts, and transmit power does not changes.

At Figure 149 A(a) in represent the L1 signaling data corresponding with them.This L1 signaling data (L1_ALLPLPS_XIXO_ PWRDIFF) representing, L1 signaling data and full PLP are

Only exist SISO(=0)

Only exist MISO/MIMO(=1)

It is mixed SISO and MISO/MIMO(without sending difference power) (=2)

Being mixed SISO and MISO/MIMO(has the transmit power poor) (=3).

Thus, L1_ALLPLPS_XIXO_PWRDIFF=0,1,2 represents the change point that there is not transmit power.At Figure 148 B In the case of shown subframe structure, it is L1_ALLPLPS_XIXO_PWRDIFF=2.

On the other hand, in the case of the subframe structure shown in Figure 148 A, ALLPLPS_XIXO_PWRDIFF=3, expression is deposited Change point in transmit power.In the case, believed by the control about subframe shown in Figure 142 (b) of embodiment J2 Breath is it is known that may be multiple antennas transmission (MISO, MIMO) subframe beginning and 1 antenna transmission (SISO) of the change point of transmit power Subframe beginning location.

At Figure 149 A(b) in represent about the control information of subframe.Compared with Figure 142 (b) of embodiment J1, each subframe Type (SUB-FRAME_TYPE) different.Specifically, SUB-FRAME_TYPE comprises the information about transmit power, Transmit with L1 signaling data.Thereby, it is possible to identify that whether the beginning location of each subframe is the change point of transmit power.

Alternatively, it is also possible to use P1 code element, by the control information (information of 3 bits) of S1 by Figure 149 A(a) L1 letter Data (L1_ALLPLPS_XIXO_PWRDIFF) are made to send.Such as, the sending method (SISO, MISO, MIMO) of L1 signaling data Situation about determining uniquely is preferred.At Figure 149 B(c) in represent the control information (letter of 3 bits of corresponding S1 Breath).In addition to the table 2 of embodiment E1, such as, as the definition of DVB-T3 standard, newly arrange

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that 1 antenna sends (T3_SISO_only)

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) sends (T3_MIXO_only)

By L1 signaling data and PLP, it is mixed 1 antenna and sends and multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) transmission (nothing transmission Difference power) (T3_SISO&MIXO_mixed_nopwrdiff)

By L1 signaling data and PLP, it is mixed 1 antenna transmission and multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) sends and (has transmission Difference power) (T3_SISO&MIXO_mixed_pwrdiff).Thus, T3_SISO_only, T3_MIXO_only, T3_SISO& MIXO_mixed_nopwrdiff represents the change point that there is not transmit power.Situation at the subframe structure shown in Figure 148 B Under, it is T3_SISO&MIXO_mixed_nopwrdiff.

On the other hand, in the case of the subframe structure shown in Figure 148 A, it is T3_SISO&MIXO_mixed_pwrdiff, Represent the change point that there is transmit power.

By L1 signaling data illustrated above or the definition of the control information of S1, it is possible to easily detection receives sending out of side Send the change point of power.

Generate the structure of dispensing device of the control information of L1 signaling data illustrated above or S1 in Figure 76 or Figure 85 Represent.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and H5, control signal generating unit 7608, P2 symbol signal are raw One-tenth portion 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502) or P1 code element insertion section 7622 generate L1 signaling data illustrated above or The control information of S1.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

Sending method and corresponding the connecing of dispensing device with the control information generating L1 signaling data illustrated above or S1 The structure of receiving apparatus represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and H5 is put and adds following place Reason.L1 signaling data is decoded by P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603, or carries out P1 code Unit's detection, S1 is decoded, obtains about information with presence or absence of the change point of transmit power by demodulation section 8601.There is transmit power In the case of change point, P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 also obtains Figure 149 A(b) The shown information about subframe structure, it is possible to the change point (regularly) of detection transmit power.Change in the transmit power obtained Changing point (regularly), OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y, 8601_X, 8601_Y) can also make AGC process especially High speed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

(embodiment J6)

In embodiment H7, to using configuration based on transmission antenna, (suitable ordering of sub-frames, it is considered to polarization, also examines Consider transmit power switch mode) the situation of subframe structure be illustrated.In the present embodiment, to relative to embodiment H7 makes the L1 signaling data receiving the change point that transmit power or polarization can easily be detected in side illustrate.

Figure 150 A represents relative to the subframe structure shown in Figure 130 of embodiment H7, for Figure 128 (a) Suo Shi Pattern 1(in the transmit power of SISO and MISO/MIMO, have difference, it is also considered that polarization) situation added transmit power or The figure of the change point of polarization.According to the beginning of Figure 150 A, V/V-MISO subframe, the beginning of V-SISO subframe, the beginning of V/H-MIMO subframe It it is the change point of transmit power or polarization.

On the other hand, Figure 130 of embodiment H7 is at SISO and MISO/MIMO for pattern 2(shown in Figure 128 (b) Transmit power in there is no difference, it is also considered that polarization) situation added the figure of change point of transmit power or polarization.By it again Secondary expression is in Figure 150 B.It is the change point of transmit power or polarization according to the beginning of Figure 150 B, only V/H-MIMO subframe.

The L1 signaling data corresponding with them is represented in Figure 151 (a).This L1 signaling data (L1_ALLPLPS_Y/Z_ XIXO_PWRDIFF) representing, L1 signaling data and full PLP are

Only exist SISO(=0)

Only exist V/V-MIXO(=1)

Only exist V/H-MIXO(=2)

It is mixed two (without sending difference power) (=3) of SISO and V/V-MIXO or V/H-MIXO

It is mixed two (have transmit power poor) (=4) of SISO and V/V-MIXO or V/H-MIXO

At least it is mixed two (=5) of V/V-MIXO and V/H-MIXO.

Here, MIXO represents MISO or MIMO.Thus, L1_ALLPLPS_XIXO_PWRDIFF=0,1,2,3 expression is not deposited At transmit power and the change point of polarization.

On the other hand, ALLPLPS_XIXO_PWRDIFF=4,5 represent the change point that there is transmit power and polarization, at figure In the case of subframe structure shown in 150A and Figure 150 B, it is ALLPLPS_XIXO_PWRDIFF=5.In the case, if L1 signaling data comprises the control information about subframe structure, is known that as transmit power or the subframe of the change point of polarization Beginning location.

Alternatively, it is also possible to use P1 code element, by the control information (information of 3 bits) of S1 by the L1 signaling of Figure 151 (a) Data (L1_ALLPLPS_Y/Z_XIXO_PWRDIFF) send.Such as, sending method (V-SISO, the H-of L1 signaling data SISO, V/V-MISO, V/H-MISO, V/V-MIMO, V/H-MIMO) situation about determining uniquely is preferred.At Figure 151 (b) The control information (information of 3 bits) of the S1 that middle expression is corresponding.In addition to the table 2 of embodiment E1, such as conduct The definition of DVB-T3 standard, is newly arranged

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that 1 antenna sends (T3_SISO_only)

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that the multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) by V/V sends (T3_V/V-MIXO_only)

L1 signaling data and full PLP are that the multiple antennas (MISO/MIMO) by V/H sends (T3_V/H-MIXO_only)

By L1 signaling data and PLP, it is mixed a modulated signal and sends and use V/V-MIXO or V/H- Two of the transmission of MIXO, do not have their poor (the T3_SISO&V/V or V/H-MIXO_mixed_ of transmit power Nopwrdiff)

Following transmission is carried out by L1 signaling data and PLP

(1) be at least mixed two (2) of V/V-MIXO and V/H-MIXO be mixed a modulated signal send and Two of the transmission of use V/V-MIXO or V/H-MIXO, have their the poor (T3_V/V-&V/H-MIXO_mixed of transmit power OR T3_SISO&V/V-or V/H-MIXO_mixed_pwrdiff).

Thus, T3_SISO_only, T3_V/V-MIXO_only, T3_V/H-MIXO_only, T3_SISO&V/V or V/ H-MIXO_mixed_nopwrdiff represents the change point that there is not transmit power or polarization.

On the other hand, in the case of the subframe structure shown in Figure 150 A and Figure 150 B, it is T3_V/V-&V/H-MIXO_ Mixed OR T3_SISO&V/V-or V/H-MIXO_mixed_pwrdiff, represents the change that there is transmit power or polarization Point.

By L1 signaling data illustrated above or the definition of the control information of S1, it is possible to easily detect and receive side The change point of transmit power.

Generate the structure of dispensing device of the control information of L1 signaling data illustrated above or S1 in Figure 76 or Figure 85 Represent.But, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and H7, control signal generating unit 7608, P2 symbol signal are raw One-tenth portion 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502) or P1 code element insertion section 7622 generate L1 signaling data illustrated above or The control information of S1.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

Sending method and corresponding the connecing of dispensing device with the control information generating L1 signaling data illustrated above or S1 The structure of receiving apparatus represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and H7 is put and adds following place Reason.L1 signaling data is decoded by P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603, or carries out P1 code Unit's detection, S1 is decoded, obtains information with presence or absence of the change point about transmit power or polarization by demodulation section 8601.Send existing In the case of the change point of power or polarization, demodulation section 8603 must for P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) To the information about subframe structure, it is possible to detection transmit power or the change point (regularly) of polarization.In the transmit power obtained Change point (regularly), OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y, 8601_X, 8601_Y) can also make at AGC especially Reason high speed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate Figure 150 A and Figure 150 B example as subframe structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment J7)

In embodiment H9, the transmission frame structure that have employed AGC synchronization preamble is illustrated.In this reality Execute in mode, the L1 signaling data newly needed relative to embodiment H9 is illustrated.

Figure 152 (a) represents and synchronizes with front about the employing AGC as shown in Figure 134～Figure 135 of embodiment H9 The control information sending frame structure of synchronous code.AGC synchronization preamble is used L1 signaling number with or without (AGC_PREAMBLE) According to transmission.Thereby, it is possible to represent the transmission frame structure that have employed AGC synchronization preamble.

By the definition of L1 signaling data illustrated above, even if also being able to realize in the case of transmission antenna number changes The high speed of AGC is followed.

The structure of the dispensing device generating L1 signaling data illustrated above represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except In embodiment E1 and H9 beyond the point of explanation, P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502), Control signal generating unit 7608 generates L1 signaling data illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The structure that receive device corresponding with the sending method generating L1 signaling data illustrated above and dispensing device exists Figure 86～Figure 88 represents.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and H9 is put and adds following process.P2 code element (also has Situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 by L1 signaling data decode, obtain about each subframe AGC synchronize use Information with presence or absence of preamble.Based on these L1 signaling datas obtained, OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y, 8601_X, 8601_Y) AGC synchronization preamble can be utilized, the change point (regularly) at transmission antenna number carries out the height of AGC Speed is followed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

(embodiment J8)

In embodiment H10, the transmission frame structure (being also contemplated for polarization) using AGC synchronization preamble is carried out Explanation.In the present embodiment, the L1 signaling data newly needed relative to embodiment H10 is illustrated.

Transmission frame about the employing AGC synchronization preamble as shown in Figure 136～Figure 137 of embodiment H10 The control information of structure (being also contemplated for polarization) represents in Figure 152 (a) as embodiment J7.By AGC synchronization preamble Code transmits with L1 signaling data with or without (AGC_PREAMBLE).Thereby, it is possible to represent the transmission using AGC synchronization preamble Frame structure (is also contemplated for polarization).

By the definition of L1 signaling data illustrated above, even if also can in the case of transmission antenna number or polarization change The high speed enough carrying out AGC is followed.

The structure of the dispensing device generating L1 signaling data illustrated above represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except In embodiment E1 and H10 beyond the point of explanation, P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502), Control signal generating unit 7608 generates L1 signaling data illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The structure that receive device corresponding with the sending method generating L1 signaling data illustrated above and dispensing device exists Figure 86～Figure 88 represents.But, the point of explanation in embodiment E2 and H10 be with the addition of following process.P2 code element is (also Have the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 by L1 signaling data decode, obtain about each subframe AGC synchronize By information with presence or absence of preamble.Based on these L1 signaling datas obtained, OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_ Y, 8601_X, 8601_Y) utilize AGC synchronization preamble, it is possible to and the change point (regularly) in transmission antenna number or polarization enters The high speed of row AGC is followed.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate Figure 136, Figure 137 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment J9)

In embodiment H11, (it is also contemplated for transmit power to cut to the transmission frame structure using AGC synchronization preamble Die change formula) it is illustrated.In the present embodiment, the L1 signaling data newly needed relative to embodiment H11 is said Bright.

As shown in Figure 123～Figure 126, in embodiment H11, illustrate and there is not the change point of transmit power, also may be used Not use the example of AGC synchronization preamble.But, in the case of there is the change point of transmit power, need AGC same The employing of step preamble.(it is also contemplated for transmit power switching mould about the transmission frame structure using AGC synchronization preamble Formula) control information represent in Figure 152 (a) as embodiment J7.By AGC synchronization preamble with or without (AGC_ PREAMBLE) transmit with L1 signaling data.Thereby, it is possible to represent that the transmission frame structure using AGC synchronization preamble (is also examined Consider transmit power switch mode).

By the definition of L1 signaling data illustrated above, it also is able to carry out AGC's in the case of transmit power changes Follow at a high speed.

The structure of the dispensing device generating L1 signaling data illustrated above represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except In embodiment E1 and H11 beyond the point of explanation, P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502), Control signal generating unit 7608 generates L1 signaling data illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The structure that receive device corresponding with the sending method generating L1 signaling data illustrated above and dispensing device exists Figure 86～Figure 88 represents.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and H11 is put and adds following process.P2 code element (also has Situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 by L1 signaling data decode, obtain about each subframe AGC synchronize use Information with presence or absence of preamble.Based on these L1 signaling datas obtained, OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y, 8601_X, 8601_Y) utilize AGC synchronization preamble, the change point (regularly) in transmit power can carry out the high speed of AGC Follow.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, make 1 Antenna transmission and multiple antennas transmission can use in the case of being mixed and sending, receive.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 123～Figure 126 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this.

(embodiment J10)

In embodiment H12, to use AGC synchronization preamble transmission frame structure (be also contemplated for polarization, it is also considered that Transmit power switch mode) it is illustrated.In the present embodiment, to the L1 signaling newly needed relative to embodiment H12 Data illustrate.

Transmission frame about the employing AGC synchronization preamble as shown in Figure 138～Figure 141 of embodiment H12 The control information of structure (being also contemplated for polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) represents at Figure 152 as embodiment J7 In (a).AGC synchronization preamble is transmitted with L1 signaling data with or without (AGC_PREAMBLE).Thereby, it is possible to represent and use The transmission frame structure (being also contemplated for polarization, it is also considered that transmit power switch mode) of AGC synchronization preamble.

By the definition of L1 signaling data illustrated above, it also is able to carry out in the case of transmit power or polarization change The high speed of AGC is followed.

The structure of the dispensing device generating L1 signaling data illustrated above represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except In embodiment E1 and H12 beyond the point of explanation, P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502), Control signal generating unit 7608 generates L1 signaling data illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The structure that receive device corresponding with the sending method generating L1 signaling data illustrated above and dispensing device exists Figure 86～Figure 88 represents.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and H12 is put and adds following process.P2 code element (also has Situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 by L1 signaling data decode, obtain about each subframe AGC synchronize use Information with presence or absence of preamble.Based on these L1 signaling datas obtained, OFDM mode association process portion (8600_X, 8600_Y, 8601_X, 8601_Y) utilize AGC synchronization preamble, the change point (regularly) in transmit power or polarization can carry out AGC High speed follow.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 138～Figure 141 example as transmission frame structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

It addition, in above embodiment J1～J10, illustrate the subframe structure relative with frame.Equally, for super The shorter frame structure that the level relative frame structure of frame etc. are relative with longer frame, it would however also be possible to employ above embodiment J1～ The content of J10.

Super frame is used by the content of embodiment J1～J10, as long as those skilled in the art the most certainly can Understanding, if specifically describing an example, then will constitute each T2 frame and the FEF(Future of the super frame of DVB-T2 standard Extension Frames) regard the subframe represented in above-mentioned embodiment J1～J10 as, send as a T2 frame or FEF Data be fixed as certain of SISO, MISO and/or MIMO.Further, the transmission data sent in each frame can also be According to by SISO data acquisition system or the frame of data genaration by MISO and/or MIMO data acquisition system.

(embodiment K1)

As shown in Figure 103 (b) of embodiment F1, as desired in standard from now on, enumerate

1 antenna can be selected independently according to each PLP to send or multiple antennas transmission；

And then, the L1 signaling data sent with P2 code element also is able to select 1 antenna to send or multiple antennas sends.

In order to realize these, need the L1 signaling data of new transmission control information.In the present embodiment, to relative to Embodiment F3(is also contemplated for polarization) the new L1 signaling data needed illustrates.

As shown in the table 2 of embodiment E1, in DVB-T2 standard, use P1 code element, by control information (3 ratios of S1 Special information), define

1 antenna transmission (T2_SISO) is carried out with frame entirety

Multiple antennas transmission (T2_MISO) is carried out with frame entirety

Signal (NOT_T2) beyond DVB-T2 standard.

In order to successfully shift to standard from now on from current standard, it is desirable to be able to by DVB-T2 standard and mark from now on Accurate (such as DVB-T3, DVB-T4) transmits in a time multiplexed way, it is possible to use P1 code element identification they.Such as at DVB-T3 In, in order to meet the transmission method represented in Figure 103 (b) of embodiment F1, the definition from DVB-T2 standard is different, S1's Control information can not represent the transmission antenna number that frame is overall.

As the solution for this problem, at Figure 153 A(a) the middle control information (information of 3 bits) representing S1. In addition to the table 2 of embodiment E1, such as, as the definition of DVB-T3 standard, newly arrange

L1 signaling data is that 1 antenna sends (T3_L1_SISO)

L1 signaling data is that multiple antennas (V/V-MISO) sends (T3_L1_V/V-MISO)

L1 signaling data is that multiple antennas (V/H-MISO) sends (T3_L1_V/V-MISO)

L1 signaling data is that multiple antennas (V/V-MIMO) sends (T3_L1_V/V-MIMO)

L1 signaling data is that multiple antennas (V/H-MIMO) sends (T3_L1_V/H-MIMO).

Further, as each PLP sending method (V-SISO, H-SISO, V/V-MISO, V/H-MISO, V/V-MIMO, V/H-MIMO), by table 3～the table 5 and Figure 153 B(c of embodiment E1) shown in control information with L1 signaling data transmit.

And then, the control information of the subframe structure as shown in the Figure 109 about embodiment F3 is represented at Figure 153 A In (b).By number of sub frames (NUM_SUB-FRAME), the type (SUB-FRAME_TYPE) of each subframe, the OFDM symbol number of each subframe (SUB-FRAME_NUM_SYMBOLS), SP configuration mode (SUB-FRAME_PILOT_PATTERN) the L1 signaling number of each subframe According to transmission.Thereby, it is possible to represent subframe structure (being also contemplated for polarization).

By control information and the definition of L1 signaling data of S1 illustrated above, it is possible to realize 1 antenna in frame and send It is mixed (be also contemplated for polarization) with multiple antennas sends.

The structure of the dispensing device generating L1 signaling data illustrated above represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except In embodiment E1 and F3 beyond the point of explanation, P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502), Control signal generating unit 7608, P1 code element insertion section 7622 generate control information and the L1 signaling data of S1 illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

With the control information generating S1 illustrated above and the sending method of L1 signaling data and corresponding the connecing of dispensing device The structure of receiving apparatus represents in Figure 86～Figure 88.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and F3 is put and adds following place Reason.In frame, it is mixed 1 antenna send and in the case of multiple antennas transmission (being also contemplated for polarization), be also carried out P1 symbol detection, S1 is decoded by lsb decoder 8601, obtains the sending method (SISO, MISO, MIMO) of L1 signaling data.Based on the L1 signaling obtained The sending method of data, decodes L1 signaling data, P2 code element (also having the situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 obtain the sending method (SISO, MISO, MIMO) about each PLP and the information of subframe structure.Based on obtain these L1 signaling data, is demodulated the decoding of PLP with institute channel selection.

Figure 154 A(b) represent by Figure 108 B(b of embodiment F3) represent utilize existing transmission antenna V/V-MISO in Distributed-MISO, for V/H receiver sends.Owing to two transmission antennas are all sent out with V polarization Send, so in V/H receiver, H poliarizing antenna the incoming level of the system received is extremely low.Thus, to V/V-MISO When transmission is received, the process of the system by being received by H poliarizing antenna stops, it is desirable to achieve power consumption reduces.Pass through Control information and the L1 signaling data of the S1 represented in the present embodiment are capable of this point.

In the reception device represented by Figure 86～Figure 88, the control information of S1 is decoded, is V/V-at L1 signaling data In the case of MISO sends, in the decoding process of L1 signaling data, system (such as, the antenna that will be received by H poliarizing antenna The system of 701_Y) process stop.Additionally, be in the case of V/V-MISO sends at the PLP of institute's channel selection, this channel selection PLP's In decoding process, H poliarizing antenna the process of the system (such as, the system of antenna 701_Y) received is stopped.By with On, it is possible to reduce power consumption.

It addition, in V/H receiver, it is also possible in the terminal of the terminal and connection H poliarizing antenna that connect V poliarizing antenna The change color of adapter, shape etc., set up corresponding by the system of reception antenna with polarization characteristic.

Additionally, V/H receiver represents that the control information of S1 or L1 signaling data are the numbers that V/V-MISO sends receiving In the case of according to, the receiving quality of the respective incoming level of the system of reception antenna, S/N ratio etc. is compared.By this Sample, V/H receiver can interpolate that the system received by H poliarizing antenna.

No matter it addition, V/H receiver can also the control information of S1 and L1 signaling data, all pass through reception antenna The comparison of the respective receiving quality of system, whether the MISO being received sends is the judgement that sends of V/V-MISO.

On the other hand, Figure 154 B(c) represent at Figure 108 C(c of embodiment F3) in the Co-sited-MIMO that represents, V/H-MISO for V/H receiver sends.Being all V/H polarization owing to receiving and dispatching 2 antennas, polarization point can be obtained so having The effect of collection (polarization diversity) effect.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 109 example as subframe structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO Frame, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment K2)

In embodiment F4, to using sub-frame starting symbol and sub-frame closing The transmission frame structure (being also contemplated for polarization) of symbol is illustrated.In the present embodiment, to new relative to embodiment F4 The L1 signaling data needed illustrates.

About use sub-frame starting symbol and sub-as shown in Figure 110 of embodiment F4 The control information of the subframe structure of frame closing symbol (being also contemplated for polarization) as embodiment J2 at Figure 143 B () represents.By the sub-frame starting symbol of number of sub frames (NUM_SUB-FRAME) and each subframe with or without (SUB- FRAME_STARTING_SYMBOL), the sub-frame closing symbol of each subframe is with or without (SUB-FRAME_ CLOSING_SYMBOL) transmit with L1 signaling data.Thereby, it is possible to represent use sub-frame starting symbol and The subframe structure (being also contemplated for polarization) of sub-frame closing symbol.

Definition by L1 signaling data illustrated above, it is possible to the transmission path presumption being received side improves.

The structure of the dispensing device generating L1 signaling data illustrated above represents in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But, except In embodiment E1 and F4 beyond the point of explanation, P2 symbol signal generating unit 7605(controls symbol signal generating unit 8502), Control signal generating unit 7608 generates L1 signaling data illustrated above.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The structure that receive device corresponding with the sending method generating L1 signaling data illustrated above and dispensing device exists Figure 86～Figure 88 represents.But, explanation in embodiment E2 and F4 is put and adds following process.P2 code element (also has Situation including Signalling PLP) demodulation section 8603 by L1 signaling data decode, obtain the sub-frame about each subframe Starting symbol with or without with sub-frame closing symbol with presence or absence of information.Based on these L1 signalings obtained Data, channel variation presumption unit (705_1,705_2,707_1,707_2) can utilize sub-frame starting symbol The beginning part of subframe and the channel variation of last part is estimated accurately with sub-frame closing symbol.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, illustrate a Figure 110 example as subframe structure (being also contemplated for polarization), but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to Comprise H-SISO subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

It addition, in above embodiment K1～K2, illustrate the subframe structure relative with frame.Equally, for super The shorter frame structure that the level relative frame structure of frame etc. are relative with longer frame, it would however also be possible to employ above embodiment K1～ The content of K2.

Super frame is used by the content of embodiment K1～K2, as long as those skilled in the art can manage the most certainly Solving, if specifically describing an example, then will constitute each T2 frame and the FEF(Future of the super frame of DVB-T2 standard Extension Frames) regard the subframe represented in above-mentioned embodiment K1～K2 as, send as a T2 frame or FEF Data mean to be fixed as certain of SISO, MISO and/or MIMO.Further, each frame the transmission data sent can also It is according to the data by SISO data acquisition system or by the data genaration of MISO and/or MIMO data acquisition system Frame.

(embodiment L1)

Figure 155 (c) represents by Figure 108 C(c of embodiment F3) in the Co-sited-MIMO that represents, V is received V/H-MIMO for machine and V/H receiver sends.V/H receiver is able to receive that V/H-MIMO, and V receiver can not receive V/ H-MIMO.In standard from now on, in the case of importing MIMO transmission, it is desirable to by existing 1 reception antenna (the most only V pole Change) it also is able to receive the program with this standard transmission.

As the solution for this problem, it may be considered that use SVC(Scalable Video Coding: scalable Video coding) generate essential information (Base layer: Primary layer) and extension information (Enhancement layer: enhancement layer), Essential information is sent with SISO or the PLP transmission of MISO transmission, extension information other PLP(such as V/H-MIMO is sent) Transmission.In the case, by existing 1 reception antenna, the PLP of essential information also is able to receive, it is possible to basic with this program Message part, such as standard image quality appreciates this program.On the other hand, it also is being able to receive 2 days of the V/H of the PLP of extension information In line, it is possible to appreciate this program by high image quality.

In the importing process of the Co-sited-MIMO represented by Figure 155 (c), it may be considered that existing V transmission antenna is chased after Add H transmission antenna, maybe existing V transmission antenna is replaced with V/H transmission antenna.On the other hand, side is being received, it may be considered that to There is V reception antenna to add H reception antenna, maybe existing V reception antenna is replaced with V/H reception antenna.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the case of being sent essential information transmission by SISO, if it is considered that existing 1 reception antenna (the most only V polarization), is not the most to polarize with H, but sends with V polarization.By this sending method, it is possible to 1 reception antenna (the most only V polarization) is had to receive the PLP of essential information.

The structure of the dispensing device being transmitted by sending method illustrated above is represented in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But It is, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and F3, to carry out the PLP of SISO transmission also from existing V transmission antenna (such as Antenna 7626_1) it is transmitted.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The structure that receive device corresponding with sending method illustrated above and dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, explanation in embodiment E2 and F3 is put and adds following process.Receive device at these and only there is existing 1 reception Antenna (the most only V polarization), in the case of the most only having the system of antenna 701_X, it is possible to only receives and carries out SISO transmission PLP.

Additionally, in the case of these receive 2 reception antennas that device has V/H, i.e. there is antenna 701_X and antenna In the case of two systems of 701_Y, additionally it is possible to receive the PLP carrying out V/H-MIMO transmission.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, enumerated a Figure 109 example as subframe structure, but it is not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO Frame, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.But, in order to by existing 1 reception antenna (the most only V polarization) also Being able to receive that the program with this standard transmission, the PLP needed to major general's essential information carries out V-SISO transmission.

Additionally, existing dual-mode antenna to be set to V polarization, it is possible that the situation of H polarization.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

(embodiment L2)

In the present embodiment, with respect to Figure 108 C(c at embodiment F3) the middle Co-sited-represented MIMO, uses and does not has differentiated sample between the transmit power of SISO and MISO/MIMO shown in Figure 128 (b) of embodiment H7 The situation of the example of formula represents in Figure 156 (c), and the relation of transmit power and the modulation system of use is described.

As explanation in embodiment L1, it is considered to existing 1 reception antenna (the most only V polarization).In present embodiment In, such as set the transmit power of existing V transmission antenna as P, if the transmit power of new H transmission antenna is P/4.That is, will send out The transmit power of antennas is set to higher.

Additionally, in the present embodiment, make the modulation system used by two transmission antennas different in V/H-MIMO sends In the case of, such as set the modulation system of existing V transmission antenna as 16QAM, if the modulation system of new H transmission antenna is QPSK. That is, the order of modulation of existing transmission antenna is set to higher.It addition, in embodiment C1, to relative to the formula of use (52) Precoding, the sending method that the modulated signal after precoding carries out phase place change is illustrated.Thus, in the modulation of s1 In the case of mode (16QAM) is different from the modulation system of s2 (QPSK), for using the precoding of formula (52), it would however also be possible to employ Modulated signal after precoding is carried out the sending method of phase place change.Additionally, the combination of modulation system is not limited to this.Example As, the group of (modulation system of the modulated signal of s1, the modulation system of modulated signal of s2) can also be (64QAM, 16QAM), (256QAM, 64QAM), (1024QAM, 256QAM), (4096QAM, 1024QAM), (64QAM, QPSK), (256QAM, 16QAM), (1024QAM, 64QAM), (4096QAM, 256QAM) etc..

By above sending method, in the case of only there is existing 1 reception antenna (the most only V polarization), due to The PLP of the SISO that existing V transmission antenna sends has higher transmit power, so also being able to keep the receptivity of SISO. On the other hand, in the case of there is V/H reception antenna, owing to the PLP of V/H-MIMO will have higher transmit power The order of modulation having V transmission antenna is set to higher, so also being able to take out of the receptivity of V/H-MIMO.

The structure of the dispensing device being transmitted by sending method illustrated above is represented in Figure 76 or Figure 85.But It is, in addition to the point of explanation in embodiment E1 and H7, also will to have the transmission of V transmission antenna (such as antenna 7626_1) Power setting must be higher.Additionally, the PLP carrying out SISO transmission is transmitted from existing V transmission antenna.And then, at V/H-MIMO In the case of transmission makes the modulation system difference used by two transmission antennas, the order of modulation of existing V transmission antenna is set Must be higher.

Here, distinctive point is, after have selected precoding as sending method (or precoding and baseband signal After replacement) signal when carrying out the sending method of phase place change, signal processing part 7612 and Fig. 6, Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27, figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 69 are same, carry out the signal of (or after precoding and baseband signal are replaced) after precoding is carried out phase place change Processing, carrying out the signal after this signal processing is modulated signal 1(7613_1 after signal processing) and signal processing after modulation Signal 2(7613_2).But it is also possible to do not select this sending method.

The structure that receive device corresponding with sending method illustrated above and dispensing device represents in Figure 86～Figure 88. But, explanation in embodiment E2 and H7 is put and adds following process.These receive device and only have existing 1 reception sky Line (the most only V polarization), i.e. such as in the case of the system only with antenna 701_X, it is possible to keep carrying out SISO transmission The receptivity of PLP and receive.On the other hand, in the case of there is V/H reception antenna (antenna 701_X, antenna 701_H), The receptivity of the PLP carrying out V/H-MIMO transmission is also not damaged.

It addition, in the present embodiment, it is illustrated based on DVB-T2 standard, but is not limited to this, propping up It also is able in the case of holding the sending method that polarization is different use.

Additionally, enumerate a Figure 109 example as subframe structure, but be not limited to this, it is also possible to comprise H-SISO subframe, V/V-MIMO subframe, V/H-MISO subframe and constitute.But, in order to also be able to by existing 1 reception antenna (the most only V polarization) Receiving the program with this standard transmission, the PLP needed to major general's essential information carries out V-SISO transmission.

Polarize additionally, set existing dual-mode antenna as V, it is possible that the situation of H polarization.

Additionally, as different polarization, be illustrated with V polarization and H polarization, but be not limited to this.

It addition, in above embodiment L1～L2, illustrate the subframe structure relative with frame.Equally, for super The shorter frame structure that the level relative frame structure of frame etc. are relative with longer frame, it would however also be possible to employ above embodiment L1～ The content of L2.

The content of embodiment L1～L2 is used for super frame, as long as those skilled in the art the most certainly can Understand, if specifically describing an example, by each T2 frame and the FEF(Future of the super frame in composition DVB-T2 standard Extension Frames) regard the subframe represented in above-mentioned embodiment L1～L2 as, it is meant that send out as a T2 frame or FEF The data sent are fixed as certain of SISO, MISO and/or MIMO.Further, the transmission data sent with each frame can also be According to the data by SISO data acquisition system or the frame of the data genaration by MISO and/or MIMO data acquisition system.

Industrial applicability

The present invention can be suitable in the wireless system sending different modulated signals from multiple antennas respectively widely, example As being preferably suitable in OFDM-MIMO communication system.Additionally, in the wire communication system with multiple transmission position System (such as, PLC(Power Line Communication: power line communication) system, optical communication system, DSL(Digital Subscriber Line: digital subscriber line) system) in carry out the situation of MIMO transmission and also be able to be suitable for, now, become and make The such multiple modulated signals of explanation it are sent in the present invention with multiple transmission positions.In addition it is also possible to by modulated signal from many Individual transmission position sends.

Label declaration

302A, 302B encoder

304A, 304B interleaver

306A, 306B mapping portion

314 signal processing method information generation unit

308A, 308B weight combining unit

310A, 310B radio section

312A, 312B antenna

317A, 317B phase place changing unit

402 encoders

404 dispenser

504#1,504#2 transmission antenna

505#1,505#2 reception antenna

600 weighting combining units

701_X, 701_Y antenna

703_X, 703_Y radio section

705_1 channel variation presumption unit

705_2 channel variation presumption unit

707_1 channel variation presumption unit

707_2 channel variation presumption unit

709 control information lsb decoder

711 signal processing parts

803INNER MIMO detection section

805A, 805B log-likelihood calculations portion

807A, 807B deinterlacer

809A, 809B log-likelihood calculations portion

811A, 811B Soft-in/soft-out decoder

813A, 813B interleaver

815 storage parts

819 coefficient generating units

901Soft-in/soft-out decoder

903 dispenser

1201A, 1201B OFDM mode correlation processing unit 1302A, 1302A serial-parallel conversion portion

1304A, 1304B sequence portion

1306A, 1306B are against fast fourier transform portion

1308A, 1308B radio section

Claims (9)

1. a dispensing device, has at MISO i.e. multiple input single output or MIMO i.e. multiple-input and multiple-output and SISO the most single the most defeated Enter the function of the lower communication of single output, it is characterised in that

This dispensing device possesses:

Sending part, is transmitted processing in the way of being mixed MISO or MIMO and SISO,

Above-mentioned sending part,

In above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, the 1st polarization polarity is used to send modulated signal with the 2nd polarization polarity, in above-mentioned SISO, Use above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity and above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity respectively, send the identical modulated signal of same frequency,

In above-mentioned SISO so that use the transmit power of the modulated signal of above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity transmission and use the above-mentioned 2nd The transmit power of the modulated signal that polarization polarity sends, uses above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity to send out with above-mentioned MISO or MIMO respectively The transmit power of the modulated signal sent is identical with the transmit power of the modulated signal using above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity to send, and

In above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, by using the transmit power of the modulated signal of above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity transmission, it is set to ratio The transmit power using the modulated signal of above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity transmission is high.

2. dispensing device as claimed in claim 1, it is characterised in that

The order of modulation of the signal using above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity to send, in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, is set by above-mentioned sending part Fixed that than using, the order of modulation of the signal that above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity sends is high.

3. dispensing device as claimed in claim 1, it is characterised in that

Above-mentioned sending part,

SISO is used to be transmitted the i.e. master data of the data that can individually reproduce in the content-data of transmission；

The i.e. growth data of data reproduced combining with above-mentioned master data in the content-data of above-mentioned transmission uses MISO Or MIMO is transmitted.

4. dispensing device as claimed in claim 1, it is characterised in that

Above-mentioned dispensing device is also equipped with:

Phase place changing unit, changes regularly to the phase place of the signal sent from least 1 antenna；

Above-mentioned sending part sends the signal being changed phase place by above-mentioned phase place changing unit.

5. a sending method, be have at MISO i.e. multiple input single output or MIMO i.e. multiple-input and multiple-output and SISO the most single The sending method of the dispensing device of the function of the lower communication of the single output of input, it is characterised in that

This sending method includes:

Forwarding step, is transmitted processing in the way of being mixed MISO or MIMO and SISO,

In above-mentioned forwarding step,

In above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, the 1st polarization polarity is used to send modulated signal with the 2nd polarization polarity, in above-mentioned SISO, Use above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity and above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity respectively, send the identical modulated signal of same frequency,

In above-mentioned SISO so that use the transmit power of the modulated signal of above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity transmission and use the above-mentioned 2nd The transmit power of the modulated signal that polarization polarity sends, uses above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity to send out with above-mentioned MISO or MIMO respectively The transmit power of the modulated signal sent is identical with the transmit power of the modulated signal using above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity to send, and

In above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, by using the transmit power of the modulated signal of above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity transmission, it is set to ratio The transmit power using the modulated signal of above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity transmission is high.

6. one kind receives device, it is characterised in that possess:

Acceptance division, defeated from having at MISO i.e. multiple input single output or MIMO i.e. multiple-input and multiple-output and the i.e. single input list of SISO Go out the dispensing device of the function of lower communication, only receive modulation in the modulated signal sent, that use the 1st polarization polarity to send Signal, wherein this dispensing device is in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, uses above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity to send with the 2nd polarization polarity and adjusts Signal processed, in above-mentioned SISO, uses above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity and above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity respectively, sends the phase of same frequency Same modulated signal, in above-mentioned SISO so that use transmit power and the use of the modulated signal of above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity transmission The transmit power of the modulated signal that above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity sends, uses above-mentioned 1st polarization with above-mentioned MISO or MIMO respectively The transmit power phase of the modulated signal that the transmit power of the modulated signal that polarity sends and the above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity of use send With, and in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, by using the transmit power of the modulated signal of above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity transmission, set The transmit power obtaining the modulated signal that 2nd polarization polarity more above-mentioned than use sends is high, and this dispensing device generates to comprise and represents above-mentioned The control information of the information of transmit power is also transmitted；And

Demodulation section, modulated signal demodulation in the modulated signal that above-mentioned acceptance division is received, that send with above-mentioned SISO.

7. a method of reseptance, it is characterised in that including:

Receiving step, from having at MISO i.e. multiple input single output or MIMO i.e. multiple-input and multiple-output and SISO i.e. single input list The dispensing device of the function of the lower communication of output, only receives tune in the modulated signal sent, that use the 1st polarization polarity to send Signal processed, wherein this dispensing device is in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, uses above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity to send with the 2nd polarization polarity Modulated signal, in above-mentioned SISO, uses above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity and above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity respectively, sends same frequency Identical modulated signal, in above-mentioned SISO so that uses the transmit power of the modulated signal of above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity transmission and makes By the transmit power of the modulated signal that above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity sends, use above-mentioned 1st pole with above-mentioned MISO or MIMO respectively The transmit power changing the modulated signal that polarity sends and the transmit power phase of the modulated signal using above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity to send With, and in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, by using the transmit power of the modulated signal of above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity transmission, set The transmit power obtaining the modulated signal that 2nd polarization polarity more above-mentioned than use sends is high, and this dispensing device generates to comprise and represents above-mentioned The control information of the information of transmit power is also transmitted；And

Demodulation step, modulated signal demodulation in the modulated signal that above-mentioned receiving step is received, that send with above-mentioned SISO.

8. one kind receives device, it is characterised in that possess:

Acceptance division, defeated from having at MISO i.e. multiple input single output or MIMO i.e. multiple-input and multiple-output and the i.e. single input list of SISO Go out the dispensing device of the function of lower communication, receive modulation letter in the modulated signal sent, that use the 1st polarization polarity to send Number and use the modulated signal that the 2nd polarization polarity sends, wherein this dispensing device is in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, uses above-mentioned the 1 polarization polarity with above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity send modulated signal, in above-mentioned SISO, use respectively above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity with Above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity, sends the identical modulated signal of same frequency, in above-mentioned SISO so that use above-mentioned 1st polarization pole Property the transmit power of modulated signal that sends and the transmit power of modulated signal using above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity to send, respectively Transmit power and above-mentioned 2nd pole of use with the modulated signal using above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity to send in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO The transmit power changing the modulated signal that polarity sends is identical, and in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, will use above-mentioned 1st polarization pole Property the transmit power of modulated signal that sends, be set to the transmission merit of the modulated signal that above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity sends than using Rate is high, and this dispensing device generates the control information comprising the information representing above-mentioned transmit power and is transmitted；And

Demodulation section, the control letter that the modulated signal received according to above-mentioned acceptance division will comprise the information representing above-mentioned transmit power Breath decoding, according to the information of the above-mentioned transmit power of decoded expression, in the modulated signal that above-mentioned acceptance division is received with Modulated signal and the modulated signal sent with above-mentioned MISO or MIMO that above-mentioned SISO sends demodulate respectively.

9. a method of reseptance, it is characterised in that including:

Receiving step, from having at MISO i.e. multiple input single output or MIMO i.e. multiple-input and multiple-output and SISO i.e. single input list The dispensing device of the function of the lower communication of output, receives modulated signal in the signal sent, that use the 1st polarization polarity to send With the modulated signal using the 2nd polarization polarity to send, wherein this dispensing device is in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, uses the above-mentioned 1st Polarization polarity with above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity send modulated signal, in above-mentioned SISO, use respectively above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity with Above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity, sends the identical modulated signal of same frequency, in above-mentioned SISO so that use above-mentioned 1st polarization pole Property the transmit power of modulated signal that sends and the transmit power of modulated signal using above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity to send, respectively Transmit power and above-mentioned 2nd pole of use with the modulated signal using above-mentioned 1st polarization polarity to send in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO The transmit power changing the modulated signal that polarity sends is identical, and in above-mentioned MISO or MIMO, will use above-mentioned 1st polarization pole Property the transmit power of modulated signal that sends, be set to the transmission merit of the modulated signal that above-mentioned 2nd polarization polarity sends than using Rate is high, and this dispensing device also generates the control information comprising the information representing above-mentioned transmit power and is transmitted；And

Demodulation step, will comprise the control of the information representing above-mentioned transmit power according to the modulated signal that above-mentioned receiving step receives Information processed decodes, according to the information of the above-mentioned transmit power of decoded expression, the modulated signal received by above-mentioned receiving step In the modulated signal sent with above-mentioned SISO and with above-mentioned MISO or MIMO send modulated signal demodulate respectively.